THE STUDENT'S GUIDE TO S A N S K R I T C O M P O S I T I O N

A TREATISE ON SANSKRIT SYNTAX FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES

BY VAMAN SHIVARAM A P T E , M. A.

I H O W K I I I B I SAMSKilT SEIIES i F F I i E , M M M S I . 1984

 C h o w k h a m b a S a n s k r i t S e r i e s Office K. 37/99, Gopal Mandir Lane Post Bex 1008, VARANA8I-22100I ( India ) Phone : 63145

Twenty Seventh Edition 1984

Also can be had from K M 1 8 H N A D A S A C A D E M Y

Oriental Publishers & Dlstributora Post Box No. 1118 * ( Ghllra Cinema Building ), Yaranasi-221001 ( INDIA )

TO ALL SINCERE & PATEIOTIC AND W O R K E R S IN THE OF SANSKRIT T H I S B O O K IS D E D I C A T E D FIELD LOVERS

as the first humble attempt towards doing something calculated to encourage a critical study of the Language by

The Author

The Author.

P r e f a c e to the S e c o n d Edition A GLANCE at the Table of Contents will show t h a t this edition differs from, the first in many respects. The additions and alterations that haYe been made both in matter and arrangement require a few words of explanation. The main, body of the work is divided into four parts. The first part gives the general scope of Syntax and lays down the principal laws of Concord, The second part deals with Government, and gives principal rules in the Karaka Prakarana, In the third part are considered the more important Grammatical Forms, the meaning and use of which require explanation; such as several kinds of Participles, the Infinitive Mood* the tea Tenses and Moods. Particles, such as are most frequently used in Sanskrit Literature, are also treated and illustrated, being alphabetically arranged and distributed over eight Lessons. Some peculiarities of the Parasmaipada and Ataianepadar certain roots taking the one or the other pada according as they are used in a particular sense or are preceded by' certain prepositionswhich were gftren in an Appendix in the first edition, have here been incorporated into the body of the work, and treated in two additional Lessons. The fourth part gives matter not given in the first editkft the Analysis and Synthesis 'of Sanskrit Sentences. 1 have tried to apply the system of English analysis to Sanskrit Sentences, and in doing so I have illustrated the rules of English Grammar by examples from Sanskrit authors, making such additions and alterations as were necessitated by the peculiarity of the Sanskrit idiom. To some this portion may perhaps appear superfluous. But my experience is that a correct knowledge of the relations subsisting between the different parts of a Sanskrit entence is Mghly useful! the students* not only la t i a a s k t -

VI ing from Sanskrit into English, but also translating from English into Sanskrit, inasmuch as It clearly brings to Msnotice the difference in construction between two languages, and ia composing sentences. The general rules of Analysis are much the same in all languages, but their application, is not eaf.sly understood In Section II of this part some rules on the order of words have been given, mostly drawa from an examination of the construction of Sanskrit sentences and comparison with Latin idiom. The third Section takes up the Composition of sentences, where the student has to frame some sentences so as to apply the roles of analysis given in the first Section. Several exercises have, with this view, been given in this Section. I am inclined to believe that these exercises, if carefully worked, will give the student considerable facility ia writing a few sentences of original Sanskrit on a given subject. The student has also been shown how to paraphrase Sanskrit passages, and It is expected that, with the help of Analysis, he will be able to paraphrase ia Sanskrit as lie does in English. The fourth Section treats of Letter-writing, in which arc given, with example aad exercises, some of the common forms of letters. On this subject I have derived considerable help from a number of manuscripts, dealing with S5ROT:forms of writingthat were brought to my notice by Dr. Bhandarkar, and kindly placed at my disposal for some months. This edition differs also in the arrangement of matterloach Lesson here consists of three parts; the first gives the rules with illustrations; the second and third give sentences for exercises. Choice Expressions and Idioms, which were in the former edition, given after .the rules* and the Sentences for Correction which were given last, have here been given after the Notes. The Idioms have been arranged in the alphabetical order of the importaat words in their English equivalents, and a good many taken from

VH standard authors have been aided so as to Increase the former number by over one-half. The Sentences for Correctian have been promiscuously arranged, and they may be attempted after the rules have been fully mastered. There is one more material change In arrangement that will not fail to strike the reader. The Sanskrit sentences have been divided into two parts : those in large type for reading in class, and * Additional Sentences for Exercise,' which may be read at home as additional reading. I have beea obliged to make this division, not because I considered the number of sentences very large, as some of my critics did, but because the sentences, as they stood, were too many to be read by student in the ordinary course of class lessons. I myself felt the difficulty, while teaching the book; and I thought it proper to do that which 1 myself did, and which other teachers also who did me the honour of teaching it to their pupils, must have done, namely to effect a division of the Sanskrit sentences. This has moreover, enabled me to add tinder the s Additional Sentences ' several passages from authors not previously drawn upon. The lesson on the Nominative case ia the first edition has been omitted as it was found to be superfluous, and that on Pronouns, being out of place in Concord, has been transferred to Part III. The Appendix OE the formation of the feminine of nouns and adjectives has been dropped. Other improvements made ia this edition are two Gbssaries Sanskrit-English and English-Sanskritwhich give the difficult words occurring ia the exercises for translation, and an alphabetical Index of all the nouns, adjectives* roots, & c , which have given rise to syntactical or other rules. The want of the two Glossaries, more especially of the first, was much felt by students. The most ordinary words, which the student must have come across

vili In -his elementary course of study, have not been included The importance of the Index need not be much dilated upon, since it facilitates reference to a very remarkable degree and is now regarded as almost a sine qua mm of such words. For this I must thank Professor Max MMer, who was kind enough to suggest, among other things, this idea of giving an Index. The Notes, given after Part IV, retain much of their former character. The)' are. mostly intended to be explanatory. Individual words, being included in the Glossaries, not have here been repeated. There are the main additions and alterations made in. this edition. Beside, the work has been most carefully revised throughout: indeed, it will be difficult to fiad a page which has not undergone careful revision. Several rales have bee a recast; and many more, drawn from .a closer study of Sanskrit Grammar and the works of classical authors, .have been added to each Lesson, Throughout the book several Sanskrit passages have been added, either to the illustrative sentences, or to the sentences for exercise. The effect of this and the like additionshas been to increase the matter by nearly one-half. Yet by a suitable arrangement of types, the volume of the work has not much increased, and that it may be within the reach of all classes of students, the price has been reduced to Re. I, as. 8. The rapid sale of a large edition in less than three years shows that the book, in some measure, supplied a felt want; and it is hoped that the student of Sanskrit will find this edition more useful and a better guide to Sanskrit composition than the first, on account of the improvments effected in it. Before concluding, I must not omit to tender my most sincere thanks to Dr. R. G. Bhandarkar, who was kind enough to spare time to go over the greater portion of the book with me, and to make several important suggestions which have been mostly acted upon; and secondly, t o

IX Mr. Lee Warner, Acting Director of Fublie Instruction -who, at the recommendation of Dr. Bhandarkar, was pleased to sanction the work for use in High, Schools. My acknowledgments are also due to Dr. Morell, Professor Bain, and Mr. McMordie, whose works have been useful to me in writing Part I V ; and lastly to Mr. M. ShesihagM Prabh" of the Mailras Presidency, who was the first to suggest the addition of Analysis and Synthesis of sentences. .Poona, 24th December, 1885 . S. A'PTE

P r e f a c e to the T h i r d Edition For this edition the book has been carefully revised throughout, and some sentences have been added, particularly In the illustration of rules. As the work is mow used as a text-book in several High Schools, even In the other Presidencies, no material changes in its plan and scope have been effected. I t gives me great pleasure t find that the several important changes made in the second edition have met with general approval, and that the book affords help, however slight, to the student in writing Sanskrit correctly and mastering some of the intricacies of its idiom. foona, 11th December, 1890 V. S. A'PTE

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PART I
SECTIONS PAGE INTRODUCTORY

1- 8 Concord

LESSON

I. II.

Concord of Subject and Verb Concord of Substantive and Adjective Concord of Relative and its Antecedent

17

4 10 II

18 22 2S 25

PART II Government III. The Accusative Case General use Particular use IV. Verbs governing two Accusatives . The Causal VI. The Instrumental Case General uses Particular uses VII. The Dative Case General uses Particular uses VIII. The Ablative Case General uses Particular uses IX. The Locative Case General uses Particular uses

16 26 31 38 42 80 37 41 49

24 2R 36

50 54 35 59 44 0 65 66 71 58 72 75 ? 86 2 87 92 98--i too

XII
LESSOS SECTIONIS PAOE

X.

XL

The Genitive Case General tises Particular uses The Gesitlve and Locative Absolutes

/ 101105 106119 ip125 82

PART III The Use ami Meaning 1 Grammatical F i n n s & Wlfis XII. Pronouns Personal .. .. ^Demonstrative Relative Interrogative,Indefinite, and Reflexive Participles Introductory Present Participles Future Participles Perfect Participles Participles (continued ) .. Past Participles Potential Passive Participles Participles (continued) Gerunds ,. Namul qr Gerund in apj The Infinitive Mood . . Teftses and Moods Introductory Present Tense Imperative Mooi The Benedictine Mood Tlie Potentisl Mood . , 90 126129 13182 183 134140 98 141 142147 148 149 104 ISO154 166157 110 158161 182171 172181 182184 185190 101194 195 190206

XIII.

XIV.

XV.

XVI. xvn.

119 126

svm.

134

xiti
LESSON SECTIONS PAGE

XIX.

XX.

Imperfect, Perfect and Aorist Imperfect .. .. 207208 Perfect .. .. 209 Aorist . . . . 210211 The two Futures and the Conditional . . . . The two Futures . . .. 212215. The Conditional . ., 216 Additional- rematks on the use of the Teases and Moods 217241 Particles

141

146

XXL xxii.
XXIII

m, sra; arftsw,arfa, arfir, art, 3ffg, &nd 3|ft .. .. 242251 m, m, w.%.1%, m, w , f t , <# > and =#( .. .. 252262
suPRpr, m-tm, mn, f , (Tww, % fw^,

1ST 164 172 170 187 19* 199

soe

|%ff:), $m, %f*9 sad ^ XXIV. H^.aadf xxvi. f?:, m-., (mm), .. ..

' 263271 272279

f ( W ) , isng, cff, W:, OTT,

XXV, fesOTT, *l, nm, H, !R, and f t 280287 m, mw%, .. 288295 296800
oiSQT

ijf:, f^, a n d ^ ^ c ^ . . XXVII. iPff-OT, and l W f - W l

XXVIIL wt-H, m, m*l,w>>mA'k

XXIX.

XXX.

Atiaaaepada and Parasmaipada Introductory 308309 Roots of the First Conjugation 310825 Roots of the remaining Conjugations, and Causals . . 828- -845

214 225

XIV PART IV Astlfsls a n i Synthesis tf Sentences

( W I T H EXEECISES )

Section 1
SECTIONS ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES .. ., PAGE

235 346349 850376 877391 S02398 ..899414 268 268 415 41642 421-423 424426 281 427--480 481483 184-438

Introductory The Simple Sentence The Complex Sentence The Compound Sentence . . S e c i t t 11
OB THE OEDEE OF WORDS IN SENTENCES

Seeien 111
O N THE SYNTHESIS OF SENTENCES ..

Introductory Simple Sentences Complex Sentences Compound Sentences, Paraphrasing Section 1

LETTEB-WEITISO

Introductory Domestic letters Miscellaneous letters Notes ,. .. Choice Expressions and Idioms Sentences for Correction Sanskrit-English Glossary English-Sanskrit Glossary Index .. ,.

., B s * a . a

289 330 369 378 4(14 417

XIST OF CQMVENTIGNAL ABBREVIATIONS IN THE BOOK

VSEB

N, B.Where a Roman figure is followed by an Arabic ^figure, the former slgniies the canto or chapter ( i n the case of l i b , and Ram., the Parva or Kanda), aad the latter the number of'the verse; a single Arabic figure in the case oftdramas signiies the number of the act. A. R. staads for Anarghyaraghava. Bg. Bhagavadgtta (Bombay Edition). 8k Bhartrihari, I I . denoting Nltis'ataka, aad III, Vair&gyas'ataka (Bombay Edition). Bk. Bhattik&vya. B. E . Bilar&nAyana. C Ch&nakyas'atAa. Dk. Das*akm&racharita 1. leaotlag the first part* and II. the second, and the Arabic figure the number of the story (Bombay Edition ), "6. M. Ganaratnamahodadhi. H. Hitopades'a. the Arabic figures denoting the four parts ia their order (Bombay Edition ). BE. C. Harshaeharita. K. Sana's E&dambaii ( Bombay Edition). the Arabic figure signifying the number of the page. K&v. Kavyaptaklis'a* Ki. Kiratarjuntya. Ku. Kumarasambhava (Calcutta Edition ). M. 31&kvik&gnimitra ( Bombay Edition ). Mai. Malattmadhava (Bombay Edition ).

xvi Manu. stands for Manusmriti. Mbfa. Me. Mk. Mu. Mv. Nag. F. Mahabhashya. Meghadita. Mnebbakalika. Mudritrakshasa. Mahavtracharita, Na{jS,aaeia. Paa'cfaatantra, the Roman figure deaoting the 1 number of the taatra, and the Arabic figure the number of the dtorj f Bombay Editiop ). Pfasannaraghava. Maghuvaws'a ( Bombay Editioa ). ,K Hatn&vai { Calcutta Edition ). S'akuatala (Bombay Edition ) S'&trekar&bhashya. S'is'upalavadha. SiddfiAtttakauiniidL S'amkar&charya's Mohamudgara. SuliiiasHtaratnakara. Uttararamacharita (Calcutta Editioa). ikramorvas'Iya {Bombay Edition ). Yarttika of -Katyiyaaa. Yteavadatfa. iddas'Mabha*jika. Yenlsahfraara. ( Calcutta Edition ). Y&jn'avalkyasmriti, where II. denotes the Vyavah&ra chapter.

P . R. R. Ratn. S'. S \ B. Si'. S. K.' S.' M. Sa. U. V. ^r. Vas. > . B. Ve. Y.

THE S T U D E N T S SANSKHIT G U I D E

TO COMPOSITION

PART I INTRODUCTORY SYNTAX* in English deals with the mode of arranging words in sentences, and lays down rules for the proper and correct arrangement of words. In Sanskrit and other languages that are rich In inflexions, Syntax has not this definite scope. The grammatical inflexion itself shows the relation of one word to another, and no liana or inaccuracy occurs, if the student does not observe the :sual order of w<*ds in a sentence. Take, for example, the English sentence " B i m a saw Govind." If the order of the words, 5 Bitaia,' and ' Goviad.' be changed, there will be a very great difference in the meaning;. it will, in fact, be a different sentence altogether. Take, however, the Sanskrit sentence for the same : tfflt Ttf^r^WP^r. Here, even if the order of the words be changed, no difference occurs in the meaning: the sentences ^pff sffpf^fliW?!, 1*tf%? f &c, all mean the same thing. The order or arrangement of words in Sanskrit sentences is not, therefore* a point of great importance except in some cases; but this does not mean that perfect arbitrariness is allowed, and there are certain cases i n which it is necessary to arrange words in a particular manner. In Sanskrit Grammars, rules <on Concord and Order are rarely giYen. The " Kiraka*

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

Prakarna " ia the Sid&anta Coumudi is popularly, though not correctly, taken to represent Syntax in Sanskrit; but it represents only one of the parts of Syntax properly so called, .., Government. The use and meaning of particies and grammatical forms lias also to be taken into account In the joining together of words Info sentences. This portion of Grammar is usually considered in English Grammars under Etymology; and in Sanskrit Grammars, in explaining the formation of words in Accidence, the use of the words themselves is given; as, in the Store 5S2T: {Panini III. 2.124.) which states how to form present participles as well as when to use them. In treating of * Syntax* ia Sanskrit, one has thus to look mainly to Concord and Government and the Use and Meaning of Grammatical Forms and Words, and the Lessons in this work are accordingly arranged. As already remarked, the order of words is not so Important a point in Sanskrit as in English; but there are a few cases in which it has to be carefully attended to. Seme Huts on this subject will be found in Part IV. 2. There are in Sanskrit, as In English and other languages, three persons and three genders. The use of persons is not practically different from what it is in English. As regards genders of nouns in Sanskrits no definite rules can be laid down "to distinguish one from another. The assignment of genders is purely arbitrary, except in those cases where the male and female sexes are indicated, and where the distinction is natural; as, ^Sfr; a male sparrow,* ^ZWl * a female sparrow; * f^n, p i t , 8RH, spsri &c. The arbitrariness of genders may well be seen from the fact that there are, in Sanskrit, three words of three different genders for one and the same thing; * wife' is represented by %K ( masc.) f (Jem. ), and RSW (nent.)i ' b o d y ' by ^W., ?P|:, and &C. Genders must, for the most part, be studied from the dictionary.

TO SAN8KEIT COMPOSITION

There are three numbers, instead of two, as in English or Latin, some peculiarities in the use of which are noted "below. 3. The three numbers iu Sanskrit are the singular, dual, acct plural. The singular number denotes 'one' or a single individual, but often represents, as la English, the whole class; as, TC ; a man*;* f%f: iSPhWT^ wfe^g: ' the lion is the strongest of all the beasts. * Note,To represent a class the singular or plural may be used : ' BrafamaMas must be respected' may be expressed by 'WTfFf: f s c , or iHgTTT: f^lf:. 4, The dual denotes ' two *; l f e # ' t h e two As'vins'; ^T?ft ' a pair * (husband and wife). But words meaning a 'couple * or 'pair* such as, Sf, ftRPT, ^T% 'TT, S3, &c. are always singular, except when several pairs axe indicated; as, g * a pair of arms 5 ; ^JplT^^WOTSf ' a pair of delicate feet.' (a) The dual form sometimes denotes a * male' and a * female' belonging to the same class, the form being an instance of the J f W H compound; as, Wffil facTft 3% fT##I^IST'ft ( R . 1 . 1 ) ' I salute the parents of the universe, Pa f rvati and Parames'vara (S'iva). * 5. Some words having a dual sense, that occur in the plural form in English, ought in Sanskrit to be translated by the dual alone; as, i he washed his hands and feet' if^ft Iflft frariOTTflF; ' she shut her eyes' m ?#*f# Hpft5W5T. 6, The plural denotes ' more than two' and may, like the singular, represent the whole class; ^ p T : ' birds,' or a 4 class of birds.' But there are some words in Sanskrit which, though plural in form, are singular in sense; as, 3TCT: 'wife'; similarly mr i f , f%W, arcRTT, 3flj, S T , &c. SW {a) Sometimes the plural is used to show respect, or to speak of a person with reverence; as, 1[fiT sftefa^RWf: * so says, the revered S'ankara.'

THE 8TUJMENT-S GC1BE

(b) In the first person the plural sometimes staads for thesingular, if the speaker is a high personage j as, spprjtf Yr3?fr *reft*Rf feift fSBim (S'. 1) ' we, too, (i.e. I ) ask your ladyships something regarding your friend'; fiwpf ff^Wffw^sqra^ (Mu. 3) ' we,, too, shall apply ourselves to our work.* But this condition is not absolutely accessary; e.g., rf(u. 5). 7. Names of countries are always ia Sanskrit used. in. the plural because they are taken from the people themselves; as, sff W. 1v3Tfa^ stfsfR (Dk. II. 7) ' I once weat t o Kalinga * (the country of the Kalingas). Note.When the words %3T, fW<T &c. are used with the aunties of chantries, the singular must be used; as s WTW^1 fRfe^^ 1 W TTC'' there is a town called P&taliputra in. the country of the Magadhas. s 8, The plural of proper nouns not uafrequently denotes, the family or race, as in English; as, TTOiFW ^ t (R. I. 9 )> ' I shall describe the family {genealogy) of the race of R a g k i ' ; T: (U. %)' to whom is a connection between the families of Raghu and Janaka not dear ? LESSON I 9. " When two connected words are of the same gender, number, person or tense, they are said to agree with one another, or to be in Concord. Speaking of a man, we h a w to say he, of a woman she, of a plurality of persons they j these are agreements or concords," Bain. The'Concords that deserve notice in Sanskrit are three i (1) Concord of Subject and Verb, (2) Concord of'Substandve and Adjective, and (3) Concord of Relative and its Antecedent. Cttncord of Subject a n i Vert. 10. That about which something is said or asserted is. called the subject of a sentence, and is put ia the QOtniaatwe

TO 8AN3KB1T COMPOSITION

case. A verb, ss in English, agrees with its subject in numbet and in person; as, WflteTWT 5f3fft TPT ( K . 5 ) ' there was a king named S'udraka *; ffWOTt f# {S. 1 ) ' we go * (take our way 1 11. The predicate, or that which is said about the subject, may be a finite verb, as in the above instances, OP a substantive or adjective with 3RT ' to be * expressed or understood. In such cases the substantive should be used in its natural gender, being made to agree with the subject only in ease; as, fff Jp5l#f=5@>GfflMfiPI ( S'. 3 ) * she is, as it were, the life of the Kulapati *; P|pt %<fef ( Mk. 1 ) * who Is the hunip (chief) of those who know the Vedas. * 06*. The concord of the adjective is givea in Lesson I I . (&) The verb, when. used in such cases, always agrees with the subject; as, 1WRHWT fPff% ( U. 5 ) * thou art, therefore, a friend,f (b) When words like wm, Wm<, WPfIff, OTW and. mm, are used as predicates.they ate always ia the singular number and neuter gender, though the subject, be of any number or gender, and the verb agrees with the subject, and not with the predicative noun, whatever be its position; as, fptff: ?JW!fWW 'fjfpjpj ( U. 4.) * in the meritorious, merits axe the object of worship ! ; Sflf fWF: STWPI (M. 1) ' your honour is an authority * ( your opinion Is accepted ) ; { H. 1 ) ' wealth is the abode of miseries'; rwfij iTfpt ( Mai. 1. ) 'thoii art. the receptacle of light,'; (Mai. I ) ' i n various ways did I become the object of { h e r ) looks.' Here It would be wrong to say WWi: jpnWTPrfe, 3?if ^f, though the words fWT and fpf be placed anywhere in the sentence. | 12. The nous or adjective used to complete the sense of the so-called verbs of incomplete predication, such &s, ' b e , ' 'become,* 'grew,* 'seem, 1 'appear,* is put in the Boa8ative ease; as, Jfft' 1 1 I f % ( R . III. 5 1 ) 'if this ht

THE STUDENT'S O0IBE thy resolution;' srvfJJiyl^PrTPT ( S'i. I. 49 ) * wishing to itetmne the lord of the "three worlds'; so w^fe<5J2PTTS# ( S \ 8 ). (a) The same rule holds good in the passive construction of the transitive verbs of incomplete predication, such as r *^all, * * n a m e , ' ' m a k e , ' ' consider,' ' t h i n k , ' ' choose, * * appoint' &c; as, 5 ^ ^ %WK: fieF: ( H. 4 ) ' the dog was mack a tiger'; WPf ^wf *RPV: * he should not be considered a fool' &c. I 13. When the subject consists of two or more nouns, connected 'by ' and * the verb agrees with their combined number; as, fl'tfNf'pfg: TRFIIWr TRJt T 'TPfft ( R. I. 57 ) * the king and the queen Miigadhi seized their feet. * (a) Whea the nouns are jftot taken together, but each considered separately, or when they together, form but one idea, the Terb may* be singular; as, H i t Tf?f ?fRT: SfWfff f ^fWf W WfA ( Mai. 2 ) * my father canoot save me, neither cam my mother, nor yourself'; W % ( H. 1 ) ' skill and truth-speaking is kaown in conversation. * (6) Sometimes the Yerb agrees \vith the nearest subject aad is left to be understood with the rest; as, BTfjfW ijfww ^ # f &% cnffsfq- srprrfir TTW fer^ ( P. I. 4 ) day and night both, the twilights, and Dharma also knows the action of man.' So in Latin: (a) ' Tempus necessitaque postnlai,' ' time and. necessity demand'; (b) Filia et unus- e fiWs captus erf. * *a daughter and out of the sons was taken prisoner.' 14. Singular subjects connected by 'or' will take a. angular verb; as, TPTf T*tf%<: frraftwrF5icJs letRtam, Govind of Krishna go'; so fejcf f^of ^T W^f f j WWTSfe WM". (V, 4). (a) Whea the subjects are of different numbers, the verb will agree with the nearest subject; as, % "fOT ^ ' let them or this (persoa) take the reward.'

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

15. When two or more nominatives of different persons are connected by 'and* the verb agrees with their combiacd number; and In person, agrees with the first person in preference to the second or third, and with the second in preference to the third; as, ?f Wf =T pfff; ( Mbfa.) * thou and S I cook,' similarly i pppcr 3Tf =f f i t W * srfTOif? * those Tf servants and myself shall start for the village to-morrow"; ?f iff tffarcftre^r rtro,.,f?P5i {Mb. v n . 8 7 . 1 2 ) *thou, Somadatti and Kama remain. * So in Latin: ' Si tu et Tullia lux nostra vaMis, ego et. suavissixnus Cicero valemus,' ' if thou and my darling Tullia are well, so am I and my sweetest Cicero. * IS. When two or more nominatives of different persons are connected by 'or,* the verb agrees with the one nearest to it in number and person; as, * he or you have done the work $ 1" W *W fctcPlfspw; ' either they or we cam fJ do this difficult work* I m PI %? | ^ t W #Hffi^j WPf:. If. When two or more subjects are in apposition to some pronoun or noun, the predicate agrees with the latter; as, mm f W fm %% ^WWfffWOT % P | <H. I.) ' the mother, W the friend, and father, (these) three are naturally friendly.*

i mm*,

fffei

(v. i) : ! (V. 8)

IT

(U. 4) ft^RT: snofT: 1 ( Dk. II. 2 ) qfeWf; | ( V e . 2 ) 1 (Mbh.)

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

f i (u. s)

<ve.i)

(H.2) ffi: 1 ifq-fffff J ^ ^ q 0.1 |c?nftcr^! (R.VI. 71)

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE t (MM. s ) I ( K . 25)

I (K. 8 ) : u (H. I i (H. I) I (R. III. 16) I (R. VI. 29)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

u (MM. 2)

The king of the Vaugas lost his life in battle. When she saw that dreadful sight, her hands and feet began to tremble O Govind, thou art my life, my joy, my object of pride my all the world* They became aa object of suspicion without any fault of theirs. Good wives are the prime cause of all religious actions. Bhishma, Droa, Kripa, Kama, thyself, the powerful Blioja, S'akuni, Drauni, and rnyselfs constitute, O king, your army. When he fell down from Ms horse, Mama, Gopala and we two were present. Why do you and Krishna not try to finish this work ? Is it very difficult ? Obedience, truthfulness, want of pride, and assiduity In doing his work : these are the merits of a servant. You, Rama, and myself passed the time happily ia the forest of Daniaka. Riches are a source of innumerable Biiseries in this world, Paras'urama, the son of Hari, is the jewel of his class? and the ornament of his family. Let that man or these boys take this fruit. Hari arid I, or you and Krishna, can do this work; Qeither Gopala nor Ms younger brothers can do it. Yon two, the three servants of Pushpamitra, and two other men. should go t o the royal court.

10

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE LESSON II Concord of Sulstantlte a n i A i j e c i t e .

18. In English an adjective is used with a i genders numbers aad cases, in the same unaltered form; as a good man,good tables, I saw a good horse &c. In Sanskrit, however, all adjectives, whether participial, pronominal or qualitative, must take the same gender, number, and case as the noun which they qualify; as, q?ftt mfl, W 3ffe, a c f f J fitsRlPT "ppf% 'good homes'; Wtwtwf *V$fQ: ' from gooa houses"; iftwwft WFft^f: * from good wells'; ff% <PPF! f 5 # &c. The adjective in Sanskrit must, In fact, be treated like a noun capable of taking cases, genders, and numbers. Obs. Numeral adjectives differ from ordinary adjectives.. They have particular rules for their use, for which see Grammar* 19. When adjectives are 'used in Appositlonai or Batovrifai compounds, they are used in their original unmodified form; as, ftepPT; * a black deer*; ^W#fT ' of red eyes' (fern.); WW^WPf 8 a beautiful wife9; *rf!lP|: ' a bow taken'; ! R: 4 a man whose heart is fixed on another (lady)'Ac. (a) There are a few exceptions. The sign of the feminine gender is retained, when the feminine is treated as an appellative, when an ordinal number in the feminine geader is the first member or when the first member is regarded as a class-name; as, ?WWPf;, Vf*ltWPf:, 5JTRTOW: &c; also U%#WPf:, ^ts#Wff.% For further particulars see Siddhanfv Kaumudt on PJinini VI. S. 84-41. 20, When participial adjectives, such as, past and potential passive, are used as predicates, and when the subject is followed by an appositional BOUE used predicatively, the participle agrees with the subject (see f 11); as, tf (M.I) M&lavika was sent ( a s ) a present/

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

11

2 1 . When there are two or more substantives qualified by the same adjective, the latter is used in their combined number. As regards gander, what the substantives are masculine and feminine, the adjective will be masculine, and when they are masculine or feminine and neuter, the adjective will be muter as v m r f s i m F P i k ? Mt W (M, 1) *1 and the Queen are (respectively) interested in these two *J f p fp| ?j% It (Bib. III. 58. 10 ) truth, courage, knowledge religious austerities, purity, self-control, and tranquillity* are firm ia that king, pre-eminent among men and resembling the guardians of the worlds. * 06s. This rale is b&sM on the principle involved In Paini I. 2. 72 cTO^fT l f e w ; oo which a Vartika says:

So in Latin: ' Pater mihi et mater morlui awnt,1 ' nay father and mother are dead." 22. But an adjective in Sanskrit often agrees with the substantive nearest to i t ; as, SRf? ^t^ ffeft fW =f ^ n f e H (U. 1) ' by whose valour we are rendered happy, as also the three worlds s ( f t ft (MM. 1) * Love has displayed its power, as also the blooming youth.' Here we must follow what is called the HRfr* SffonTT process; that is, the gender must be iinlerstooi again to suit the next substantive. Concord ot Relative a n i 'its A n t e c t l e n t 23. The concord of the relative pronoun and its antecedent has no special peculiarities in Sanskrit, The relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender, mutnber, and person, the ease of the relative being determined by its relation to its own clause. Like other pronouns in Sanskrit, it may stand by itself, or may be used adjeetively. The rela*

12

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

live pronoun generally precedes the noun to which it relates in the relative clause; or the relative may stand alow, the antecedent noun being used with the demonstrative pronoun ; while sometimes the antecedent noun is not expressed at all ? 3Rpff J||% f mVffi TwMmiwm, (V. 1 ) ' may that Sthanu,who is Inwardly sought, contribute to your supreme happiness; wfmm spj OT ( P , I. 9) ' he who lias intellect has strength * (knowledge is power); fwTOTFT t r a t ^ ^f>TpRT fl^T ?ff wefpflj * i e upon us all, who are fighting with a angle-handed boy I* 24. When the relative lias for its predicate a siibstan* tve differing ia gender from the antecedent, the relative generally agrees with the predicate j as, ^W f | W W SPff??^ ? W (R. V. 54) * for what is coolness is the natural property of water*; so *IRgS<| iftlfi W WRf gpff#lfW ^W C (Manu. IX. 1SI). Gbs. It.will be seen from these examples that the correlative pronGua agrees in gender with the BOUB it qualifies. But Panini in I. 4.32 says ??fwr w f t f l w W (not m) I W W . 25. Whea the relative stands for a whole sentence, such as is represented by s that * in English, it is always used ia the neuter gender singular (*Rf); as, B wf%^w <spt ## fgWlt TS^T ROT: {V. 1) ' i s not indeed India's valour thai his allies subdue their enemies ?' TT ( Mai I ) * But that she, the moon-light of my eyes, came within the range of my sight, is the only great festival (joyous occasion) In my whole existence, * In such cases in the principal sentence, the gender of the demonstrative is the same as that of the antecedent noua not neuter because JFSJ is neuter.

TO 8ANSKBIT COMPOSITION

19 i(u. 2 (ll. 8 )

j#f:

tg^tft m ftwt fRW IT: II ( p . I. g )

1 ( S?. 6 )

| f e : H ( p . 1.15)

f%iiraT: ^ ^

Mw$i sirr w i i f M a : ii {Mb. x v n . i . 2 0 ) w$i s i

. YL62. 8T) I II (R. III. f 8)

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXEBCIS1 it

f a w m : 1 ( u . 3) fe# wfw: it (U. 7 ) 11 ( u . 1)

14

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

f # fjWf: II (U. 2) fcrsprnft s 11 (H. 1) Iff 3 ?W ft^ (I (H. l ) II (H. I )

; WPZT. f^prftenfaft

i w wmiw iprt: 11 (Bh. m . 10) IT 1 WfPf#ilfP!f II (R..X.82) p w *w w t^pfr fTw 11 {Mb. VI. 6.26)

There are many good people in this city, but they are despised by some peevish, wicked, and narrow-minded men. The King of PMaliputra and his Queen are both very generous. I saw yesterday three beautiful lakes, six deep wells, and fifty-six extensive gardens. He who speaks a lie in order to hide his fault, commits two faults. That you should say so Is certainly astonishing.

TO SANSKEIT COMPOSITION

15

That a man should be always virtuous Is the opinion of all philosophers, ancient and modern. These sweet mangoes are sent {use a participial adjective) as a present by my younger brother. That wicked people should hate the virtuous is but their inborn disposition. Those persons who are ready-witted, can surmount difficulties. On account of this incident I became ( adj. from SR ) the object of their envy. Patience, industry, and honesty are always commendable j but rashness, idleness, and faithlessness are censurable.

P A R T I!

G0YERNMENT

LESSON I I I The Accusative Case | 26. We now come to Government, the second general principle regulating the grammatical union of words in sentences, ' Government' is the power which a word lias to regulate the Case of a noun or pronoun. The Lessons ia this Fart are intended to explain and Illustrate this power. 2f. 'Karaka' is the name given to the relation subsisting between a noun and a verb in a sentence. Thus any relation subsisting between words not connected with, the verb will not be called a K&raka. There are six Karakas in Sanskrit: ^jgf> IJif, qvCS?stfSTSFT,V n ^ H and arfspRT. These relationsbelong to the first seven cases, except the Genitive, which is not regarded as a Karaka case, w f is principally the sense of the Instrumental, and means ' agent. * The nominative in Sanskrit, as in other languages, is simply the naming ease, that which is concerned in BrfrraTTV predication.' According to Panini II. 8. 46 < xtfttz^fomfwW&Fmrn OT1T) the nominative is used to denote the crude form or base of a word, gender, measure, and number only; as, 5fHh, frasn, # : , m , t&:-t-t, # : , ?ftff:, ?*:, t , i p : &c. Note.Several indeclinable words govern nouns in one or another of the JGtraka cases, and such cases, are then called * OTT^ftwpRf/ i.e., cases governed by indcclinables & c , as distinguished from WTfiffwfiW, cases governed by verbs; as, pft ;|f%fPfj WPMIT, WWfftft &c. The latter predominate ovei

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION the former, where both are possible (

17'

28. The persa or thing, upon whom or which the effect of an aetioa takes place, is called the object of that action. An object is put In the Accusative ease, except ia the passive voice.; a?, W iffwiWf ' he saw H a r i ' ; VKW f p f f w * f # (S. K.} * wishing to eat food he eats poison..' Here fft and fifff are objects of the verbs <JPTORT and W # . Bat in fffe %of% the pemive form %5H^f expresses the relation of object and verb which exists between fft and %?[; and therefore, ff\ is Hot required to be in the Accusative case; but in |ff% %^% there being no passive termination, the noun f fx is put in the Accusative case. 21. Verbs signifying 'to name' "to choose,' 'to make," 'to afpoint," "tocall,' 'to know,' 'to consider,3 &c. and the like, govern & factitive or indirect object, besides a direct object; as,'?smmT#r 5|f f (Ku. II. 13) ' they consider thee % to be Prakriti'; fWfa *rf*TOW8"W>l1f?;dW ( P k . U. Q) ' made a certain courtezan his wife'; ^Kff% ?Wt Sfffgff (Me. 6 ) * I know thee (to be) the chief person (minister).' ' 30< All verbs that show motion govern the Accusative ease; as,5?fcif ^?J^PHW (Mai. I ) ' 1 had gone to the temple of Cupid'; siMfr *R^T2T (Dk. II. 2) ' I also roaming over the earth s ; if^ r R j ^ H # t ; ( P . 1.1) * went down to the bank of the Jumna* ; so fipf^R SHf (R. II. 8 ). But this idea of motion is expressed in a variety of idiomatic expressions, where the motion is not actual but merely conceived; as, s ( P . I. 1) s was greatly dejected'; 3f?f?TWT T {Ve. 8 ) ' was not A As'vatthaman thought of by y o u ' ; qiRTpTOT IJVJH %Wf (Ku. 1.26)' the fair-faced lady afterwards went by (acquired) the name Uiaa'; soJTOT&flprwm wm mn ^th ( P . I. 2 ) ; H qfeffw^t (R. i n . a ) . (a) GeEerally i ntransitive roots preceded by prepositions, become transitive in sense, and then govern this case; as, 2

18

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

W 4 to be.*; fT<|?r ' to act aeeewl.ing t o , ' ' to follow'; as, P % T% 3Rts*ara?f (S'i. XV. 41) ' the people Indeed follow the will of their lord'; 3f=fe^^fi|ra"WlCtf (K, 120) 'ascended the lofty summit of the mountain 1 ; similarly ( E . VII. 37); sfto?r% ^T M (Ki 182); Ifffalt f r o S W t WTOWfSTOTWfa" ( U . 1). 3 1 . *The roots # ' to He down,' f T { to stand," and W 3FK * to sit,* when, preceded by Sfftf govern the Accusative of the place where these actions axe performed; as, ^'STPfff^ ^ f i i w n p f w f e w {K. 206) ' Chan<Mpida lay dowa on a slab of pearl-stone'; spsrfffsf #ffi#sfifTOt (R. VI. 78) * stood on (occupied) half the seat of Indira *; 3PTOf pfffpsf ( R . I. 95) ' lying in a tat (made) of leaves. * ( a ) ffef with stfiffJT governs the same case; as, 3ff*rffff (S. K.) ' h e resorts to a good path *; so ipf t R (Mu. 5). S 32, JTbe root ^ ' to dwell,' when precede! by the prepositions sWT, ^ , ^fw or 3fT, goyerns the Accusative case of that which forms the place of residence j as,OT-W^-W-wTw-lll%" 4 j 5 fft: (S. K.) " Hari dwels in Vaikuntha* (the heavens). 33. $The words TOl:, ^iwi ftp^, and the double forms 9T#!ft, W^(W: anarftT, when they hae the sense of 'nearness 8 and Sfftf 'to,'govern the Accusative case; as, OTHcl": fswt if^TT: (S. K.) ' cowherds are on both sides of Krishaa *; i f e frwf (ibid) * on all sides of Krishna' j vfW fft". (ibid) ' Hari is just over the world *; { ibid)' just below the world'; lwW!fW!^ (U. 5 ) ' fie upon the rogues *; f % w l f ^ M T feqm S% (K. 132) * 1 have no doubt m i i. *. 46), i ( I . 4. 4 7 ) . ': I ( I . 4. 48 ), rj i (V4r.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION
as

It

to her being heavenly',- so j [ / jfbij,). When nearness is not indicated the Genitive may be used; as, OTIffx frWPTrfef ? ? t^T (Mb.) higher and higher than all by means of Ms lustre, like the sun,' (a) ft"f[ may sometimes be used with the nominative or vocative; as, fe f f 'fie upon thee, fool'; faflpf f f e l l ( P . II.) ' cursed be this poverty." 34.'**The words W ^ : , ffen (both meaning 'round*) 313T, PftW (both meaning ' near') and | ? ' woe be to, * govern the Accusative case; as, ffepft TfWRfrfira': ftW: (M. 1) * the attendants stood round the king'; w H l t f ! Tfeft #RFf*RT {Bk. I. 12) * destroyed the demons (seated) round the altar*; Iff OTWF-^WT (S. K.) * near the village*; so pPW? # # c f % (Dk.); (wrtr) Tmm w l f t w fPirfi (S'i. I. <8 f, fT ^wrr^f# (Jtd.) wee be to a non-worshipper of Krishna. * fT is sometimes used with the Vocative; as, ff iffR?flPtff?r (U. 1) ' alas! oh revered ArundhatL' | 35. f The worJ'"'^3^| meaniag ' wttkrnd,* ' excepting/ and 'with reference to,'" 'regarding,* goveras the same case as, l ? l ^ ^ ? W ^ r m^t wTm^[ (Ve. 8 ) ' who else but thee is able to retaliate ? s ; 1WI*fl^W #5^ftswf ?felOT: (S'. 2 ) ' how is her eye-love regarding you f' (a) So also 5WTT, meaning ' between *; sfsRT ?ff f i t W (Mbh.); fWOTHW ^ft^%W f WPIT P % w%m fw^w# frarr ( B . R . IO ). f 36. Words denoting duration of time and space are put in the Accusative case; as, ?r w t ^wffw HOT ^5FWW: fDk. II. 6 ) ' t h e thousand-eyed (Inclra) did not rain for 12 years'; ?## J H H F T # (S. K . ) ' the river runs winding for two miles'; TOT tW5ft TR^ tfrat5PPnwr (Mb. II." 10. 1) * O iking, the hall of Vis'ravana is 100 yojaaas in length. V&r.J i ( n . 3.

20

THE StUDENT.'S GUIDE

37. The preposition apj Is sometimes found to be used by itself with nouns in the Accusative ease, in the sense of ' afler,' * in consequence off or ' being indicated %,* 5 resembling' or * imitating '; as, W$% TOW5T {S. K.) ' i t rained after the muttering of prayers'; <5PI *n*J*[ ^ (V. 4) ' everything of thee is after mine (resembles mlae). Obs. P&nini mentions arf%T in the sense of ' before, * * bard by,' ' in,' vJ7 * near' * inferior t o , ' Brfff" superior to, and 3R ' b the side of,' * along,' ' inferior,' under the category of prepositions, which can be used by themselves and which govern the Accusative case (See P&n. I. 4.84-5-8-7, 0-1-5 ); as. ifft?lfspFt, Witt fftfrfw, m $ T pr: ^fe IfW fWf: ^ # ^wfecfT %fT, 3f^ fft 5^1:, &c. (S. K.). Prepositions used by themselves and governiag a noun in some case, are called Kotmapmvachantifu ^

*Rlf SBFCSclH I ( M . 1)

SM

(S\8)

(s'.s) R^| ^ l (S'. 6) fifilf SjpKPTgWffi'TI ( B . 111. 51 ) ( Me. 118 (S'. 8)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION i <|?i ^P! **: (

21

Kaia. II. 98.)

( U. 4 ) W 1 ( K. 119 ) ( K. 178 ) apt t qfel: (S'. 4)

Mb. n . 7. 3

I ( R. V. 68 ) : || ( Ram. I. 47.17 ) ?=M#lcff g f r R ^ ^ S c f 1 ( R . I I . 2 4 )

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXEMCISE < S'. 5 ) *WT f*RT W ^ I ( V. 4

22

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

anwhr i { u . i ) t^iftef srier mn wTnm^ t { Ku. v . HI ) i i ( K . 12 ) (M. 3 ) !%WWff%# fW: II ( M. 2 ) & f e WW^WIfW I ( Me. 102 )

U( R. VI. 10) r % ^ i w f ^ ^ i m: tt f rt m fteftf m wn u f Bk. v i i l . s o ) : ^ * f^r fvwtf: msmwc u i P. 1.4 > It {IT. 1) m |w? 3#r mi arfir ww# *ir

t (u. s }

: u (H. l )

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

28

mm fefciftw 4ffimft 4s it {Ve. 3 )

A wife sfiould always follow the will of her husband. Here Is another person coming to wait upon its with regard to another business. Then she was made acquainted with ( use 3M^W) your Immodesty by the girl when greatly importuned. There is a-beautiful garden, round the cityof Pushpapura. Oil ( | T ) my misfortune.! My oaly son also is reported to be dead I He studied Nyaya. for three years and seventy-five days and has now become proficient in it. For two miles from Av&nti are to be seen beautiful gardens on all sides. Has she not yft recovered her senses ? I believe it Is Impossible without the application of a better remedy. What will the people of Mawipura think of ( sra%tf) iay past adventures in that city ? It appears to (srfif ) us proper that we should flow return to the subject of our discussion. Fie upoa those who wish to afflict others without aoy advantage to themselves I Woe be to those who follow immoral paths ! M&ma dwelt on ( W with wfif) the mountain CMtrakuta W for several days. The servant informed the Queen that His Majesty was sitting ( 3|T?r with arfw ) on the pleasure-mountain, and that he had called her there without delay.

34

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

When she was herseif again, she burnt the body of lie; dead brother, and then slept ( Wt with 8ffw ) on a -mat the whole night. That cow now resides ( W t with 8ff%) in the lower regions^ the doors of which are closed by large serpents. The vernal season does not appear splendid without tfa| presence of mango-sprouts. I do not remember what you said to me after ( 3f?j) thi departure of that young sage. What do you say " There is no Kshatrlya but our Emi peror ? " Fie upon you, rogues ! Here I take away youj banner; save it. if you can. LESSON IV Vttlte governing two Accusatives 38. There are some verbs in Sanskrit which take what Is called an ahathita object, in addition, to their usual direct one. As its name indicates, it is that object which is not otherwise ' kathita' or mentioned by way of any of the other case relations, such as, 3TTRM, srftf^W &e: and is, therefore, optional. If the noun capable of taking this akathita object be not intended for any other ease, it is put in the Accusative ease with such verbs; as, vJ ?tfsflf *W: ' he milks the cow (her m i l k ) ' ; SFSPffOTfe Tf ' he confines the cow to the fold.' Here R and W are akathita, or optional objects. If the speaker do not intend to have this object, the words will be put in their natural cases;, as, #?fr (ablative) pft ?tfar, 5W (locative) spffWfe i t . 39. The roots that are ca'pable of governing two accusatives are meationed in the following Karika " ; i

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

25

In the case of the roots |f^ ' to milk,* ff^f ' to beg,' W to cook,' 93? * to punish,' W * to obstruct or confine,' 933 ' to ask,' f ' to collect,8 ' to t e l l / ?H' to instruct,' % {af '"to win' {as a prize uf wager), #*f Ho churn,' JW ' t o steal.' and also in the ease of sft, f^ fT5 .and f^ all meaning ' to take ' or ' carry.' and others having the same signification, that none which, besides the direct ooject, is affected by the verb, is put in the Accusative case; as, If 3tjr qjf: (S. K.) ' he milks the cow'; rf% m^% *R$qt (ibid.} he begs the Earth of Bali'; similarly ft f rf it, front Wfff-fr, are examples of the other roots ia order. (Mb. I. 171.21) are instances of this, kind of object, because WW or W? and fasr or ^ have the same laeaniHg as and ITT, the roots given in the KS.rikA, 06s. The roots 1%, tpf, "W, ^ , ^ J , fw 1W, f, and evea I f s are of very rare occurrence as governing two accusatives, in classical literature, though given in the above list. 40. The roots mentioned above and others having the same sense, thus take two objects. One of them is principal, and the other, secondary. In the case of the first twelve roots from gi^xo WW^ the nouns Pf:s W?pt, ^Hfft, Ijwt, &c. are principal objects, and ft, sf%, [% iftlPffW, &c. are secondary objects, for they can, according to the speaker's volition, be put in other cases* A&d in the casfe of the last four roots, apfT is the principal object and 1TW, th* secon4arg. Thus that which is necessarily put in the Accusative case in order to complete the idea of the verb, is the principal object, and that which may be put in the Accusative, case, depending upon the speaker's will, is called the secondary object.

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE 4 1 . *In the passive construction of roots -govefnini two accusatives the secondary object in the case of the firsf twelve roots s and the principal object in the case of tlujj last four, is put ia the nominative case, the other objec^ remaining the same as in the active construction : e.g., ; Active construction (sr) * ? mt sftfar I Passive construction. j ( i w ) **: (nom.) mt ( a c e ) ;

fttSWt vm

I t : lJff: (nom.) f i t (ace.) ipfi | 5^W ftWlW ^^Wt (iMMti.) 9W (aCC.)

^fefft i
(M.

I ( M. 1

I ( K. 192 )

fl I ( Ku. I. 2 )

I ( Ku. III. I I ) cfti: I : II ( Ku. VI. 27 )

(K.

v . 88 (S. K.)

II

TO SANSKMT COMPOSITION

27

: i ( R. VIII.

12)

f^Wlf

5T3ft*T II ( Ram. L 35.16 )

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES B'OR EXEECISE fs II (R. I. 58) first : I (K. 228) l I f f W : l ^ ^ ^ j l l (R. X L l ) : II (Bg. II. l )

S W I 1 (Mu. 3) 1

fipnrt srfwfiifeftw n (Me, 104) T iffttft TlWnft few 5^Ff i

w
snfer aw m u (Bk. v i . 8-10}

m w WTWPI nl f ^ R

28

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

I asked him tea questions, but he did not answer any one of them. The mendicant begged fifty rupees of a rich man, who was reported to be very liberal. The king punished (<?[) t h e culprit with a fine of three hundred and sixty rupees. The preceptor instructs (STT^) these pupils in the principles of Nyaya and Vy&karma. The king was begged (pass, of ifT^) by the minister to pardon (OTi) the fault of his servant. He tells (w) me that Gopala has milked his cows. Sir, you were asked by me your name and family, and not how much wealth you have. Fourteen jewels were churned out of the milk-ocean. The shepherd took all the sheep to the market and sold them. Yesterday the cows were milked by my youngest daughter. The Gods went to Brahma and asked ( f ) him for a deliverer from Taraka. LESSON V The Causal 42. " The Causal of a root conveys the notion that a person or thing causes or makes another person or thing to perform the action or to undergo the state denoted by the root" (Dr. Keilhorn's Grammar 416); e.g., * P | ' to go,* jp>fyf?r ' he goes,' f i p f l * he causes to go''; 3psr ' to eat'; aRrfffe ' he eats,' W i f e ' he causes to eat.' 43. That which is the subject of a verb in its primitive sense is put in the Instrumental case in the causal, the object reiaainiag unchanged; e.g.,

TO SAKSKHIT COMPOSITION Primitive after Devadatta coofcs food. Causal (He) causes Devadatta to cook food, (^f) TWT WITCTISflTOf1 (He) makes Mama abandoa (His) wife,

Kama abandons (Ms) wife.

4 1 . *In the ease of roots that imply *"motion,* i knowledge ' or 'information', or some Mad of ' eating,' and other roots having a similar sense; also of roots that have some literary work for their object, and of intransitive roots, that which is the subject of the verb in its primitive sense is put in the Accusative case in the causal, the object remaining unchanged; e.g., Primitive 3P f J? Causal

But ia H|iTfir TPTt i"tf%? (Eiinaa makes Govind go) if somebody else (fiwfip') prompts Rama to do this, we shall have to say fgwTwwl U%W wW%? tffmfzt Vishwumitra prompts Rama to cause Goviud to go.' Here * Rama * is not put ia the Accusative case, because it is the subject o the verb, not in its primitive, but causal sense. 9 ?t I (I. 4- 52) f These examples are put together ia the following verse :-

30

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

Note.-Patanjali, la Ms Mahabh&shya, adds this explanatioa on the meaning of the word 5P?pf la the Sutra ffe &c. $|333>)T may mean either SPST %ft ftsfT or ^l T *Hlt fK T When we take the former interpretation, the roots (f*k), ifef?T (*Ff), and^WPI% (denom. of ?PS[) have to be excluded from the rule; as, fE^fff1 ^ ? T T : ; ffrwfa" ? W f ; ^f?&-5fs?W%-%W?W:; ?P : <'I%~?I^W&-^f?W | f.And the roots *f, IT with ft, and Wff with 3T, must be Included in the ;rule; as, ?!#&fefWfra"-W^%-^W?W:, WRW&-fWlW&~ ^rT^JonrRr?spr?T^. When we adopt the second interpretation, the roots H?*?, WM with, 3TT, and 5W with Pf, must be included In the rule; & f t f % ^ f % 45. There are several exceptions and counter-exceptions to the preceding rule, which are important : ( a ) *The causals of ?fi" to lead' and ff * to carry, * do- not govern the Accusative, but the Instrumental, e.g., in (S.K.) (H<?) causes a servant to carry a load. But Wf when it has for its subject in the causal a word signifying a ' driver," obeys the general rule; as, |(S.K.) The charioteer makes the Horses draw the chariot. horses draw the chariot. (Mbh.) 1 (b) f l h e causals of the roots 3T? and W\, to eat,' govern the instrumental case; e.g., A servant carries a load. j The boy eats his food. J (He) causes the boy to eat his food. (Var.). f*W*ftlWllfl ^ | t W ^ J I (Var.) ? | (Var.)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

81

(<?) | | , when it has not the sense of ffT * injury to a sentient thing,* governs the Instrumental; as, w f e f<nflf :, w w t r W f %rc#r; but w w f ? *prpr srstasf:, w&rfsr W T (Mbh.). (d} The roots f*[ and W, which denote particular kiacis of ' knowledge' o r ' perception,' are not used with the Accusative; as, WCtf-fsFJf^FlW^f!:, OTrafe-WWf!f-tW5#T. Sometimes, however, the Accusative also is used iirthe case of the root W, especially when it means * to think of or remember with regret *: as, Sfft t jj t feff% H <Ftre#?r Stfrft: (Mu. I); see S'i. VI. 5 also. () *3^F is construed with the Accusative In the causal; as, I f f ! ??% Wf% < # l f e WTFF-ffi: ( S . K . ) . O6s. 351 ia classical literature is sometimes found used with the Dative, instead of the Accusative; as 8 ft^ W ^ f?ft.(E. X I I . 84). ( / ) flfae subject of .the verb in- the primitive sense in the ease of | | and if, and of 8ff*iR[? and 5^T whea used in the Atoianepada, is either put in the Accusative or Instrumental case in the causal; e.g., S Vftfff fJffffWI I ? " (S. K.) (He) causes the servant to The servant makes or make or take a mat. takes a mat. So arfVrarcq^-^KNftr*^ ^Rtf-TfJf&T Wr I (S. K . ) ( H e ) makes the devotee bow down to, or see, the God-. 4S. By intransitive' roots mentioned ia 44 is meant sueh roots as are not by their nature capable of governing an object other than that of ' time,' * place* &c., and not those roots which, though transitive, may sometimes be (Var.) (Var.) (1,4,58).

THE STUDENT'S GOIBE used intransitively according to the speaker-ss Volition, 01 when their meaning is quite evident; as s f%$T: *N$r. Here H%8 though transitive, is used without an object, because it can be easily understood; hence, f^JJ^T 7PWf?r and not f%^; but WKPTRRrfif t^ff. 47. fin forming the passive construction of causal verbs, the principal object in the causal, which is the subject (agent) of the verb in its primitive sense, is put In the Nominative case, and the other oVject rempiiis unchanged; e.g., Primitive [ Causal Active Causal Passive 1 Tpfl IPf F8Sii I 'CP! !ff m i f f I CPff W T O t Rama goes to a (He) causes Rama Kitaa is caused to village. to go to a village. go &e. $ The servant preI (lie) causes the The servant is jlares a mat. servaat to prepare made to prepare a mat. &c. Govimd sits for one (He) makes CJovind Goviad is made to month. sit &c. sit &c. ( a ) But in the case of roots that imply lknowledge," "eating,* and those that, have a literary work for their object the principal object is put ia the Nominative case, and the secondary in the Accusative Qr vice versa; e.g., 'he makes M&navaka know Ms d u t y ' ; or i n w w Hff *?!&& ' M. is made to knww duty,* or ' duty is made known to M,' arzrft^f TOwfe ' he makes the boy eat food'; fSTfef WtTO or I S ^ ^ i l Wl^% (S.K.). 48. The causal forms of roots of the tenth conjugation are the same as the primitive forms, and the meaning must SWUFifft I : II (S. K.)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION be decided by the context; as, TT*ft sffcwftr ' B t a a steals Tf wealth'; Tl*ft *frf%tr PT !ffarf?r 'R&raa causes Govinda t o steal wealth.' l a the latter senteace the verb has a causal sense. 49. With regard to roots that govern two accusatives the rules mentioned in 48 and 44 hold good in their case also; i.e., those roots that imply motion & c , govern the Accusative of the subject of the priffltitive base, and others the Instrumental case, subject to 45; as, ^TPfft ^fe ^?JW R%; ( f ^ f t ) IFftT ^f% P|<ff ijrspfftr { ( G o d ) makes Yirniana ask Bail for Earth; #ftswt mt frf?T; (WPft) W>t afftH wrat I T t fRWf^" '(The master) makes the cowherd take the sheep to the town. !

54

THE STIJDEXT'S GC;DE

I ( K . 20a) i t ^Rft fwf Rft wf#S: I ( B . I I , 70 ) (Mb. 1.180. 25 ) I f fl^wf % # : SlfSlf CW: i (M, i x , 78 )
1

. XV. 88)

ftcfM ^ J r

f l ^ ^ f f R t : il (R. X I I . 70. i )

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR 1X1BCISE : } (Mai. l ) s' I (Dk. IL 6.) (Ma. 4-.) swftw v f w ? : (Ku.iv.ii) mmm% wnfmmm mm qiwff H I H P I II (Ku.vil.27)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

85

f^fffeff W f It ( U . 6) 1 II (R. IV. 78) ! II (R X I I . 12) 5 II fM.XIII.24)

II (Ki. I. 81) rftftf

n (Bk. VIII. 82-4) ftrawt n(Bk.ii.2i)

We made him know (f%?) his duty, and sent (cows, of fsff with w) him home. Whe*. the desire of independence enters the heart of a ^minister, he will make the king himself lose (??Pr) his life. Having vanquished his foe ia the battle, he wade Ms bards sing (# ) the glory of his warlike deeds. He caused his servants to bring (ft or | | ) fuel from the market.

36

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

It Is no wonder that the tributary princes are made by the Emperor to obey his commands. These persons were told to get garlands prepared by those maid-servants. When a student is made to kaow the theory of a subject,, he is tatight the practice of it. Overcome your enemies and make them pay (<?r) yotributes. He caused a large mandap to be erected (f>) by Msservants for the marriage of Ms son. He made the boy eat (ar? or I f ? ) food against his will. I showed (caws, of ^ ) my library to my distinguished guest. He makes Rama ask the pilgrims the way to Benares. The sheep were caused by the master to be taken (flf J to the village by Ms servant. A lord should be made by a servant to give him rewards, by adapting himself to Ms will. I caused them to stand, round the king, and made then*, salute ( cans, of spt with stf^r) Mm.

LESSON 1 T i e Instrumental Case 58, *The Instrumental case in Sanskrit has two principal senses: it either denotes the agent of an action, or the instrument or tneans by which the action is done; as, ?rat %m PPWMfjf (Ve. 1 ) ' then what was said by the Queen*? ^PPJlfif mm 1 fjftwfte (Ve. 1) 'shall I not reduce to powder the thighs of Suyodhaoa with my club'? I ( I I . 3. 18)

TO SANSKMT COMPOSITION

87

3 feapftfflf ^ t t ^kwmmm (K. 181) again lookeA at that very celestial woman with Ms. eye.' 151. The iastrameBtaity, which this case denotes, ^nay be expressed by various relations : (a) The manner of doing an action, or aa attribute which characterizes a noun; as Wf^fPjpCTt f%ffftPi% (Ku. 1.18 ) lie married ( h e r ) worthy of himself acewiiBg to the rite '; gfRftT A^Nfft: (Mbh.) * lovely by nature \lWCfPP? f*t#f (Und.) I am a Mafhara by my family name 8 ; W f T f f f e (ibid.) walks unevenly * j sunttary f?ffl#r WFt ^W% W ^ (6) The price at which a tMng w b o ^ h t ; as,' ' at wJiat price was the book bought*? (c) With verbs indicating motion, the coaveyance becomes the instrument; as, WlWfJ 1^ fWFFf ft < R. X I I I . 1) * passing through* Ms own abode (the sky) ia a balloon.* (d) With verbs of emtyimg or plaebjg, that oa which a thing is carried or placed Is pat in the Instrumental} as, it W f fspRtHf ( H . 4 ) ' h e bore the dog n his shoulder.' ^ f R r t I^ff WKW (Ku. I I I . She) * p l a c i d Ms master s s order on Ms head.' (e) With words of 'swearing,* that In whose name the oath is taken, becomes the iBStrumeu.*; as, M (K. 288) * I swear to tfaee by nay very life.* ( / ) The direction of route flowed to go to a particular place also becomes the iastrameat; as, W%W fanfph? iRH *l ^^: (y, i,J in what direetlom did the rogue go*? | 52. With verbs iinplyiBg 'eseceUing' a a i 'rambling*' the Instrumental is used with the qualities in which the excellence consists, or the points or particulars referred to >n the resemblance; f#*?fr*IW I f f f a i t (R. V. 14) * 0 you fortunate one, you excel your ancestors ia that

88 (devotion)'; %WM TPPHPflFJilTfa' (U. 4) ' resembles Mama In Ms voice.* Qhs. Sometimes the Locative is used in the same sense; as, WT^ 1??I# ?f?t * P ?erT<TC (Ram. I. 19) 'equal to =T Kubera in (point of) charity (munificence), and like another Dharma ( a second Dharma) in truthfulness,' ( a ) Words implying * separation from*, are usually" construed with the Instrumental; as, 3PT%pr% <jqr f%?i)W OTfci: ( . 4) ' here Is this separation from iier suddenly fallen eo my lot'; so m f% OTTpf 1 ft fsrejjETr OrsTOtT: (Me. 118)> (6) Words expressing ' likeliness * or * equality * are also used with this case; as, <R^T sgnfOTPt * equal to Rubera in munificence'; ^ W W #OTf wmif WW^fe (U. 4) 'hisface corresponds to (is just as similar as) the moonlike face of Sita. * See under Genitive also. , 53. * The Instrumental is used with words expressive of titne or place when the accomplishment of the desired ubject is meant to be expressed; as, i r ? ( P. I.)'" grammar is learnt in twelve years s ; (S. K.) ' t h e lesson was learnt by him in (i.e., by going over) a Kos.* 54. fWfaen a noun denotes the cause or motive of a tMng or action, as distinguished from the means or instrument, it is put in the Instrumental case; as, wft iROTi ^ r f w t \ R. II. 63) s I am pleased with thee "for t h y devotion to thy preceptor"; ^ W w i ? OT s t O T T f%l%f?W (K. 126) * the place being very far off, he could not see anythirig.' (a) The object or purpose -also is put in the Instrumental case? as, srsin^r' sf?rf?r ( S . K.) * dwells with the view ( for the purpose) of studying.' i (II. 8. 6) I ( I I . 3. 38 }

TO SAXSKEI.T COMPOSITION

39

Obs. The Instrumental, which Is used with verbs meaning ' to be Satisfied', ' to rejoice a t ' , * to be astonished at*, ' to be ashamed of', is accounted for by this rule; as, WJW: Ff?T%iTffT <|<3?fiT {P. I. I J ' a low persoa is pleased even. with l i t t l e ' | WO l < T # : smv*m ftlMNt (R. XV. 68) J TW T r ' the people did not so much wonder at the proficiency of both of them'; 3pfT STTI^wh" ^ ^ (K. 193) * I am ashamed of this boldness.' 55. f Attributives, which show some defect of the body, govern the defective limb in the Instrumental case; as, sfjfujT sppif: (S. K.) ' Wind of one eye'; so, q&ff WW:, # f ffsrt: &c. f 56. % An attribute, which indicates the existeace of a particular state or condition, is put in the Instrumental case to express this relation; as, 3pjrfVrc?nW: (S. K.) ; he is an ascetic by (the fact of his having) matted hair.' 5?, 3f5J and f>cf meaning 'enough? govern this ease; as, OTFdlf3%T (Ve. I ) ' enough of prolixity;' <PP!%W (U. 4.) ' away with the horse; * ?FRTc$?f W^WrwfewiTft'; ( P . IV. 1.) (a) In this sense 3f# is often used with a gerund; as, 3?"5y}f?^ff WiftOT (M. 1) ' enough of misttaderstanding {do not misunderstand).' In such cases it has a prohibitive force. 58. * Words like f, m4! mi, m &c. having the sense of 'companionship' govern the Instrumental case of that which expresses the accompaniment of the principal subject of assertion; as, cffT f fTOOTfe" f W (U. 2 ) ' I shall dwell with thee in forests '; 3PRf%W: (U. 8) ' the heavenly river with persons like us*; # ^ (Bk. VIII. 79 ) ' sit with me on the mansion.5 r: I ( I I . 3. 20) m i ( I I . 3, 21) I (II. 8. 19)

#0 5i Words like f%,.^W, apt:, spft5R> 'JW: &c. expressing mm or need, and the root ff with f whea used in this sense, % govern the Instrumental of that which is used or needed and the Genitive of the user; as, ifffTCRf % ^ ^ SWlvppf ( H. 1) * your Majesty's feet have uo need of servants'; ?pN" ifflf f l t ( P . 1.1) ' ot rich persons (even) some purpose is sewed by a blade of grass', ft? ?RT fW% Nff ( P . I.) ' what Is to be done with that cow' ? f OTT f ^ ^ f (S'. 2 ) % * what is the good of seeing her' ? SOT^T l^fd'TW "flcW ^>*t JJW: (Mu. 1) 'what is the use of a devoted but foolish errant * f Obs. Panini mentions Kf: w ' ^ f l . 4. 43), i.e., f?W 'to play * governs the ace. or iustr.; as, ^^OTMf ^sJlftr ' he plays at dice *; also, ##sf?RFlf f^fw ( I I . 8. 2 2 ) ; Pw P flf HaTPft^1 * he lives in harmony with his father, *

(M.1) r I f i ^ w f i g p i iP-rf^Fci: (M. I ) (MM. 8)

!

. 8)

: i (u. a) (K. 76) j (K. 138)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITON

41

(K. 229) ,| j (Vc. l ) t^ !%tft (Me. 4) (K. 28S) ft

i (Mk. 4)

: H (S*. i )

(It. III. 2) it (Bg. x . s )

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOE EXERCISE Ife *^nlW 1 (K. 152)

44

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE iff

?PI

f I (K. 369) (V. 3)

f: i (K.

^ f f% 9 T IW^TO^I^'sft v^^ II (H. 1 ) W

II

(R. II. 34)

^ u (R. VI. 79.) WW^ f%

* ift

ft

WfW# COfer 1% H?WfT II (Bh. II. 55)

tJf*!fTSflR?W*rf?f *TW W ^ ^ ^ ^ : il (Mu. 8)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

43

j i( (Mu. 3) anirr *tfe HH^ wnjiwFit n w iWt fwwwpt ^ i (Bh. II. 48) 5IWW U (Ki. I. 21.) uapft wtf fmn "jfnit?R: i ( M m . 1.1.17-8) ff%t II (S'i. I. 70)

A king should protect Ms subjects accordlog to the rules laid down by Manu. Morality says 'that one should save the life of his friend even at the cost of his own life. This matt is avarice incarnate; lie will never be satisfied with hoarding money. Are you not ashamed of your ignorance, and do you boast of your noble birth, not attended with knowledge ? This king excels all others in bravery, knowledge, and a desire to keep Ms subjects contended. That your orders are borne by other kings on their headsis one great sign of your sovereignty. The man took the lamb on Ms shoulder, and went by this road to the slaughter-house. I swear by my tutelary deity that I have never before seen your ring. I know nay servants will come back within fifteen days, for what is the use of their staying there longer f Even a sinner is freed from all his sins by repeating but once the syllable em through ardent devotioa.

44 What Is the use of walMag with this man V He is lame of Ms right leg and cannot walk swiftly. Away with douhts in this respect. This matter is all but agreed to by my sister's husband. Fie upon you, fool! What Is the use of this bur'den of books to you if you do not read them ? Bo not (wtf) censure m e ; this was not done by me. Child, do not (aft?) weep; when thy mother comes here, 1 shall cause thee to be fed with food by her, SliaJcttntatt did not notice the approach of Burv&sa on account of her thinking of her lover, O blind man, what is the use of this lamp to you ?

LESSON VII The Dative Case | 60. The person to whom something is given is called ftSffltFf. A noun denoting TOW is p i t in the Dative case; as* 1%-R5 fwp| nc% S%# (R. V. 18) Oil learned Sir, what is to be giYen to tfife preceptor *? The person or thing with Teferenee*to whom or having in view which an action is done is also WSRTR"; as, pt! fffffi' (Mbh.) * he prepares for battle *; m mum S T ^ " (MM.) he demands her for Namiana.* ( a ) *In the case of the root ip^ * to sacriice' or * to give as "in a sacrifice," the person to whom the sacrifice is offered is put in the Accusative, aad the thing or means by which it is made is put in the Instrumental; as, PEPTf <f W?t" (S. K.) ' h e sacrifices a bull to Rudra.' S I . f i n the case of the root ^ s t o like* and others (Var.) ( I . 4. s s )

TO SANSKEIT COMPOSITION

#5

having the same signification, the< Jjersoa or thing that is pleased or satisfied is put ia the Dative case; as, f f|^% ( S \ 2) i what pleases your Lordship *? m; ^K&s'ikk) ' Yajnadatta likes Apupm.* | 2. JThe person to whom something is due (the creditor) in the case of the root tf (10 el,) * to owe* and the thing desired ia the case of W|^ are put in the Dative case; as sppNR f WTWffT % ( S \ l ) ' thou owest me two sprinklings of trees *;#C##lWFTf WWf#?tJt|lf?! (Bh. HI.45) * an impoverished person desires a handful of barley-corns,* Obs. Derivatives from W ^ are sometimes construed witlt the Dative; as, i#ff: flffRPf: (Bh. I I I . 64) 'desirou s of enjoyments'; s p p p t mfcwfa <wm: fPfW: f*ffr (Ve. 8 ) ; but generally with the Locative; ?ffHWl S R ^ %f fFPlt (R. I D . 5 ) . S3. T h e roots ^ r , %% , fw^, <f^, and others having the same sense, govern the Dative of the person against whom the feeling of anger, hatred, malice, &c,, is directed; as, f t # ^i^'ff--^^f?r-fwf?r-3r^ff W (S. K.) ' h e is angry F with, or bears hatred towards, Hari. * But ^W aad Jf^, when preceded by prepositions, govern the Accusative; as, (Mu. l ) ' to do injury to my person*; ?r ^ ^ 1^: (V. 8) * did not the preceptor get angry with her'? 64. f i n the case of the root *s| with srfif or W meaning ' to promise," the person to whom something is promised, is put in the Dative case; as, fffej^Tf ^r^?fW#ff fw^WSffif Owt (R. XV, 4) ' Kakutstiia promised them the removal of obstacles. * : | ( I . 4. 85-i) (I, 4. 87-8.) fsit fim m^ i ( I . 4. 40.)

46

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

85, JThe purpose for which an action is done, or that for making which another thing exists or is used (as a thing made for a certain purpose) is put in the Dative case; -as, <i>f65 331% (K&v. l ) ' a poem (is composed) for fame'; ^TRf <?T5 (Mbh:) 'wood is for (making) post'; f f (ibid.)' gold is (used) for Kundala ornament'; ?? (ibid.) ' a mortar for pounding down.' (a) When the sense of an infinitive of purpose is suppressed in a sentence, the object of this infinitive is put in the Dative case; as, is^nnjfr q j % = f5FqT|f ?| qfff ; he goes for fruits* i.e. ' to bring fruits'; WTPT i t JUTf^S^Wf *ftj i t igsffa ' he let loose the cow for (i.e. to go to) the forest.* Here ^M and 3FT, the objects of the infinitives 3dff# and Wtf, are put in the Dative, (b) STiie Dative of an abstract noun is .often used to express the sense of the iafiaitive of purpose from the root; as, ifFTPf 5*1 & = W^ * T? l he goes to offer a sacrifice *; so T fT ifffelfWW SifCTcfT hi (S'. 1); H%st *: #WFPHW (V. 1 ) . * I B the case of the root *S< * to be adequate to % f5T ' to bring a b o u t ' , ' to tend t o ' , and roots having a similar sense, such as #7^, IT, fW, the result brought about, or the end to which anything leads, is put in the Dative case; as, i p ? # TOTTf ( S \ 5) 'thou art adequate to bring about (our) protection'; ?PCPf P?#-3OT%-?fW% *PTPT: (Mbh.) gruel tends to (produce) urine.' The Dative is frequently used in this sense without ?|or 3IB; as, TO"# ?f?T|:WPJ (P. I.) ' since thej r two cause, very little pain.' ( a ) fThat which is foreboded by a portentous pheno(Var.) : 1 (11. 3.14.) $ j*p#5^ ^ R l ^ ^ ! ^ 1 ( I I . 3. 15.)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITOK

47

is also put ia the Dative ease; as / Mbh.) ' the twany lightning forebodes a hurricane * 5^nr 33Tlfd% Hi: (tftid.) ' t h e sound of a deer indicates (the getting of) food of flesh.' (6) With the words f|5F and ^ f the Dative is used; as, %f-^ (S. K.) ' good for a Brahmana'; %RPOTf(Mbh..) good for a sickly person.* 06s. f|p in the sense of ' good in or t o ' is used with the I ocative and Genitive also. | 7. $The words TO, fffef, *Tfi|T, fWT, and 1^5 (terms used in offering oblations t o Gods &c), and 3T55 in the sense of ' a match for',' sufficient for' govern this case; as, ?pfj fepfeRp g?# (R. X. 18) ; abow to you who created the universe'; ; H f e W5% (M. 2) ' good-bye to you'; WWW Wlff {S. K.) ' this offering to A g a i ' ; similarly fRTWn fOTT, ?RPT aftrs; f?#wft ^ftW (S. K.) ' Hari is a match for the dej n o n s ' ; wmWf Mfmm (t) ^ c t (R. II. 89) ' t h i s (cow) is sufficient to satisfy me who am hungry.' (a) Words having the sense of 3f?5 ' sufficient for', ' able to d o \ such, as 5W, 5RcT and even the verb y | are used with the Dative; as, yPfeft JT??5ra, f5l ^ ? # ^?^PT, ^W?^Pf ( M b h . ) ' one wrestler is a match for another'; ? f t r : ^ W % (Bh. II. 94) ' over whom even the* Creator does not prevail.' (ft) TO joined to f> generally governs the Accusative, but sometimes the Dative also; as, trfsppj spR|>5ar (S. K.) saluting the three sages'; but PRiPff ^fefPT (ibid.) ' we salute Nrisimha.' (c) Roots meaning * to salute,' such as SffTO, HW^ are construed with the Dative or Accusative; as, WTcfR srf (Ku. II. 3) * saluting the Creator'; also (Ku. III. 60), 3fpf SfftTOI (Mu. I ) ; so, ?ft J iftwuiS'RT^ww^ws^inni^i i (II. 3.

48

TSE STUDENT'S GUIDE (Ku. v i i . 27) mm

W P ? (K. 2 2 8 ) ; ft ftq?nr: nwm f ^ (K. i 8 i ) .

Note.Classical authors occasioaaPy use the nouns ate derived from these verbs with the Dative; as, -Vstf SPTPT *wm: (Ku. i n . 6 2 ) ; anpqr s f w f w f w r f K. 142), W (Dk, I. 2 ) . ( ) In greeting and ia expressing a blessing the Dativeis used with words like fiPRf, | W ; as^WOTWy^fW (Mbh), WWW^sf (M. l ) 'welcome to the Queen.* Words like ppj, US', 5 9 &c. are used with the Geoitive also. See Lesson X.* 8. The roots f?f, fTT, 5TW, and =W, all meaning * f fell* (contrary to the principle of <jpprj[lP[ &c.) the causal of f%S[ with 1% (contrary to 44), aad other roots having the same sense, govefrathe Dative of the person to whom something is told, as, H # 1P!#f'i| "TOW (S'. 1) * O worthy lady, I tell yoa the t r u t h ' , W.% % M f ft% ? ( S \ - 4 ) 'come, let us communicate this service ( of the trees to KSiyapa *; so ff # WpWRWf wfl ( t J. 4 ) ' t o whom he sang (revealed) the Veda*; Jff# wfwp" rtf%W (Mv. 2 ) , 8. Verbs meaning s to send * or * despatch' generally govern the Dative of the person, but Accusative of theplace, to whom or which a thing is sent; as, Wt^l>|[?ft <W%' fef^: (R. V. 89) * a messenger was sent to Raghu by Bhoja'; mm mmif ^ m i %m^n (Mai. 1.) * by Devarata sending Madhava to Padmavatl.' 70. * The secondary or indirect object of the root W| * to think* el. 4, which is not an animal, takes either the Accusative or Dative, wheticontempt is to be shown; as 8 T ?lf OTF<T W4 W tp (S. K.) ' I do not consider thee to f be worth a straw.' <W*fffl$H!fP| I ( I I . 8.17 )

TO BAXSKKIT COMPOSITION

49

Cits. Whtea no negation and contempt are meant, but mere comparison, the Accusative alone Is used; as, fit ?Jf # {"Ah.) * I consider thee as a straw*; but ffopspflf (S'i. .XV. 61) 171. f^tt *^ e c a s e ' roots implying mohon, the place to which motion is directed is put in the Dative or Accusative ease when physical motion is indicated; as, W flWW att ' W f e but nmi fft f f t r * goes to Hart Tf mentally* (contemplates him). O i s . ' ( l ) T P f t w t ^ fWFf: (I. *. 89) *.e., the person, with regard to whom some questions as to good fortune or welfare are asked. Is put in the Dative ia the case of the roots T P | ' to propitiate * and fsf * to look to the welfare of any one*; as, ( 2 ) ^f^^W i ^ ^ F W ^ M f f t ( I . 4. 44) i.e., the price at which a person is employed on stipulated wages is put la the inatr. or i a t . case ; as, M^ ft##i

( S . 2) (S\8) ? f f (S*. 7) ( P . I. 18} 1 ( u . r) t * P P i w l l ftwWW^I W W P W l f t ( I I . 8. 12 )

50

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

(K. 108)'

(K.

II (ft. X. i s )

. 3)

^ :

It (Ku. VI. 82)

(R.VHI.79)

(R. V, 17)

^ # : 5 1 ^ 1 1 (R. IX. 77)

a > o

II (Bg. IV. 8)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE (Dk. I. 4) f t <PWW I (U. 8) WTPW?

51

IT feWfe W^ftw: (U. 4} ( f t 1,28) II (Ku. II. 4) w; i (V, i l (V. 3) ff fewws ( v . 3) it (N. III. 95) II (Ku.V. 44) w t r a ^ f ^ f ? r a r ^ u ( P . I. u ii (H. 3) n)

52

THE STUDENT'S GOIDB

tf ff| ifcllV'Bnftr %fnft II (S'i, XVI. 25 j ^ l l (R. II. 65)

&OTf<i 5RW 1TOI g^W^W II (R. II. 681 W Pff W^^Wi ^^pwW^W II (R. V. 19) I (R.XVI.42)

f% ?4 H I S ^W WrRf a SfftPtWW fnfn OT# !W^ II (Bk. VIII. 76-8,98)

Wretched man, do you like service in the lionse of Lady, do not misunderstand me, and do not get angry with me in vain. I do Hot long for ( ^ f ) wealth, but immortal glory. Having promised Lakshmana to accompany him, why do you now tell Mm that you are' unable to do so ? Being greatly delighted at hearing the account, the} communicated ( f t ? with ft') to him even their very secrets. Even a sight of these pious men will briag about ( ^ } my purification; I shall, therefore, wait upon them for the accomplishment of my desired object.

TO 8ANSKBXT COMPOSITION

S8

1 told him f WT with Wf) through my brother that I liac nothing to do with seeing him. Old lady, such sad thoughts will only result in greater sorrow; therefore, eottifjose yourself for a time. The enjoyment of pleasures in this world only leads to -disgust. My subjects bear hatted towards ( l l j f ) me and plot against ( f J my life. First salute ( w t | ) your preceptor and then begin to learn your lesson, A bow to three-eyed God, who reduced Cupid to ashes with the fire of his third eye I Wtiea a man gets a soa, he pays off the debt due to his fathews. You yourself are able to defeat (se,3R) the whole troop of the enemy. When a man is doomed by fate, even a trifling cause Is sufficient (3R?) to bring about Ms ralm. I shall send a messenger to the king of Vidcha, and communicate to 'him this glad tidings.

LESSON VHI T i e Ablative Case 12. Hie cliief sense of the Ablative case Is 3PfR"Ff. T h a t from which separatioa, whether actual or conceived* takes place is called spiWPf, and is put in the Ablative lase j as, WTWRWTft ' he comes from a village *; i.e.t that from which the separation takes place is ffPf. I t has thus the sense of 'from* in English. 13. *A noun ia the Ablative case frequently denotes I ( I t . 8. 25)'

JS4

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

the cause of an action or phenomenon; and has the sense of.' on account of . ' f o r ' , ' by reason of' &c.; as, ^fftjpppTpOTt (U. l ) ' n o t living apart (whose resort was not different) on account of affection.8 A noun not of the feminine gender denoting the cause of au action is put in'the Instrumental or Ablative; as. wsmn WFSWK( Wt W?: (S. K.) * lie was caught by reason of his dullness *; 33TOT Wf?n{S. K.) * he was set at liberty oa account of his skill'; ipRiyj" *pft *r*HJWm ? ^fTTll% r (R. II. 68) ' I am pleased with'thee for thy de%7otioB to (thy) preceptor and compassion on me.' Obs, Sometimes a feminine noun, also is used in the Ablative in this sense; as, TrffcT Wffl'TOW: (S. K . ) . {a) The Ablative often serves the purpose of a whole causative assertion in replying to, or advancing argumentsia -discussions; as, Wft^ftpOTT *pT?f (Tarka.) ' t h e mouatain has fire (in i t ) , because there is- smoke '; ^fwrt WM: W ^ f ^ r a t I fW: #fWR#TOllM (S. B.) (A disputant says) 'God cannot be the efficient >cause of the world Why ? .(Because) he is liable to (the two charges of) being partial and cruel.5 ' 74. Words in- the comparative degree, or such as have the sense of comparison, are used with the Ablative of.that with reference t o which the comparison is made; as, WW(|cf #T: (Ve. 3) 'falsehood is better even than t r u t h ' ; t : " (R. XIV. 56) 'consciousness became f V more painful than swoon'; ^WWKft s p w t '(R. VI. 50) ' ia VrindaYana not inferior to Chaitraratha \8fW%W?flpff: l^f%WfMT^% (H. 4) ' t r u t h itself is superior to a thousand horse-sacrifices'; Vf&J Jwf^fR'fTf^ofl f%ftpq% (Mantf. III. 278) 'for a S'raddha ceremony afternoon is preferred to forenoon.' 75. *When the sense of an absolutive is suppressed I SHWWPPtlfl' f (Var.)

10 SANSKKIt COMPOSITION

55

iu a sentence, the object of the absolutivc is put in. the Ablative case; &% Wim^Wlm (S. K.) = 5rraRTTCfS? J sees from a palace '; so SWttf33rf<f?r ( s - K.) = () The place where an action is performed Is also put iu the Ablative under the same circumstances; as, an^WI?!?%, i.e., mim OTpfW SSRt ' sees from a seat. (b) In questions and .answers also the Ablative is used ; ai, ftft 'W^FT-ird^ra (Mbh.)., 7 l . *Words denoting ?mjm 'abhorrence,' fapcm 'cessation,' 'refraining,1 and grWR 'swerving.' govern the Ablative ease; as, f F n ^ ^ F ^ (Mbh.) ' h e shrinks from sia*; ^WTfeTT (U. if1 desist from this. O child'; f | Me. 1) ' swerving from his d u t y ' ; similarly {Bh. II. 26) 'refraining fr<m injury to life'; (Mbh.) Obs. 3"?T? is usually construed with the Locative ia the sease of ' to be careless a b o u t ' ; as, W sprMf?!" SfSRIif IWTffWcl": (Manii. II. 218) 'wise snen sire not careless about their womeu.' 77. f Tlie teacher from whom something is learnt, the prime cause in the ease of 3 R ' to be bora,' and the ' source' in tlic case of IT, are put in the Ablative ease; as, 'OTP'^WI?^ft% (S. K.) ' learns from the preceptor'; so WWI dtwfefwTqi^IT l%fST3T (M. l ) ' I learnt the art of dramatic representation from a teacher'; 'nwrgft'TO 3ffq%'(Mbh.) ' t h e scorpion is produced from cowdung'; Sfi^fTgW^WTW (Sigveda X. 90) ' t h e wind was born from the breath'; f^mit TO SW^RT (Mbh.) ' t h e Ganga has its source in the Himalayas'; ^tWTcT ^W WW^fS (H. 1 ) ' anger proceeds from avarice. ! T ( Var.) : I Wf: TO: ( I . *. 29, 30-1)

56

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

Obi. Verbs meaning ' to be born * are often used with the Locative of the 'source'; sis, R?I%J 5fBf% lit *J?ft j p (Maim. I I I . 174) ; imWt ?TW! *qrk*t (Y. II. 18) ; f *pft?*iwt ?t*pft STRF: ( K / T S ) ; ^ f p (Ku. 1,22.) 18. $ In the case of words implying ' fear ' and * protection from danger ! , that from which the fear or danger proceeds is put in the Ablative case; as, J? wfcft p (Mk. 10) ' I am not afraid of death"; U^mfl^fef?f (Bk. I X . 11) 'were afraid of the monkey's sound*; cftWIffepI (Mu. S) 'is afraid of (shrinks away from) a severe person'; ?frnfg.9rR!*f ff% (Ve. 3) * to save Duhs'&sana from Bhima *; so ^IHWKf^lw (Bh. II. 62), tTWfl^l: ffotftw: (R. I I i . 78). (o) * T i a t from which a person is warded off or prevented Is also put in the Ablative ; as, fWTtWff^W (Bh. I, 72) 'wards off froni sin. * 79. f In the case of the root far with TO, that which becomes unbearable is put in the Ablative case; as, (Mbh.) ' finds study unbearable..* 80. | The point of tin.e o'r space from wMch some * distance in time or space * is measured, is put in the Ablative ease. The wotd denoting the * distance in space * Is put either in the Nominative or-Locative, and that denoting ' the distance in time in the Locative ; as, ipft^*Rf: s f t i t f *mfc # P f # r ^ f > # | m (Mbh.) * s . is l o w yojanas from G.'-; Wlfmm J r t f W * ^nt (ibid.) * A. is one J ^||ifP#t Wife. I ( I . 4. 25) * W T W I ^ ^ f e ^ : I. ( I . 4. 27.) t PO#Cfte: I ( I . 4. 26) I (Var.)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

57

month (at the interval of the month) from Jf- * ; so, p r ^ p l ^iteft or 3pfcnft:. 81. % Words nieaning' other than ' <* * different from", suet as arsr, qr, W%", WfJIW ' near ! or remote *; W!( " without *; words indicative of the ' directions * used also with reference to the * time corresponding to them ; words expressive of * directions * derived from 3fl[, for Instance 5WJ, JT5SR?, and such as end in 3fT and Wlff; all there govern the Ablative case; as t fV ^ (8. K.) s different from, or other than, Krishna 5 ; [ (S. K-.) ' near the forest, or away from i t ' ; f%flTOFP|?l$JJT8?rcf HTfef (V. 2) ' there is ao resort other thaa a retired spot'; ^TWi^or T^T^ W '' co the east or north of the T village'; #WTcft: ^IeW: (S. K.) ' the month of Falguna is prior to (that of) Chaitra'; JIT^lW^f !WRf (ibiei.) ' t o the ast or west of the tillage*; ?fe"Tf^fsftrff ^T WRV^ {ibid.) " to the south, or in the southern direction, of the village'; WI^TrfwlTO (Manu 11.29)''before the naval is cut.' 182. The words 5TW%, sftTWT, srff:, 3 R ^ , Vt, 35f govern, this ease; as, ?RRTc9"rf?T <ftfwi (U. 1) ' brought u p ever since her .childhood'; mmr. mm^?i^^WKTm (M&1.6) * from the day of first seeing Malati'; ^ '{R. VIII. 14} ^ residing in a dwelling out of the town'; 1TfflFft^Jff%WT^t (Ku. VIII. 1) after the espousing of her hand'; 3rWF?R (S'. 6) 'after this pereoa'jmsf fm Jfpffe (Bk. XVIII. 36) ' I shall die after a moment.' Obs. (a) The words IvRr and ants? are often found used with adverbs of time in the same sense; as, JRH 3T|f?|f -m: s?wf?r (s*. a),- 3 r w f & wmWw ^m: (Ku. v . s e ) . (6) The sense -of WRrt, Tt &c. is sometimes understood ; as, g^f^s? ^T^f?r (U. 2) ' seen after a long time..* 8 3 . *The words <T^ 'different,' fWT and WHT govern, 1 ( CI. 8. 29 ) ( I I . s.

68

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

besides this case, the Accusative and Instrumental cases t as, Tm%i*w nn m fcprr mn mm m ( s . K.) ' without different from Rama, ff f ^ ( 84. The preposition 3|T in the sense of 'till,' " as far as,* and 'from ' governs the Ablative case ; as, (S'. 1) ' till the satisfaction of the learned ! ; ) J j ^ f i f fif ( S \ 1) ' I wish to hear from the beginning' ^ ra; (Me. 11) ' as far as the Kailasa..' Sometimes an! is joined to nouns to form Avyayibhava compounds ; a s j W%^# ^f^W W*fFlt (Ku. I. 5) of clouds sweeping as:| far as the girdle (middle p a r t ) . ' | 85. *When "eoneealmeut" is indicated, the persou whose} sight ooe wishes to avoid is put in the Ablative case; as,i iH<|f%5fJij% spwjj; (S. K.) ' Krishna hides himself from Ms! mother.' 1 86. f The preposition SffiT in the sease of ' representative ot' or ' Sa exchange for,' governs the Ablative j as, \ (S. K.) ' P . is the representative of K.';< (S. <K.) 'exchanges Mashas foi | sesamum.' \

S'. 7)

WfflX: qfeiicPTr #

I (V. i )

(u. i)
(K.

35}

i ( I . 4. 28) "WTO I ( I I . 8. 11.)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

(U.5) J t | (K. 134)

(Mu.

: Jff^Wf

(K. 180)

1 ( v . 4.}

I ( Ku. V. 3 ) sit m ^ wit m ^'l ^ (H. 3)

I (R. III. 31)

^ l l (R. IV. .15>

II

<0 B

THE STUDENT'S

. II. 62-8)

J P f t f e If (Manu. ft 12)

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE* I (K. 836) Iff K. 225)

/Dk.-ll. 8) {ffew?|fpti| Wff f f t V

%9Plfai3T J i ^ W l f ^ ^ I (Mu. 3) W T II (H. 1) W ferftarwinrf'l a w sspjtjtpc: ( R . I , >*) If ( B . VIII. 22} : n (Bh. II. 80)

TO SAKSKRIT COMFO8ITIOM Wtpf; m: ropfft %cwf t U (Bg. H i . a s ) tt (Mauu VIII..118)

(Bk. VIII. 7 0 - 1 :

m tt (Bk. V H I . vi*. ^ : II (Manti I . 9 ) m nUm nNicwrt ftfeisit H (Manu 11. 83)

A house without & house-wife surpasses a forest iit dreariness. Go in the northern direct ion (*3fft) of this tree, and 1 shall just follow you. Do not desist from the work you have once promised toperform, I have walked to this place from the hermitage of Yilmiki to learn the Vedas from these ascetics. He exposed himself to much trouble in saving that gk from danger.

#2

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

lie who wards off his friend's mind from sin and makes him set it oa virtue, is called a real friend. Do you not know that various kinds of miseries result from treading ia the foot-steps of the wicked ? This your illness arose (PT) from your great exertions of yesterday. Is there now any change for the better? Who else but this powerful king can protest his realm as far as (iff) the regions of the Himalayas? Before (JTRf) beginning his studies he places his grammar and dictionary by him. Five years ago I saw this very charming forest; but now it lias undergone'a vast change. Ever since the day on whicb I happened to see her, my mind has become 'perturbed, and I do not think even of taking my food* ..on account of my constantly thinking of her. I do not approve of the speech you made yesterday after (3585? or apfar) the excellent oration of the President, Sita was clearer to Mama {gen.) than his very life. Honesty is superior to all other virtues-; without it one cannot inspire any one with confidence. That wretched fowler did not see the little parrot on .account of his body being contracted through fear. Revered Sir, we wished to hear from you the history of this parrot from (3JT) the beginning. Bombav is one hundred and twentv miles from Pooa.

LESSON IX The Locative Case I 87. The place in or on which an action is represented as taking place is called f^RW an<| is put in the Locative

TO 8AX3KBIT COMPOSITION

88

case; as, ^sflf-fpft^f Ifftf ' cooks food in a cooking utensil'; mm 37f*rcrf?T 'sits on a-seat.' ( a ) The Locative Is used to denote the time when, an action takes place; as, STPrB'CT SPfr*lfS3& (Me. 2) ' o n the first day of Ashadha*; so #5f%^wffwra" # ? # fffffimrP? (H. I . 8 ) . 88. The Locative has very often the sease of * towards/ 'about,' as to ' &c. ; as, Tffcf m T ^ I I I f (Mai. 9) be not ruthless towards me'; f<Pf qw fefRPPff fef*|ftOTWW (R. VIII. 10) * became free from desirt for perishable objects.* 89, *With adjectives In the superlative degree, and in those cases where a distinction is made, as of an individual from bis whole class, (generally expressed by ' of,s or ' among * la English), the nouns with respect to which, such pre-eminence or distinctiou. is shown, are put in the Genitive or Locative; as, *KT *ftf W iFWI Igtsftn (S. K.) F * among cows the black one gives much milk 8 ; so Pff W mfm: m*5'. (ibid). f Words expressive of the interval of time or space, are pot in the Ablative or Locative; as, arfp#5'f VS?1TS? ^ f T ^ ^ t ^T Wlf3T (S. K.) 'having dined tor-day, he will dine agaia after (the interval of) three days"; spfWlW SFtSlTt T M l l ^ C T f f ^ f (S. K.) ' standing "here, he will hit a mark at (the distance of) one Koss.5 91. This case is used in lexicons to denote ' i a the sense o f ; as. 5Fft Wfe^1 ?rt (Amara) WTT is used in the sense of 'the son of Bali,' and 'an arrow.' 92. The Locative is sometimes used to denote the object or purpose for which anything is done; as, (II. 3. 4 i ) I ( I I . 3. 7)

64 (Mbh.) ' man kills the tiger for skin, the elephant foi tusks, the Chattuu? for hair, and the musk-deer for musk/ 93. Words meaning ' to act,' * to behave/ * to deal " with,' are construed with the Locative ; as, afTPffsfelffi^TiR 3RR(f (U. 8.) * let your honour act modestly towards this person ' ; spf ^wf%Pwt^ a R ^ % tfapn&Rfi (M. l ) * Oh t does the fool deal with me by an exchange of duties * t . ]r? fwilfiRffw OT?ftf# (S*. 4.) ' act the part of a dear friend towards the rival wives.' 94. Words signifying * love,' 'attachment,* 'respect,' such as, f f ^ , Sffw^W, apTCs^ & c ., govern the Locative of the person or tiring for whotn or which the * love ' &., is. shown ; as, f w ^ wpKfl*!W fWf^fe" % 17: (S'. 7} ' why, % indeed, does my mind love this child * ? f cfWOT^WW! rf: (*$' 2( ) * I cherish' no love for S'akun^ f f e fe (Bh. I I . 62) ) tala, the daughter of the sage"; fWtfffe i f e ( ' attachment to one's own wife'; ?if*ft?!lf ?ffc^l^3lsw^ (Dk II. 8} * had no great regard for politics'; ^% ^3P% ??JP^RTT: Vm: (Ma. l ) * the subjects are firmly attached (devotedly loyal) to His Majesty Chaadragupta'; 3lf?3" % VteTfTsftS^lw (S*. 1 ^ ' I have also a sisterly affection for them.' Obs, Derivatives from * H ^ ate occasionally used with the Accusative ; as, tpf *Tf?PPT^gT (S'. 6 ) ; Sfff ( (Mu. ( ) 1). In such cases 3pf must oe taken, separately, and understood as a fflfsraWffW governing the Accusative -case. See 87. 5. When a word indicating * cause * is used, t h e ' effect * is often put in the Locative j as, t ^ F f ff ; Pft f?t SPT apt^of (Bh. II. 8*) ' fate alone is the cause of the decline and prosperity (rise and fall) of men,* 9S The root Jfif and its derivatives govern the Locative of the thing in the sense of * f * in English ; as, {s*. i ) '"the

TO 8AMSKEIT C0MPQSOTON

xevered Kas'yaps Is not prudent as he appoints her to the duties of the hermitage.* ( a ) With words expressive of ' fitness, ' * suitableness * &c, the nouns regarding which the fitness Is expressed are put In the Locative case ; as, Jptrflfe* fl!% ( S \ 2) ' this is fit for thee *; WfWCTTfr wwk arfeTSf*^ ( H . 8) ' the sovereignty of even the three worlds suits h'm *; SIW^TPPIW^ (S'. 2) ' o r this Is quite proper for this ( ) q p sage-like king*; % mn: wm% ffPJTWtt1 (S*. B.190) (S B ) * those attributes suit the Supreme Brahma." O6s. The Genitive is not Infrequently used in the saAe sense $ as, 53WHf*R fwwf WWt: ( . 2 ) * this epithet suits the wind.' 97. The Locative, strictly speaking. Implies place, bat In several cases it is used with the object or recipient to which anything is entrusted ttr imparted ; as, p f p l j p p (K. 57 ) having emtrastd the responsibilities of the kingdom to Ms npnister S'akaiAsa ( I K ) enjoyed the pleasures of yQuth *; f^arfe" Wf: W% f W i 4 f ? T ^ t (U. 2) ' a preceptor imparts W imstractioa to a clever person in the same way as he does to -a dull-headed o n e ' ; so >ffarafa% ^ B : OTf# Wli {Matn. 1 ) . Mote,^ with f is used with the Dative also; as, % ?T (Dk. I. 1) ' gave him over to me *; so, f i ( S ) ( a ) Moots implying * to seize * or * strike,*-often govern the Locative of that which is caught hold of or struck ; as, mNPFPf V. W f I f ^ ^ P f f e ( S \ l ) ' your weapon is for protecting the distressed, and not for striking the innoceat *; W f W^tfT ' seizing by the hair.* 98. Words like fifPT, m, m, having the sense of * thrrtsriBg * ox 'darting,' govern the Locative of that against which anything is thrown; as, ?F!(| iTPfWli!; (R IX. 58)

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

" of him who wished to throw arrows a t the deer '; < T iKfm ^fmimt^Fm^k ( S M ) * an arrow should not be discharged at this body of the deer.* (a) Words implying 'belief/ 'confidence,5 generally govern, the Locative of that in which belief is placed; as, <jf% fspprflfr fp? fWrft (N. V. 100) * when does a virgin ever believe in man s ? 06$. rgr governs the Accusative ; as, ^ : STgft^r (Mk. 3) * who will believe the real state (of things) '? 99. *Words like apftifPT * who has learnt,* pf * who has comprehended,' govern the Locative of that which forms their object t and < T T and WPJ, of that 8* towards whom the goodness or otherwise is shown ; as, ! (Dk. II. 5) * versed in the four Vedas'; {ibid,) ' who has mastered the six %ngas"; f (S. K.) 'well-behaved or ill-behaved towards Ms mother. 100, Words like SffW, ' W , ff, g?K having the sense of ' engaged in,' * Intent on,' and jpp5, faff, ^fe f | mtn, ff?l", meaning 'skilful,' and W and Tw^R ' a W rogue,' are used with the Locative ; as, Wifwfw KfFfcfl 3RTF W (P. II.) ' engaged ia her house-hold duties'; IFffcff ^% f^f^of: ^ p f : (S, K.) * llama is skilful in playing at dice. ( a ) fThe words ST^RT and ^ ^ meaning ' greatly desirous of,' ' longing for,' govern the Locative or Instrumental ; as, feWT felT m W^: (S. K.) ' longing for sleep.'; so Vf> f f f ^ r f w f t ? ^ %, (H. V. I I . ) Note.THT with 3Pf in the sense of ' to offend ' generally governs the Locative in the sense of the Accusative, and sometimes the Genitive ; as, ^ft^^fq" ^fTifSTO'ST ?ffp^f (S'. 4) ' S'akuntala has offended (erred with respect to) (Van) I (II. 8. 44)

TO SASSKEIT COMPOSITION some one deserving respect5; so

67

: I (M.

: ! (SM) f f 3#T aRE*lRtf?lt I !T ^PlclfRCPt t ^ ? # I (V. 2)

1 ( u . e) . ^ mil frwi^r Hff I ( K . 288) i nor: i ^ f i | I (Ve. 3) ( H . 3)

: m

n ^ l ^ w % II

(H. I)

f f P r f t ^ ^ w g ; ii ( H . 2) 2foFf5t j

I T : ^Bh. II. 62)

88

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE J efor f k i t f f f s S t j i M I t u (R. L

*-:

ADDITIONAL S1NTJUNC1S FOE EXEBCIS1 il (Ku. III. 18] rtfir aiHHT ^f^^^ i ( P . I. i l )

^ fpt ipir w: w r m f t r ii ( u . ) i l t f f f t ^IWISW^fWf% II ( H . I ) ffspfCT!?f f rf^fe^ ( B . XIV. 48} 8W|!tffPFi| isf t ^ l f ^ ftjpj |i (R. X V I I . 81}

(Ma. 2) t

f f f e f i c f ffi?.

TO SAHSKBIT COMPOSITION

i If!!

wmft vrotom: ii ( H . 2) J II (Bk. I I L 95)

iff fWtawfiWTO^ * w f f O T f e i l W: I (Me. 115)

II ( R .

XL 42)

The subjects of this king are all attached ( t T with to hjm. He who shows pity towards helpless men, and he who performs sacrifices to gods, are considered equal la merit. My husband does not love (fef % ) me, does not believe in what I tell Mm, and appoints me to unworthy a c t s ; will you, my frifiad, tell me what I should do under' these clreamstaaces ? A sage becomes regardless (f%:Wl>J of the pleasure or pain of this worldly life. Have no anxiety whatever as to the educatioa of this boy. He entrusted the burden of Ms family to his eldest son* amd bidding farewel to all his Mends and relations, be took Mmself to a forest residence. He was seized by the hair and pulled down ; and then all the spectators threw (few or j p j stones at him. The absent-minded woman did not east even a look at what was taking place near her. This news has all got abroad. Has it not reached your ars' that the king 1ms fixed Ms love on S^garik^ ? KMkeyl was the prime cause of the banishment of RJana for fourteen years.

TO

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

He always spends Ms time in gambling with men expert ia that a n . This is the tallest tree of all in this garden. 'Of flM persons, lie who is intent on doimg good to others is most to be praised. Among Indian, poets Kalidasa and Bhavabhutl are the most renowned. B t t A a s a will not leave Ms family with men not equal t o Mm in dignity.

LESSON X The Geellf e Case 101. The Genitive case, as observed in Lesson I I I , is not a ]Ktoik& case, and, strictly speaking, expresses t h e fetation, of oae nooa to another in a sentence. In t h e rale* given in this Lesson the Genitive has one principal sense, *.., fPf?f, aad even in those cases where verbs ate used with the Geotive, It is to be considered as having tfhe sease of relation only. But in several instance this w e is used by loose, and not {infrequently even classical authors, to express relations pertaining to other eases; as* (1J. ) p^ ( 4) 4 sent it to Bharat s (^nsRir bemg ( p i t for w i m ) ; ^1%SIWIW!1OT%W T ^ ( % % (M. 4) for % ) 4c,j f # i t ftWI# ^ * i w : ( H . l ) for f # | A c ^oBstructions should be considered as deviations from t h e usual pmcfcices and should not be imitated. 102. Generally speaking, the Genitive ease deaotes t h e iepemlenee of a substantive or pronoun mpoii another wort* which is usually a substantive or aljectiye, b u t sometimes a verb. ( a ) I t is thus used to represent * of * in English; but Im seretal cams eomjxmnds ate used Instead of the Genitive ; as, W W W JT: or i^uwpr: ' t h e son of Das'aratha,

TO SARSKEIT COMPOSITION

71

06s. Mark that all the relations expressed by 'of* In Eflglisk cannot be eqwessed by the Genitive In Sanskrit, e.g., the adjective meaning and the apposition m e a a i e g ; as, * a pot of gold * is generally translated by a compound |?f<TPf, or b y a derivative f # Tpf, but not by |pf: fpf; * a pot of clay * iffwff or mm i t * ; s a pearl of great price f jf|pf tPRfPpJ} * a man of strength * 995t ft:, not fSIW 5PE. Similarly ' in the mo^th of VaJs'akha * #W!# *ff%, or #<freP'."T%', but not #WffW *ntf; ' the town of "Bombay ifWPjClF or pi qW j C t So i n Latin : * a man of talent * is * iKano Ingeniosus * (tftanFC), n o t ' homo ingenii s ; but * a man -of great t a l e n t s is, unlike Sftnikrit, * homo magni lageaii. s 113 The Genitive denotes the possessor, or the or thing* whereto anything belonp, that which belong|> is 'possessed, being p u t ia the Nominative case; as, Jfffer sppf SRII ( P . I.) * he who himself poraeses or has no talent s : ?% % <p|?: (Mk.l) * this is our house fi * t o err belongs t o m m * W5f*f WjWFft *pf:. ' Ofe. This sense is often expressed by derivatlv; as, *&[$ f%04 * property belonging to ancestors *; so ^ f f W | | &c. 1104. The Genitive is used with stibsiaBtwes aad w o r f used sabststttlvdy* to denote the whole of which a part 8^ taken and i t is then called * partitive genitive *; as, I W S ' fsT|: s a drop of water *; mi TOSt ^ft (R. X . l ) ' a lakh of yews passed '; so l i t 5IOT^llW ' thousands of cows.* So la l a t i n : Mile liominum valentium,'. * a thousamd of strong men.* ( a ) The Partitive Genitive is also found used with QKHnals and pronouns or adjectives implying a Bumber; as, s W ^ ^ # r ?Pf!ff#ff (R. VI. 89) * blessed girl, you alone = %f are their third *; i ^ W M f ^ K ^ O T |M 5) a let one of the

72

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

w o be accepted ' ; iRPfSTOTT -(MM. l ) ' one of those (girls).'Compare Latin * pnmi juvennm,' and * consulum alter, (b) The Partitive Genitive is likewise used with superlatives and words laving the force of superlatives ; as, f t5; tffon ITflffflOTTWflRfwiWFff ( K . 5 ) ' the h foremost among the bold; and among the clever. ' Obt. This use of the Genitive is already considered la 89. So la Latin : * Meadmi prmeiputnf ' greatest of princes '; orohirvm proestatdhstmt * ' t h e most eminent of orators. * (c) Sometimes Wf is used with the Genitive la the sense of of' or ''among *' as, $ %fc& ^ # f ( P a . 5)) * of these some-are desirous of the treasure and ararty of the enemy. * i5 When a certain period is represented to have elapsed after the occurrence of aa action, the word expressing the occurrence is put in the Genitive case ; as, W9 3E!*ft fi (Mu. 6)) * it isto-3ay ten months since ( the death of my father s ; (U. 4) * several years have elapsed since lie begaa to practise penance. 1 IS.'Words having the sense of' dear to* or the reverse, a*e wed with this case ; as5' .S^OT* fsWT ' (U. 6) ' Stta was by her very nature dear to ( ) y mm: W T ^ ^ r : { I )) ' t o whom is the body not dear' ? {P. ( c ) This ease also occurs in the constructioa of words signifying ' difference * , such as, f%5ra: afar; as, t ": (S*. 7) * this is the o'nly difference ^ ( ) ( betwwn the long-lived one (you) and India *; ^ f T ( (M. l )) 4 there is as much difference between this worthy person and myself as betweea the sea and a puddle..'

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

7*

1S7 *Ia the case of potemtial passive participles, the agent of the action is put in the Genitive or lastrameatal case i as, sfffe TOW ^ w Jftrtiff: (K. 157) * i n & e i theee is notMag that canaot be accomplished by the mind-born (Cupid) *; so W W f 8 f f t p STPft^RIHf ( K . 6 1 ) ; W?N#if: y ( ftftftfr: (Ki. I. 4 ) ; TratRw mm ms wwrfw m ) (Bk. VIII. 129) 4 this forest fit to be preserve! by the iord of the demons must be cat down by me.* 1108. f With words meaning 5 cause *, * sake *, * reason * the Genitive is used ; as, ^ f W | # % fHjftraJ'f (R. II. 47). wishing to give up (lose) much for the sake of little * j fffjpf mm | f t : (Mu. 1) s for what reason i s It forgotten * ? Ob. Patafijsli says that the words meaning * came ? ' reason ' such as, fffiw, WTW, ^ , may be used i a this sense ia any case in agreement with pronouns.- Bat this is net universally supported by the usage of classical authors. ^ T , s a d ^Pff^pOT-*KOIT^-^d:, are the usual constructions in this sense. We do no* ay % : Wife or ^ | ^ W % in the same sense, nor even t?Pt" Hftf, which means ' for what object (purpose) in view do you dwell' ? f%ftft^"^af^#-WW-^ is, however, not uncommon. Patapjali's role must? therefore, be understood in a restricted sense. 109. 11 With Bouass derived from roots by Krit affixes such as, %, ?f} ar, 3fff, &c. the Gettitive is used ia the sense of the agent and object of the action denoted by the nouns; in other words ; the Genitive in Sanskrit is both gttbfective and objective ; as, fwrPPTT wfeOTW (V. l ) * this composition of KMI4&,s "; *l^: WWTW ( R . XIV. l ) 8 on account of the death of their lord ! ; ssfTFIPff ?fw: (K. 18) the knowledge of S'itstras* ; 3|Tf9f f^plt ( K . 5) * the performer i ( I I . 8. 26) ) : f f e I ( I I . 8. 85)

74

THE iTOBEKT's GUIDE

of saeriiees *; <pnkpff tWPT fjj<t w f t (U. 8) ' M m a ' s seeing his friends aow only contributes t o {produce) SHW. * Oba. In the case of verbs governing two objects, the aeemukuy object is put la the Genitive or Accusative j as, # H mwt ff TOW m (Mbh.) * the taker of the horse to Srughna.' TMs construction, however, is very rare ; the Genitive Is more geaerally used, with both objects (principal and secondary); Iff <fnfft $t$i, < T n C s p p w WR,. B C T where the first genitive has the sense of t h e ablative, 110. *Whea the agent and object of the action denoted by the nouns formed by kr& affixes, are both used la a sentence, the of^ed is put In the Genitive case, and not the agent; as, 3fp=pf Jpft ?iftsft%7 (S. K.) * the milking of cows without a cowherd is a wonder.' ( o ) fWhen the agent and object are both used, the agent is put in the Instrumental or Genitive ease, when as some say, the Kril terminations are of the feminine geader or as others say, wfaea the terminations are of any gender; as, fcforr Wm ^ f e ^ f f t l ? m (S. K.) ' the creation of the world by Harl I& wonderful *; ^ R F f P f ^ f W f R P P F SfpfPwf m ( s . K . ) ; so f i w m& <rrft#: (or f f i f e r r ) f * r f%: (Mbh.). 111. fThe wotis mrm4, m, m, f i w , igs, 9&, mi f^ g w e r a the Dative or Geaitlve case, when, s blessing is iatenied ; as, f^w-^WTW f , %f ^ t ^ ^ ( S . K.) * may happiness or good luck attend Krishna.' 112. f W c r f s ending in m slowing direction, and other words such as, gift, m:, f*:, ffWKf, ( I I . 8. l I ( I I . 8. 73. J i ! P l i l # i p # f 1 ( I I . S. 80)

TO 8ANSKMT COMPOSITION

75

having the same meaning as those ending in H | , governthe Genitive of that with, reference to which the direction Is shown; as, WWW 5#Pfff:-3?P5R (S. K.) to +he south or north of the village'; ffWffvWfTft (S'.7) * foing &bwe the clouds '; l^ipfB": (S'. I) 'under the trees-*; fflWf WtW f^p t p | *jfSr if^f (Nag. l ) * as oae shines standing *m the ground before Ms father *; C p r a s r f W (M. l ) * who is foremost among (is at the head of) ascetic*.5 Obg. OTft is often j joined In a compound ; as,. p ft ( (U. 5 ) ; W P j ^ f f t WOTW7W: (Mu. 8) (o) *Words expressive of * direction * ending m *? sucfr * as, ^fe#^, 3 ^ t w &c- govern the Gmitive or Accusathre'tf t h e place with respect to which the direction is shown; as, % 5# f # # | t (Mb. V I . 8 , 2 )) # ( of S'veta 'and to the north of Nishadha *; ^fW^ 1 JiRfftlt ( (S*. l )) * to the south of the grove of trees '; fe^^ ( ) (Me. 78) ' t o the north of the Imam of Kubera.* (ft) fWoris having the sense of fT * distant,* a a i * near' govern either the Genitive or Ablative; as, WWW m Wt f t - f t ^ - l * f * e (S. K.) * the fbrest Is from or near the village/ 06*. The Genitive, howww, is more generally used; as,

113. {Verbs inaplyii^ s to be master of,*' to rale,* Mke |W, w with s , ^ ' t o pity/ * to have eomjjttssloa on,' aai words Implying * remenpibering' * ( w i t h ^ r e f c ) 9 * to t M n t of, * like W, f with 9^t, govern t i e object of these actions in. the Genitive casd; as, l % | 1 ) * why, your homotir .has. ffliastery over yomr p u p l , ( I I . 8. S I ) ( I I , 8. 84) t wife ( n . 8 . ss)

76

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

JffPCfSf: ( fPCff (Mai. 4) f f e SPrfonfT n?Ptt ) ( S M ) ; spf WPfPFPtt^ ( ( K . 312) * he cannot rule (control) tt^ ) Ms limbs'; wm mmwismw^k w ? w f : (Bk. v i n . 119) * Laksfimana taking pity on Riima s remembers (thinks of) you"} mi fetftF sr fef: g^prftwr: (Ki. V. 28) ' do not pereuade the heavenly nymphs to think of heaven s ;. so I W ^ f t f # f t (S'i. VIII. 6 4 ) . So In Latin : animus meminit prwtetitorum '; ' o virgo wm$ereremei.f Obs. (:o) W with S in the sense of ' to be able * is used T with the infinitive (see the Less6u X V I ) , and In the sense of 4 to be sufficient-for * governs the Bative j see 67 ( a ) . Ibp P[ 1B ordinary sense of * remembering' is used with the Aeeosafclve ; as, Ff^ftr ffPlflfr P K f e #?Wff IT ( 0 . I ) . l a t h i s case the "object is Intended t o be used ( W 1J} f*WfiSRf Wl% 1?T ^ 1 H ^T%Mbh.) (c) Adjectives-signifying * conscious ' or e knowing.' ' mindful,' and their opposites, govern the Genitive of the %**rf; as, awfW*PfPlt W: ^ c ^ f ^ i p # ( P . I. l ) he who js mot mindful of merits (does appreciate merits) is not followed by his servants ! ; so 8P!*W^ WW W^PFIW ^ffiWOT f T | S ' . 8 ) . The locative also is sometimes used; as, ^fe
H ^ ^ r : ^ w w r a f w : ( u . 4 ) , OTFTPWI ^w: ( u . 5 ) .

114. *Words showing ' so many times,' or the numetal adverbs of frequency, such as, fff:, fw:, arssf^f:, HWW5 govern the Genitive of the time in the sense of the Locative ; as. fSTfft ifrspf (S. K . ) ' taking meals twice (in) a day *} mwfRPTOff: f W ^ ^ I TfrOT: (Bk. VIII. 122) ' t h e best of the Baghus thinks of you alone a taodfei times a djtyv* 115. fPast participles ending in ? are used with jthe T t ( I L 8. 64) ( I L 8 . 07)

TO SANSKEIT COMFOSlTiON

77

Genitive, when they *, iis*><J in the sens** of the present tense; as, affifa Vffit T f t ^ : (R. VIII. 8) * 1 alone am regarded by the king'; fwfef g^WPf ^ ^T % | W f ( R . X . 8 9 ) " I know that the three worlds are being t d n a e n t e i by hiin '; Hlff *j[faw: [S. K.) * is honoured fay kings. * ( a ) But when ps.rf time is meant to be indicated, the Instrumental alone is used ; as, sr | Ma. 2) * were they not discovered by the wretched (6) When used as absiraet neuter nouns, past participles are, of course, used with the Genitive ; as, JTOTfT pf (Mbh.) ' t h e dancing of a. peacot-k'; #ff??Jf? afffW, ^3W ^W 8 T W ffef (ibid.). 1 1 1 6 . f t * for,' ' for the sake of * and P t ' in the presence of' govern the Genitive; as, spftfi JnTRf 1% (Bh. I I I . 86) ' f o r this life'; TRT: HT3%f (M. l ) ' i n the presence of the king himself.5 Ois. ?% is often compouaded with another worii; as, (KJkv. l ) . 117. *Words Imving the sense of * equal t o , " like,* such as, ^5T,- fl^T, W } fPFRF & c , govern the Genitive or Instrtonental of that with wMefa. any^object is compared ; as, ^ w i w ^5T: H^T: &c. (S. K . ) . For the-Instrumental see 5 2 ( 6 ) . 06*. Paiai says that the words JpJT and ^m cannot be used with t h e Instrumental. But this is against good usage; as, f3f q?Hlff% 55RT1W (Ku. V. 34) ; i p J I f W fRTFd? (R. VIII. 15) i ffStW f r f # f # ^ T (S'i. I. 4 ) . MaUio&th tries to recoHcile these instances with Pawini's sfitra ; but the defence is evidently lame. ( c ) Adjectives implying s worthy.of ', ' proper *, befit. 3. 72).

78

THE STUDENT'S 6DIDT2

ting *, are usually coastnied with the Genitive ; as, f # ^ 5 # f <tcF$g3sf 'HRK (K. 146). ' friend Puradarika, this Is not worthy of you *; llJwMlJftfWRP^fW ( S \ 6) * this indeed befits the pridelass love.* See also 96 (a). 118. Nouns ending in ?| are used with the Accusative instead of the Genitive, when * habit ' or ' disposition * is intended to be expressed; as, fRTOfTTOrftffiT W (V. 5) W ' always keep thy father p pleased'; & ft ^ ^ (Dk. II. 8) * whose habitual disposition is to respect the wise and to hunfljle Ms foes *; b a t vmtft Pprfir, W5W I f f Ac. ( a ) W with 3p| -to imitate *, ' resemble * is often found se<! with t i e Genitive wr Accusative of the object ; as, Rf!sgjffxf?<iff: felW (Ku. I. 44) * then It m ^ h t imitate ( (resemble) her smile f j TOW ^ f t^jpi f t ) ( ) i H (K. 10) * as if rewmbHng the god Man in point at sablef f f t ft i ^ : (K. 76.) * . imitated him In all other arts * ; so j (Bk. I L 8 ) . 119. *The roots a R f and |W ( I A'.) in the seme of * dealing in transactions *, ' staking in gambling ? , goverm the Geaitlve of the object; as, SRPW s r ^ ^ J p i ^ (S. K.) * ieaMng In hundred * or * staking tacd:*3d *; so HlWHfWffw^Rft ( B k . V n i . 1 2 l ) . But t i e Accusative is more generally used ; as, PRW ywff *(i^Rff (Mb. I L 65. 8 2 ) . () ftf when it lias the same sense, Is similarly used ; as. $Rrer ^tsffl" (S. K.) j but when It is preceded by a preposition, the Accusative or feaitMve may be used ; as s mm m m s f e # ^ t i ( s . K ) -

f I (11.3.57-t)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION ^ht^r %^: 3Ht3T%3rt I f f : I (u. i) fe # ^ i i ( u . 3) (S*. 2 )

79

(u.

ff 1 ( K . 1 5 8 ) if ( K . 167) 1 (M&1.5) t I ? ! ^ S cBIWW 1 (K. 241)

ft w i t ^ift ^ - ^ *PKI ^ J i

: 1 fUjNft ^ P R f e f e : (I (P I- 10)

il

(H.

1)

( B k III. 80}

(U. 5)

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOB EXERCISE lf fPttff HtWSff W |{K. 6) W l W W 4 I f l ^ W l I (K. 44) ^ ^ ' (S'. 7) : If % TW jJWT * W %^M II ( U . I ) (B XIV. 4) Iff ^ W H ^ 1 W W ^ I # : ^HW 1% JKW5! ^ W II (R. XIV. 61) fWifif f T "CPft H #W% II ( U . 8) : I K t 1W II (Bk. VIII. 118 \

I * I W B II (t"Kd. 124-5) II ^ ^ TW. ftrat ^fcoif: fffW II (Wd. 104, 107)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

SI

The women looking intently at the young man could, with greak difficulty,-control ( f ^ ) themselves. What difference Is there between men and beasts if the former Imitate (fT with 3P|) the latter ia their actions I Friend, do not despair ; she for ($%) whom you are so much afflicted, will herself soon come to you. There is no pleasure equal to (fjw) that enjoyed by those who, devolving their house-hold duties upon their sons, reside in forests. Is this your act suitable to the dignity of the high family la which you are bora, ? The order of my elders will only have power (ij with u) ever my body, but not over my mind and its workings. The child being long kept away ( f l ) from its mothers remembers ( w ) her of tea and often. To the north (vffPRT:) of this mountain is an extensive plain, covered all over with'verdant grass, which almost cntihaats beholder's eye. The story, which the attendant narrated to the Mug la the presence of (WTO) all his ministers, went home t o Ms heart. Here I see before (%X:) me a large heap of bones ; there a number of bits of flesh under (spr:) the trees. What may it be ? l a the reign of Susbena e%rery one out of his subjects thought that he was respected (fw) and liked (w?f) by the Mug. Be thou worthy of thy father by reason of thy qualities liked by the people I A long time has elapsed since the venerable lady went t o see MMavikiL This king is fit to be waited tjpoa (%w) by servant* ; a n d the epithet * protector of mea * quite become* him.

82

M B 8TOTttW**8 GUIDE O

There is nothing in this world like (fft^r) friendship with the good. Good books are dearer to clever students than i a e clothes* A devout BAhmatta should perform his Saadbyi ado-' ration thrice a day, and eat only once in a day before sunset. B t e i a was dearer to Slta than her very life.

IXSSGN X I The Gesfiwe and Locsttve A l s t l t t e s { 120* " When the participle agrees with a subject, Mff rent from the subject of the verb, the phrase is said t o be in the absolute construction.' {Bain). The p h a s e is wBconneeted with the general straetare of the elawse in wWch It s t a a d s ; as, * t i e wind being favouwble, the sMp set s a l . * The Absolute case differs la different languages*; in Bnglish8 It is the nomimmtive; in Latin s the ablative; and ip Sanskrit, the Genitive and JLoeatiYe. If It be found that the nooiiBative of the subordinate sentence be not m nama. wjcirangin the principal sentence, or a pronoun rep seating such a noua, the absolute construction may be used. Take the sentence: 4 Ktea, after he bad taken. I A D M , returned to Ayodhya.' Here the subjects of both the senteac are the same, and no absolute construction can be used. The sentence may be translated by # S W^Wf (or ^ I O T R ) Wftwt4t PWfl". But the sentence * B&ma9 after the monkeys had takea Lanka, returned to Ayoihy& , * may be translated by ^ftfftWWF #Wff ( o r Mote.-To form t h a e absolutes, the subject of the participle mast be pat In the Genitive or LoeatiYe erne, aad the participle made to agree with it iwgender a n i number.

SJG UT AN M U 121 *A noun or pronoun which expresses a thing, the action done or suffered by which Indicates the time of another action is p a t la the Lodative case, ix., the time of the first action is supposed to be known, and that of the second which is unknown, is determined with reference t o its as s iff: <fh% ppff 5fW% ^ W P i m f e (S f . 6) 8 who, while Paurava is mHng the earth, acts immodestly * f fet fc j j : (( K B . H . 58) * that speech ) ( being finished, the elf-existent (Btahma) ottered the words ; v tpr *rf% ^ t ^ ^ n f t w f l ^ f l ^ f e (Mu. l ) ' who, wMle 1 am still Kving, wishes to overcome Chaadragapta*?, Obs. "Da Locative absolute in Sanskrit is used in the sease of the nominative aiwolote la English. {122. When * contempt ? or * disregard' is to be shown* the Genitive absolute is used ; as, ?TO W f W W WRft t W l ^ 1 (Mu. 8 ) ' the Mand^ were killed like (so many) beaftts, IWfaiha looking o a s (notwitfateBding that IWkshasa was looking O H ) . Thus, where dbuses <r seatences iateoiucei by 'notwithstanding, 9 Ma spite of,* * for all * &c. occur in EngHshs the Genitlire absolute may be used; as In spite of (for all) my looking on, the c H d was snateljed away Ijy a hawk * fd % ^ ft (P. L M ) . 123* The Genitwe s like the locative absolute, is frequently used to express the sense of the English participles * w t a t ' , ' while ', &e., it not conveying its usual meaning; as, y$ Wit: WWlt ?R?rt: 9 TRff ^fW^WW Jl^pJ: ( P . I. 9 ) * while they two were thus speaking, the Mag coming to Ms bed slept down." Obs. When the participle of aa absolute construction is ' Mng \ it is omitted ia Sanskrit, and two substantives, or a substantive and adjective, w e put together i& t h e (U.8.8T)

84

THE STUDENT'S GOIDE

absolute case ; as, %m JTOf5BPf/<f smm ( R . V. 18) ' you (being) the lord, how can any mishap befall the subjects'? So la Latin : M. Tullio Cicerone et Antonio consulibus. 124. Semetlmes both the Genitive and Locative absolutes are used to show * disregard, ' ' la {pite of ' & c . , as, f^fw 5 # ^fsft W |Wff fell SHWPftf| (S. K . ) the father T turned oat a recluse, in spite of his son's weeping. * (a) The sense of ' as soon as, ! * no soonerthan,' 1 scarcelywhen, * ' the moment thai ' &c. is expressed by the Locative absolute, with the word. l?f used with t h e Locative, or wn joined to the participle, and the compound word is put in the Locative, with or without tT; as, 3PTiffepPPf ty? wfr W | R K M W gfwpsg^: (Dk. II. 4) the moment I had finished my speech (scarcely had I finished &c. when) a Iwge serpent lifted up its-hoed ' ; ^ ) p f (Mu. l )) ' when f had scarcely dawned (scarcely ( ft g ) f had the night dawned) ' ; srfw<OTR" If5f fi f ^ p *T: ?wffw ff^flpT ( 8) ' n o sooner had his honour stepped (S'. ) ff f p in, than our actions were left without any obstruction.* Note.^WPf, with or without ^W8 foined to other cases gives the same meaning; as, WRPTPf W M: W% nf*r f SfW W ( P . H I . l ) ' he who does not quell aa enemy and a disease as soon as that is bora (arises). * (6) Sometimes the word agreeing with the participle is an indeclinable, such as, %^4, 5f?f,, fWT, ?%, &c.; as. t$?r # ( S*. 4 ) ' such being the case s; f l ^ i s l { H. 3 ) s it being so done * &c. 125. The suiyect or object of an absolute construction is not. repeated in the principal sentence, in any case except the Genitive, either in its OWB form, or when it is represented by a demonstrative pronoun. When instances occur ia which the subject or object, or the pronoun representing it, is to be used in the principal sentence, the absolute construction should not be uselj

TO SAMSKBIT CGStPOBITIOH the whole should be treated as one sentence, and tramslated by the use of participles; e.g., Instead of say tag we should say f f W R F W % similarly, 1 F I % - W f frwft SfifRf %% is not so idiomatic as arPRtttft f%sNf: & c , or WFPffPTft ft TfTfar, as OTPIRf. OTFftt fTOS Tlf*r. So also t # % f ( i r t f : j s p p f f&: is not so idiomatic as "<f fKWt a n ^ T sp: and tf rf jpafff is not s{ idiomatic as, Bat *TCft l ^ f ?W 5W csft feT f^T, or is perfectly idiomatic*

*TMs is a point on wMeh grammarians are silent; still I tbink it may be said to be detaiteiy s e t t W (I) by the veiy definition of ao absolute eoastntctMrn, (2) the overwhelming evideace foruisliel bj the best S a ^ f a i t writers, and (8) the analogy f other classical languages, e.g., Latin, Jfhe definition distinctly implies that the subject of m e absolute phrase must not be a nomin occumng in the principal sentence, aad hence^it caanot be repeated in aay case. Secondly, in the several instances of absolute constructions that we tod in Sanskrit aatiiow, we find very fews or hardly any, cases la wMda the subject or object.is repeated in the principal assertioa in any case except the Geoitive, And just as we should not my *HjW5ft in- the sense of s having m a c t streagth \ b a t merely i f W ^ : the same meaning being more compactly expressed by this word; soialso constructions like JpfOTHt axe mote compact than sft^ ^ i W W ^ &c. nd have, therefore, become more idiomatic. Thirdly, the nature of an absolute case in Lfttia is precisely the same. " When a substantive or pronoun together with a participle or au adjective, form a clause by themselves and are mot aader the Government rf or in agreemeat with.

THE STUDENT'S OOTBE

any other words, they are put in ablative absolute " ; as * Pythagoras Tattpdmio Superbo tegmate in Italiam venit. 9 Thus though Sanskrit grammarians are silent on this point, the three circumstances above alluded to lead to the conclusion that what is more compact and idiomatic is more correct than th,at wMch, grammarians by their filence do not condemn. A Mead from the South, draws ray attention to a work called " MhtkyaMiyam " aa abridgment of S'yt-Bhagavata Purtoain which the writer does not Invariably observe the rale given above, My friend quotes two or three instances ia support of Ms statement. I for my p^rt should consider such instaaces inaccurate and umdiomatic, if not positively incorrect constructions, rather thaa modify the rule, by relying on insufficient evidence.

TO BANSKmrr COXPOSITIOK

SI

m tffrlft 1| ( S*. 5) f

: <=p: ( U. 8 )

H ( B . XV, 84 )

ADDrnONAL-SENTENCES FOE E X E E C B 1 crai -. WT w$ feif f i f e i (P. I. s)

: I (Ku. 1 5 9 } (Ku. IV. 81) 1% i j i f e ^iWT ^ i ^ w ^ ii ( P . 1.1) fewftwn^^^*.few:( P . I. i i ) #itfiwiii5t ^ C T i ^ i % u ( P . I. i s ) : l ^ f t w ^ ^ & II (U. i ( H . *) I ( R. V.

#S

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE Iffi 5J|WI1 ( W J fifwrawrowf: VCtW Wi ^Ht TTRff "(R. X V I . 78 J ff ?ft ferni nm: it ( u . i.) f %
!%

w f e 1%^ fets& fffeanrPi w. H ( M U , 4)

: it (Ve. 8 )

N. B.~The following sentences should be translated jusing the absolute construction only. Men commit misdeeds, though gods see them. The tree of self-respect being cut down b j the elephant of poverty, all the birds of merits fly away. When calamities are closely impending, even friends become enemies. The moment the picture is finished by the painter, come to call me. Scarcely had the sage uttered these words, whea the lovely.nymph, was transformed in a moment into a stone. The cause of danger being so distant, why do you, under colour of illness, say that you will be unable to accompany us ? When this sad news reaehad their ears, they were excessively distressed. I do not know what became of the boy after lie had been ruthlessly abandoned by Ms mother.

TO SANSKKtT COMPOSITION

M9

His mind being engrossed by these and the I k e perplexing thoughts, he passed a sleepless night. No sooner was an arrow discharged a t the object tfcaa "he heard a plaintive cry in that direction. Damayantl wishes to have Nala for her husband* though there are the resplendent guardians of the worlds. Fie upon ye, ye base vaunters! Who is able to crew eves the shadow of my brother, while we hundred brothew are yet alive ? The mass of darkness being dispelled by the rising moon* th,e eastern direction attracts my eyps. Notwithstanding my entreaties for the prisoner's life, the king ordered him to lie executed. Siace death Is certain, why do you sully yoar faiae by having recourse t o retreat?

PART

"THE USE AND MEANING OF GRAMMATICAL FORMS AMD WOKBS LE5SGW X I I Pronouns Petamwi Prmoung

1 1 2 6 . The use of the personal pronouns is not peculiar. They are subject to the same rales as nouns, when under t i e government of verbs or prepositions? as, STf fit W^W 4 1 pray to t h e e ' ; mm fafT T Wgq>ft W%^ (V. l ) . S 12?. *But t i e short forms of 3pFP[ and ??*![, %e.t m, % "ft, 1:, tfT, %, W and W: deserve notice. They are aever a s e i a t the be^nning of a sentence and immediately before the particles ff Wf, ^ and f i (rarely a f or f ) , and a t ike beginning, of a foot of metre, as, % ft#j f: frff8 # 1 ^ Jfee. are wrong; 3W I f t f not % ) t # ^ f f e * there is enmity between Mm and m e ' ; ffff *P? W 1^{ (not if Wt}; f $ ( not % ^ ) ; f1 ^WifWPW ( not IT); %t^W: not ?T:) fsT: l # < r a ^ ( S . K . ) * may Kiisiwa fit to be known by all t i e edas s always protect us * I (a) When the particles do not connect tfcese forms the short forms may be u s e i with them ; as, f i t f f e f % **Hft ( S . K . ) *Hara and Hari a*e my I<fe*; ft IT % jsft ^ ^ * what indeed will my daughter do * ? (I) Similarly these short forms me mot used Immedia tely after Yocative form ; as, m($t WR p|3t?R| ( not % ) *l IWlflfWftll i ( m 1.84); ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ r t I ( V i n . 1.17,18,20)

TO SANSKRIT COMPO8IT1OS

91

C not K) Tfff ?RRF (S. K.) * O God, always protect us. * The Vocative is, in fact, an abridged seateace. (c) If a qualifying adjective follows the Vocative forms the short forms may be used ; as, ^k, WttSl *r: i d ? (S. K.) * Oh, Mad Hari protect u s ! * 128. *PR i s . o f t e n ' n e d with reference to the person addressed, as a courteous form of expression, not necessarily Implying respect; it is to be regarded as a pronoun of the third person, and the verb must agree with the third persoa ; as, 3PPIT f?f VWFW^% ( M. 1 ) * or how do yoa think ? ' ; ft frf ask you something. * 129. When respect is to be shown, Witf { KfRft/.) i preceded by apr and ?PT or ,* the former referring to a person that Is near, the latter to one who Is at a distance, or absent, from the speaker; as, fW WPfWff! " where Is the worshipful Kaiaaadakl ? * f ( S*. 4 ) ' I am ordered by the worthy Kas'yapa'; t ( S'. 2 ) * begone, this worthy person is himself agaift \ M P O T J ft## (MM. 1). * His honour appoints me. * Demonstrative Pronouns

130. There are three demonstrative pronouas ; ^<W s or ^ this," TO * that,' and 3Ri| ' this * or ' that *; they are used along with the nouns they refer to, or are used without them ; as s ^ f yr:; W:," 9? *$; anf , ^ f % * 131. The forms offOTand *ps[ are. soraetimes used in the sense of 8 here * in sentences like * hare I come % * here comes the b o y ' , usually In conjunction with the [ *TMs seeffis to be inaccurate, f| is not prefixed t o W i t like n o r f ( ; we do not find such forms' as P U R &e in use. In the instance cited it must be read separately. 1

92

THB STUDENT'S GUIDE

first or third persons, and agreeing with the subject of the sentence like an ordinary adjective ; ass QlPhpf fwft*f f S*. 1) * lord, here am I ' ; fOTgWITtfrfj? ( U. 1 ) 8 here I mount * j apprpfi^ffir ( S*. 8 ) ' here I come ' ; so 5*f ST mft <mm {Ve. s ) . 132. W\ is often used in the sease of celebrated or weil-kmowfi; as, If t"f? W & (Bh. I I I . 87) ' that celebrated charming city '; ffFftTf^i T 3W {ibid.) * and that weHknown circle of tributary princes .* Compare the use of UU in Latin. fa) ?ff Is oftea used in the sense of s very, * l'same,* frith ^W f eneraly expressed or implied from the context; as, HFfHsilf% WWpf {Bh. II. 4) * all the organs are the same ' ; f^f tpf (ibid.) ' the name Is the same *; ^ Jf fmM" (U. 8} * these are those Yery mouataias *; l ^ ^ W (U. 8) * the forest of Panelia\'afi Is the same. * (b) When W? is repeated, it has the sense of * several" various *, as, t| Hf Wl^W ( K. 8 i 9 ) s la various places.. Relative Pronouns | !33 When the relative proaoun is repeated, it has the sense of * totality, * * whatever, * and the correlative plonoan Is generally repeated; as, Pw% {U. 1) * 1 shall do all that she says '; *ft in ffffilf ^*raTO^WTl!^ (Ve. 8 ) * whoever a weapen, of Mm, even the destroyer of the worlds, I become the destroyer '; so 4 V fPfffr WW i W y # W Wff ^ W : ( B h . I I . 5 1 ) . (a) Sometimes the idea of ' whatever * or ' any mfuOmer *, is expressed by joining the relative with the i^teirogative pronoan, with, or without t h e p a r t i c l e s ! ^ f t ' , f t ^ o r ^ ' ; a 8 , ^ H < # H # vm m^ ^f^m <1WT * a giri.so beautiftil as tins, should not be givea to a pereea whoever be May

TO SANSKHII COMPOSITION

98

be *; Jft W pt W 1"WT^f (Ve. 8 ) * whoever I may be *; f Hlfffft' f#rf% * he sleeps anywhere. * Interrogative, Indefinite and Mefienve Pronouns 134. Interrogative pronouns and their derivatives are used in asking questions ; as, f: JTOlt WPOTT ( U . 1.) *but who is this son-in-law *; ^K^PT fWTPFT "RI- fl srwi: ( V I ) * in what direction is the rogue goae ' ? f *prfrfir W JT^Wftr % ( U . 1.) ' what shall I do ? where shall I g o ' ? 135. ftRJ, *Pf, W% and sometimes f?f? are added to f Interrogative pronouns and adverbs to give them the sense of indefinite pronouns; as, frfffwftwfT ! f# (Me. I ) 4 a certain Yaksha made Ms abode ' ; f^ff^ffjHiW-afff * at some time ' ; Ifft (S*. 5) ' some veiled l a d y . ' (a) Sff% sometimes has the sense of ' indescribable, * rff); as, ^Ptff |?|: ( U. 6 ) ' some iadescribable motive s | so warn ftwPr aa* rft ft *m fmt ^-.(U. 2>. (b) wf%S-wf%5|, WTf%^-^lf%^ are used in the sense of in some placein another place (here-^-there) and at one time-at another time, (sometimes-sometimes, nownow)} as, ffpjfgtwnra w f e f f f frtff ifef (Bh. III. 12)' iaone place is the pkying on the l u t e ; in another the cry of ' alas ' here you hear the flutethere you Jhear the cries of alas'j T' 3Pffi| ^ f ^ ^ iftpf^HW ^ ( K . 58) & sometimes (now) tie plunged into a forest, ami sometimes (now) he sported in lotus-forests,' (c) W f ^ e f ^ T ^ has rarely a reference to time also; as, i#T[ WWPft WOT Rfa*T -(R. X I I I . 19) s aow of clouds,, now of birds. s 136* The pronoun 3F1-3W or *IX~WK is ased in thesense of one~another; us, apJf: iPCHar SRft ^ % ' one does, another suffers *; i W W ^ S ^ ^ ^ ^ r l w ^ ^ W i r ( P . I. > * wicked people h^ve one tMag in mind, another in speech,. n d aaother in action.'

 137. More generally ipspire or 8fRT is used In the sense of the onethe other with reference to two objects that are before specified; as, t | # f i t # p | J f fell? ( R. V. 6 0 ) ' t i e one went to the regions of Chaitraratha, the other to the country of the VMarfAas ( wMch was ) happy on account of a good king. s 138. When, I33~WC or 3|wr Is used In the plural, it has the sense of mmeatha-a; as, ffmwf *pfffH[: mWSllfpRf ??#% W^i"OTf!ff%fip"?Wrt ( o r ^ ^ ) ''some think that widow-marriage is prohibited by the S'istras, others that it is ordained by them. * (a) l a this sense %l%c| sometimes takw the place of #T; as, HfRf %fff^^s^w I 8W% frf%^f: (Dk. II. *.) * some approved of my -speech, others, however, censured it),' 118S. ??, &F&N, 3rR*ftT and fw^ are wsei relexively, as, W ^TO W * tell your own name *; few ^TO#IW * he showed Ms (own) courage* * (a) f W meaning * of one's self* Is a reiexive adverb as, IT m % U OT" f P * she herself went there.' 1 1 4 0 . The word more commonly used%as a reflexive pronoun is TOF| (as self). I t is always used la iShe masculine gender and singular number, though the noua to wMch it refers be in any gender or number; as, W spft N ^ ft% (V. 2 ) * what woman boasts of herself being sought after by Mm * ? <m (Ku. VI. 2) 5 we think MgMy of oarsdes*; so ^ ( R . X. 60).

wt <r q k i p l c j ^ w c i ( DIE. I I . 2 ) ( Ma. 2 )

TO 8AMSKBXX COJSTOSITI0M

U.i : t |a |f feg#

K.)

: i (u. i ) gf^d! i 3 u. 8 ) I IU. I CPtf~-!P? Wl' S ^ s ? W I ^ f oW^ Pt?p# (Mo. 8 ) ( K . 908 )

(K.1M) ( K . 287 ) n B . H I . 19 ) 4 a w w w w mm ^mi *m i {Bg. v n . 20)

S8

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE

K. 107

tm ipct fmin Up?!

i ( K . 123) I (S'i XX. 761

nt5fffipitff f f ^ s i f t HI

WIIM f r o

ii ( Bh. II. i o )

II ( U. 2 ) HI it ( H . i ) W II ( H. I )

pnlit f v r a f f it ( u . 7 ) Weft: Spptwt: I w II ( R. I. 46 ) m ii ^ f e | l % ff a * p j ii ( P. I.

TO SANSKmrr COMPOSITION

97

?f HfWft* tftov&f W f B W W l f s M jpffT: Safest < < IP? SfftfUf II G? ( R. V. U7 )

The worshipful Gautama lias ordered'me to do this work, "What does yout reverence intend to speak oa this auspicious occasion ? Dear Gopal, do not weep ; here come thy two brothers whom thou regardest as dead. Here comes the mother of this child with fruits in her hand. There is some Indescribable pleasure ia the company of the wise. They sasref themselves 'with great difficulty at that perilous tim& These two boys- were brought up by me just like my owa children ; the oae was very clever, bat the other extremely duM. She thought herself most unfortunate at hearing that mews. There goes a report that in the teniple of Bhadrakalt lives an old woman. At one time she begias to rave, at another t o speak sensibly., Some philosophers believe that God created the whole UuiYCBe; others hold that it sprang up of itself. Some mea accomplish their own good, some the good of the people alone, wMie! others try to accomplish both. The ^oas of Yajaadatta have become proficient in various arts and sciences. i t is the very man 1 saw OE the road, dressed In tattered wtgs.

THIS STPDKNT'g GUIDE

He studies anywhere, goes out with any body, dines in any body** house, and sleeps anywhere. Whoever is strong-minded, will try to take revenge for any insults given to Mm. Speak "sweetly with all those persons that may come t o your house. USSQW XIH Pwttdplck 1141. A i participles in Sanskrit , 'except the Bo-calei indeclinable past participles or dbsolutives, are t o be regarded as mdjectivet, agreeing with the nouns they qualify, in gender, number, and ease. They are tailed * participles * from the supposed pottidpatim or sharing in the functions of the erb, the adjective, a a i the moan. The principal Kinds of participles in Sanskrit are-these : Present, Past, Future, Perfect, Potential Passive, and Indeclinable Past Participles (for the rales of formation see Gramtaar), These participles obey the same rales for governing cases that may have been .laid down, regarding the roots from which they are derived. Present, Future, and Perfect Participles are treated in this lesson. Present Pariieipks 142. The present participle in Sanskrit ( for rales of formation see Dr. Kielhorn's Grammar 498-500) corresponds to the participle i n English ending in * ing.' I t is .used when contemporaneity of action is Indicated ; as, f% f^lRWWW 5^fKWHK ( K . 125) * while ttunkinfr in this manner, he dismounted from Ms horse *; f j ( R. VIII. I ) * he made over* the earth to him* wMle. ( y e t ) wearing the mamage-8trimg *; W ( WlffWfW ( K . 141) * and going, he thought, *

TO 8AN8K&XV COMPOSITION

99

The sense of * w&tfc, * * whilst * Is thus inherent in this participle which serves to express an idea expressed la English, by a whole sentence. Obs. (a) The Sanskrit participle must never be confounded with the participial substantive or- geraad in English which also ends in ing. (6) When no contemporaneity of actioa is indicated, this participle cannot be used; as, * ascending the faotiataim, they rested for some time ' ; WtPfTCifW % ^ f e t | ff# a p p ? j f and not 'WfPIIPCtiP'". &c.-, unless the sentence implies that both actions are performed at the same time, (e) The present participle is not used la the nominative ease as a predicative adjective. We do not say W jpfffff * he is doing ', though we say ^Pl fppf 1" 4t?Rr. 143. T h e present participle (Aim.) is often used to denote * tlispositlon * or * h a b i t ' , * some standard of a g e ' and * ability * or '* capacity to do a thing *; as, fW 1WPI {S-. K . ) ' Imbituated to enjoy * s WW4 fWUW: {ibid.) '* wearing an armoar * ( M the age at- wttich. anmour may be worn ) ; ^ # f%^Pf: (ibid.) * able to destroy Ms foe.' Compare with the second example : ^JsrfNft?pW | R. VIII. 94 J where 1*ffR: f f 144. * 'The present participle is used to demote MM atleadaat cireumstance or attribute, and the cause of an action ; as, SRfRT ^ ^ ^ " IRTC (Sk. ) * the Y&vanas take their meals, ( b y ) lying down '; so fe^W ^ i f e (Mbh.), *PBBB^ l ^ ^ f e (tbid.);ff%<RW^ f8^%(Sk,) ' by (reason of) seeing Hari he" gets absolutioa.' The first sentence is an auswer to the question W t # , and the last to % ^ 1 % . fa) TMs participle also ilefines the agent of an action; as, WtewtaW 3rR% W ^RP5r: ( M b h . ) ' he is Devadatta who sits studying"; so T Wf#^1s#% f %ws^: (ibid.). ; PHOT t ( H I . 2. 126)

100

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

06*. This use eprresponds to the restrictive use of the participle in .English; 'students preparing their lessons,, will be rewarded * ffSPf^TOFT: ftTOT: frfefrtwrfw WPft. (6) This participle is also used to state a general truth ;.as, pWRT W % f i t (Mbh.) * the JD&rva grass grows (wbea) in W a recumbent position '; arreffaf ^ # ^ f w {Udd. ) * a lotus-stalk grows f when) ia an upright position.' 145. The roots M% ' to sit *, ffr * to , stand * aatf rarely [ and 3R[, are used with the present participle* of roots to show the continuity of the- action denoted by t h e m ; as, WfjftfTflfw fefWMWfffi^ ( P . I. 1 ) * kept on pulling down the tops of ant-hills and bellowingloudly *; iffolUTFE'WIPC SRftOTWWWt ( K . 1S5S j * eontlmneel to await the time of the conclusion of the song.* 146. Verbs like -sssaj, fcft, wf; to be ashamed ' are usually used with the present participle of rObts la thesense of ' to' in English, j xtf fq^# s(^m 5F5|^ ( K . 247} * art thou not ashamed to strike so mercilessly*; f W ffffjW fffeftft HW &^f% ( K. 287 ) ' I , a young, girl, am ashamed to cotpnrufdteftte a rash- thing myself.* 147. The present participle is'iarely used with t h e prohibitive particle W to imply a eoise; as, W # w ^ rt f r # % ( S ' i . I I . 4?) "cursed be he (tit. may be not live) who, though smitten by the pain of the contempt, of others, still lives/ Future PartitApUs 148. The future participle which ends in ^ ^ {r 5Rf) {pass. WP) denotes that a person or thing is goiag, or is about to do the action, or to undergo the state expressed by the root, as, ifftspr * going to-do * or * about to do ' ; WlWf" going to loose '; liftwWW ' being about to. be done/ (a) Besides showing simple futurity; it denotes intention or purpose ; as, ^Finf^wfwUra jj^HflTRF Spf ll^WR (M.II.8| * he ranged over the forest as if wishing to tame the

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION *

101

wild beasts ' ; ffflWlTW: Wft 5TO1F! ( R. III. 52 ) * intending to I t an arrow to his bow. * This participle thus corresponds to the English prospective form. Note.&nch sentences as * before taking Ms departure, lie drank a little water * are translated by means of the future participle made to-, qualify the subject; as, SPWf fjftcf?! 9 fif^pMiw "FT!. * Before * has here the scase of * going * or * a b o u t ' to take &c. Perfect Participles 14S. The perfect participle ( ending in 3RJ or 3JH) is less frequently used. It lias the sense of * who or what has or has, been, done *; as, tsfotffT f f t ^ l ( R. Y. 84 ) * of thee who hast obtained all good things (blessings)'; few|^#lTOWWW# ( R. II. 6 ) * ipmnly maintaining his seat when she had sat dowa. *

(P. I* 15)

W* ?W 1 { P. I. 18 ) CRT K. 72

Wl f W (Bh. II. 12) im i (

K.

m 277)

102

THE STUDENT'S G0IBK ft *ift I ( Dk. II. 7 ) mwm.

(K. XI, 22)

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOll EXERCISE W IfSffepSpf I ( K. 142 )

( Dk. I. 3 ) Jlf? lf TOWRTfe w f e ^ S ^ q f < T T II ( M. 1 ) 3C wrst wrfa1 f*ra?r it ( P . 1.8 ) | it ( u . 8) wrmv t www wpf^fTftffiH n ( R. XV. 6 )

| ( Bh. III. 10 R. .

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

109

N. B.ln the following sentences use' paHiapm jot the Italicised words, I saw many men on the road bearing leads of corn on their heads and walking gently, talking with each other. While going to Eaglaaci In a sMp, oae m^y see several befeutiful scenes. Oh the beauty of this picture! The painter has fully sho wa Ms skill In making the several parts so charnunft to the eye. Is he not ashamed (*% ) to communicate such a message to me through you f Eati, looking at the dead body of her husband and remembering his diverse sood qualities, kept on ( W f ) Weeping for a long time. When Chamdrapida was about to he crowned (-f%^ with 8ffW ) as heir-apparent to the throne, S'ukanasa advised him, directing his attention, to many important things. Wishing to become proficient la Ny&ya, he went to BenarH; and studied there for several days. Before giving ( <f) Gopal the reward I had promised him to givfc, I asked' him if he would consider it. unworthy o Ms exertions. Reeds, because they bow down to a stronger foe, are saved, while huge ak trees, proudly standing up, are swept away by the current; of water. The lion kept on killing the beasts of the forest In their torn. You should not bear hatred towards (fp|J this Bmhmaa who ,tas studied ( % with ajfa ) the four Vedas, mmterei completely the six Angas, and has seen the ead of. ( fully mastered) the four S'&stras, J a n a t a gave Ms daughter Sita to R&ma who bad broken the bow of Ssiva, aad attracted the naiads of the beholder* by Ms uncommon strength and skili

10*

IBM STUDENT'S GUIDE LESSON XIV Past Participles

150. There are two kinds of past participles : oae is passive, formed by the. addition of W or f to the root, and the other active, formed by adding f3[ to the passive base; as, |W?^W * this-was said by him '; 1" * he said this. * They are both used ia the sense of the past tense. In latter- Sanskrit it became more usual to tee participles than verbs. We generally ftaci *RT or 3fi[ itfOTW instead of 3ffj gf^qrw*^ and many purposes of the predicate are served by this participle. | 151. Many intransitive verbs have past passive participles, and they, as well as the past particljlks of traasitive verbs used intransitively, are often used impersonally with an instrumental construction, as, i #^#<B! ( Maf. 4 ) ' the full-mooB*like Makaranda lias now recovered fais consciousness *; V I W f # ^ {U. 7 ) * victorious (all-powerful) is the afleCtioa for children, * Obs. This kind, of construction is not restricted to past participles alone; it occurs in the passive voice of verbal tenses also; as, WQTIfwft WCTfW nffW% ( S \ 2 ) * it is wandered (i.e., I wander). through rows of forests e#ea at midday *; mm; w f t wpff mw &H mmtf{ ( c . 74) aoi-restraiat, of the senses is regarded as the path to miseries; victory over them, as the road to riches, f prosperity); go by whatever way you please.* 152. *The past passive participles of roots Implying motion,'ot Intransitive roots generally, and of the roots * to embrace', # , WT, 3TR[ RT * to dwell, s W^ ^ I (111. 4. 72)

TO SANSKBtT COMPOSITIOS

10$

nd % * to grow old * cl. 4, have an active sense; as, *f?ftsf (Dk. I I . ) *1 went to Kaluga *; Wm fTf Jffff: ( P . 1. 1. ) ' h e went dowa to the bank of the f Turana to drink *; SRPftTrfJFsrart fft: (S. K . ) ' Hari embrace! JLaksfamt *; 5Wll%?ffel: * sat on the fprpent *; f u l f i l l - * served S'hiva '; few'pjpsftw." * grew old after the world *; ( K . 173) ' the tasl and bei^g dead*; so 3 &c. Obs. KMidAsa constraes the past passive participle of W in an active sease ; as, W&HK fff^llSW^f f ( S'. 5 ) ; ^#?ra p w farf^sft WWPT (ibid.); w ) fPP|?f * ^ * | V. 2), 153. "fPast passive participles ending in f have sometimes the sense of neuter abstract nouns,' as s * speech ', ffffW * sleeping *; ffsi" * laugh *; so iRf ' whose is this picture * ? l a such eases the forms tee their passive force, and are not used yrith the instrumental; as, * her gait is graceful * f R T ( n o t ?WT) T?f wffBWJ I W ^ ^ f t RT fWOTfaOT W T (M. 2) * her ( motionless ) posture Is far O more charming than her dancing, * 154. The past passive participle of the roots >P| * to think, * ' to wish, * |W * to know, * and f^J * to adore, * and others having the same signification, are used in the sense of the present tense and are then congfcraeti with the Genitive. See' 115. Obs. There are other words which are similar!} used. They are given in the following verses:- f f t w : Wftf SfffKt i | ^ f f l f f I #

y i : I p^R^WR M (Mbh.) t nfifc n% m: ( n i . s. 114)

|06

IFE STUDENT'S GUIDE PotaJ&tl Passive Participles

155. There are three ways in which potential passive participles are formed in Sanskrit:(1) by W, ( 2 ) hy spftir, and ( 8 ) by *T; (for the rules of formation vide Dr. Kielhorn s Grammar 529-538 ) ; as, sp-faf, sp^ofta, and, ppfr. They perfofiu a verj< useful function in the economy of the Sanskrit tongue, and enable It to express in one word aa Idea which would require many words in English ; as, * he should be killed' = ffasr:. They denote that * the action or the state expressed by the root or deriYative base, mud ot tmgM to be done or undergone *; as, m^sq3TBiF*3*Pffcr * what ought to be said. * The sense thus COBveyed by them is that of fitness, obligation, or necessity; e.g., ' I have to go there * TO 3W f?pf; ' I must do i t s 1$6. These ptoticiples axe used In sentences in the same way as the passive of the roots from which they are derived; as, WWIOT 1C1RT ?W#? W^T: ( B . XIV. 6 1 ) * the king sh&old be told this in my behalf' spff flit # * the sheep ought to be taken to the village '; so | f ft: (S*. 7 ) 'heshould be made to hear the good fiytune ia the fotm of the acceptance of Ms "laughter by her htisband.' They are used with the Instrumental or Genitive of the agent of the action denoted by them ; see 107. 157. The impersonal use of this participle is not very peculiar. I t is used ia the neuter gender singular, taking the place of the verb ; as, fiT: ( S \ 1) * we must wait upon (the audience) -with tue drama * (represent before them & e . } ; WW1WF cPft^f *fefaf (V. 5 ) * his honour should go to a penance grove. * (a) The Impersonal use of the forms wffWsjf and "JIF^ deserves notice. They are used impersonally In their literal sense of * being, * or in the sense of ' must be.,' * in

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

107

till probability is,' showing some uncertainty & c , and ia both cases the noun or adjective coming after " b e ' must agree with the agent like an ordinary adjective ; as, ?%| # | TTSMWTO'jfffWW (fwrifw:) (V. 1.)' you should be careful of your respective parts ' j cRFSfttfe^fFf 3% ifwffOTT Kff%g3^ ( S \ 3.) ' she must be (is most probably) present in this bower of creepers f ( P . I. I.) ' Ms strength must (la all likelihocd) be corresponding to Ms bellowing. * (6) Sometimes the participle is used in the sense of the future with certainty ; as, 55os#?r iJPriWlfPTT 4Wi ( H . 1.) * the fowler Is sure to go (will surely go) seeking after the deer's flesh ' ; tfW#TFft" 5P?: f W : ( H . 8 ) * then he also will surely make a noise,' (c) Sometimes the potential passive participle merely denotes a future t i m e ; as, fl^ft: TSR%T ipflPf %J^(H tf^si {EL 4') * I too shall go at ease b j the strength ( support) of y e w wings. *

| ( M. 1 ) M. 4 S'. 2 ) .. 2 )

u.

(K. 157)

108

THE STUBEST'8 GUIDE

1 ( K. 158 )

w ^ : | Mu. mm i (ve. m

II

{ P.

I. IS

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOE EXERCISE TT3j|T (S\ 3) fffW*Wl W T ^ ^ ^ ^ W t ^^^BHW^Pf: I (K. 38)

I (K. 355)

(Mu. 2) I (Ve, l ) I i%
II

(u. s)

IO SANSKB1T COMPOSITION p I F I I T wfojffeRPj i II ( H . l )

109

(R.VI.77 ) sr*m JRRTW: gr%J W p r rtfpw ( B k . X J )

f *f?T: Wwfe: H (S*.

Af. B.Use participles for the words italicized. . K&rtlkeya defeated' Tiraka though Jbe was guarded by strong armies* Dear child, in doing this you have offended {'CTSF with aw) JUmadagnya, and not dome him any good ( f? with 5PT), His army beiag eomplet-ly b l e a t e d by the enemy, some of Ms soldiers mounted ( ^ with 3ffw) hills, gome descended to seas, while others entered ( fef ) solitary caves* You will g-urefy become aa object of contempt if you slight your intimate Meads. Who may this man be, that calls me by my name. Oh yes, he is most probably my old friend Mitravannan Wait for me a little; I, too, fare to be present at the meeting. As soon as -he gets up, instead of beginning Ms studies he goes out to play.

110

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

Do not give way to sorrow; your child must have by this time 'come home directly. I have wandered ("J3W ) over several countries, suffering many difficulties, but have -not obtained (?5W or TO^ cans,) my desired object. He appears to be beat oa ruining you, but I tell you . he is sure to be defeated in his attempts. How should he sustain Ms life in that country if you, were not to assist hira ? These things should be taken (STW ) by you to the owner of that large palace. 1 have yet to read (Wff^r ) many books; so I shall not be able to accompany yeu. This great reward indicates that "the ring must h&oe been greatly liked (WT ) by the king. Nothing'is difficult to be accomplished (|:1TW) by wise men. Since ht had mucii wealth, he must have had many wives. How long should we remain with our -armies for b a t t l e !

LESSON XY
PAET I

Indeclinable Past Participles or Grunis 158. The indeclinable past participle in Sanskrit, commonly called ' absolutive * or ' gerund, * always denotes d prior action, or an action completed before another, and corresponds to the perfect participle, or the participle in ing having the sense of the' perfect participle, in English ; as, si?ftfRtC'T<:Rr?f tffefpmsNW {K. 8 ) s the female door-keeper, drawing near or having drawn near, modestly said'; SR

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

111

p anc?r TOTOpfte ( K. 8 ) ' V a i s ' a m p f <ma as if contemplating for a moment, respectfully said. * But in the sentence * going to a village^ he touches a blade of grass on Ms way, * we must say, HP? i^gFT fff j 159. Indeclinable past participles In Sanskrit are formed by fff or by W ( changed to $T) whea a preposition precedes a root f for rules vide Dr. Keilhorn's Grammar | 518-525). They are, aS before -stated, used to denoie a past or pnof action and must have the same agent as the main verb ; as, gOTIf JCtWPf WFf OTt^f W: {Ku. II. 1) " having placed Indra at their head they went to the' abode of Br&hman. * Here the agent of * placing * and * going- * is the same, and hence the gerund can be used-; but If <S ftWff?Fr3V is wrong. In such cases the gerund cannot be used; the Locative absolute construction will have to be used to express the same sense; as, wfpifitf fJ^SipT*ps*[. So W: tRjffilttffepni Ps^t falRK {H. 2 ) s the lion was ntreated by aE the beasts, having assembled together s ; f f ' T ' {Mu. 1) * let Mm be expelled from the city (by thee) having proclaimed this crime. s 160. The Sanskrit gerunds are very useful to economize the use of cfonjunctions and verbal forms ip describing or narrating events, hx translating constructions introduced by 4 after having,! * when * or ' after,' when, s ' after * &e,, need not be translated, the gerund of the verb being alone used; as, TWf ipWT * after having killed Kft,vaa *; * when he went there, he did not find anything ''S ?fW WfU T An English sentence contpEmg several clatises introduced by * having ' would look awkward ; but in Sanskrit several gerunds can be strung together to express those ideas which would be expressed in English by- a verbi teass and the copulative ceniuactloaj as, W f

112 ^ w : Sffet? Jpffff ffgijBippF srRt { P . III. ) ' havingbesmeared me with blood, and thrown me under the tree, goto the mountain Rishyamiika,' i.e., besmear me &c.; and f f f W Sffpftr: ( H . 4) * then, the Bt&hmana thinking the beast to be a demon, threw it on the ground with fear, and cteasuriag Fate, set off for bis home. * When there are copulative assertions in English, the gerunds may be conveniently used in translating them into Sanskrit. Obs. The natural sequence of events must be observed ia the use of these gerunds; as, tftWI IPfclT fff?f?f * having cooked and taken Ms food he s l e e p s ' ; but not 161. Some Sanskrit gerunds may often havt the ease of prepositions and prepositional phrases ; as, JPR^T ""except, * VMM * with, * ^f^ff * towards,' af^f??^ ' with reference to.*
PABT II

Namal f Gerani in w j 1S2. There Is another kind of gerund In .Saftskrii formed by the addition of 3PJ immediately ^o the root or derivative base, and making the same changes as before the f of the passive Aorist {see Dh Kieihorn's CJ'rammar 5 2 8 ) ; as # f * haviag thrown ' from fe<|; mi * having spoken '; lW * having dined .' 16& When this gerund is repeated, it denotes a repetition or recurrence of the action or state expressed by the root; as, WTt P O t OTff %W ( S : K.) ' having often and oftea called to mind he bows down to, S'iva *; ^f^fmvi wff u t r i f e ww ww#wwf ^ s w t e f t i w * | Dk, i i . s ) 4 having repeatedly heard t h a t the lord of the Kaiingas was hostflely inclined towaris himself.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION"

118

became ready to fight *; so also IPf fW, %$ <t$$ * having repeatedly drunk or seen.5 164. * With the words 3ft, Sfjpf and ff this gerund or the ordinary one in ? T is used ; as, 3f# SfWf |f-^F WW W *pcW ifF iWftf * having first eaten he goe.s.' (a) **With the words ajwfsrr, ^ spf, and ?? this gerund of f? * to do ' is used, provided the whole word thus formed retains the same meaning as the words them* selves ; as, ^W f # (S. K.) ' he eats thus *; W R ? | # * in what manner does he t a t *; but,ftfCfs^OTTfrcTf # # . (6) fWitb the words JP(T, OTF, when aa angry reply is given; as, OTWft mm fe mm (S. K.) * I will eat thai way ; what have you to do with it * ? 165. JWith the words Implying * sweet' or * seasoned * this gerund of f is used ; as, ?H^^fT-5Wff!Prt-''j^' * he eats, having made his food sweet or seasoned. * I S i . $ In the case of the roots 5p| and fm ' to know ' this gerund is joined with their object to denote the whole or coUect&tnt of that object; as, W K i TOlfif (S. K.) * he chooses as many girls as he sees ' ; i.e., ail the girls seea i iIiJF?%^ j w|3rafe * lie feeds as many Br^hmawas as he knows, ' i.e., ail. (a) |fw{* to get * and sff^ ' to live' arc combined with 1Tf?J in the same sense; as, IWf? *jf?f * he eats as much oshe gets *; !JTW*1TWC!% '"he studies as fang as he lives % i.e., throughout his life. I (III. 4. 24) * ** ^SW^WfeWj fe?wrt*R%^ I ( I I I . 4. 27) j* 5WWWWR^^CTi3^^W I ( I I I . 4.28) wpjwt ( I I I . 4.26) : OTWd I ( I I I . 4 . 2 9 ) : t ( i n . 4. so)

114

THE STUDENT*? UIDB

'(b)' fWitfa the words pff and WT this gerund of <p: is used -with the object; as, ^Wtyc W # ' eats so as to fill his belly *; so f f g t ??PTl1w 'spreads so as to cover the skua.* 167* |With the words 9Jf>, "f*# aad. J S T this gerund FF of fer is used like the cognate accusative in English, i.e., the gerund of the root and the root itself are used t o signify the sense denoted by the root; as, 'sjW'tw ppffe" *he grinds something till it is reduced to powder, * i.e.,. he grinds It to powder; m (jgtqMPSMfaf ftwfe ( a ) With the words 5|Bf, WG&G, <tf, the roots fFt, $ , and 5 ^ are respectively used in % ccgnate sense; as s ^5WW f & * he destroys so as to tear up by the roots, i,e., he totally exterpatt* ; WfpWWT wOffa * he iocs a t H a g wiiicb was not done before'; 5 sftsRnRJ W^iTfe * captures him so as to preserve Ms life, * i.e., captures hka. alive. (b) l a the same way this gerund of igf and f*P| is msed frith a noan to denote that it is the imirumait of the action; as, ^KHS" ffe" = n^?r f% * he strikes with t!e foot *; WQft fprfe = 3^%^ fttffe ' be grinds with water '; similarly, ft f ^ H g rfnf?r i he takes him by the h a n d ' ; so frfWWIf; ^WTf &c.; %mm n i ^ = ^ n &c. Other examples tve : ^ I ^ W Jwrfsj ' perishes so that Ms life perishes, i.e., dies away s ; a^NiW ^ 5 ^ % TO; * the tree is dried up while it is still standing *; so i S f j i ^f&. 168. fSometimes this gerund is used to denote similitude or likeliness, such as would be ordinarily expressed by ?W; as, spPTRf q ^ ; ' he perished like a g o a t ' ; T!f#Wtt ^ i f e * he walks like P&rtha 'j f W ' m-ater was kept as ghee (would be kept). * : | t : I (III. 4. SI) w, ftw: ( I I I . 4. 35) | * f s g ^ : 1 ( I I I , 4. m i ( i n . *. 45)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITIOK

115

16S. t Roots having the sense of 'Iff * to strike', such, as ??T, <yir <fee. are used in this gerundive form with BOunSj when the object of this gerund is the same as the object of the main verb, and when the 'noun with which it i s compounded would have stood in the instrumental case if the ordinary gerund had been used; as, ^1ft7WT?f iff: ^rnszrfft * he collects together the cows, beating (-them) with a club. (a) Similarly, ^j/fKN' W, FfFFffe * he stations the cows so-that they are all in the fold'; TR#l!ft? #1* = (b) flf;fs is joined with fp?f, %, and words hi.- ing the same sense, when immediate contiguity is Intended; as, %5BITf vps?$[' having closely caught (each other) by the hair, they fight' ( = %#fj Wft^fT). Also f ^ H f = f # ifJfWT, ilfeilf * taking a stick,' ( ? | f e pf)wi') so # ^ W f . 170. * With words signifying s limbs of one's own body f this gerund is used, when the limb is not kept steady; as, wfCf#f w r f r ( nwm ) * he narrates (tb* account) tin-owing his eyebrows ( glances ) about in all directions. ' (a) fin the same way when a part of the body is completely hurt or afflicted in the action, this gerund is used with that part in the sense of the accusative; as, 3T:srfOT<f w j % ' the}' fight so as to afflict their whole bosom ' (f^fiTT: tffeiRT:); *3*jWPrtt' WfFT =r (Ku. IV. 2G) a ' and she struck her bosom so as to hurt her breasts. * 171. JThc roots fet with m ao.d lf% are joined in their gerundive form with m%H in the sense of the ffwr#rt <% mwm^mrti ( I I I . 4.48) (III. -1. 54) (III. 4. 55) (III. 4. 38)

110

THK STUDENT'S GUIDE

accusative ; as, WPfTiSPTPPg' ' he mentions ( i t ) telling Ms. name '; ffPfHf itPFFipWfw * he calls me by taking my aaioe * ( i.e., % my name). Ohs. This gerund is used, with nouns to form coinpound words; as, fH|IW%5, not f^flfFT ife; sfcnn^ not # mi & c

5sRrat

SRK: mm

m-fmtm

(P.L7)

(K. 98) : (Ku. VI. 94)

(v. i )

(Dk. I.

mi (Dk. 1.8.)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

117

(Mu.2)

tmr ^crat r p w f i t l i H (Bk. v . 5.) ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOE EXSBC1SE 11 (Bk. 11.11)

! II (U. l )

II (Me. 119) i II (Bg. I. 31) T5f 95OTW?^teWf ^^ffiroTO^W I (Dk. I. 5) ' (Ek* II. 4)

118

THE 3TUDEST'S tiUIDK

(Bk. II. 23.) cr wt (Bk. HI. 14}

Wi pl ft^Wfa II (Blu. 6) AT. B.Use partidpks for the words italicised. Seeing the fowler coming towards them, all the animal* becoming frightened, raa away in differeat directions. When did you come back, acquainting the lord of the Vangas with this news ? Becoming, of one accord and forming a strong resolution not to desist from the work undertaken, begin your business, A jackal, roaming at will near the precincts of a town,, accidentally fell into an indigo vat, and being unable to get up, remained there, feigning himself to be dead. The Br&linia?iaj hearing the words of the rogue, placed the goat on the ground, looked at it again and again,, placed it once more on Ms shoulder, and took his way home, thinking over the rouge's words. Then he was respectfully dismissed by the minister; having called Mm to court, honoured liirn with suitable presents, and communicated to him the message of the king. N. B.Use Namtd forms for the words italicised. He chose as many girls as he sow (j^) suitable to himself.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

119

He reduced (fatf) the medicine to powder, and placing It on fire and boiling it, drank it up. He mas pelted to death (ipr) by the followers of the king for having killed their master. I fell upon my enemy all at once, and touting all. Ms followers, caught (5f^) Mm alive. The king of Pataliputra captured the town of astidurga, and took Its inhabitants prisoners.. Who calls me % my pamef LESSOH XVI The Infinitive Moi 172. When one actlaa is represented as being done foe another action, the latter is, in Sanskrit, expressed by the Infinitive, which is formed by the addition of the termination ?pf to the root in the same way as the third person singular of the Periphrastic Future. It has the sense of * in order to,' 'for the pt$rpn$e of, * *for* and thus corresponds to that form of the JSngiisli Infinitive which is called * infinitive of purpose ' or * gerund. * The Sanskrit Infinitive has thus a dative sense, and may, if necessary, be replaced hf the dative case of the verbal derived from the root; as, (11, IV. 60) ' h e then set out to conqtier the Persians', i.e., for the purpose of conquering &c. Here ^ = and the sentence may stand thus : TTOftWft WTOf so # m P ^ F r r a r f ? pr: f^HWcKW (K. 147) where Obs. (a) Like the English infinitive, the Sanskrit Infinitive is a remnant of an old inflexion. In Yedle times the verbal noun formed from a root by the termination <| (*f<J, -TI^) was regularly decline/ We find such fauns as if?r "f?l%, #11:, as if ifij, was a regular aoun. In course

120

THE ST0DENTsS OOTDE

of time the use of the forms *ffft: *fl%, became less and less frequent, and the form that was", chiefly used was the accusative Inflexion. I t was subsequently considered to turn; a dative sense, and hence the present Infinitive form in Sanskrit has always the sense of the dative. (b) The Sanskrit Infinitive corresponds ia Latin to the Supine In um ( datum = 5RJ) which is properly the accusative of a verbal substantive, just as In Sanskrit; * Themistocles Argos habitatum (f fRJ ) concesslt * * Themistocles retirefi to live at Argos.' The same sense is expressed, as in Sanskrit, by the dative of the gerundive participle ; * Decemviri kgihus scribuniis * (firf^ffrfTPT) ' Becemvlrs for framing laws.' 178, I t foiows from the definition that the Infinitive in Sanskrit cannot stand as the subject or object of a verb* I t has no connection with any words In the sentence, except that It may, where possible, govern a noua in the same case as the loot from which it Is derived. Where the Infinitive oceans In English as the subjeat or object of a verb an abstract moua from the root must be used ia Sanskrit; as, 4 to get up early In the morning is wholesome ' tRffF! ( not 'iWRJ) 8frdwiWf; ' I learn to sing' (a) The Infinitive after verbs of s seeing,' ' hearing * is 9 as In Latin 8 translated by the present participle; as, * I heard Mm speak8 WTTOW tFWW; so spftTO1 W # i * he saw Mm study. * 1174. The strict sense of the Sanskrit Infinitive Is motive or purpose of aa action; but there are some cases, as In English, where the Infinitive is used with nouns and also adjectives ; as, * fit to do',1 able to go \ * time to read. * Soch cases are, however, limited by Sanskrit idiom. Sonie of the principal cases of this nature are givea below. 1175 e * The Infinitive is used with verbs and sb ( I I I . 3. 158)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

131

stantives meaning * to wish' or * desire \ provided t h e agents of the infinitive and the verb are the same; as, f f f f Ku. V. 58) s desires to obtain for her husband the Pinakahanded god ( S ' i v a ) ' ; so ar j t^iflf: IPft {P. I. 8 ) ; but not Wt *fif!5f5#!' * I wish thee to go* where the agents of *P{ and h h *, h h f f[ are not the same. 117S, f I t is used with verbs meaning to be 2&fe, I make bold, to know, to be wearied, to strive, to begfrn, to get, to set about, to bear, to be phased or to condescend, and to ie ; as, f Wftfw ffWUfWrTfei ( U . 4 ) i I am not able to compose my h e a r t ' ; naf Pf!: f r ^ w i w ^ ( K u . I I I . 1 ) ' thus proceeded to speak to Mm priYately *; aiFFTfir %tt ft^tef^ ( U . 1) * you know (how) to entertain nay queen '* 3|fer-W&-fW%-lT ^ ^ W { S. K . ) * there is fool to eat * i f f%fi| fwfwww^rfww ( Ve. 8 ) * I caaaot t o see the distress. * I III. 4. 65) This S&tra presents a kaotty point. Bhattojl DIksMta says ^ ^ f W W f e t ^ |ff*fll% ^aX5flW, i.e., the SMra gives roots from W | to 3fi| and roots having the same sense as 3RJ * to be. * But.this is hardly consistent with the almost overwhelming evidence of usage. According to DtksMta f s interpretation, W^ s to be able ! cannot be used with the infinitivfe ; but *f fTWft" f^%?ft^ (S*. 4) ft ^ (M. 8 ) ate instances from a standard author; similarly fw? * to know * cannot be used with the Infinitive; but if f ^ wmpz^ am ( R . VI. 80 ) is as good an instaMce. We must, therefore, suppose that the Stftra iadieates the existence of an interpretation connecting 3PWffT with all the preceding roots j otherwise we s h a l "have to condemn as wrong all such constructions as those given above. TaHag this view I have inteipreted the Sfltra, connecting vfffW with all toots.

182.

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

117. I t is used with words meaning sufficient, strong*, 6fe, and substantives meaning ability, power, oi skill; as, fefewfr %mi sftfswej %'. W*m: ( H . 1) * who is able to avoid that which is written on Ms forehead' 1 ^ ^ R 5 ? 5?sr ff ijRW: { Ku. II. 58 ) * his penanee is able ( sufficient) to bum the worlds'; ffef % f w f : m <rfTSrT$ (V. 2 ) * I have power to know everything *; ^tssf! gflT^t^r fer (S*. 4) * who else than fire has power to burn'? JpiRr. Tfff f S, K. ) * skilful in eating r (knowing how to eat). 178. f i t is used with words meaning * Hme * with' wfereace to the work of the time; as, wWTtSJTOc^t^ f ( S ' . 1) * this is indeed the time to show myself';' f5fpwti# %ff^ ( V, 2 ) ' it is time to bathe aad take food.* Note.As ia L'&tin, some verbs ia SanArit xe of the nature of depmtents, i.e., passive m form, bat active in sense; as, SRji, W , ^ f aB<| their derivatives; as, m W ? P lW: SWtT^ ( H. 8 ) those faults cannot be corrected oi remedied8; *r fS8f mfit TO#fOTfro | M . 8) ' t h e As'oka does not deserve to be kicked with the left toot.' 17S. The Sanskrit Infinitive has no pmrnm form, 'the same form being used to denote both active aad passivesenses. In turning a sentence involving an Infinitive into the passive voice, the words governed by the Infinitive remain unaffected; as, f fipiW ^ ^ P l ^ s f e ; & f ffffW 3faj* ftcq-et; xmt I T # f f n ^ ; ^ I ^ T wi n^nkn. Wliere the object,of the Infinitive and the verb is the saite, it Is, ia the passive-voice, put in the nominative case> leaving it to be understood with the Infinitive; as, W 7f5<|W ; q f S f f t ^ t , the object of ffe^ .being 4 ^ t ( I I I . 4, 68) ( I I I , 3. 16?)-

TO SANSKRIT CO1IPOSITIO1C

12$

if necessary. l a this case it will not do to eay *PT <lfe|ftpHI%_ or ^ y g w o u j ( j j j e a n impersonal construction though. ?W is not aa intransitive verb. l a the case of roots like those referred to In t t e Note to | 178, both constructions will be faultless j ft or <TW: anfM'Tsr *SFW%, though the latter looks more elegant and classical, | 180* The use of the root 31^ * to deserve ' deserves to be marked. I t is frequently combined with the Infinitive in the sense of * prayer * or * respectful entreaty *, or in those sentences where * he pleased ' or ' / pray * or * beg ' occurs in English, and in this sense it is generaEy used with %he 3m4 and 3rd persons ; as, J m W mfm^T^ T * Ku. V. 89) ( ' (I) pray, do not consider me to be a stranger * ] ff g gfiff?T jipfK: (Mtt. 4) * be pleased, O Prince, to hear it attentively * ( I beg that you wiE hear &c.); fW WPTft T n % # P f ^ % O T ^ f % (U. 8 ) * dear Janakt, be pleased not to forsake me who am in this plight.' 181, The Infinitive with the final * omitted is osed T with the wSrds WT and H: in the sense of * wishing * or ' desiring' or * having a mind ', to do that indicated by the r o o t ; as, jprftf epRprpf ?TRff W i t ( S \ 1) " your honour appears desirous of speaking again. s

(S. 5)

(K. 62) ( K . 157}

134

THE STUDENT'S 0OTDE

i 3583*11 ( M . i )

(P. I. i s ) SRT: < n l ^ f l % r w f l i ^ I! (R.X.25)

mm

wm%

i ( R . X V . M)

(S'. s)

: w f t qR left ( j j ^ : g ^ T ^ f w : if (Bh. 11.6)

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOB EXERCISE

^ ^ ^ ^ I I |K.. 169 J

(Ve. 1)

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

125

!fflWgTORTSffpliW W E f f e f TR II (V. 5) m aw. vstwrawtatf i % f w srftmgi^ftr M (Km. v . ) i (Ku VI. j ii ( B . f i l l , 90)

Wfl' (Ve. Z) He strove as far a? possible to effect the good of Mscountrymen. Why do you wish to appropriate to yourselves the pro* perty of your brother ? 1 told him to do the work, which lie did xnost reluctantly. To take revenge appears at first pleasant to a man, but in the end it results in ruin to himself. I do not bear to see even poor men disrespectfully treated. Be pleased, O Krishna, to dear (fe^) this doubt. I t is now time for you to begim to study your lessons. Even an insignificant enemy does not deserve ( 8 ^ t o ) be slighted. I desired them to go to Bombay, but they did not like to do accordingly. How Is it possible (5TW) to go to aaother country, leaving you here alone?

Mot to mention the poor, even, rich persons find i t difficult to live honourably in. times of famine. Tiiis villain deserves ( i R ) to be punished for Ms crimes. Let all the prisoners oe ordered to be released oa this auspicious day. To expose one's self to danger is sometimes preferable to remaining idle in the house, being deterred by calamities. In Alaka the splendid palaces will be able (sr) to equal ftp?) you in those various particulars. He was greatly desirous of doing good to others, but lias not been able to accomplish his object to any extent. ' I beg your honour to grant this request \ it will ever be my duty to remember it with gratitadf

LESSON XVII Tenses a n i M t o i s 192. l a Sanskrit there are altogether ten. Tenses and Moods : Present, Imperfect, Perfects Aorist,. Periphrastic Future, Simple Future, Imperative, Potential, Conditional and Benedictive. The ten lak&ras given-by Pa-nini arews^, 57$, fes, ^ , WcT, W5, ^ t ? , fe^, 5$ and fe.* Of these the last %H is found only in the Veda, and has the sense of the subjunctive., and it is generally termed the 4 Vedic subjunctive. * The remainiag nine respectively * This terminology of Famni is artificial, and is not based on any particular principle. Other grammarians have adopted a somewhat rational nomenclature. The names of the several tenses and moods, according to them, are in the above order as follows :W%t (WOTFTF) f^fBFftj TTflT, aTSRFft, fsfftFtt, Wf%^f?rs T^ft, w f t (these two alone being' quite artificial) ftsfffwiftf: and SfRft:. The feminine is used, because, the word ?{%: is understood after each.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

137

eoreespond to the tenses and moods given above, tho Benedictive being in. Sanskrit included ia f?55j and distinguished from the Potential (fffsffes} as mftf%3[. 183. Erery verb In Sanskrit, whether in a. primitive, causal, desiderative, or frequentative form, may be conjugated in the ten tenses and moods, though the last two derivative forms of T-erbs are very rarely used except in the Present tease. The senses conveyed by them are usually expressed by other forms or combinations of words j as, isprfirrfir = *i3f*r^f?r; 3ieT?# <= f t arefir, 184, some of the teases and moods ia Sanskrit exactly correspond to the tenses and moods in other languages, and some are peculiar to Sanskrit. l a this and the next three Lessons are given their uses and meanings. The Present tense and the Imperative and Benedietive moods ai considered in this Lesson, Present Teise 185. Tne Present tense is used to denote an action iakiog place, or a fact existing, at the present time; as 'SFfif: facPft Sfi? ( R . I. 1) 11 salute the parents of the Universe. * Obs, Strictly speaking, the Present tense in Sanskrit corresponds te the present progressive, imperfect or incomplete form, which expresses the continuance of an action which is begun. Patanjali says ' ^ftTWrf%H% SUffRr^TT W?lt * which indicates that the action denoted by a verb in the Present tease is yet continuing and has not stopped; as, Kjjfa ^[^Tm Ppffe 4mfm (Mu. I ) ' this lady brings (is bringing) water ; this {another j grinds (is grinding) odorous substances' iraT?OTffW^^F W q^Tfa^ir ( S \ 1) ' these ascetic-giris come (are coming) ia this very direetijfi.' There is no distinct form ia Sanskrit to express this continuous action j hence :ts usual signification.

128

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

I t must, however, be renieinbered that it is only by a special adverb or by the context, that the Present tease can. be confined to mean a present act solely; as 3 f r W^fw (i.e., apffrr) ; or OTWsfpfpft. The principal use Present indefinite is, as observed by Baia ( Grammar Page 185 ) * to express what is true at all times, * I t expressespresent time only as representing all time. The permanent arrangements and laws of nature, the peculiarities And propensities of living beings, and whatever is constant,. regular, and uniform, have t c he represented by thepresent indefinite *; as UffPfRT: W J f *f IP^HIT f i t {Bh. % I I . 28) * say what the company of the good does not do toftfefipTRwffrtfffi JpfffwiPf: (Ku. I. I} f * there is { stands) in the northern direction the lord of mountains caled the Himalayas *; sd Jfffe f ( K . 85); ( U . I . ) ; T f | p m 4 b ( ^ m - . * r t & (M&i 1) &e. 186S Besiles these general senses, the Present tease in Sanskrit has, like the English present, the folowing senses s. (a) I t has sometimes the meaning of immediate fiiture i as, WW^WP^WPr (S ! . 8 ) "here I m n e f s h a i l c o m e ) ' ; ^ r , ^ % _ ^ w m ^ ( S . K . ) ; tmf W Wfff (MM. 5). (6) When an action has just taken place, the may be used to denote the recent past action j as s PRWPraisftr ?WWPf'STft' ( S . K . ) * when did you comefrom the village ? here I come (I have just come).~ (c) In fables and in recouatiag past events it is used as if the Barrator saw them passing before Ms eyes, as, fpft S% ^ ^ * ( H. 2 ) * the elephant asks (asked) who art thou * I (d) With words meaning Oil, as far as, before when, &c, it has the sense of the Future perfect; as, fWIfS fi %# # C . i j therefore, befort, hereturns (or till he s h a l have i,ot returned) walk away . this thicket of trees.

TO aAMB\m% COMPOSITION

18

(e) Sometimes the P r e s e n t denotes habitual action such as is represented in English by the past habitual * used to * or ' would '; as. ^ ^ jpnf sippsfff P* ( S \ 4 ) * did not think of drinking w a t e r first > j w a s m t j n i ^ ^ m of driakiag, &c); so ffff^ w>spf ft*r tilit tlftftr ( H . 1). 187, The.Present is 'sometimes used for the Future im conditional sentences, or s u c h a s j m p | y c o n aition ; as, wfw w i & (mt mm% v) i - ^ f qiff ^wm j j ^ t w) ( S . K . > * he who offers (will offer). food goes ( w i i g o ) to heaven. * 1188. When joined .\itii p a r ticle ff the Present tbs. has t t e sease of the Past; a S j ^ m ( P . I. 8 ) * thi, r e i i V e d in a fore8t a | i o n BlAsurata'; * f f w W W W ^ f tffy ^ s ' i XVII. 15) ' bought fame a t the cost of theiij, |j v e 8 > 18i. With ittterrog a t i T e S j t h e ftmmt often coavey* the sense of the Future ^ t h Ie{erenee to 8 desire; as, ft #rt* *nwrfir < U. 1 ) ' ^ h a t shall i do, where stall i g o 8 ! (S.K.);so fe'i^ff^^^ (Mu.6). {a) When an answer is g j v e n t o a q U e s tion, the Preseot is used In t h e sense of the ^9fA ^ ^ t h e w o r i mj m> ^ m . *n|f: fe^rr *trtr # : ( s . K . ). f 190. * With the w o r d s ^ a n d j ^ w h e a u s e d w adverbs, It has the sense tof t h e fntute, when certainty is ladicated;,as, an^t% % fitfijff ycr (Me. 881 'wiE sorely fall In the raage of your a i g h t . . w m m ^ ^ W g w m Wf4 mf (U 1 h f (U. 1 )) '' II s h a u S'atraphna to exterminate
sclid

this wretch. * Obs. Certaiaty ' need

n O t b e n e c e s8aray

meant.

H e Iraieratife Mi | t i l . TMs mood is u s t a i a t t e 2 o d person ia the sense ^ ^ ^ , as 1B English; [|. g,

18

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

#Cf: (Mk. 10 J ' Listen, ye citizens ' ; ^I * help ! help 1 *; f r fSOTfe Wltf Iff % s f t t W ! (U. 1) * alas, my beloved, where art thou ? Give me response * ; KVmt %fe var rrt wrff rcr (Bh. II.) * leave off ambition (greedy desire); have forbearance ; give up pride. * (a) The Imperative in the passive voice Is often used s a polite way of expression ; as, trfKTOWFPrai (V. 2) * here is a seat, please sit down. * | 192. The second and third person Imperative is frequently used to express benedictions or blessings; as, rffi ( S \ 1 ) * may S'iva, J rff endowed with those eight visible forms, protect you ! *; uppjf: !fRPfiff trfg apPRtwfeft fitf ^TtIT: (Mk. 10) * may rain pour CIOWE in season ! may winds blow pleasant to the people's naiad*; y w t w f t w ^^lf%fPflF^ff (S\ l ) 4 m a y you get a son possessed of these qualities, who will be a sovereign ruler f *; gtf OTffTf^Wpjnpf (R.V. 84) * may you get a son worthy of yourself'; W % f^t Wfe (U. 4 ) &c. | 13. The Imperative is used in commands and exhortations extending to the future as well as to tne present, and is generally used in laws and. in laying down precepts, just as the Potential mood is used in the same sense. See iesson XVIII. | 194. There is a use of the second person Imperative, which, deserves notice. When ' frequency ' or s repetition of acts 'J is indicated the imperative second person (Parasm. and Atrn.) is repeated, though the subject of the maia verb be different and verb be in any tense ; as, qrff JTff!% ( S. K . ) * he goes often and often ' ; so TO" JJTRlcft' Obs. This corresponds to the use of the imperative mood in MarMM and other languages derived from Sanskrit?

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

181

(a) The Imperative is similarly used (without being repeated) when several acts are spoken of as being done by one person; as, WF^{ f w TOT: 3fTt?*rWTW^% (S. K . ) * he takes'his meals, eating barley and tasting fried corn ,* Compare Mar&thi:' mm m, fW" ^M 1T# <ft, 3RTT f t # f

T i e Beneiictive M o s i 1S5. The Benedictive mood ( W R | - ^ f w t e ) is always used in giving blessings, and In the first person expresses the speaker's wish} as, (U. I ) * so what else shgJl we say as a blessing ? May you give birth to a warrior *; fMwRpffT: T W W f W Tfrff? (Mkl, .6) * -may the gods make the end very pleasant * f (ibid, ) ' may I become successful!

(P.

i.

WFlfc I ( H. 1)

(t: I (K. 65)

mm

1S2

TOE

STODENT'S GUIDE

ui in

(s#,*|,

(s*.

ABBITIONAL SENTENCES FOBRXEHGISE (MM. If ii

[Si 1.51)

RWB H- ( I I M .

10)

(Bh. w i w ^ ^ f r ^ l w i (Me. 112)

TLrry

V0 SANSKRIT C0Ji08tT10S

ii (Bh. n . 2 8 )

The serpent having climbed the tree used to eat the young ones of crows. Aquna, having strung Ms bow, says to K a m a ; ' A r e you now ready to fight with me * ? There is a tortoise being carried by two birds on their shoulders. Why do you abandon me here ? What $MB, I do T To ^Aom shall 1 go for protection I 1 shall just wait for her (me qffl|) sittinf .under the thade of this tree. 1 have just cue back from a long t i W e t ; an do you tei) me to work so .soon f May .you both get sons resembMng yo in aB gooi nudities I Obqr your p a r e s i s ; respect the learned; Ewer ^ A oae word of censure to others; and be content with your position. May cows give (Ben. of ? f ) much milk I May the Earth be fernistai with all sorts of-com by clouis pouring ctowa in season I Let spies disgoisei as ascetfes be sent <ttt over Ms nioas to find out the r e d state of Ms kingdom. He desolated the whole couetry pttllag ctawm* r iriving away the people, aad buraing low* their pow8i@M

184

THE STUDENT'S GUIBS, LESSON XVIII The Potential Mood

196. The Potential mood in Sanskrit corresponds to the Subjunctive mood in English and Latin, but it has not all the senses and uses of the English Subjunctive, mot the wide application of the Latin Subjunctive. In English the Subjunctive mood is not used in independent clauses; in Latin, it is used without any preceding verb to express a wish but it is generally used in dependent assertions; but in Sanskrit the Potential mood is used both in independent and dependent assertions ; as, ffHkl^f ffftijfepft: (Me. 26) fW WSJ i f f d f% ?R$tf SJTcT (Mat. 1). We shall now see in what senses it is used in Sanskrit. 1 197. The Potential expresses (A) probability, command, wish, prayer, hope, and capability; (B) it is used in dependent clauses In which the above senses are implied; and (C) it is used in conditional or hypothetical sentences, l a which one statement depends upon another as its reasonm condition. (A) 1S8. The senses of 'probability,* ' c o m m a n d ' Ac. expressed by the Potential are expressed, in English, by * may,' * shall,' or * should,s and often by * wiU,' * wmM * * cmdi,f * might, * as used in direct assertions; as, W ftn>9ng gwwfr W^Si <ffaWr (Bb. II. 5) * one mayeven get oil from saad, by diligently squeezing it together' j Wtl ^ff%^4 H^rat sffj- sfm ftmrraifcr (Mu. 5 ) * who, indeed, would think it probable that the Maurya king would sell ornaments V; ^frrt ^lfl%^W fwwm (Mr. 3) s may I conquer the conqueror of Kartikeya V; JPfftpSRPi: f ^ T f 1 O T ^Rf (M. 4) * may the tree of Love make me taste the flavour of its fruit V; $*lf ^WTfir f W W I w f w ^ " (Ku. I l l , 10) I could make even the Pinaka-weapoaed kd lose M

TO 3ANSK.KO" COMPOSITION strength of mind ' ; i *fta?f ^m I get food,' (S.K.)

Il-i ' 1 pray that

(a) The most general application of the Potential is in giving commands, ia laying down precepts or rules for guidance, aad la showing obligations of duty, as expressed by shall or should in English; as, SPFfifW !%#?[ (Y. III. I) * one shall bury a child that is less than two years old'; BTTR5? Wf I^cf (C. 29) ' one should save wealth -against (in order to meet) bad time *; ^9T f^Rtjftr 1 ft>it (Ki. I I . 80) * one should not do any act rashly.' Qbs. Paraini lays down that the Potential, as well as the Imperative, is used in directing (a subordinate &e.), giving invitation, expressing permission ( t o do a thing), in speaking of an honorary office or duty, in asking question*, and in prayers (f%f%f^Jf^WOT^WI^KOTSRTSrW';fWfe^ III. 3. 161), and that in the case of direction, permission, and proper (particular) time the Potential, the Imperative and the Potential passive participles may be equally used N i f ( III. 3. i s s ) ;f as, f f Tj#w-'*ffrai w r ; f ) j f f or ffTWcft srfftRTSsf "SCWf * you may sit here *; # f f T f t : ( Me. 2 6 ) ' you may dwell on the mountaia' &c.; * you will teach the son as an honorary ^ y duty ' ; fsnjt | ^ r # f t q r 3<T m ' Sir, what shall I learn, the Veda or Logic ? ' ; ^m wm or 5W . . ( S . K.) The use of the Potential is, however, more common in these senses than that of the Imperative or the participle, 199. When, fitness is implied, the potential passive participle or this mood may be used, and sometimes the noun ii cf also; as, cf Fift <*^:, ?f ^^fPff sftsr, or cflf ^??F ftfan ( S . K.) ' thou art fit to marry the girl.' (a) Whea i capability' is implied, the Potential or the potential passive participle may be used; as, Hft z4 M%l or mx^Kmt %EW. ( S . K . ) ' you can carry, the load."

ISO

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

| 200. *Wilh interrogative words such as, f , W ( , &e* % the Potential or Simple Future is used to Imply eeasure as, S: WCt Sff $ft fltff ,f%fe^% w ' -who will censure Hari * ' (a) fWhen bonder is implied, the Simple Future' is used in preference to the Potential, when flft is not used; as, aiWPHfSt WPT <fwf OTfRf (S. K.) ' it is a wonder that the Hind man should see Krishna I *; but afflprf i f ? #8#jftl" * a woader if he study, * <B) 2811 The Potential mood is used in dependent sentences intplying the senses of hope, prayer, &c. stated in 197; as, 8fKf%SfWlf ( S. K . ) ' * I hope I- shall l e a r n ' ; ^TPffT f f| ?f; t | gftilw OTffPr (Bk. X I X . S) ' w e k d no hopes that we' should live * &e. (,) With words implying * wish * the- Potential is used in the sease of the infinitive mood when the agents of both the actions are the same ; as, sj^Wftf 5<Bf?f ( S . K . ) s= ^ ^ l ^ s f f * wslies hat he wffl e a t ' , or ' wishes t o eat. * 22 In .dependent seatences, the Potential is often used with relative words to denote' * result or purpose"'; AS, # r | Jr #Pf?PPf m l!M%#% (U. 1.) * but tell me faijdt of mine so that (in order that) it may lie rectified.* 213, f When a hope is expressed except by the word the Potential is generally used; .as, * it is my tope that you will eat *; but f hope lie lives j l f % ^ v | : CTTff ^%% m ff (Me, 88) * 1 hope yo remember yuur master, O pleasingbird, because you are Ms favourite. '(a) ^JWhen ' expectation* is implied tv sacli worit i ( i n . 8. M I ) . 3. 158) If few H # ^ W H # ^ ( I D . 8. 156)

TO SAWiKBtT COMTOSniOM

1ST

as, #W!W^ i f f f or arff TW the Potential Simple Future Is used except when t i e word zp^ is used; as, gwiT WTpf W#?f i f l i # T W^W ( S . K . ) * I expect you will T eat *; 8fff sip? WW>#J*itflrf%#s?t' ( BI&L 7 ) ' would 11 wish) t h a | the plans of the revered lady become successful f *; arfqf 3f)%?| W Vljgroftr^: (U. 2) ' may I expect that the Brahmana boy comes to life I * { Weald that lie comes to life ? ) But $*HPPnOr ^^jsfiPfRWil * 1 expect that you will eat, 5 (6) *Wfaem word expressing * wish s such, as, f^, Ss*J, \ &c., are used, the Potential or Imperative is used; as, f s # f fW Wi-f fWf ^r W ^ ( S . K . ) ' 1 wish honour will ttink Soma. * f With, the words vm, I w , W T the Potential is osed when the worf ^ occurs in the sentence; as, 1M>JfPPf!-'t!B! I I 1 ^ "W^Fs^f * It is time that yoor .ttonoar should take yomr meals.' (C) f 25. l a coniitioaal sentences In wMch one statenaemt is made to depend upon aaother as its tmmn or gwwn'i, the Potential is used in both the antecedent and the eonsefttmt clause, (otlnerwise caMed tbe protasis and apoebau}^ the former containing the condition or ground of argument, and the latter the conclusion based upon it. l i e place of *if whether- expressed or understood, is taken by W f % or %5S[; as, W ! SH". ^ff%J%ft t%?j[ TO: f ^ ^ (S*. 1) *if % our papa were here to-dmythem what would happen I *; (MM. 9 ) * if yoa roaming at will over the world, happen to see my beloved* first comfort her, i ( i n . s. 1 S T ) fewft i ( i n . & i s )

WB and then relate tbe state of Madhav ' so <p# *RJcT ffe Wept W(% &c. Qbs. Mark that %? never stands at the begianing of a sentence. 28. In conditional sentences the Present or Simple Future is often used Instead of the Potential; as, Jfft ffCcff spiff spj: (Bh. III. 97) * if the lord get up and see p j f i (you), lie will be a n g r y ' ; W % t f %affitff ( Dk. II. 6 ) * if you do not answer my questions, 1 s h a i eat y o u ' ; fwif w fif %epf ^TCCer (.S. K. ) * if he bow to Krishna, he will go happily. * , (a) Sometimes the Present is usel in the protasis aad the Potential in the apodosis ; as, rf? Wff SFffwfWWgjnj% cRpF n^% m^tT ( K. 160 ) * if Ms death take place, that also will be a great sin *; so i t fi (R. VIII. 87). The Imperative is used instead of the Potential, In the apodosis, as a polite way of speaking; as, ^ %<ST f ( S . 1) ' if any other duty should not suffer thereby, you mipht enjoy the hospitality shown to guests.' {c)> When the conditional clause is affirmative and certain m expressed by the indicative mood of the verb, or when: both members of the sentence deal with fads, the Present must be used instead of the Potential; as, * if it rains. we cannot go out * jrfV Mt wfftr i f f m not M t ^%_ &c.

mm

f* (V. i (U. 5)

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

I&9

: I ff

(K.

286) t | i f # 1 ( K . 182)

3cf; e ^ ^ l ^ P

sr f l w i f % ^ w n (c. is) !)

(H

: Jrai: 11 (Bg. i n . I wm 11 ( V e . )

# r f | |[ (Bk. XIX. 2) If (iWd 8)

PT: H (UM.

IT)

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES F O E EXERCISE

afir R T JB

140

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

WSfii ( v # 8) t it (Ku.v.&) ITPWCTfPRwPf WWWT^^ffWW II (P. 1 81 5 *ftfiw ^fesS^wiwq^ it % if (H.8)

f : II (RJUV.65)

II

(Bh. IL *)

*JfT ftfipt *ifir 1% wpf w it (Mu. l )

II ( R . v r a . ) Vfiak he was. thinking how he should accotnplisli his desired object, the whole night passed away. How possibly will he be at ease, being plunged into this gteat ocean of sorrow? May it be that her agony proceeds from- the Influence of love! You should obey your parents and teachers, speak the truth, keep coaipaay with the good, and always think #f the greatnew ef Goel.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

14|

If you go out in this pitchy darkness, and bring me towers from the gttden, I shall consider you to be of a fearless mind. Eves if Ms heart were male of stone, he would be moved to pity at seeing this heart-rending state of the woman. Having heard that strange account I was at a loss what to say or do next. One should win over a covetous man by giving Mm wsaltfa and a fool by acting according to his humour. Who but the SUB cat. cleat the sky of the pollution of nocturnal darkness ? I might overtake even Garuda if he has started before me with this speed! of the chariot. Would that the wretched Ch&nakya were woa over to the side of the Naada family? I hope (use spfwRj) your religious austerities are being varied OB without aav obstruction.

LESSON X I X Imperfect, Perfect, a o i Atriif 2? * In English there is only Ae tense referring to post time, it is the paM. indefinite or Aortal' {Howard's Note on English verb P, 12); as, * I walked. * In Sanskrit there a?e three tenses referring to a past t i m e : Imperfect, Perfect and AorisL Eaeliof these had origiaaUy a peculiar signification. In ancient works, or works composed at a time when, we have reason to believe, Sanskrit was a spoken language, they are found to be used in their exact senses; later on, as Sanskrit became less and less a spoken language, writers began to use these three tenses promfecuoush1:. The senses la which they were originally used are as follows:

142

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

The Imperfect is, according to Paini, apRRPT &W, i.e.. It denotes past action done previous to the current day, hence at a time removed from this day. The Perfect is C W fe^, i.e., it denotes past action done previous to PT this day, and which was not witnessed by the speaker, The Aorist is merely *pFf *JSt, t.e., it lias reference to a past time indefinitely or generally, without reference to any particular time. An action done before to-day m expressed by the Perfect or Imperfect j what remains for the Aorist is, therefore, to express a pasi action done very recently, say, in the course of the current day or having reference to a present act. Aorist, therefore, merely implies the completion of an action, at a past time generally, and also an action done at a very recent time, as during the eoyrse of this day. The Imperfect and Perfect are used in. narrating events of past occurrence, generally in remote past time, the Aorist is used in dialogue* and conversations which refer to recent past actions; but it is not used to denote past specified time, or to narrate events.* Thus in the whole of the Purusha-StMd (Rigwda X. 90) the Imperfect or Perfect alone is used, the events narrated referring to a past time, and in Aitareya Brahiaaa, recent actions are shown by the Aorist; as, 9" Wpr &c. i aisfpr % 4 ifpi##fijr. But later Sanskrit writers lost sight of this difference between the Imperfect, Perfect, and Aorist, and the three are found to be promiscuously used to denote merely a past action, whether recent, remote or not witnessed by the speaker; as, ?RTf ppr^Rof ffPTJf f % ai^rW% m^w mmfmn (K. i e e ) . 28. The Imperfect, besides its general use, is sometimes used to ask a question referring to a recent time; *For a fuller explanation of the difference between these three tenses, see Prof. R. G. Bhawdarkar's Second of Sanskrit, Preface to the First Edition.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

US

as, spf^fipir ST w f * ik he gone to the village f'; bat E when a remote time is implied, the Perfect alone should be used; as, qitf 5PTFT Pf? (,S. K. ) * did he kill Karnsa * ? 209. The Perfeclln the first person the Perfect denotes some distraction or unconscious state of the mind; it should not, therefore, be used ia the first person, except in this sense; as, S f | s p f ^ y ^ M W WU fa^lf (SI, XL 39) * being frenzied, 1 forsooth prated much before him. *' (a) It is also used in the first person to conceal the truth from somebody by affirming the opposite of that which is alleged against him; as, ffswnFrsft: f * didst thou % dwell in the .country of the Kalingas ? *; JfTg ^flprfo^pfpi' ( S . K . ) * I did not (so much as ) go to the Kalingas. * 210. The AorislThis tense, besides its general meaning of a recent, indefinite past time, also implies the idea of continuousness. The Imperfect cannot be used in this sense; as, ITSPtw! JfnfsaftaWTSRr (not STOIcf) * he gave food tc Bra-hmanas throughout' his life. * (a) In the case of <|TT ' formerly * not joined with W, the Imperfect, Perfect, Aorist or Present may jbe used; as, Wt% <|ft" UIW ar^TR^WJJpfi ' here formerly dwelt pupils.' But with ||T?W the Present alone is used: as, qf3f% ^tf ^ r * he formerly sacrificed.* | 211. The augment of the Aorist is tisually cut o 5 .after the particle W or TRT. I B the second person this f tense with the augment so <3ut off has the sense of the imperative mood, and in the first and third, that of the English * that * with * may' or ' might' or simply of' may'; as, W f II *raff f: (M. 4 ) ' friend, be not afraid ' ; ifcFfelf^nfr TtWIOTT I R f SRfW WT: (^'. 4 ) ! though wronged {ill-treated), do not through anger, go against (the will of > thy husband, *; *PiOTiW?fFftW!?t: i (III. 3. 135)

144

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

IT Iff u

^g lW,,.. ... -(MM. l )

May the Self-born (Cupid) aot Infatuate thee} may thy mind be not infested with dark thoughts (emotions) it is bat vain to say this or some such thing in this case.' i i (s\ m W : Wf: f ^ g l i w w ^ | (K. I T )

( K . 58) # II (U. 4)

j|

( B . I.

21)

k 11.17) ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOE EXERCISE

(Dk. II. 1)

(R. III. 14)

tO SANSKKIT COMPOSITION

145

It^fWfe'JSffTPPf it ( i t . I. 87f il |K XV. Sf f iron *pi: f pf j fj# f W f t f f i WtlflffPS TOW II (Bg. I I , 8)

When 1 knew that my friends had heard me prate in my sleep, t felt ashamed. Do BOC lie (W) anxious on this point; my fetter will take care of {W^} your son in your absence He spent the whole day in the compaay of Ms friends. BOW . toy conversing with them OH scriptural points, and BOW by engaging in drawiag pictures. Why have you spoilt my- book ?No, Sir, 1 did not evea look ( f * 0 at it. Wiiea went to see "him I did not find Mm at home. OUT father has divided the whole ancestral property that we might not afterwards qaarrel with ae aaother. The king lias stationed ( f f l ^ a&r. ) his guards aroafid all hermitages that the ascetics might not be disturbed ( aor. pass, of the carts, of 3ff^ ) in their peaaaces. 1 am giad to iiad that your attempts at Improviag the coaditioB of the poor have been crowned with success. The witnesses of the plaintiff have ail cbme; let, there* fore, the hearing of the case be proceeded with. Having spent Ms life in hunting for many years be at last accidentally fell a victim into the jaw* of a fiewe tiger. 10

146

THE STUDENT S GUIDE LESSON X X The two Futures & the Conditional

212, In English, futurity is expressed by will or shall,' in Sanskrit there are two different tenses to denote a future action; the First or Periphrastic Future, and the Second or Simple Future. The original distinction between the two is nearly the same as between Imperfect and Aorist, except this, that the latter refers to a past time, the formev to a future one; in other words, the First Future denotes an action which is not to take place in the course of the current day, while the Second Future refers to a future time generally or indefinitely, as also to a recent future action. Thus the First Future denotes a remote future time not of to-day; while the Second Future is employed to denote Indefinite future time, to-day's future time, and recent and future continuous time; as, t:^WTflfw5%W cPf 4WIT. (Mu. 5 ) ' we ourselves shall go there in five or six days '; ^....^rf^RTTC: spft%?WT ( KJ. III. 2 2 ) s they will be extirpated by Arjuna (the monkey-bannered) ! ; HWSrar (S*. 4) * S'akuntala will depart (departs) to-day '; sTiprqTTJi # WRf 5 T > : (Me, 9 ) * cranes will wait (at T5 3 T some future time) upon thee, lovely to behold, in the sky.' Writers are not so loose in the use of these two tenses, as in the use of the three past tenses. The Periphrastic Future is far less frequently used; and where it is used, it generally denotes a remote (not to-day's) future action; whi|e the Simple Future is used to denote any indefinite future action. 213. When the close proximity of a future action is intended, the Present or the Future may be used ; as, 5KT n f t ^ f t ITW if^rf% Tftanfir rr ( S . K . ) ' when will you go ? I shall just g o , ' 214. *When hope is expressed in a conditional *aTRfHWf UjiPPsSf (III. 3, 132)

TO SAX'SKKIT COMPOSITION

14?

.orm, the Aorist, the Present, or Simple Future is used 'n both, the clauses to denote a future time ; as, %f?%5WWi? 2pff% srfa-arfer m w r ^ ^ p ^ m wmt mmwt *n ( s . K . ) s if it were to rain we should sow corn.' 215, Sometimes the Simple Future is used in the sense of the Imperative as a courteous way of telling one to do a thing ; as, ?KT WT 7RTRi5?wf% ( H. I ) ' afterwards cut my bonds ' ; so tppWTtTC Jffe 'rfip^C *ST*R! ?RF (V. 4) * this corresponds to the polite form of expression in English *; as, ' you will see me at the station to-morrow at twelve noon. ' | 21. The Conditional is used in those conditional sentences in which the non-performance of the action is implied, or ' where the falsity of the antecedent is implied as a matter of fact. * It usually corresponds to the English pluperfect Conditional and must in Sanskrit be used in both the antecedent and the consequent clauses; as, jrf? 4) * if you had felt (which you clearly have not) the fragrant smell of her breath, would you have had any liking for this lotus ' ? Bhatti's use of the Condifional (Canto 21) is much wider, but it is not supported by classical usage. N. B.The Sanskrit Conditional should not be used in those conditional sentences, where it is merely implied that under a supposed condition, such a consequence would follow ; as, * if lie were here, he would defend his country bravely ' ; * if I could agree to his your plan ,1 would rather die than live.' In translating such sentences the Potential is used; as. qt< tSW l!%%ft "Sflrfff

148

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE Additional Remarks on the use of the Tet8 & f t e t i s

217, The intricacies and detaib of the several forms of the Present. Past, and Future are not found in SanskritThere is one principal tense, and the different forms a r e usually expressed by that tease. Even in English formslike the future progressive passive, future progressive passive continuous, are of a modern growth, and are not of frequent occurrence. Hence it is that a student of Sanskrit generally finds it difficult to translate the multifarious forms of these tenses into their corresponding Sanskrit equivalents. Some Hats on this point are givea In tHfe following sectioE88 stating in more detail what has feeea given im the three preceding lessons. Present, Past, and Ptdure 218. As before observed, the Preseot tense ia itssimple form (called the present indefinite) has i t Sanskrit most of the senses which it has ia English ( 186). TheEnglish, Past tense has according to the usage of classical authors at least, come to be expressed by any of the three tenses referring to a past action, and future time is generally denoted by the two Future forms ia Sanskrit, and sometimes by the Potential mood ( 198), But the several forms of the different tenses are not considered by Sanskrit writers; if they are to be translated into Sanskrit, other forms have to be used for them. 211. The cmtimuom forms, called * present continuous,* * past continuous, * and * future continuous, *' may be generally translated into Sanskrit by merely putting the simple forms of the tenses; as, * lie is studying Ms lesson ' 1 ITSfftfr, and not spftaffitefcf; for the progressive or continuous form is a irm or strict present tense (Baia's Cram/mar, P. 186); * the boys are now playing! fTOFf 3pjff

TO SANSKBTT COMPOSITION

149

; ' the sun was shining * lfc?Tf^ (. not ?PPf STRfft(); he wilt be preparing his lesson * Sf TPOT^ifwpt. Ofe. The present participle with OT^ Is used in those cases where a -regular continuity of action is intended to be expressed, such as is stated * a 145. When these conti* nuous forms occur in subordinate sentences* the locative absolute of the present participle may be conveniently used; ' while the minister wag -speaking, a messenger entered tne assembly * WfWWf%*rf?% UfW^jp": IWf SfffflRlf. 220. The emphatic forms, which exist only for the I*r*seiit and Past, may* be translated by i^f, |Sf, fR|, or soiae srnch word expressing certainty, with the simple forms; as, * I do consider tfaee guilty * afg ^Wip", or !pf tff..,,*p}"; ' he did tell a lie or W W Perfect and its coniimuous Forms 221. The Present Perfect is more strictly by the Aorist, or by the past participle of the root; as, 4 what sia T have committed by d a y ' h 4 1 have done my work * SRf < T w f ?fwfeF!P[; or sometimes O by the Imperfect, and the Perfect also ; as, * he jtas finished his speech * tf HTWWffWffW or ^fWTIS^I^I^ or PCTR| or Rrrcnr. 222. The Past Perfect or Pluperfect nifty in depeoient sentences be translated by the locative absolute or gerund; as s * when he had departed I came back ' ; * after I had prepared my lessons, I went to school * or sometimes by the past participle alone ; as, * 1 said to Mm who had tl .us sp6ke * go now * f f3|f?pra' W nwtwfWfWW ; ' he cured Mm who had km wounded 223. The Future Perfect may be expressed by the Potential of W with the past part, of the v e r b ; or better*

150

THE STUDENT'S GOIDE

by the passive or Impersonal construction ; ' a s , lie will have gone there by this t i m e ' w i # r S m mt 1%^T, or |T <Pt *Rtf. 224. The Perfect continuous forms * I have been doing,' s I had been doing,' ' I shall have been doing,' may be translated by (a) the simple tense with words of time ; as, ?ffr f%^ffefS?T: ( H . C. 2) ; (b) by present participles with the corresponding teases of 3FRF, W or FIT ( 145); or (c) more Idiomatically, by the genitive of the present participle, made to qualify the subject, with words expressive of time ; as, * 1 have been doing it for three days' 3p$3pftft xft[ j%fspf gjTij; 'how long had he been staying there ' ? O T T W ftfR? f W T *m$ ssRffcT:. 22!k The prospective or intentional forms, i.e., * he Is going or is about to d o , ! * he was' about to d o ' and s he will be about to d o , ' may be expressed by the words . joined to the Infinitive-of the verbs (18l) ; as, f f e ^T; and in subordinate sentences,, they may be translated by the future participles also ; as, * when he was about to go I spoke to him thus * rf Witt and Shall 226. ShaM In the 1st person aad will ia the 2nd and 3rd persons expressing mere futurity, may be translated by the Simple Future or Potential; as s * I shall do it * or spftwrf^r ; ' he will go there * W ?!W TOT or 2?7. WiH in the 1st person showing * intention or resolution on the part of the agent 9 may be expressed by the Present tense of verbs meaning s to wish, * or more generally by the Simple Future with V& or similar' words showing cert-ainty; as, * I will do i t s 3ff flfSF^fapssrfir or generally anf T w f t ^ r t t ^ ; 4 even if death be the result, I o it,'

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

151

228. Shall in the 2nd and 3rd persorfe, showiag (1) command or threat, or self-determination on the part of the speaker may be translated by the Poteatial mood or by some word meaning ' to command ' such as, ^MP^, or by the Future of the causal of the verb, the subject of the causal being the speaker; as s the son. shall obey his father * *pf: PffTHFrWi^f ; * thou shall go to the castle,' i.e., ' 1 command tfaee to go s&c.f *j?r i he shall do i t ' 3Hf ft f^lKlq||fq' ( 3Hf,# JpfftWTpT &c j or sometimes by the use of the potential passive participle with or without <p", 31337 &c. as, * thou shalt not kill him * <SRIT If W if?W:; ' thou siialf not move evea a step from this place * aqTFn^WFn?Kf?I^lft W ?HW ( 2 ) When sfeail shows prm^M, it may be translated fay the Potential or Simple Futme of the verb with a word expressing 4 certainty'; as, * lie shall be my prime minister' W *PT ^ l rf or ff 229. SAall in indirect speeches, expressing futurity in all persons, may be expressed by the Simple Future or Potential; as, * you say you shall do it * ;f# ft ffgf *Jjf W . Wfl showing determination on the part of *he ^ e n t and used ia all persons, may he translated as in 227. 5 He says he will write * ffigift$i i&fawfltg' 230. Will and Shall occurring ia interrogative sentences in aH persons except the 1st, and expressing will or tvish on the part of the person interrogated, may be translated by the Potential or Imperative when referring to another's will, and by roots meaning ' wish '.when referring to the will of the subject of the sentence; as, * shall I or lie go ' t trs#sf or *P3TfJr f , T^'^ (W^g) f%; ' shall you" % go * f irsss f or #?j WjWfW f ; s wiU you or he go ' ? % % *jftr33r or" ^ ^ 9 " f%; but when will interrogatively used merely refers to futurity, the Simple Future Is used; &s,

152

THE STUDENT'S GtJEPE

* will he go there * ? ?Pf ffipftt" f ; ' mitt you come to my % tease-? m. ^fOTlfoanr ff. Skmdi aad WmM

| 231. ShmM expressing contingent futurity, obligation or duty, is translated by the Potential mood ( 198), or by the potential passive participle; when It shows some doubt or difflience as, in * I should think s o , ' we may say Iff % feft: or lif:, 25B Would showing contingency or wish is expressed by the Potential ( 19S): when it shows kaMtnal action it may be translated by the Present tense alone; as, itisf wrfir 'tm&d pass Ms t i m e ' ; m% *r wm wrowfar i # (S*. *) * she w&uM mot drink water first * ; ' mmM that he were present' f f t ^ W ifcffff: WR| f^ ^ f i ?ftw^ 1%^. {a\ l a intoxogaft'e sentences, wottH and should are translated much ia the sanie way as * will, * and * shall *;
J or he go out * ? ff|!#8ifIFSBT^T ( T 8 ^ [ or

" teW yo do this ? ' ^ % 3 W f ^ W ae*ordlng to the sense. May (might) aod Can (could)

1% or

| 238* May in its senses of * possibility ' * permission, * * purpose * is estwested by the Potential; as, awtffatffifftF ^ff^UWlfe * I come here every day that I may play at dice *; b a t wlieo it expresses a wish, It is .translated by the Potential, the Imperative, or Beaedictive. 234. Can (emid) always shows power, and not per, and is expressed in Sanskrit by woris meaning * to be able * with the Infinitive of the main v e r b ; as,, * 1 ca do it * tgf^ WltPfg f W : , TOlft At. | 235. Might is usually expressed by the Potential as, 4 It <migM be s o ' x$i fff^; or metimes by usiag the potential passive participle; as s he might be my friend"

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

Ml

\a) 3tigU used wira tae rertect tease may be by the potential or past passive participle when it denotes * poasMtUy *; as 8 he might tare done It * I i so also * I emM have lone It * t

236. Must In Its seas of * necessity, * * force from without,' * cetcainty or nvemswf inference * is always expressed %y the potential passive participle; as " you must go * ?ff! tfwsf; * he must obey m e ' 8ff I 231. Ougkl is exprewei in the snae w a y ; as* -y to learn it* S^Rtt (snpfif) W^W^, a n d s o n t a by the Infinitive with afl^. Used with the Perfect tense, mutt ad ougM may be trandateci by the Potential with a past participle or fay the potential passive participle: as, ke must have come home * W I Ifffffft" H%^[ or f [ f (M. 4 ) * she ought to have asked yu so ' ; 4 you ot^At to have told me this * f f !WT ^ The Subjmmdive Mood 238. There are three principal forms ia which- the Subjunctive mood occurs in E a g l s h ; the present, past and pluperfect. Whea the Subjunctive mood is used in the present in dependent clauses, governed by vetbs of * command, ' ' advise ' ftc, is. used after verbs of htjMBg, praying Ac. and after lest, it shouM be translated in Sanskrit by the Potential mood or Imperative; as, *I order that he be hanged'' f WSPfRWcf * afRNfif 5WfWWWfl%; * I * * hope I cam out successful in this affair/ f or arfir TW f*W%W ( 208) ; * save" has, lest her indisposition increase * ^f^WW!%^t Tfl^ I W T 239. In cooditional sentence where the Subjunctive is expressed by the Preseat tease ia both the clauses, i t

154

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

may be translated according to 206; as, * if you go I go * " qfe jnj jpsusj- (ifftrspf or W$M ) tff% Wf JfswPf ( or f ^ f ) ; if it rain we shall not be able to go o u t ' W^F (^f?T wf%Wf% m) iff *Rf wff>fcj 5PFWTPT ( T 240. Whe the Subjunctive mood occurs in conditioaal sentence with the Past tease, the Potential mood is used in both the clauses ; ' if he were here, he would accompany me ' W m !%WWiT iflW^W. Biwwhen the past subjunctive implies a denial or falsity of the antecedent, the Potential cannot be used, but the Conditional ( 216); as, ' if the book were in the library (as it is not), it should be given to you ' Jrfsr StJpRJ tsjT^SWflBffrff tfS&tvi mms. Thus ia translating the three sentences ' i f the book is (as 1 know it is) in the library, you may take i t , ' 4 if it fee ( I am uncertain) there, you may take i t , ' and * if it were (as I know it is not) you might take i t , ! the Present or Potential may be used in the first two, and the Conditional In the last. | 241. The Pluperfect Conditional is always expressed by the Sanskrit Conditional ( 2l<i).

(p. c?#i t
(K.

ii7)

(Dk..n.8)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

15S

ffitcfT I 3 3 (Dk. I I JFT TT ^ ^

air W R J ^ r e ^ n s w ' r a T T %a n ( K . V I , cRI: f * II I I II (MM. 9) (R. XV. 47)

it (s*. 7)

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE

s I (Mu. 5)

iff f!W JW ffesff ^Pf ^ 3 ^ ^ ^ II (Su.)

(Ku.VII.60) ?rn

15S

THE STUDENT'S GOIDS I f f fWIWf ijflRftff wt<pwpwli! n {Bg. n . 52-3) f t SJWft ^JpsfT WW% W P | 1 (Bg, I I . 85) 1 %spi#irow #rir ftpwuir it (Bg. x v m . 58) OTf ^ p ? ^ f ft^^fti^fe II (Ku. IV, 42)

Let all the subjects be informed that Chaniragupta Mmself will heficeforth look to the affairs of the state. You will get your desired object, if you only attempt to get it, * All t h i s , ' said the sage, * will happen (<K with w) in the Kafi age yet to come, and men will commit various sins. * If that boy had been brought up with care from Ms childhood, I- am sure ne would have now grown as old as this boy. Rien4s will swarm round a man by tiundreds in days of prosperity, but in adversity they will leave hiai. If a Mag were not prompt in inflicting punishment on 'iGfoulters. the stroager would prey upon the weaker. M you ami Gop&la were here, you could iiardly bear to see the dreadful sight. A- stag once proudly said to Mmself that If Ms legs had been similar to his horns, no animal on the earth would have been able to equal (tp?). him in beauty. If Rlma had not goae there just at the moment, the whole house would have been burnt down.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION'

15f

Had I not then remained quite i&dUferent, I should have Incurred the displeasure of the king. That he would now come back and Joyfully spend hi? 4ays with as, is next to impossible. H a l 1 but served my God with half the zeal I served my King Jbe would not have given me over Baked to my enemies.

LESSON X X I Particles , a w , w P i f w , arfir, erftr, A , m^ &

242. There are several particles given under the head of * Avyaym1 la Panini, Aiuarako&aa, and la the GanandnafBokodadhi of Vardhamtaa. Some of them are very useful as short connecting wordss and, as such, then meaniag must be accurately understood. Some of the more common of suck particles are considered In this and the next seven lessons. 248. *Wf by itself is used as a vocative particle; as, ^ f e f ( G . M . ) ' hence, Sir, I think the M&lati flower was somewhere tasted by a young bee *; 3W JpfwRfsrsfr cTRT: ( K . 2 2 1 ) ; SVfff 3PPiFIPPi *ft 11R^I% f Mv. 8 }; or as a particle Rowing respect oi peverenee j as, 3TT f%fWMWlWW7 (G. M.) * learned Sir, teach M&ttavaka. * (a) 1% is sometimes ased with ft aad means much the same as f%W or ftfJT: l how much more,' ' how much less '; as s ^if W ^ ^ f T O W f f%*fT WPTOfWH I^T (P. 1- 1) ' rich persons (even) have need of a blade of-grass j muck more of a man po*essed of speech and hands.' (n.

158

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

244. *3W is used in these senses :(I) As, a sigu of au-spieiousness ; SfTO*! ^pferWT (S. B.) ' henceforth the inquiry about Brahma '; (2) marking the beginning of a statementi 3p|?irR^% ffefk ?pf ( P . I I . ) ' n o w (here) begins the second Tantra (book)'; (3) ' afterwards,' ' then '; apr SPTPTPrfTO SPUt PTW # ^ J J # f (R. II. 1) ' afterwards the lord of men in the morning let loose the cow to go to the forest'; often used as a correlative of qfe or %^ in this sense ; n (S 1 .7); (4) asking a question; cf ( 6 . M.); often with the interrogative word itself m m fmwmm M : H?ft (S\ 7 ) ; (5) ' and,' ' also '; wWOTT*?: (G. M.) ' Bhimaand fas well as) ArjuEa '; *rfoRrvpq *{ESX ^ f e # (Mk. 1) ' Mathematics as also the Kaus'iM a r t ' ; (6)* if,'' supposing that,' * in case '; n ( K . 144) ' if you have a curiosity, I shall relate ( i t ) ' ; 3Pf ^ (Ve, 3 ) ' in ease (but if) death is certain to befall man '; ( 7 ) ' totality, ' ' entirety ' ; 3IW ( G. M.) ' we shall explain the whole Duty (duty in its e n t i r e t y ) s ; (8) * doubt,' ' uncertainty'; *R*t fe^WfPf? ( 6 . VL). Obs. Lexicons mention also SjffPR; * 3JW W^TW.' * but (I) and (2) and 3rfWlR are identical, in-as-mueh as they all mark the beginning of a statement; so also Bp^T^T (reemploymeot of the same word in a subsequent part of the sentence) and 5Tf%lT (affirmation, proposition). 245. 3W joined with f means ' what else,' ' yes,' f % * exactltfso *; as, 3FBK:-%S SR^TTPRf I %?:3frf% (Mk. S) * S'akara'-has the carriage arrived ? Servantyes, (exactly).* (a) 3PT IT is used like the disjunctive ' or ' in English ; but more generally it is used to correct or modify a former fBTRlt

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

159

statement in the sense of ' or why * * or rathera; as, # # f ?f WfTOfipr ST ^T%W Pi? fHR (U. 6 ) ' why am I nnt % J shattered to thousands of pieces ?or why ( I should say so) what is Impossible to be done by Rama ?' 24 The gerundive participle arfef^r is used in the sense of ' regarding, * ' with respect to,' ' referring to, * and governs the Accusative} as, gp (S f . 1) * but referring to which season stall I sing " ? J is used in the same way in the sense of * with reference to,! * towards'; as, STJ^jffW SRR<t ( H . 4) ' h e set out towards his town *; fefrffWffif IFPft WcWW tf%9T: *=: ( S'. 5 ) ' with what object (with reference to what) may these sages have been seat to roe * ? 24?,, *arfi' has the following senses :(1) * Though, ' am if; nfJWtsPr FOWI#: f Bh. II. 95) '"though made to fall down by the strokes of the hand *; (2) * even V WPTftn?-, ( S ' , 1 ) ' this sleader-Bodied girl appears more charming even by means- of the bark-garment'; (3) * also,' * and also,' * on one's part'/ { Dk. I. 1) ' the Mng, on. his part, (and the king also) accepted the words of the sage and remained (quiet)'; f TPfflT: TffecIT: ( P . I.) s Vish?s arman, on Ms part, taught the Princes';TO" ftfa% ( ?g% )(S. K . ) ftw ajfa sprinkle and pray '; ^ f e % wfewtflct^f (S # . 1) ' I have also a sisterly affection for them '; (4) In asking gsiestions, in which case it is used first; srPr ?TTt WWl' (S'. 1) ' i s your penance prospering'?; W^WJt^H (U. 2) s eaa (may) this be tbft penance-foresb ? ; (5) ' Doubt' or * uncertainly '; 3i# #clw%g; (G. M.) s m a y he be a t h i e f ? ' ( I am not certain about i t ) ; (8) ' Mope,5 ' expectation ';
A

3!w

160

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

iffPlfe*|: (0,2) * 1 hope the Br&hmana boy trill eome to life.' Obs. I n the last sense srff is generally joined with fPf; ?Wff *T WTHZ: grot 5 ? W*PRJjplf?r (IT. 2) * then 1 IW expect that Rama will again grace this forest (with Ms presence). * Mote.Other senses are also mentioned; as Iff * censure *; f^ v; (S. K.) s fie upon Beradatta, he will even praise a S'ucira * |so culpable is be); KI^F * the sense of word understood '; frfwtff WRF (S.-K.) ' even a drop of clariied butter *; and fOTWRPWT or w w f ' permission to do as one i k e s . ' ; 4ft ?ff ' you may pray, (if you like)'; so a#F f ^ ^ f f fctJIFriT^wpgW' ?TOCT (Bk. VIII. 92). (a) After words expressing number 3ffir has 'tire sense of * totality *; as, f f l f f TUt wl^W (P. I. 1) ' kings have need of all' (not excluding even one)*; so 'ftpjfjfff Wlfe^. (6) Joined to interrogative proaouas and their- derivatives, it has the seme of * any, * and sometimes that of * indescrib a b l e / see 135. (c) Wf%~?WTf% are correlatives, aad meam ' though yet still or nevertheless.' 248, *8ffr is used (I) as a gentle adaress in the sense of 'friend, prythee'; as, arf?f f%%?^wraif%%r ( M . I ) 4 friend,you have said something void of judgment *; lff% qn 1 ^W1^OT% Iff # % (U. 4) * O darling Sita, born from the sacrifice to the gods *; (2) l a asking a gentle question;. arfir #ft3WW * f f e (Kn. IV. 8) ' lord of my life-, art tkou alive * ? 24i 3"% is principally used to fexpress (1) * surprise* woader f;-3(ik wmw^t{V. 5) ' O h ! it is the revered Arundhati'; so sr$ TOf ^ W T : ^mt (V. 5 ) ; (2) * grief, r * dejection, * fear ' ; 3ft tWTK fWIWlfl'ftff'W'l (Mu. 2)
4

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

181

* alas f this is the state of a servant of the fetes-like feet of His Majesty." 250. faffi is fotcu to denote (1) joy, astonishment or amaaeme'nt, ano (2) grief or excessive torment; 3T$3 : (Bh. II. 8 5 ) ' Oh, the greatness of the life of the great is indeed infinite I *; $g wfe: (UL 2 ) * O h ! it is a terrible ttonder-stroke *; fe f i t : (Bh. I I I . 110) * Oh, Alas, the folly of the creator P S 251. *Hft (1) is % vocative particle; as, * O Mags s ; (2) It is very generally used with adjectives ami mouas Ip the sense of * .Oft',4 O how ' expressive of joy, grief, or sorrow; as, argfr WWIW ffSWRf <?f (S*. 1) * O how pleasing Is the sight of these girls ! ' ; 8Hft f f (ML 2) *Oh! the faultlessness of beauty in a l states.!* Chow faultless is beauty &c.); ai^t ftfW*. (U. 4) * Oh tMs change of state I*; lift 3 ^ ^ % %9^T: (U. 4) \ (S)itsometbmm denotes snrprise as caused by meeting with some p a w n or thing unexpectedly; as, 8Hft l ^ f e f l f ^ r (M. II 4 Oh, It is Bakul&valikft!'

(S r . 8) i C s ' 2 ) i i mm # i (V. 1)

f t f f f t II (%.)

162

THE STUDENT'S (U. 4) aw

46)

: | (K. 120)

: jrf?W: 1 {Mu,

few: I ( u . 4) I (R. XV. 78)

ABBITIONAL SENTENCES FOK EXERCISE (M. a ) i (u. i)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

16$

(Mu. I )

I (K. 160) : i sift

TTWIW

sff^sr fefewt w f e ^ r : i (Mu. i ) ftt (S'. s) i

(R.

v . 4)

It n (R. VIII.48)

(Ku. V. 33) IT ^ ^ % ^ ^ I | f e It (Bg. II. 26)

JfTfcftTW II (S'. I )

Even a fool should not be disrespected; rnuMi less a iearned. man. But suppose you take the there perforce, my mind will still be directed to my beloved, the sole object of ray loym.

164

otas

STUOBMT'S GUIDE

MasterHave you done the work 1 told you to do ServantYes; it Is long since I 4d it' TMs Wng Reserves praise for protecting Ms subjects well; or why, it is the very duty of kings to do so. The boy, about whom 1 am speaking, is very sharp.. "He who gets angry for *a definite cause is appeasei as SOOE as that cause is removed. At this the God, Vishnu went to the house of Garuda. He, in bis turn, came out hastily to receive his wftrthy master. is it likely that my desires will be fulfilled ? flow pitiable is the condition of f hese distressed pereoas I I t will inake even a heart of stone relent. Oh the serene b vxty of this lovely gaxi&n. I How full cf obstacle* Is tae accomplishment of oae's flesired object f j l W ! J have spent away my whole time in gambBag, and whom have I to blame but myself ? Oh I it is my own ring j I hve been searching for it these eight days. Where did you Had it ? I am tired of walking j prythee, let us now go home. I hope yew remember the man regarding whom I spoke to you a month back. LESSON X X I I m 3ft, air:, f # l , f f , w , q i , tf, 252* *W besides its meanings of * till' and 'from (see 84) has the sense o ' a little, somewhat, * and is. equivalent to the English ish in.' blackish' &c. I t is prefixed to adjectives ; as, 3ftfcpT& ' a little tawny *; WPRTFft

TO S4SSKBIT COMPOSITION

165

fff%9T: (M. 3 ) ' with the warbllngs of cuckoos somewhat drunk with passion. * The use of W with verbs is WjJl-known. (a) fWT is sometimes used in. recollecting past events ; as, 3 F ^W f%^ 15T#lf (U, 8) * Aii! such indeed was then the T ease 1; and sometimes, merely as an expletive ; as, 3ft ^W HWRUG. M.) 8 258. *WT is used in, recollecting & past occurrence, and is .sometimes nised as an enclitic particle, slewing determination ; as, f%fPT t^^ ('GPRffc feslw)<ft (U. 2 ) * is this Surely the Dandakk forest ? * (looking .all around) * Oh 'yes, * (I now recollect); arr f^TPT JrfafStefar (G. M.) * indeed, I have awakened after a long time. * (a) Occasionally it is used in giving .answers la the snse of ' yes '; as. W iJs^F." flWRlll'! 5Pffe%# ^ ; (M. I )"'ve, F that person standing near the queen, was seen in a picture.' 254. Jsrr: is used to denote ' paia * or ' anger *; a% 3TT: # j (G. M.) ' Oh, how chill it is t * 3TT: mwmTv tPK9"f!W: (U. 1 ) , ' Ah J is there still d^tarb&nce from demons' f 255. Tbe particle ffe" is most generally aseei to report the very words spokea or supposed to be spoken b j m e one as expressed by the direct comlructiim ia English, I t takes the place of the quotation marks or * that' occurriag-in oblique nawations, and is used at the ead of tle words of a speaker wltieii are quoted; as, WIFatfW XHfmpa^ i P I T O m^4 w | t w ^Iwfgwwf #fe (Mia 6 ) s i Jiave been ordered, by the Mag's brother-in-law Sth&,varaka come with, the carriage to the old garden *; (K. *ose of the two young sages says, *,I have conie to ask t Wf SPJjgd! f^ft 1IW I (St.)

168

THP STUDENT'S GUI'

for the rosary of beads, * o f ' says thai he has come to a s k ' &c, Obg. In translating oblique constructions Into Sanskrit, the words as they would stand in tKe direct censtruction x e translated witL f& at the end of the words quoted; Mlteta said to me that be would giv% me money whenevei I wanted it * wit (a) The pirticlefft", being in this sense -used to Indicate an assertion, -requires tbat aff the conditions of a distinct assertion or proposition should be fulfilled, i.e., there must be at least a subject and a verb hx jthe sentence quoted;. as, ^ T R ^ ifK? f ^ ^ f l '.f: (S'i, 1. 9) *-he by degrees recognized Mm to 6c Nlirada'; artf% W i w t f e (R. XIV. 4) " 1 know her to 6e .Innocent (guiltless).* Here it would be wrong to say 'RPJJJ nT?f'R*nftf^' W. or ftt J If f% be not used, the accusative may b e used, 25$. * Besides this general sense, fflftaas the following, senses :-(1) * Cause \ as expressed la English, by ' because *, * sinceT, * on the growni tlat V f ! % ! ? # % 'J^Fft' V: JfT^lr WPirar (U. 1) *I ask you because I am stranger, who isthis soB-IaJaw ; S^RT^lSPfH^r Hr^KwW': (M. 1) * of Mm. Who is afraid of (shrinks from) a contest an the grovma that he has secured a footing'; (2) * purpose * or * motive *; i f t o l f^%fftwf?f?riTOflf?l-c^ I W F W QL. 82Q)* Ibroaght the body up t h a t ' i t should not be destroyed* (lest it be destroyed); (3) * thus f to-mark the conclusion ; "iffF W * thus (ends) the third act'; i ^ *PT. ?f% S ^ # f 'earth, w a t e r . . . .these are the dravyas ' ; (4) ''-of this description * ; f^Pf-TOtf- lft(Ki. XI. 10) 'having clasped "m his arms Mm who* |?f! wif i

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

'

107

had said s o * ; iftVPft fRftff stlfe * Jati (kind) is of this nature or description, as, a cow, a horse, an elephant*; (5) * as follows \ * to the following effect \ In denoting what is related afterwards; TWrfVfpft fftftc'ppr (R. X I I I . 1) ' Hari by rfarae (in the form of) Ii&ma, said as follows '; (0) * in the capacity of, * as regards *, a ' for * t o slio'v the capacity In which a thing is considered ; as, fflffif 1" <pr:, a f a t m f% fa*8T: ' a s a fatlicr, he must be respected, as a teacher, ccusurcd *; (5ftarf*I% ^ t 'fipjWfMtr f%pfW ?%?T (S'.-3)'as for (doingit) quickly, it Is easy; as for (doing it) secretly, it is a question (must be thought t o f ) ' ; (7) ' an opinion accepted '; lp?TfTOffe (G. M.) * such is the opinion ct Apis'aii'; (S) * an illustratiqn *.; f f f e ftf # w f t ? 5 I # araPTfOT: (Chandraloka). Ob$. The senses WW-aadJWff are allied to eacH other; while SffW, SWSF and TORf -are very rare. (a) ffe is joined, to % to form a strong question, why indeed ", * viixy to be sure *; flClWTfflPCWfff $Wt m ^m 5B#^#ff fej (Ku. V. 44) * why indeed haVe you cast off "raameBts, a n i put on, la your youth, a barkgarment befitting (only) old age*? | 257 %^ is generally used to show comparison, and is put after the standar.1 of comparison; as, Wfiflf ~%9 : (K. 5) * lie was like Yainateya who gave delight to Vinatt ' (or * those who submitted, to Mm ' ) ; WfFR; affw ^W * the ocean-like worldly existence. * Obs. The words connected by ?cf must be ia the same case } Tf^tf*Tf sr?n|g%!t ^ ^ # ? ? # (K. 181)* he saw a girt who was like the earth, whose surface is filled with water I who supported her body by means of water) *; fW % ? % W fffWFpfeT f^nftMrnftfewr ( K . 51) 'lohabited by amorous people who followed their Meads like day following the sun. * (G. M.

188

'

me

STUDENT'S GUIDE

(a], Its other senses are:-(1) *a little \ *mtnewkat' 8S3TC fHW (G. M. ) * he is somewhat tawny *; (2) * as if; * os it were *,; ijWPfl?ftf ftsfT^^ftw Wfft" (S'. 1) * I, as it were, see (before me) Pinakin following a deer *j aft m p l ^ ^T^sf (K. 5) * who, as if, laughed at (ridiculed) Vasudeva.' (b) f t is added to interrogative pronouns and their derivatives, in the sense of ' possibly \ ' I shmM like to know T, * indeed \ as, f%fff tffantsqr f%fipf ff *f <pf ^Wf^; (U 6} * what possibly (I should like to know) will not be distressful to the lord of Raghus separated from the queen Sfta *; ^mm%: jft%: spffipf ^M %^ %m: (Mu. 8) * how possibly should a dependent person know the taste of happiness 9? | 258. | W Is generally used in the sense of , s or ', to express different alternatives, and is, ia this sease, usually tfee correlative of f * whether \ the place of 3?T beiog also % taken by ajjft, WT^,W1ftf?f^; as, nmn ppfe*? ^ R W H t l f wgn$ warn wfm T^m^s^mr^^^^mfm(K. isi) * I know not whether this "is worthy of your bark-garments, or suitable to yoor matted 'hair; whether It befits your penance, or forms part of your .religious instructions,* {a} vJ?T wken repeated, has tfas sense of * eifM&ror' as, -^^W Wt ^IfJiT Tr*f^nnT: (G. M.) * one thing only is preferred by omen, either a kingdom (sovereignty) or a | 25. Used by itself OT haS these senses :(\) ' doubt' ,tmcer^iint '., * guess *; ^ f i f f l ^ f | W : (G. M.J 6 may it be a -post or a liftman being , (2) ia asking a question ; *Kf tt: qfilHdw (ibid.) * will the stick fall' I Ob*. The sense 'SRf*! is very rate, 260. m% is most frequently used to strengthen aad emfhasize the idea expressed by a word. In this sense it may be variously rendered, by * just *, '5 same ', * ve ry % t <*RI JW^ fe^ W ^ W ^ f t ^ ^ ; I

TO- SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

169

* only ', * alone * * already ' , ' the very moment,' * scarcely" **j n&, ii;f%i exactly so *, * just .so '; aiwfopfF f*fd|^r: J f i J ^f xgjf (Blu XI. 40) * that very man. (tne same man) devoid of the warmth of wealth'; m tPq%*I#rflf?fT ifci (Ku. I l l , 63) ' she was told by 'iva only the truth * {nothing but the t r u t h ) ; ifFif?f M%wroif|OT: ( K. 5 ) * who ' brdke through the hearts of Ms enemies only by Ms name '; 37ftsrcW ^?m4t ^rffer *ftfat V& m^ (R. J. 87) 'since she is here the moment her name was uttered * (immediately on mentioning her name) ?rf?Rpapfa %T (U. 4>) * It will take place. s * 2S1. * ^ is most frequently used in the sense of to \ * 'thus', * in this manner-', feither with feference to what p-eeedes or follows, or in giving directions to do a certain, thing; as, C[MWW: ^ P M ^ : SRTfl^T (K. 151) * Rapifijala, thus addressed fby me), replied. * (a) It is also used to show * assent * (yes, indeed); as, ip^tetjF (tf. I ) * quite so,' 6 yes. you are right'; yes, we shall do so, * 06*. ^W is rarely used to show * likeness * or ' determination. * 292. fsftff is not a particle of frequent occurrence. I t is generally used to mark an auspicious beginning; as, sff srfifif!# 2Tt%f; or to mark the conclusion of a sacred ritual or prayer, in the sense of ' amen s; Wip W: W1?: ? f ^ . (a) It occurs in classical literature in the sense of * yeg, * ' vetij well,'' signifying *' assent s s o r s approbation * ; as, aftfWOT^FirTO!: (Mai. a) let the minister be told, * I shall do so (very well) ! J f s # ^ % ? f # WK: ( S . D . I ) .

.5)

170

THE STUDENT'S

&uiro:

( S ' 1) (S'. 4) (U.'I) (H. 2)

mm

MM :
(K.

155)

e n : ^ : I (M. 1)

( H . 1.)

II ( u . 6) ( s r . 4) I ^ T I (Mk. 5 ) RT

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE

IT-

i i

(K.

33)

I (K. 812} II (M. l ) f wrotsf

(s r . 8) II (Ku, IV.30) fPCf: f l f c W f ^ W ^ l t i ^ f w f e l f e ^ II ( B , V I I I . 89 j *n i (MM. !

1

; (I | R . XIV. 841

A wicked person is not to be trusted because he speaks sweet words. He has.beea staying here for the last two months that he might be acquainted with the learned men of the city. He, hastily coming, up to m j , as if enraged, said that I had greatly offended him.

172

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

That misfortunes never come singly is a wise saying often realized by men in this world. When the enemies fell upon us like so many hall-stopes, we did not know what to do. Not being fed with food for a long time, he became, as it were, ready to die. The whole world considers me to be powerless because I do not harm any body. Immediately on hearing my vprds, the rash.maa, with only one attendant, became ready to run the risk. I do not kno# what to do next; whether I should stay ia this town, or leave it. He remained thinking whether the persoa standing before him was his enemy % or some spy disguised as a ascetie, or actually some beggar needing protection.

LESSON X X I H mm., f

283. * l#55fW implies some hope expressed by the speaker, aad has the sense of ' I hope t h a t / &c. It is interrogative in form, in which the expected answer is * yes' or * MO 5 according to the form of the question ; as, fifWfft" Wftft^fjpjSTpf f>f^Fcj[ ( B . V. 8 ) * are your ho'y waters undisturbed 5 ? (I hope they are &c.); spf^ST WFUfeOT^ SinWiJTreTOt (ibid, 8 ) ' I hope no accident, such as a hurricane, befals the trees in the hermitage * ( no, it does* n o t ) . 264. f f f means ' where'; and when it is repeated with two o^inore -assertions, it denotes great differ^ice, or excess-ive * HffH fpistl>t f (ar.)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

ITS

incongruity or unfitness, as, ff ^ f w i t ^5f: ff wfe:' (R. I. 2) * where the race torn from the San, and ^here (my) Intellect of a limited scope * (there is a very great distance between the two, the intellect being quite ipable to describe the race)^ OT: Pf i d r f sf f ^PR? W%; (Ku. V. 4) * what a great Incongruity is these between penance and thy body s (thy delicate body is unfitted to practise penance). 2S5. % W f means ' at will *, 4 to one's satisfaction *; but Its most general use in classical literature is in the sense of * granted that,' ''admitting/ ' supposing for a Moment', being usually followed by 5 or OTTfr o*r a similar word as its correlative; as, W ? T Hf^fj WFRPJWif W f H 5 3[felWT: (S'. 1) ' granted (admitting) 5 that she does not stand facing me, still her glance is for the most part, not directed to anything else. * 266. * & Is mostly used- in asking questions ia the sense of * why,' * wlterefore '; as, ?HHf f f ^T% Sf&it Wfflw % (Mu. 2) * wherefore, O fickle goddess, wert thou not destroyed %t that very place ? ! ; sometimes it enter? Into compounds in the sense of * bad '; as, f WT ^W S 5fffW % T ^ftsf^f (Ki. I. 5) s is he a friend ( i.e., he is a bad friend )t who does not properly advise Ms lord ' ? 27* fa? when followed by m, W , amft &c. has the sense of * whetheror '/ as, ST^Rrf f%%?KRflipfr'fTf %fff {P. 1.1) ' l e t it be ascertained whether this (animal) is wild or domesticated.' For *he use of fa with m &c. see 258. (a) f ft> is usually joined to gr, OT, or yr: la the sense of * how much more ', * kotvmuchkss \ ' much more ','muehless ; as, ^ ^ ^ a R w f ^ ftjj m ^5W (H. 1)*' even oae of these j HOT sf^rTOs^fEn^fpn^i^sfcr w i (l%.) * fir f ^ w f ppi# 1 (ar.) f finj www^wt fww ftfwF wiPf ^ i i r 1 (%.) fefe # &^^ ^ 1 (fir.)

174

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

taken singly will cause ruin, how much more, all the four'; flppr ^rctarczr (Mu. I ) * suspicion ( fear ) is aroused in even an innocent persoa (when) summoned by Charaakya, much mare then, in a guilty person *; *rf% tfOTtPr JPf SFf?? .fOTWTSrffST; ( f t I I . 82) * even the Destroyer is not able to sjtrike (hurt) me, muck less other wild animals '; fW Ttfll%<| 3P5T 35<flsRt ?%j fir j;rtTOW%W!#f ( K. 291,) ' affection Is felt even for trees planted by oneself-muck more for one's own chicken *; {Ye. 3) * even the three worlds dare mot come In tfie way of a person like you, much less the army of Dfaajjma. * Obs. fan? is also used to deaote * uncertainty', or ' doubt'; asf, ff% t w f U f : fefl m: (U. 1) ' may it be the spreading of poison (over the body), or excessive delight *f 28. The general sense of f%5J is * verily ', i indeed *, * assuredly ', and it follows the word on which, it lays stress j s, 3ff if few feff ^S^ (M. 4) * the rogue does deserve annoyance '; SRflf;: ifffriWwWr: W W f%?y (H. S) * prevjous W : over-excitement Is verily an obstacle to all accomplishments (of desired objects). * 269. *{%5 Is also used in (1) the sense of * as is reported'^ ' as "they say '; as, !f*Pf sfaft ft^ ^ R H W : (R. VI. 88) * there was, as is reported, a Yogia, Kartavirya '; fWT^ W fcw ifP|i|5|: (Mbh.); (2) to express a feigned action; as, sra^T fe|: fe^ m 1 W (R. H . 27) 5 a false lion seized her with violence 5j q^fWTW ftw sncPJSOT (Ki. VIII 48); (3) to express hopes or expectations; as, fpf: ftrar ff3fta|% f^ (G. M.) ' 1 hope Pijrtha will conquer the Kurus.' 06s. The senses mf^ * dislike s aiu! ?W?^W ' contempt * ( ^ $m %f%i^fe and ?f PP5 W*kW%) given by Vardhamana, arc found when ft? Is joiaed with f as, Wift Rf % T W I (3T. j

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

175

^ (S. K.) ' I cannot believe that you will eat the "food of S'udras. f The sense |<J is very rare. 270. %3RT is an adverb meaning * only ', ' merely *, but it Is sometimes used as an adjective also; as, P w | ^ i f q f e x& % ( Ku. V. 12 ) ' sitting on the bare altar * W> | without any coverlet), (a) The combination of %35F with arftf or f%5J in T the sense of * not onlybut' is very common; as, W| 9T fspftif %W WRffff ft5r#RT (II. VIII. 31) * not only his wealth, but even Ms possessioa of good qualities, was for the sake of others.* (b) Sc5TcF sometimes takes the place of srftr; a s , 3R (Nag. 5) * not only is ray child alfve, but (on che contrary) he is waited upon by Garuda with folded hands. ' 2 7 1 . f W is used in the following senses :(1) 'indeed, * ' surely, * ' verily, * for the sake of empliasis, or as an expletive ; WfW <Wff?f ^ 5 | ^ ftwtWffe (S*. 4) ' thy footsteps do indeed fall uneven (trip) on the way '; (2) '.Conciliation' as an entreating word; H ? P | ? W T % ( S ' . l } ' pray, let not the anr-v be discharged jt this *j so Jf Wi|#5fr|W^Tt%^ ( .*ag, 2 ); (8) * an,inquiry,'' ss a T softened question ; !T ?Sf?| 3T^ft^5t T5s .(V. .3) * I should like to know if the preceptor did not get angry with her * {was he not angry with her ? ) ; (4) with gerunds, having a prohibitive sense, like af?? (see 57); ftrwfft^W i^Pf ^ s ^ n f ^ Wrf^fJ (S'i. II. 70) * .when any matter is' determined (decided) by a letter, du 'not indeed add a verbal message * (it h unnecessary); (5) * reason ' (for); T f

513
) '

lf

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

{ Ka.IV: 5 ); * I am not sliattered to pieces, for women are h a r d ' (this is given by Vardhatn^aa as aa 'instance of fSfW? * dejection s ) ; so fiffw 3pf f f wfe*?f5?#f IPf *%stf f i t {Ku. IV. 10), (6) It Is sometimes used merely as an expletive or to add grace to the seateace. Qb$. The senses fsfW and f^PFW ia G. M. sire nearly Identical.

! (M. 8 ) | (v. f r r e # f j I ( M . 2)

(K. 103) ftfoRl(S',5)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION T mm: i w ? itw

177

(K. 167)

(Ku. V. 88) 531 | (KL II. 21)

% : mmii

mm

it (Bg.

XVIII.

72)

t | | (R. VI.

15Rlt *W: II (S'. 2) ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOE EXERCISE(V. a )

(K. 48) ii ^ ^ : if<? few? i p f c ^

1

( S ' . 5) 1 j 11 ( v . i )

1: i # % fnftsff rt fPf: II ( K u . V I . 1 s

17S

Tins

STUDKXT'S GUIDE

#T>ft If: I (R. I l l ; 31) i s p j irnft wift^r: # 1 s i w t i fttftantrft 11 (R. III. 19) l% it (R.VIII. 5) TOTfW I .{Me, 8) : II (Me. 89) Hi:

II

(ss. 2)

I t Is reported that the king has become exceedingly angry with us for our..carelessness. I shall not forget a person who may be but once seen; much less an old friend. Even inanimate things in this penance-forest appear to be possessed of a purifying power; how much more objects possessed of life. When I went to him, he reviled not only me, but the preceptor himself. Nok only do BO people hate me, but on the contrary they feed me with food.

10 SANSXBtT COMPOSITION

173

I hope it Isas not reached the king's ears that it was I who ordered the kaumudi festival to be at oace stopped. We find that even persons,that are bora rich are not completely happy in this world; much. less are those who have~to gain their livelihood by various kinds of troublesome occupations, 1 earnestly hope that you will spare the life of this helpless creature. Good men hesitate to kill their very i>v-my ; much les^ an innocent creature like this child., I hope you are aU going on uninterruptedly with your religious austerities.. Granted that- you are possessed of all good qualities, still I consider it my duty to advise you, because youth is subject to temptations. Tree that I do not remember to have married her j nevertheless my mind is greatly affected at seeing her. Is there any congraity between thy c r e d learning and this ickle state of heart ? The acts of kings, naturally unfathomable, .cannot be sounded by men like me whose knowledge is very limited

LESSON XXIV 272. *Sf is s by pre-eminence, a copulative conjunction, and joins words or assertions together. It does not stand in the same place as * and' in English or * els in Latin. It is used with each of the words or assertions which, it joins together, or is used after the last of the 'words or assertions so Joined, but it e&a never stand first

180

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

in a sentence ; as, TW^rf Wfl^f5W or UW\ iftfsRS^ ' R a m a and Govinda '; ^fipPTFWfif 'f g W ffff 'wtef # ^ or T gipypfTfqfe tO*T Rc#?f ^ % r ' tie brings rice, cooksthem, and eats the cooked food.' But it is generally better to use =? last, rather than repeat, it after each connected word, as, g&r ffpwr mm nf %m^ imfdmmwm: (R. VI. 79). (a) Not lmfrequently ^ is admitted to any other part of a sentence than the first word; as,&Pf raw spp^" SfffW: I ^ra^iW d p R i T W f#W f?fB3ff?r { P . HI. 1 ) '"thep the elephant, bowing down to Win, went away, and the hares lived happily from that d a y . ' (b) 'of- when used with ?f Jias sometimes the sense o * neitker,' ' nor '; as, ?r 1 W #rf%f| q^iWfW: (Ml) * neither is he unknown nor unapproachable.* (c) Sometimes it has disjunctive force, and may be translated by '''hut, * * Mill,' * nevertheless'; as, ?rfwpR^ppjtf^; ;pjprf?r ^ m" ( S'. 1 ) ' this hermitage is tranquil, still my arm throbs.'' Obs. In this sense *r is generally repeated; see the next section. (d) Rarely it has also the sense of ' indeed, *' verily, * having the force of Iff; as, SRffcr: fWR W =? wffWT m$~ WOT^: ( G. M.) ' your greatness iadeed transcends the range of speech and mind.' (e) I t is sometimes used to denote ' condition * { = %3f or yfe); as, sfrfwa' %^% TC |?jf % Rcn W^ (M. b . ) , i.e., #feififE^% %< &c, (/) Or it may be used as an expletive, as, ft?n *r ( G . M.). 06s. Lexicographers give as the sense of =?, ^PffllR, IW^WT, IW^^", which are included in the general idea of ' conjiinctioa ' or * copulation * denoted by ^r. means ' coaaectiag a subordinate fact with a

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION"

181
e

l principal one '; as, fsrefPfff T mm* go to beg and (wiul T doing so) bring the cow '; 9*ITfR is ' collective combination "* as, <fpft =f fpft f # W K ; f g % i ; is ' mutual connection " 5 as, c^'Kf J i f ^ ^ f c^fnnfHt; W^PT is ' aggregation ',- as" 273. f is frequently - repeated with two assertions (1) in the sense of 'OK the one handon the other hand, * * though yet * to denote antithesis ; as, ^ *?T PprPr %^Ptffw%few^ (V. 2) ' o n the one ha.nd that lullf%fe moon-faced woman Is not easy to obtain; ao.d on the other hand there is this unaccountable working of LQYC '; or ' that full-moon-faced lady &c.... and yet ' &c; (2) or to express simultaneous or unielayed occurrence of two events, as denoted by ' no sooner than * or ' as soon as ' &e. in English; as, % \ s n ^ K ^ i P|"t 'fff^JW: | It. X. 6) 'tio sooner did they reach the ocean than the Supreme Being (Vishttu) awoke.' 274. 3fT?| means lat all,' 'pvmihlyj 'pcrnaps'; as, f fa Wf% ^ # f ( P . I. I ) ' what possibly is the use of him % bei^g born '; W Wlf WPfl mft W f^if^ (Ku. V. 55) ' the maiden cfid not at all enjoy (never enjoyed) pleasure. * Obs. Pawini lays down that 3H1J is used with the Potential in the sense of * not allowing,' ' not suffering'; as, 3nt| l?Hjpft ffi fjf^ff" WWW#F ( S. K. ) ' 1 Co not suffer (allow) that a person like you should ccqsure Hari,' 275. ?C3[ is a pronoun (see 132 for its uses) and art adverb. l a the latter case it means (I) tfor that reason, * ' therefore,' ' consequently '; as, TT3rpi m ^fetf ssrtejJT: f f ^ JTftcT ( H . 8 ) ' we are princes ; therefore, we have a desire to hear of war *; (2) ' then", * in that case' often as the correlative of rfk; as, g^ff pprfOTf ^jfJTO^nCTT: (U. 5) 'come, then, let us go to a place fit for our combat *; fTW^T 5ff? (K. 186) 'still if you have a great curiosity, (then ) I shall relate. s

182

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

276. CRf: is often used for the ablative forms of ?T5[, such as, ?rwpf ran:, ?Rft*pfrftr 3% (s. K . ) = it is oftener used as an adverb. I t primarily naeaas * thence,* "from that place"; and generally, * then,' 'afterwards," * thereupon \ as, m: ^flwf^WWT^ ( K . 1 1 0 ) ' afterwards(then) some days having elapsed. ' It also tneans (1) */r that reason, * * therefore,' * consequently,' as a correlative of JRf:; (2) * then * * in that case ' serving as a correla- tive of irflr; as, irflr Jfftlfifi? m:' h% ( K. 120 ) * If this be caught, then what would happen. ? ' ; (3) sometimes4 beyond ihat,' 'further, * ' moreover '; ?RT: PCcff pf^f^fW^^ ( K. 121 ) * beyond that is a tenantless (dreary) forest.' (o) cRTRRH (fRf:+?fl":) is used in dialogues in the sepse of ' what next," * go on, *' proceed '; a$, TIWT:OT^WWPf Vpm: S m^m (Mu. 2) * BlkshasaThe attempt of both wasout of place.Well what ( happened ) next ? {i.e., proceed)*. 277, *fPT means * so, * ' thus, * ' in that manner '.* as, fpfF W W^filWf ( S*. 5 ) * having deceived me in that T manner '; p ! P ( F 1>Tlf?f ("V. 1) ' the charioteer does so (aecordiagly)*,* OTT T ^ T : (S. B.) * and so says the Veda/ () I t is also used in the following senses :(1) * and also,7 so also,'' fa life manner '; ast s p f P f i (P. I. 18) * he who provides for the future and also he who is ready-witted '; (2) ' yes,' ' be it so,' * go it shatt fc,' signifying 'assent,* 'promise, 5 &c. and followed by ? flf; as, * King.Take Mm to his Honour.' * Pratihari.- * Yes, so L shall be (your commaEds will be obeyed), so saying exit""T;{3} la forms of adjurations, * as surely as ' (precededby nm); as IWTiPFT T !%t-OTW "Hit "TOf: *as surely as I do not tMnk of any other, maa, so sorely let this person fall dead. ' CTPRT

XO 8AN8KEIT COMPOSITIOH

188

For some of the meanings of OTL as correlative it see Lesson 27, O6s. OTfff means * for, * * so it has. been said, * * for Instance-*; OTT? ' a n d likewise.' Both*are often used in introducing quotations. 278. WRf?f, as a particle, is used (1) In Its literal sense of 4 first, * * before doing any thing else *; as, fspj" (S\ 1 ) ' my dear, just (first) come here'; fi (V. 5) * first gladden me" as a lunar ray does the moon-stone *; (2) * on one's part, * * in the meanwhile * or' while *; as, m ftrofpWt T T 18f| g w r f f r f w ^ f l w f f ^ f f f f f i p t (S'. 2 j * friend, be firm la your opposition ; I, on my part (while 1) shall act up to the will of my master'; (8) * just., * * now '; as, T^if ?FPRf * go now '; (4) to emphasize a statement, in the sense of * indeed, * * rqatty'; as, ?fifT flffWRt TTSfift^ { Mu. -1 ) * thou (indeed) thyself art the first traitor '; (5) as f for,'" with respect to * &c; 'as, ^ f f t f%jff ^Hlfcq^r ( P. I, 8 ) * this being done, as far as you are concerned ( with respect to yourself ) your maintenance wiH be secured {to you) without any trouble '; : ( H.-8 ) ' as for war, it is ImiaiBent. * For the other senses of WRI^as a correlative of see Lesson 27. 27 *5| is most frequently used as an adversative particle, meaning ' but,' * on ike contrary,' 'koaever,' * on Ike other hand *; a s r f 9W%f iprpTf awtOT OTl" i ^ f %Sj^m(~ <5R"^^ q1 %^f( K. 59) * he completely enjoyed all pleasures, only lie did not enjoy the pleasure of seeing the face of A son ,' In this sense it is often added to f and f t . % Mote.5 is never used at the beginning of -a sentence, while <R*5 aE<^ ^ * ? always stand first. (a) ^ is frequently used, in the sense of * and now', * now, * * cm one's part, * * as to, * without any adversative

184

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

force; as, fOTHl!?f (K. 8) * now once upon a time, when the thousandtayed god had not risen high enough, the door-keeper, drawing near, said '; w ^ f e f e | f j w f ^ f ? ^ ! ! %S& ( K. 11 ) ' the lord of the earth, on his part, looked at her with a stead-fast gaze'; TO arRR^^mraT^r ffe ( s . K.) or fsrefifaf ^ trf^wr ^ ^ | MM, S } (6) Sometimes ^ marks a ' difference or superior quality * as, w ^ <pft JTOgx .5 f*4 { G. M.) * pure is water, purer still is milk 5; and sometimes it is used as an emphatic particle j as, ^ t ^ 5 W^FTf ^te: {ibid.) * Bhima alone is the fiercest of the' Patidavas.*

(K.

(K. W f ( ?f) SJ%R | (U. l ) ^i wm \ snip mBm\ i ( H .S )

(Mu. l ) : I (S-'. 8)

#f|

( P . I. 15)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

185

(K. 304) i ; ti ( v . * ) ifpf = j a r ^ f f ' O T ^ I ? WWW ^TOfW If w (Ku. H i 68} W ?5ffe?pii 1! (Manu. II. 94}

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE

i (s f . s) K^: I 3f!W : i ( H . 2) it ( H . 1) %I W It (R.XVI.7) : U (S'. 6)

11 {S*. 5)

186

THE STUDENT'S 6UID

Wff (jflJfffWftfiW fesfplir ( H , -l) f l f iff? Hforfvst HT; fffaiffif|t!i|si W I ti (Bg. X i s ) mm wmt

m m M s u f t w m w w r a : s r a ^ ti (s f . i )

(MM. 9 | Those who act iu a virtuous way and are devoted to doing good to others, alone become the objects of God's mercy. I Imve t>Hgh,t from Bombay eight silken clothes, fh?e silver pots, and several other useful things. On the one Ijaod I.faave never beiore seen Mm; a the#ther s there is Ms speech as hard as the stroke of a tknndeiv b o l t ; who may this man be I As soon as these brave soldiers desert? their master'sside, I shall provoke revolts in Ms territories, You' have made very good preparations for war;. aotMag will, therefore, be wanting to you. Duiyodhana :Oh the bravery of that-yjouthfiil watrlor t I think- all warriors- must have tor a time stood still witi amazement, to see Ms extraordinary expMU. Well, proceed. Having imposed upom me ia that:matuier by your hoaeyeS. eateaces, are you aot aAamed to cast me off mow ?

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

181

You are so much afflicted with even a temporary separation from yoor mate, and yet you are so averse* to giving a love-lorn, man like me, information regarding Ms lost beloved. The moment he placed Ms foot within the threshold of the house, three men rushed upon him and made himtheir prisoner. You have now got wealth, honour, children, and everything else desiited by m e a ; what else do you want fOr why, It Is trtaly said ' there is no knowing how far toman., desires may extend.* Go thou to Yajtms'anmaB and ask Mm why he ha tarried so long; wMle I shall go and call the other Brahmanas.. Macis getting up early in the morning, begins to s t u d y ; whereas thou sleepest snoring la the bed. As far as the eldest son of Mitragupta is concerned, li* may certainly be relied upon, but 1 do not know -anything' about Ms other sons. If this be done, you yourself will go on -unlnteitttpteily with your work; and we also shall be enabled to do out own*

LISSON XXV , si, sroi, 3 , sisj, & f ? 280. fesffSfT is a particle expressive of joy or glaflaew and may be translated by ' I am glad,s * happily, * " thank Goi *; as, kmm srf?rp |3tft (MM. 4 ) * I am glad thejevil is. averted'; f ^ s f f ^ W ! # f %^T f T w ^ W f (M. 1 ) * thank God (that) you are saved by the-Queen under the pretext of anger. * (a) O r e w is of tea used with the root ?JW and ftcgTC W may be translated by * to congratulate (one) upon,' the tuiyiett of tpij being the person congratulated, and the matter of"

188

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

congratulation being put, In the instrumental case; as, feZfT JifR-Rt frf#W W#t {V. 1 ) ' I congratulate your Majesty upon your success'; few 5f^fS^T iftwVl' (Mai. 4) * you are to be congratulated upon your friend's recovery (from the swoon),' or ' I congratulate you ' &c. 2 8 1 . ? * not' is used like an adverb; !f g^ttSfiPlT ' h e T was not seen by m e . ' ' No ' as applied to HOMES is expressed by ^ with any one of the indefinite forms; as, ' no man came to me ' 7 ^ f r ffTt iTPOTIcr:; Wfppff T PPlf? W 4 Yogins have no fear. ' In negative sentences the indefinite forms mark the exclusion of all;' as, Jf^BffW ^tff ftwflf * no one whatever is afraid of death. * (a) In several cases *f-r is used to express an assertion emphatically positive ; a% W 1" JfWtf WW>ra^Tfw|^ ( S ' . 8 ) * she will certainly mention the secret cause of her agony * f lit. not that she will not mention &c). 282. * TPT is most frequently used in the sense of * by name,' * called,' ' named,' ' known a* '; as, ijwvft !PT ' the lord of Lanka by name Havana '; |Et|j# n*r * a town called Pushpapuri ' Obs. The noua before f(W must in this sense be in the same ease as the noun of which it -may be aa -attribute; as, ^W^fRt ITT fet (V. 1. 15 ) ' a friend called Mcgharada '; (Dk. I. i ) ; ^tm. (Dk. II. 6). This rfFT does not enter into any compound, and should not be rfonfoiiBded with JTPW which |s compounded; thus ^f^f?rp|' ijgfj is wrong ; it should be either* SftPCft ^IPT T S T or TT ft :). 283. Another most general sease of fT is ' indeed, * fW

: tt

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

189

* to be sure,' ' verily,'' ''forsooth '; as, wn TTT f^fff (V. I ) ' 1 have indeed conquered ' (become victorious); fl^tg^fl", SpiTESoWrfff ^fcfr^fjfSf qjjr ( S'. 1 ) ' hermitages should indeed (to be sure) be entered with a modest (humble) dress,' Obs. When T is used with 3>:, f " W4, &c., the meaning TT %, expressed is that of ' possibility ' or ' I should like to know ' (cf, 53"257); as, #5TP? xmfim: ( P . I. 8 ) ' who possibly is a favourite of kings'; 3tl TFT TOTffippifff wfcpf^jpf 53PRT f'fWTc|'fNr (U. 7) ' what creature. I should like to know, is able to shut the doors of Fate, when disposed to show its power '; atfif spf WTOR! (U. 6) * how" indeed is this*? 284. tPT is also used (1) to express a ''pretence ' or a feigned action ; as, ^Rrffsa^ftTFT Wtf! (Dk. II. 6 ) ' pretending to bean astrologer'; (2) with imperatives, in the sense of '"granted/ * it may he that,' ' if you like;' as, JR^c^fTTWtf%grrafs| g:<fRWR%l"^W ^JIT'Pft'TtWW^ TPl ^ft^I^TPf (K. 828); 4 granted (it may be that) that calamity which being of indefin^e duration, will end in sorrow, will create emotions of grief in one afraid of death *; ^ T ? 3 W ' well.be it so ' T (if you like); (3) ' wonder \-3f?sft ^ w T#OTr^fIf (G. M.) * it h u wonder that a blind man ascends a mountain'; (t) ' anger ' and rarely ' censure '; f WJ f^^[f% % ( U. *.) * Oh! do missiles gleam forth !'; f t : "Tft*ra." (G. M . ) ' What! should I, Dajanana be defeated by others' ? 285. * has an interrogative force involving 'some T d o u b t ' or ' uncertainty "; as, ?eftsf| j jrpff ^ irfgrpfl1 ^ ( S'. 6 ) ' was it a dream an illusion, or an infatuation of the brain ? ' (7) H is very often compounded with the interrogative pronoun and its derivatives, in the sense of ' -possibly,' * indeed' (cf f f 257); as, f %-^wftsp?^feflOT4r (MM, 1} %

190

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

* what may this possibly be ?-or what else than this '; Pf ;j ^TWfln^f WW {Dk. II. 6) * how, indeed, shall I get a virtuous wife ' ? 28. f The most general combination of W is with" the word f, 'and *fff is now treated as a separate word. I t Is used in the following senses :(1) ' is it not indeed that,' * surely it is *; as, % f*| (M. 1) ' when a dull-witted pupil spoils the instruction (given), is it- aot indeed (surely it is) the fault of the preceptor ? * (2) it is used as a corrective word like * why ' In English; as, f*| 1% Tfr^T f T (Mk 6 ) ' I say, say (it) changing the words '; F| W W t Jf Wll ( S\ 2 ) ' why * you yourW W " self are before me ' {is it not, indeed, that &c.) j ?*[ f?rfM^5 f f ( V 2) (well, why do you stand)" you should look for It in this garden-'; (8) in propitiatory expressions, in the sense of ''pray, * ' be pkased'&c.; a s 8 ^ wf STWT'R'J"Tf^W (Ku. IV. 82) * be pleased to take me to my husband '; f*) as a vocatie particle used in addressing persons, mean ing * Ok,' * ah, * & c ; as, ^HWI^tS^W^ I H^ TPTf 8Ht Wff#W# M M f felfe ( Dk. 1,2) Rajav&hana said :' Oman, why do you live here aloae f*; *T| ^if: ffei%f i (U. 4 ) * ah fools, you have already leatnt it i n that, chapter'; (5) ia asking questioas; as, (U. 4 ) * lias Gautama accomplished Ms object ? * (a) In argumentative discussions Tf is very often used to head an objection or advance a contrary proposition, and 3 ^ % ? with or without 3PT, is used with the statement thafe answers the objection raised, or refutes the proposition asserted ; as, ' rff ^ j l ^ jfMitakshara) ' now it may be objected 4hat the division (of the aaeestral property) is declared to be ! uneven, by the precept' the elder shall take 2 parts \

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

191

To this we reply, true this unequal division is. ordained by S'astras, but it is not to be followed being opposed to practice; so f ^ ^ W PPlWl% ^sq% ( S'. B. 4 2 8 ) ; other examples of W the use of F| in this sense are :iff %5nprf*T # # f i I T I ( S ' . B . 428 ); ?p| ( ibid. 888 ). t)b$. spf ffi| (thea how is this), f fl % | {if any were to say. so), are sometimes used in raising objections; as, m w ^ 4 ^ i f | f * f ' J W W qwwPrfw wfv. ( s . K . ) ' now one may ask how Is' it i p ^ (voc. sing.)*, ( we say ) ''Bh&guri tMaks that it is a mistake.' 287. The chief seme of Wt is. *'certainly,' * indeed,' pomtivellf'; as, |f MffTOWWfl ( H . 1 ) 4 he will certainly cut jtiar bonds. ^ w f f ^*T f l ^ T f f ^ l ^ l f f s^fe" ( S'. 8 ) '* surely i indeed) the fire of the anger of Hara is still burning i s you. *

\ ( M. 2 )

IP? OTf^W^": | ( S'. 1 ) 1 5 n?Rwii^ ^ f t f s S s q i w j e w i (s. * ) ^ 1 (S'. 7)

I *

( Bk'. II. 2 )

(Dk. II *

IS?

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

^ 1 % mm

smsr a f t fasti:

I ( Dk. I. 5 )

: li ( u . 8 )

.1DDITI0MAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE 1 (S'.l) fife" : i (S'. 6) & I (Mai, Hi r i (u 5riRifinft mm t an
STOUT (l)k. II. e) I.)

^a felt f^

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

fSffif 5 #OT*rRf ^3Pm SPfHPf II (S'. 5) fa %fe#sf li ( E . VIII. 38) Wft: fptMt

stf gtrot ^ & : it (V. i )

There lived a rich merchant by name Dhanamltra la a town called Manipura. What mortal can possibly kno.w the greatness of God, whicii baffles the imagination even of great sages ? He, possessed of inauspicious features, was indeed crowned Hag, notwithstanding that there were other qualified princes. Who is there who will try to bring down rain on his head with Ms own hands ? I congratulate you all on the accomplishment of your desired objects. Thank God that thou art again seen by me after a long separation. Friend, please do this much for me ; I shall put on a female dress and profess myself to be your daughter; you will then take me to the king and speak to Mm thus. May it be a real tiger, or some other animal dressed in a tiger's skin! Govinda:Rama, when will you go to wait upon the Guru ? Rama:Why, it is your turn to-day to wait upon our preceptor? You say Govinda is very lavish in spending moaeyi 13

194

THE STUDENT'S G 7 D TX K

why, you yourself resemble Mm la this and sevelal other respects. If then that friend demand * why Bratus (Gopiila) rose agaiast Caesar (Vishnu),' this is my .answer:' Not that I loved Caesar less, but that I loved Rome (Suvarwpum) more, *

LESSON XXVI

288. 2T: usually means * again *; as, gpjfafSJ: (Ku. V. 83) * wishing to speak again'; but it has often the sense of * whereas,' * while ', * on the other kand'; as, i i f f an#jf: t f { U. 8 ) ' it is the same Panehavatl forest, and my lord is the name; but (on the other hand, however) to me, an unlucky being, all this, though before the eye, is as If nothing. * (a) <p": <|?r: Is stronger than |f: and means ' over and over again, * ' repeatedly *; as, fW^TRSF^p''. J'Wf'W read thy lessons over and over again. * The use of <|T: with, fsp is already given {vide 267). 289. SW: or grtw means * generallyf and is used in laying down a general rule or statement; as, MWt T: (Mu. 4) ' generally (as a general role) servants, waiting upon their lord, leave him when Ms prosperity declines (fades away)'; (Me. 87) ' generally these are the amusements of women during their separation from lovers.' 2S0, *<mis used in the following senses :(1) ' alas, * t o express pity or sorrow; as, sjfft w^ M%fW ff?f ^^fiHT W# (Bg. i. 45 ) ' alas S what a great sin are we going to commit!; (2) 'joy * or surprise ', aad it is gfensrally found in con-

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

195

junction with SRgfr In these senses; as, ^ f ( Ru. III. 2 0 ) ' oh I how enviable thy valour'; so, 8fflJf fl$fsfsf (K. 154); p T arar TOff IT (G. M . ) ; as a vocative particle ; as, 5 T PfcTW ^ W ^ n f T f e f l ^ ( G. M.) * O clouds give R -plentiful water '; cW^f f C W WF ftwf: ( R . IX. 47). c 2S1. ^55^R| meaning 'having strength' is used as an adverb, In the sense of ' strongly,' * excessively,' * very much '; as, few f farefrsr g ^ ^ f e i m f ( Ku. I I I . 69 ) ' Siva strongly (perforce) curbed (quieted) the agitation of his senses'; SFSERfsrWTCPflTCT ^pPJT ( S \ 8) ' S'akuntala is very severely indisposed .* means often '; as, n w i i | | "dMa" * the child and in this sense it is generally repeated. * at one timeat another time,' ' nownow,' with each clause; as, J|jp"^Si|#SfT JglfT ( Mu. 5 ) * at p one time (now) its seeds seem to* disappear; at another {now) it yields many fruits; oh, how varied is the policy of a politician, like Fate !* 293. ^H introduces a direct assertion with or without fit" a t the" end; as, WWtSW ( K . 78) ' the popular saying is true that one fortunate thing follows another 5; f^ ( P . 1) s a thought once occurred to Mm that means for acquiring wealth should be devised and executed. * (a) ?! has the force of ' t h a t ' in such sentences as * art thou mad that thou spcakest so incoherently ? * f ?# ^fftsfif q ^ T O ? # Sf^Tfe or ' because ' or ' since '; as, % fsp mm vrW(m T ^ f t " %'Tt 'H feictf n% (Mu. 2 ) ' does not the serpent S'esha feel the heaviness of the load OE his body, because he does not throw down the Earth (from bis head) ? ';' ftiPfPlfof s t ?^rr % W?W fVm ?JT ( V . I ) ' O 292. W: often- weeps*; I t also Bieans and is used

198

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

creeper, you have done me a service, since she has been once more see a by me. * Obs. In translating sentences having the sense of' since therefore,' 'becausehence,' ''therefore,' theme,' these may be translated by g<T or KM: ; or the whole sentence may be expressed by using IR( or W-; as, 3r| %XMX ^p^WlWWlTw ^ (W:)?fts#5f |#ff: *I shall drive my brother out of the house because he is exceedingly ill-behaved.' ' 294. W: means * from which place, * being used for JfFfRT; as, TOTWF IW^RTTOW ( I I . V. 4 ) 'from whom (your preceptor) complete knowledge lias been obtained by yon '; or it means ' / o r , ' * because,' ' since, * when a reason is assigned; as, f%%fijs# n^i^f w : IPPSl1?: ?f# f f ( H . 8 ) * why do you say so ? There is a great difference; for the Karpiira island is heaven Itself. * 295. fflW, regarded as one word, is used in the sense of ' to be sure,' ' to own ' or ' to speak the truth.' * verily '.as, wifwRRPiTW ft wmm n?m =#fwft^ % f?w (Ve. i) * b\ the ominous nature of this your speech, my heart, to speak the truth, trembles.'

fwsprfcf ctfsfrocJFT: swrtw 1 (S'. 2) f # f t t : m^mi i (s # . mwm

t (K. 85) (K.48)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

19T

E ,

(K. 120) (Dk. II. 7)

f :

II (M. l )

(U. 8)

(Ma.

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE apt ^uf W^IW 'VW. 5 k w I > ^ ^ 3^' fWSflf^ffefw ( P . I. 11) STOW* W^rtfH ff d ^ I (Mk. 4) %a: (S'. SITO f^ I^HUf ^Wra1%TO% ^ 5 : I. (S'. 6) ia 11 (R. I. w 1^? wfewrf^ai *j?n ii
(R. VIII.

47)

198

-THE STUDENT'S 6UIBE

Sfpjt t p i i f pr WP-TCfp^^ W R f f ^ : II (Bfa. I I . 801 1 do not think it |n>per to speak on this subject, beoauseI am not conversant with its details. Since you. broke open my house last night, I take you prisoners, and shall take you to the court ft>r inquiry. In mattexs concerning girls, householders generally see with the eyes of their wives. Oh, the unparalleled splendour of this place ! To own the truth, It will vie even with the garden of Indra In point of beauty. Js the place, from which you have come, supplied with plenty of corn ? I am going to execute my master's command, but where are you going ? Thus the wood-cutter saved Ms life and wealth, while the evil spirit was. engaged in employment for whole twelve years.. Suvadan& tells me that Chandralekha, her' mistress, has been very ill since the day of her dancing ia the temple of Burgft; I must mow go to inquire how she is doing. As a general rule the regard shown by masters to their servants, varies as the .nature of the work intended tobe accomplished through them. Bo you think the sun is not exhausted simply because,, he never remains stationary'in Ms celestial path ? Friend, cat off my snares very sooa and save m e ; for it is truly said t h a t ' advetslty is the touchstone of friemcl*

TO SAMSKEiT COMPOSITION LESSON XXVII

199

| 29S. WT by Itself means (1) * a s / * in the tnmnner mentioned '; as, jpfffFPfti' tf; (S'. 1) * just as your Majesty orders,' i.e., your orders will be obeyed? (2) 'namely,' ' as follows,' l BO'; as, OTlPTO^lF (P. 1.) * it Is as stated below, (as follows) ; it is namely reported '; (8) * like, * * as, 1 showing * comparison * like %W; as, 3n#f<W S5PWT ife * T flT: ( U- 4) * she was in the house of Das'aratha like the PT Goddess of wealth'; (4) it is used to introduce a iirect assertion, to report words or speeches, occurring ia the direct construction in English; as, fifef ^B 1 % tptt Wfi W C w f K u . IV, 36) * it is already knowa to T you that Cupid does not feel at ease, without me evea for a moment. * Wtfj in this sense is usually followed by at the end; as, wfe^lffW Wf%f I *T*rr T S OWRft ST i (Nag. 2) I am entrusted with a message by my father (to this effect) :* O Mitnivasu, a better bridegroom than. Jimntaw^imna cannot be found; so give Mm Maiay&vatl *j (5) ' as, * 'for instance'; as, Vft WS ^ ^ ^ H" l%f: W ! *lfP% (Tarka>) * wherever there is smote, there is W fire, for instance in the kitchen ! ; (6) * so that' where ifsf often takes the place of f WF; as, ff 5 # ^ !#cf%if JWT ^WKqjft" (P. I . 8) * show thou that rogue of a lion so that I may kill (Mm) *; ffffiffipT STW: SWWfW fatffaRlt t ^ ^t^Wsffe^lfecfwwfa' (P. I. 11) * Lord, maintain yourself by my life, so that 1 may secure both the worlds, * 27. OTF and !W1V when used as correlatives of each other, have the following senses :(I) 5 asno,' in which case rfiftf sometimes takes the place of WWTl as, %4 * as the tree, so the fruit'; TOT #sftf V. f xfm: I %mit v$(&B&Sp m^W: ^fm: (P. I. 8) * as a small sprout growing from a seed, .carefully tended, will

SOO

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

yield fruit at the proper time, so (will) people when properly protected'; (2) ' sothai ', where ?P?T stands for so, and wm for that.; as, if? efTVfW OT ^OTt Wf ?RT *RTf*T (S'. 8) ' if you approve of It, so act d that I shall be favoured by th<g royal sage '; STf ffff*Rf 1 *H? mfvmh (P. I. l l ) * I, requesting Ms Majesty, shall so manage that he will kill him.' fa. The words f^W, WPf$, cfflej;, t ^ T O , fWtf & c , are similarly used for ?ffT, and forms of the re'atiFe pronoua | geaeratty W ) are used with the second clause for WT; as, f^sft 8if i f ? v # H l fWl w %WWTlf#lTf: f^frtftsfi 1 (U. 8) * I stti w uafortunate that not only am I separated from my lord, bat even from my children *, JPT ^ % absence of greed (desirel is such thai I wish to give to any body this golden bracelet, though actually In my hands *; (8) ' sincetherefore ', ' because (as)so '; as, ^ 4) ' since (as) this wind is terrible, shaking the collection of stones on the Malaya mountain, (therefore), so I think that the lord of the birds has approached '; (4) * ifthen,' used like rf?-?rfif; or as a strong form of adjuration, 'as surely asso surely *; as, mt flw*fft Ifir iiwpiff?!f% I I ( . x v . * if (as surely as) there is no unchastity ia my conduct with regard to my husbaad, in word, thought, or deed, then (so surely), O all-pervading Goddess (Earth), be pleased to take me in*; (5) * as muchas \ * so mucha* \ where W F stands for * as much or so much * and ^^l for * as *, when W the sense intended is that of ' equality of relation s ; as, ~ ?WT WWif #W OTT W f l Wra^" (Su.) * cold does not pala me so much as does the (form) Badhati.' l a this sense <* is often used with WF and OTf9 or with one of them, t o

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

20*

make the equality more emphatic, and then they may be translated by * CMas '; as, ^rsRj%fqr qrsf w 5TOF ft"TT W W gfT?T cPW fftWT (U. 4) ' among the four daughters-in-law, Sit* was as dear to Mm as' his daughter S'totA.* (a) I'll & cPTr are repeated (JfIT WlOTT cfWF) in the sense of the word the used with adjectives in the comparative degree, the adjectives themselves being translated by their Sanskrit equivalents, or in the sense of' the morethe more,' * tfie less -the less*; as * (he older he grew, the stronger became his torment (anxiety) caused by want of issue ! JJPfr Wf 9*N*rffg-^iPT gifT WT WfcWPFWT i p T f W R ' ? t,WJ: (K. 59); so ' the kss you think of your lost son, il*e fess will be your sorrow' Wf W wg^W ? f^lcffir^Tftf OTT OTT 3W |:'5PTT %wf?r or w r JwrWfkHft iwf%cn OTT STTT siFfWl patf. 298. *?IMW, used by itself, is used in the sense of ' , far as, ' itill*, ''for * showing duration of time oc spat-1and governs the Accusative ease; as, ?9Rt<TW TPtc^JW!I%8R-f (U. 7) * take care of (these) sons till they are weaned"; PpfOT^f% ^ f ^ W s ^ I W f^PPF^HfeffiKf (U. 1) ' till what limit (how far) has our life been painted by the painter * ? (a) *1PfW sometimes has che sense of 'just', s then ' denoting an action thet is intended to be doae immediately (vide 190)} as, i P P | |ff#WIp ^ftcR!*Riens5fO (S'. I) * therrfore calling my wife, I shall begin the concert *; fRTfelt gpOTTfRJ| JTf?RT5Rnfr m (S'. 3) ' Imviag resorted to this sttade, I shall then wait for h e r . ! 2S* Used as correlatives ITW^ and tff^T have these senses :(I) ' as muckas ', WR?| standing for * as much ', aad W^ for * a s ' , both being used like nouns or adjectives; as, ^ OTWf%HW WftTcT Tf%^RppT I #fspPT^ # 1 (Ku. I I . 33) ' the sun sheds as much light only, ia his city, as causes the bursting open

THE STUDENT'S O0TDE of lotuses in Ms ponds'; (2) 'off'; where the two together have t h e sense of totality; as, iffffff fPff Wfff ( C M . ) 1 have eatea all that was given*; W T % fej f K 62 ); (3) ' l o n g usf-'so long', where stands for * as long a s ' aad TORT for * so long'; as, # f # # { Motammdgara ) * as long as one is able to acquire wealth, so loog is Ms ipt'uaie attached to Mm.' Qbs. (a) Where in English * as lo-mg as\ lso long f* or * It'll *, * until' & c , are used, both TO?f and 3Tf cj will b&ve to be used In Sanskrit, *n^[ with the clause introduced by i a$lmgm\ Hitt' & c , and WR^ with the principal clause; as, ' tut long as * the responsibility of the kingdom to me, I shall keep the subjects uonteated*" f fWf spjRW: ^ f t ^ f f r ; 'charioteer, stop the j chariot till I ge*t down* ^ r WWOT fOTT (b) In translating sentences Introduced by * before * will have to be used for 'before*, it being equivalent to tili not; as, TOtt TOf! ^ R f e i W ^ w r : fw!w;OTWlw^rr (V. 4> *I must obtain information from them before they fly a p from the lake.' 3fi. Sometimes 5Hf<|cTRIf have sinjply the force of "when-then'; as fFRfft TPI W P f l ^ ^ f * t (H.8) swhen thetraveller'havinggotup,. looked upwards, (then) the flamingo being observed by Mm, was struck with an arrow and killed'; and sometimes the sense of i m soon as',' no soonerthan', * scarcelywhen* & c , where TORT stands for * no 'Sooner \ * scarcely * & c , and1 for *then',*whens & c ; a s , ^ w gr^RT f O ^ ) 'scarcely had I gone (before I had go.Be) to the end of one calamity, when another has befallen me again!*

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION grr (M. 8)

208

( S \ 1)

m\

k4m

I (s'. s)

: I ( P . I. 15)

1 ( P . I. 20)

(U. 4)

: I ( H . 1)

(K.

i5)

: I (MkL 6)

(MM. 8)

( K B . 111.72)

J04

THE

STIJOEKT'S

O0IDE

(Ku. VI. 70) fell: W? fef^ff ?fr^ Wi-afeil W t ij ; it. 1)

i II (IT. *) i 1 (It. >, V 0 . 1 1

.ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXFi .'^SK

3wr ^

wtft wteti (V. 4)

f3ti "aw: i< ( U . 2)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSiTIOH

205

hf fax&mfa n
SPOT WT

WURT

it ( H . s)

arrarcfirarar i 3P=Pf! IWTfWf 5fhf 5 f: "W: II (Nag. 4) t Wf^JWOTTW: II ( H . -1.) 9T II (R. XV. 68) PT

i|ffPfff y f f ^ : <*ftf5T. II (Bh. I I I . 88) :i (Bg. XL 29)

A hundred schemes have been devised by me for his rain, in consultation with my friends ; they are as follows : I suppose you have already heard that in the heavens dwells a class of nymphs called Apsaras. He is like Bhima ia heroism, but in wickedness of heart, he surpasses the cruellest of demons. Blvana so pleased S'ankara by his austere penanct, that the God granted him several boons. This king governs his country so well that not one of Iiis numerous subjects is disloyal to him. Since all the preparations of war itave been completed, I do not think it proper to treat with the enemy. The more 1 think about this world, the more does my mind become disgusted with it.

208

THE STOBENT'S GUIDE

The moment he stepped Into his house, his wife rushed to him exclaiming * a serpent has bit my child .* I tope you will stay here till Govinda conies back from Ms pilgrimage. As long as I breathe, I shall defend my dear country een at the cost of my life, so that I may not die with a name sullied with disgrace. He took the doctor's medicine for ( ? n w ) 2 1 days, but finding no change for the better, he ceased to take it. The teacher beat the child with a stick so severely that he fell down senseless on the ground. The more do philosophers think about God, the less do they know Mm. He is as much distinguished by the purity of Ms conduct as by his talents, and as intent upon restraining his senses as upon doing good to others. Do you not know that all carnivorous animate are provided with claws { use WfTsRT ) ? The more diligently you study, the fewer will be your chances of failure, and the greater the probability of improvement,

LESSON

XXVIII

301. *tt with H generally followed by % t| or Jff: is used in the sense of ' betterthan \ * betterbut not', to express preference, =rt being used with the clause containing the thing preferred (which is put in the nominative case ) and H =?, H SJ or "FT: with the clause containing the thing T to which the first is preferred (this also being put in the nominative case ); as, wt ?RTT WMT f ^ f f e f ^ W : (P. I. I ) 1 better ( t h a t ) a girl (be) born rather than a foolish son ;

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

207

trt sjnuwft f ^WWfWPJWf: f H. I ) 4 better to lose life, but not the vicinity of ( contact with } the base. * (a) Sometimes ?f is used without =?, or 5^: as, wis^j TTV^TT fXWf%^r# TO% tssamm ( Me. 5 ) ' better ( t h a t ) a request to a worthy person ( should even, be ) unheeded, than that it being made to a base man should be gratified *; i"t TflRf iwt: I'g if fpfgrrocpfb ( Bh. II. 14 ) ' it were better to roam with wild ones than ( t o keep ) company with, foolish people.' 302 * m is an. alternative eonj unction meaning ' or '; but its position is different in Sanskrit, being similar to that of ^T, see 272 ; * BAraa or Govinda ' ^pft ?ftf%?tlT or (a) I t has also these senses :(1) iand', * as well', also *; as, qi%w ^ W TfRl^WT: W9Wfe" ppy J ? f # fr OT^: #(3P! ?fif { K. 280) * Patraiekha, tell me whether Mates'veta and Kadambarl are doing well, and also whether the whole retinue is doing well'; (2) * life J , * as \ having the sense of ? f ; as, ^fRTT V^ f ff^wftr Tftpff WF^^ft ( Me, 86 ) * I consider her to be changed in form I appearance ) like a lotus blighted by frost'; (8) s oplitm> ally', mostly in grammatical rules; as, 3 W f t I 'ff fipcrf%TFf (P&n. VI. 4. 9 0 - 9 1 ) ' in the causal the ^ of gT is lengthened j but optionally, when it means to per?ert the mind.8 (b) w is added to the interrogative pronoun and its derivatives in the sense of * possibly ' like f f or fTW { see 257 }; as, m: * V W T WW^ (P. I. 1 ) ' who possibly, that P f is dead, is not born agaia ?';' ^PT Wl^W Rfg" ^1 ?TOJf ( K . 156 ) ' whose words else should I possibly act up to ?'; if?f qr ipq% ( U. 3 ) s how indeed can you go ? ' 3IML IT, when repeated, lias the sense of ' eitheror \ * whetheror '; as, 5W ^ S% ^t|WW<lW^Tf^W I Wt W N W ( K u . T l . 60) 'two'only are
4

I f ^^^W ^WIW i W W R ^ T C I f ||. J

208

THE STUDENT'S GtJIBE {Parvatt)

able to bear the seed of us t w o ; either she of S'ambhu, or Ms watery form, mine'; W W

f 5PPT ( Ve. 1) * I solicit your attention belag paid to it, whether out of regard to the poet's labour, or tae importance of the sublime subject-matter, or a desire tosee .a new drama represented. * 304. WFT is used as an adverb in the sense of ' justly' * properly *, ' it is quite proper that'; as, fW Vf STPIT: ^jftft fWtfttff: ( Me. 8 ) * it is proper ( i t is justly said ) that the life o; lovers is in the tiands of (depends upon ) messengers ', ?fR cTTt fW^R^VTOfT fospnPr ?Rf ( Ku. VII. 65 ) * it is quite proper that Aparwa, though delicate, practised a very austere penance for Hs sake . ' (c) 3RWCT means s inopportuae ', ' out of place '; as, 3CTR g*ftrfa Jffcfl; (Mu. 2 ) ' the attempt of both was out of place, * . &05. * if 3" is used in the following senses ;(1) 'joy , * mrprise ', * finny', such as is expressed by * Oh * la English ; as, jp" 5P|tf #ft?pP ( M. 1 ; * Oh S the concert has commenced '; ( 2 ) ' compassion ', * pity V as, JWf cf I" WPTfW: ( G. M . ) ' it is a pity, ciiild, that you have only Dh&a&kas \ (8) ' oh ', ' alas ', showing grief; as, p - fsrs mm* (U. 1) 4 alas, fie upon rue, an unhappy being ! *; (4) it is sometimes used as an inceptive particle ; as, ff?r $[ ^srfq^nft1 { R i m . I . 48. 14 ) ; well, now I shall tell you.' SS8. f fF most frequently denotes ' grief',' dejection ', paia ', as expressed >y * ah \ ' alas ', ' woe me '; as, ft t iFTif ( t J . 8 ) * alas ! oh beloved J&naki'; |T fT %fa % ^4 ( U. 3) ' alas ! alas ! my heart bursts. *' It is sometimes used to express * surprise '; as, ff !>W WfTOW% *tffi&n ( U. 4 ) ' Oh ! indeed, she t ^ Sift ftBTOWWRWW^WraW (n f )

TO SAHSKEIT CGMPOSITtGK

'JC9>

is Kausaly&, my 4ear friend, the duly married wne of Mag Das'aratlm.* For the use of |F with the accusative see 34, Obs. The sense SW'W s reproach ' is very rare, 307i * If never used at the beginning of a sentence. Ms these senses :(I) for,' * because,' expressing a strict or logical reason ; as, atfwiftffftfr f*ft f? ffJRf ( G. M . ) ' here is fire for there appears smoke'; 8fff WfflWRWgP!F|*l?r: 1 qWt ?M4 fFW.pRT fecflOTPOT ( R. V. 10 ) * haYe *yo '''been permitted by the great sage to become a householder, for it is now time to enter mpoa the second stage of life * I Ob. In general statements with refereace to a particular case, this sense of % for * is understood, ( 2 ) * indeed,' ' surely V as, '& stfttf$piFF f| { M. 1 ) * my lord, the science of acting indeed consists principally of representation ; what is the use of oral discussion in this case ' ? < ff| frJffejff CTg^f f !H|*!%S% *RfaR: ( M . 8 ) ' s o r e l y an elephant, having seen a lotus-plant, cares not for the shark '; { 8 ) It has often the sense of * for"instance *, ("Pj^n^) * as is well-known % whea a fact is stated to illustrate a foregoing" assertion* in the sense of ?W ? as, srarFrrfiTf 1?OT W mwt wfrnmi^^ I f T If W tf%: ( E. I, 18 ) he took taxes J from his subjects only for the salce of doing good to them ; ( for instance ) the sun drinks up water in order to give it back increased a thousand-fold '; ( 4 ) ' only,! * alone * to emphasize an Idea; as, W5| ff J??[#JTWJ?# ( K . 153 1 * a fool only is troubled by Cupid '; { 5 ) sometimes as a expletive.

(tit.)

210

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

if

s j . 4}

Rq^R

I ( K . 1031

n ( s \ 5) ftl ^ (Ku. i. 3} 1 ||
(P. L

14)

fcf gn^r f f f e p ^ g ^ ^ a t f i t : II (R. VIII. 44)

TO SANSKBIT COJHfOSITION

211

s ^ g ; 11

(H. I)

ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FCftt EXEEC1SE fe^| (K- 204) % if! i f I f ^ ^ # W ^ ^ ^ WWPPPrWCWlfW: II (S'. l ) 1TO! ^ W ^ *t SOT hwn: 5pP| I f TOW: J1

i f w r o f t ' f t <B<n it ( f 8) <srcrrart mml ^mmmi mz u (Ku. v i . 67)

m % a w f s i & it (Me. 88) SPWcftft

212

THE STUDENT'S OUIDE

: fSTPFfF! *jiPJ i f ^ W m W I I

( U . 4.)

i . (M.5) 4 * ff S * f t * T^feftiCTf: || { I t . I X . 74} 5 p ff | : ^ t j feapTf^IlWi t I! (Ku. IV. 26 J

a^THt H (MM. 1) I (Me. 54)

(Bg. XI. 36} sratr: 1

ti(Mu. 5}

WWW! WteMPI l (S'. 5)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION split *i fitter Wfsf: oHR^inft i f i p n : 3

213

: H (M. 8)

i t is far better to support one's self by begging from to door than to be always fawning upon the haughty rich. Eith 't he is able to do it. or his two brothers, but not any body else. I t is but just that he gives you this warning to spend -money economically, for the marriage of your daughter is w e r y day drawing near. When calamities befall a man, discrimination, is the real wisdom; for those who act withou'' discrimination nave their miseries multiplied. The poet thjat said 6 one fault merges in a collection of good qualities, * did not properly observe human nature ;# for, generally poverty destroys even a group of good qualities. Who indeed, except this magnanimous -person, would risk his life to save that of others I Be sure, O woman, that you will ere long be united with your husband; is it not a fact that a driver, the water, of which is dried up in summer, is again, united with Hi current in the raiay season f I worship all gods with the same devotion, whether they belong to the Yavanas or Br&hinanas. I shall evt;u prefer {use wtT) a dreary forest haunted by tigers 'and wolves, to a life led ia poverty araoagst one's kinsmen, Woe me that have survived all that I held dearest OB this earth I O h ! I have found the ring that I had lost. Oh I How delightful is the appearance of this man ?

214

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

I t is just that the author of the Ramayaraa used divine speech to describe his manifold deeds. Out of hundreds of kings, she chose only this king for he? husband; for the mind is conscious of its former associations. Who possibly, that has fallen into the snares of the wicked, has safely escaped ? And what weak person has not failed i a his attempts at contending with the strong? LESSON XXIX Atmanepaia and Parasmaipaia N. B.In this and the next lesson the unspecified references are to Siddhanta jfaunmdt; and Bk. means the eighth canto of Bhatti Khvy&, 38 There are two Padas in Sanskrit: the Atmanepada and Parasmaipada. The Atmanepada ('-voice for one's self *) denotes that the fruit of the* action accrues to the agent (qfynfit 9KJ); as, | > # s does for himself.' The Parasmaipada (* voice for another ' ) denotes that the fruit of the action accrues to another; I'Sjfir ' goes for another.' Thisdistinction is scarcely, if ever, observed in practice. It is the original meaning f the terms, but cannot be consistently followed in all cases. Sanskrit writers use both the Padas promiscuously ; as, fttfrfH^Fff^^fW^Mfi (M. 1) 4 1 wish now to hear the message '; ( s ' . 4 ) ; wrm^ mf^'?5Rf ( u . v . 15. j . If it be supposed that this distinction is meant to be observed when a root admits of both the Padas, this is also not borne out by usage; as. Ttm ^ where the two Padas are used in the same sense. 309. Some roots are conjugated in one Pada only as W% *[, ^ m% &c.; some in both the Padas, as f>, f%,

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

215

g-^( gj-g &c.; while some are restricted to oae Pada or the other, according as certain prepositions are prefixed to them, or they are used in particular senses ; as, *fJTis Parasmalpada; but tfTT is Atnftanepada ; 5F! ' to nile ', is Parasmaipada, but arr^TRT * to bless ' is Atm. Some roots of this nature are given in this and the next lesson. Roots of the First Conjugation 310 The root *5PTS when not preceded by a preposition, takes both the Pactas. But it is used in t i e Atm. by itself when the sense of * continuity *, or * want of interruption *, * energy *, and i development *, or ' increase * is indicated; as, ^TOPFlsfeRffe {Bk. 22 ) * moving unobs tructed in the enemy's assembly ' ; SfEWTPT ?W% * shows energy for studying *; ^pfilsf^P^ WTfWjfw ' the Sastras are developed in him.' (a) Preceded by 37 and TO, it is Atm. in the same senses ; as, ??3=lt^T # TTPRcF (Bk. 2 2 ) ' so saying he showed his might in the s k y ' ; q f l f g ^ T r t ^ T r a # <TPT fippf { ibi'L 23 ) * made bold to test &c. J (b) When preceded by SfT, it is Atm. in the sense of * ascending' or ' rising' of a luminary ; as, 3fFPf% ^ : (Mbh*) ' the sun rises '; feifT^imWW ( Bk. 23 ). But 3rpPFrf?r mt f^RfciWtf" the smoke issues from the surface of the terrace '; or <fpspfiTfer ^fft jjp%5f (Mbh.) ' covers the terrace.' (c) With |% in the sense of 'walking', 'placing the footsteps '; ftporcwsiF f w ^ ^ s Vishwu took three steps 'j f ^ # ; but Pr^TT% i f e s the joint splits, ! (d) With Sf and 37, in the sense of * beginning '; as 9 % w: 5iraw#W%?f { Ku. III. 2 ) ' thus began to talk with him privately.' But JPfprffF ' goes '; gWffif' ' comes.'

! 3 - 38-43)

"216

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

I 311. The root f & * '**> P ^ y ' i s usually Paras., but wfaen preceded by the prepositions 3fs|, #, <rfr, and air, it is Mm.; # | - ^ - 8 f F # l JfiiW:; s N w f wfMw: T* fH: (Me. 70) 'play ydth jewels. But npsfqfj$p| ^teff (-Mbh.) " plays with Mtoavaka.* * (a) With #, it is Paras, in the sense of * making a noise "j as, ^RDiff% 5RRTffsT { Mbh. ) * the carts creak.' 312. *W% with ff is Atm. in the sense of * commanicate with *, * unite with *s * join *; as, W | J ? : W f % (Dk. I I . 2 ) * I joined gamblers ' So ^ or SR^l with as, mm mm^m: i Bk. i s ) . 313. The root **m 5 to walk, * wlien preceded by '3^,"is Atm., when used transitively ; as,TOfft"5T:W: # W 4 l i ? ^ % i" (Bk. 8 1 ) s drunkards,-being intoxicated, strayed away fiom the paths ia crowds'; so W I ^ ^ ^ * transgresses 4.ty. * But i w ^ ^ H f s vapour goes up. * (a) With, '4, it is Atm. when used with the instrumental of a conveyance ; as, mM; OTf%Fi| ( Bk. 82 ) * others went in vehicles *; Pfft?WT # r # IJ^Pit (R. X I I I . 18) * BOW |>asses through tne path of gods ( sky ) .'* 314. | fafj whea preceded by- fir a n i TCT, in the sense f 4 to conquer \ or ' tc be victorious ", and * to defeat8 respectively, is Atm.; as, fOT ^ w ^ 1%9R# (V. B.'I) * her | blue ) eye surpasses the blue b t u s ' ; fsROTt ^T: ( M. 1 ) victory to your Majesty! *; ?t TOWPfWt ( Bk. 9 ) * defeatlag (completely qverstriding ) the sky. s 315. When %W{ s to heat % preceded by pr or g^, is f ^ ^ f t ^ I ( I . 3. 21) # i w f w f W , I ( I . S. 29) * 5 R W : i v i * l ^ I IPlf?j?ftlPJfOT| (I 8. 58-4) * ( L 3 . 19) W; ( I . 8. 27)} fffipr#f1|fe 1 &rttika.

TO SAN8KBIT COSOOSHtOW

217

intransitively used, or has * a limb of the body * for Its object, it Is Aim.; as, cf%f%fP!%?9!^ (Bk. 14 ) * the sun is shining very hot *; ?ftpfrW'IFftfraf?: ?ft<P?If<?: ( ibid 15.) tliis excessively scorcWng heat is unbearable K, '3rW%-0Rn?tqriffr (Mbh.) ' lie -warms his hands.' But ^ t l f f i f*f ijJPPSR: {Mbh.) ! a goldsmith, heats < causes to melt) gold '; so #sft n*sm frfrfWf Rr. Cbs. <T , by itself, is intcansitive; as, OTfifff w W t PP!Tf%cT sffipsffg1 { S'. 5 ) ' how will "darkness manifest itself, when the sun is shining * f 316, *% * to lead or carry, * without a preposition or with the prepositions^, 37, or f is Atm. in the foJIowiaf % senses:(l) instructing (lit. hoaoariag); as, ^ f * gives InstruetiorfS In S'&stra ' ; < ) ' Htiag up '; as, g 5% * lifts np & stick ' ; ( 3 ) s initiating into sacred rites *j % s invests Mtoavaka with the sacred thread '; ( 4 ) * knowledge *, ' investigation *; Wf ^ w * investigates the truth '; {5) * employing on wages ', s hiring '; ? f * employs labourers as hired servants '; ( 6 ) * paying off, as a tribute, d e b t ' &c.; R f?FP?^ * pays the tax due tft the ktBg ; ( 7 ) ' spenfing \ ' applying ,to use '; WW fjRfl^ 8 spends a hundred ( for feharity.). * (a) 'ft with f is Atm., only when the object Is something % else than s a part of the b o d y ' ; as, f%t<st ^fWW^f (Bk. 22) * or I shall remove ( restrain ) my anger ! ; but *ii fPrtfif * turns away Ms cheek. ' Obs. fffffc in the sense of ' teaching', " teming1, domesticating ', is paras.; ^mPnw^T^n f%mm% (B, II. 8) * as if wishing to tame the wicked aaimals of the forest *; so fff^q^if TCWl *mTm ( R. I I I . 29>). I 317. f W preceded by srr is Atm., either when it is I (1.3.86) ( 1 . 3 . 2 8 ) ; ^ ^ W ^ l^WW ( 1 . 8 . 7 5 ) ; ( L 8- 56)

intransitively used, or has ' a limb of the body for Its object, or -anything other than a work of composition; as, -31W53% ' spreads'; Trf'rtW^sa' ' stretches his hand ' ; QFFRW^ spreads the cloth. '* f a ) Preceded by and ^ ? it is Atm., when the object is not ' a literary work '; as, g^fRfif^ct" 'gathers rice *;, WRTO^sl' "lifts up a load"; but w{iJ *li * tries hard to leant t i e ed&s,* (b) ?PT with 3T is Atm., ia the sense of 'marrying*, * espousing ', or ' accepting in general; as,-#St ffcfT OT|ftffM% W%m (II. X I ? 71) ' t h a t the enemy of the teamouthed (Havana), having abandoned Sita, did not marry another.* 318. } T*f ' t o sport* is usually Atm., but preceded by the prepositions 1%, 8fT, or qft it is Paras,; as, fW fww W% (Ratn. 5) 'stop, stop, O fire '; afrdflr ^W# 'takesf rest ia a garden'; Wf T#^mf^ CT^ (Bk. 53) ' was for a time pleased at his sight.' ( a ) with 37 when, intransitively used, TW takes either Pada: as, g i n t # s g ' ffp^pf ^ F ! T ^ f^ftfel?f (Bk. 54) 'the monkey seeing Mm, desisted from what he meant. to d o ' ; mn ^MWim (Bk. 55) *he stopped, seeing there was no Sita.' 319 *W5 'to speak', by itself is Atm., in the following senses : ( l ) 'showing brilliance or proficiency i a ' ; as, R # WSt; (2) 'pacifying of coaxing ' (generally preceded by 57 in this sease); as, 1 i|?qwm% ' coacilistes or cajoles his servants V ( 3 ) 'knowledge 5 ; as, 50W W?ft ' kaows Skstra'; (4) 'toil', 'effort5; as, # t *& ' toils in the field'; (5) 'difference of opinion', ' quarrel (1..3. 83-85) i (1.3. 47-5)

TO SANSKIT CROMPOSITIOX {generally preceded by ff iu this sense ); as, iTPTFit Sfttwrit ( H. 1 ) ' of mutually conflicting scriptures *} ( 6 ) ' flattering ', ' requesting '; as, 5IWHVTf?a" ' coaxes the donor ', [ this sense is analogous to ( 2 ) . ] (a) With 1TST it is Atm., ia the sense of ' loud and distinct speaking ' ( as that of men &c.); as, 1 W ^ % W * the Bralimanas are speaking loudly together '; but J ?n=Sr^?Nr Ipffjjr: { Mbli. ) ' O beautiful lady, the cocks are crowing.' (b) With 3pf, efjj is A'tm., nuclei the same circumstances as (a), when it is intransitively used ; as, W l # W : f>55f1FT ' Kafta imitates Kalapa '; but M W ? 5 i F ' recapitulates, or reproduces "what is.said ';3f^Rr% =fNT ' f the lute resounds,* (c) With fwsr in the-sense of ' disputing ' , ' wrangling ', it takes either Pada ; as, OfSff^-% 'RTF:' the doctors are at variance ' {are disputing ); ^ffMCTR^ft ipjfWf W^TWW: (Bk. 30) ' went to it, filled with wrangling evil demons .' (d) With 3 it is Atm., in the sense of * reviling * fT ' reproaching ! j as/RnWfW^; *|wfteT^?WffW f Bk. 45 ), 32. *f^Tis A'tm., by itself in the sense of * disclosing one's intentions '; as, fWt fi^IW 1^5%; or ' accepting as umpire '; as, lfe&c( ^wff?^ iw% W: (Ki. III. 14 ) ' who, when he is ia doubt, has recourse to Kama (and others) as Ms judge or umpire. * (a) With <j, 3PT, !T and sometimes f?f it is Atm.; as, ? l f e W R ^ f W 3TSR3rsfT TW n 4t^S% ( Mk. 1) ' on account of a man's poverty, his relations do not act up to his words '; OTVapffcroi SW?FT *?fr # : ( R. VIII. 87 ) ' if a being breathes on, though only for a moment'; fffrffrsppspw MfW (S'i. I l l , 1 ) "then Hari set out for M&nprastha '; so apfFI^: ^ c W f ^ ^ t (S'.. B. 45 ) ap#3r#5rw: w (ibid*) i, svra^fw^wwwte^ ( I s . 22-3^

MJ

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

(b) With W it "s Atm,, only in the sense of 4 solemn declaration * (nHmr); as, ar?i'fW W W WOTWWfft (Mb.) f W for thee I shall surely have recourse to water or poison.* 321, With f ^ f in its literal sense of 'getting u p ' , it is Paras..; but in a figurative sense, it is A'trn.; as, ifffps!WffTO*Ktft 1 Sf| xrkfa ( Bk, 12 ) ' who dcj not esteem you, wfae strive foi your friend ? '; *p?ff^rfff5t' * raises himself up (aspires) "to absolution si see E x XI. Ifl, a a i S'i. XIV. 1 7 ; but f!3ffffTK3f?f, and fPfl^MW^^fe' a Mndred is yielded by a village. * 322. | With g ? it is Atm., ia the sense of * waiting upon in a religious manner ', ' worsMpping * ( a s a deity ); as, t ^ y # J 5 t # # : (Bk, 18 ) * those who wait upon the sun according to religious mahtres '; f ^ifK^^praffftfWt (Bk. 1. S). Obs. f i a tiiis sense of ' waiting upon ' io general, the root is found In literate re taking cither pada ; as, % ffwfet (Mb. II. *. 7 ); ^ ^ f (R IY. ) 323. With * sW It. is Atm.. also in the following senses : (1) * uniting ',' joining s; as, ifWf W F f # l ' l * tb Ganges joins the J u m n a ' : (2) * forming friendship with s ; as, Tf<n^(Tf9|^)f ( Mbh.) * forms friendship with charioteew ; ( 8 ) ' lead to * ( as a v a y ); as, ant <tWT: (Mbh.)' thif way leads to S&keta ( Ayodhyi ).s I (1.3,24 ) l (1.8.25) On this the MahabhSshya has the j^ mm. w % ^ # # ( % ff II mi
II

following;

I (Var.)

TO SAN8KKIT COMPOSITION

221

(a) Wittt W It takes either Pada whea * a desire to get a thing 5 is Implied; as, ffftgqft frfprf<|Wf&B5%-fe ( Mbh.} * a beggar waits a t the palace of Br^tanawa (with the desire of getting something) ' ; abo when it is intransitively used; as, ^^"^f^ ^ f t w i * stands ready at the time of dinner.' 324. f 5-with 3FJ is Atm,, in the sense of * constantly practising "9 as, "ttJWWf 8Ppft8" * horses always practise the gait of their progenitor '; but in the sense of 5 resembling ' it is Paras.i as, TfWfOTTirdw ( U. 4 ). 325 | f% preceded by m is Atm., in the sense of * challenging '; as, f>RTO?n>?ftTlpiq%' (Sk.) ( S'i. XX. 1 ); but m t^ftflfOT^Fpf# ( U. 0 ) * c a l this f long-lived boy also here.'

wmm % I (Dk. II. 8) (K. 88) 6) t #5Tf*T: W W ^

wmmmm:

I (Dk II. 3)

^BS^ | (U. 2) f I (A. K. 6) i : fct I (Var.) (1.8.81)

(R.

i v . 66)

(Me. i o i )

222

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

(Bk. II. 3 f t fe =f : 1 (K. V. 74) ! ( R . V. 71) : = II (S'i. II. 10) W

| (Ku. II. 3)

(Ku. I. 18) (U. 4)

(Bk.

VIII.

(ibid. 28) .ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOR EXERCISE % wmmk

(A.

R. ?)

(K. 389}

TO SANSKitlX COMPOSITION

228-

arrfw^r swfes?! (11. x v . 67) HfOTl WftwN%fe?P| II (R. XVII. 10) || (Ki. II. 85) II (R. TV. 60) i It (R. IV. 65) t i SI (Ki. II. 41)

it SI (U. 2) II (Bk. 111. 11) i ?;: II (ibid. 25) W ! ^W^#: f t : II {ibid. 29) < f f WTO^W ?5WFWTCWR^W: II \ibid, 63) S* : n (S'l. H . i s ) ti (5'. II. 34)

224

THE STUDENT'S GU13F

?SFFPf: t # 1 wrfa<RnfTO*( II (Bk. VII. 101-2)

At midnight, while I was sleeping soundly in my bed 1 was awakened ?>y a noise proceeding from persons quarreling ( f ? with f ) with oae another. % Having entrusted the protection of Ms family to his eldest son, the old man, start^l off (fff with S1) for a holy place. The French, ^om!na^(led by their ablest General, began f P[ with 3 7 ) to storm the citadel, but the Chinese easily defeated (fw with TO) them. From high words the two young men came to blows., and the more fiery-tempered of the two challenged (}% with 3TT) the other to a single combat. Fie upon those who wait upon (ftfr, with B7) rich taen and flatter them, simply with the desire of getting wealth rom them! The Jumna Joins (*pj with ) the Ganges at Praylkga, ad this place is held very sacred by the Hindus. Cease (T>| with f ) from a w e r and forsake avarice; % fret not thyself in any way to do evil. While Paras'ur&ma was riding out (WK with # ) on a Mghmettle^ palfrey, it shied at a pool of water, and the rider was violently throva down. The heir-apparent to the throne of England has marriei (ipT with i f ) the daughter of the king of Denmark. He who initiates (Jft with 3 T ) a boy into the sacred ceremonies and teache^ him redsat- Jearalng is called

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

225

This way leads (fWT with W ) directly to the river; while the other is rather circuitous; choose which you will. When the heat of the sun is so scorching f ?P| with 3 ? ), how can you go out without aa umbrella ? The light of Bmlumaw is naturally gentle; and, though it be for a time disturbed, It soon resumes ( fWT with STC w>th he. ) its wonted nature. Expectant of favours, we have long put up with the taunts of the wicked, and tamely submitted to the insults of the proud ; when then, O Hopej wilt thorn cease to work ? S ukanasa waited upon (WF with 3 7 ) Chaadriipitfa,. aad having .advised him on several important matters, returned home with a delighted heart.

LESSON X X X Roots ol the Second Ctmjugatioo 326. pP[ ' t o know' with tf is Atm., in the sense of * recognizing '; as, fjOTfff Wt T f f i w f e l ^ ( Dk. 1JL 8 ) * evea my parents do not. recognize me, * (a) I t is also Atm., when used intransitively, in the sense of * knmdng,' ' t o be aware.pf ; as, % s? i f e % WWlfJfpfrfSifWT ffiT (Bk. 17 ) * who do not know that the Mainaka mountain is the friend of the wind ' ? 327. W l with m in the sense of 'blessing' and with 5 in the sense of ' praying for ' is Atm.; ?fpfS?lWK%' T ( S \ 4 ) ' blesses her by means of a Rik metre ' ; ^ SRHFfi[ { U. 1 ) * we pray for t h i s . ' 328* ipl is usually Paras.; but when preceded by aff it is Atm., when used intransitively and referring tc one's 0wa body; as, WSfFf f t # l ^ W f t : W^Wl If: {Bk. 15) * as if striking with blazing firebrands, ia al directions. * 13

220 But <TW$ fsrc wfffe ( s . K . ) 06s. This restriction is not always observed; faepTfassfarreT ms: ( Ki. XVII. 63 ) Rits f the Third, Fourth, and Fifth Conjugations 32. The root 5F ' to give ' by itself takes either Pada; but when preceded by 3fT it is Atrn., in the sense of' taking '; as, JIKTI T W ^ " I f ^T T5^# ( S'. 4 ) ' who out of affection, J3 T would not take { pluck ) your foliage ' ; but W S|K^1% * opens his m o u t h ' also ftFflfefif s T T T fr ' opens the q S S Tf pimple on Ms foot'; < ^ spSJ sqK^rfa"; but s f K # fqpfH^FT: Wmw f t C Mbh,) 330. Jff^ with #, in the sense of ' preparing,''s being ready for * is Atom.; as, #W lwP#r #^f?ft ( Bh. I I . 6 ) 4 is ready to cut adamants '; ^.m ^ ^ ^ ( Mbh.) ' prepares for battle,' 331. *| with ?f, when transitively used, Is Paras.; as, Jfl^jf jf ^ o f } % ' does not (listen to my words ' j but used intransitively, it is Atm.; as ^ ^ ^ f Jp^ (Bk. 16) * listen, O monkey.' Rots of the Sfirfh Cn|ugatlio 332, ^ * to scatter * with aTT, in the sense of 4 throw' ing up,' ' scratching ' ( with joy ) for maintenance or making an abode is Atm.; as, 3PfWf^TWff%miT etc. ( U. 2 ) * the animals scratching (the ground) for food under the shade'; so, 3rqft=RcT JWfSt WOTff, 3*JT 3TFsprfff. But 3r#PTfe|f^f 5 scatters llower. s 333. ^ * to e a t ' is Atrn., when preceded by 3R; as, 3p[fiRi^ j|T?f ' swallows a mouthful.' (a) with ^ in the sense of ' promising,' ' -pledging one's xvord ' ; as, #fR% Wi ' pledges his w o r d ' ; but tfPrcfir WRT. 334. 5 ^ | with SIT is Atm., in the sense of 'taking

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

227

leave of,' ' bidding adieu to ' ; as, 8fTV83fW fsPRPSW^ ( Me. 9 ) ' take leave of this your dear friend. ' 335. fer with fa is Atm.; as, foffcpwrfsr z^fwM ( Bk. VI. 148) 'entered the Kishkindha mountain." (a) With 3rf*r also ; as, ?rt mw^strr^fafSrfo^ ^ t n p f ( Mu. 5 ) 'in the first place the fear of the person to be served enters (the mind of) a servant. ' Rois of the Seventh Conjugation 33S *V3J is Atm., except in the sense of ' proeeting '; as, affaf W # ' eats food ' ; w& f W# fe { R. VIII. 7 ) ' he tenderly enjoyed the earth*'; ^ |:^raTl% 'ff^" ' old people suffer hundreds of miseries ' ; but 3TrfsRf fTOW ( A. R. 3 ) ' governs his own country. ' 837. The root f JJ3T when preceded by S" and OT, or f generally by any preposition beginning or ending with a vowel, is Atm,, except with reference to sacrificial vessels; as, SPJjfPT: fOT <F: ( Bk. 39 ) ' employing agreeable words ' ; ( S'. 1 ) ; ^ipsswr ( R. VIII. 18 ) ; TW#sppfFf (ibid. 21 } ' Aja employed the six expedients beginning with peace. ' Roots of the Eighth Conjugation I 338. J f s to do ! 'by itself admits of either Pada, but it is Atm., generally with prepositions, in the following senses: ( 1 ) 'doing an injury to'; as, ^3?|p% 'informs against."; ( 2 ) ' censure. ' ' blame. ' " overcoming ' ; as, 5#ffl ;ff%W1?Teprt' * the hawk overeomes a snail ;; ( 3 ) ' serving. ' ' attending upon ' ; as. g f t ^ T ^ ^ * serves Hari ' ; * vsfteTspf ( I . S. OC.) t ^Trwrt TOT^n^rai|

( I . s. c i ) ; w I (Vdrttika). fST: I (1.3.32 )

228

THE STUDENT S G0IDE

{ 4 ) ' acting violently, * * outraging *; as <TOTTTT SPg^* outrages another's wife ' ; ( 5 ) * preparing,' ' dressing'; as, 6 fuel prepares ( boik ) water * j ( 6 ) * reciting ' ; as, TITO: 8pjp>% ' reeitef stories '; { 7 ) * employing, ' ' applying to use '; as, iff SF|f# ' devotes a hundred * ( t o sacred purposes ) ; so OTfWflw Sc"pf0rte>f3ft'f%?W { 3k. 18 ). (a) f with OT In the sense of s doing good to * is used in both the Facias ; as, W ff ^ f t TTFT^FTlT^pS?": ( S'. B . 420 ) 4 two lamps do not Indeed help each other ' ; f % W W4: f firaTjmlfiT( Mu. 7 ) ; ! T ^ f f t l % # mj # W ( Ki. VII. 28 ) * that is wealth by m^ans of which the possessor does good to others. ' ( 6 ) With * 3fj ar.d tTO", the root is Paras.; as, nwT!f?r 3K ' rejects a gift ' ; SRpirclfw I T O l rTTRTTW ( K. 6 ). 339. f with arfk is Atm., In the sense of ' bearing,' * enduring, * or ' overpowering V as, 17^f%^^ * forgives or overpowers his enemy ' ; Init HWnwfwttflF 1W ( S'. B. ) * Scripture authorizes men.' 340. W i t t $ ft it is Atm., in the sense of * tittering * (liavlng ' sounds ' for Its object) ass ?f?Fr f%fp# * produces sounds *; but f^W ffiftl% 'FIT: 4 Love affects the mind. . * ( u ) When iatransitively used, it is Atm,. with ft"; as, f ^ ( Bk. 21) ' I shall rfct at will in his city * Hosts tf the Minth Conjugation 341. The root # f *to buy s is Atm.. when preceded 7ft, f , aud 3R1; as, ptft>?fti ^pft: ffDSNnf ( Bk, 8 } % * ap|tfTTW!f faff: I (ftf#<ft) ( I . S. 70) t aw: m^ i (I. 3.38) t h m^m: i apptfffw i (I. s. 34-5) it f%t: I ( I 8. 18)

TO SANSKB1T COMPOSITIOK
4

228

requiting by deeds the obligations of the wind p p f W t ( Y. I I . ) * he who seEs t h e m . ' 342. * IT, used by- itself, admits of both the Facias ; as, smnftr M t e f e f ( u . 1 ) ; nftfr % w r ( v . 2 ) with m it Is Atm. in the sense of ' denying,' ' concealing *; as, {ftprtpfftft ' denies a haadrc \ * (a) With and Sf It. Is Atm. except In the- sense of thinking off; as, 5Rf #n^l% * looks for a hundred '; fWKf3J)qahT ^WKFT 3%3FFft% ( P. R. 4 ) * promises the h a a i of his daughter hv (oncondition of) stringing the bow of Hara.* But w w t Hl^ff WWFfTif 4 tMnks of his mother.' (b) Mwh Mwith 3pj takes either P a daa;; as, WpTFftHf W pj t a e e i h e d f mm ( U. 8 ) ; W#fsi# wm fFW f Bk. I I I . 28 I * then # # -consented to the departure of Hs son. * {e) The deslderative of IT ie always Atm.; m faRUfff ^ l ^ ^ r 1W ( B . II. 26 ) * desirous of knowing the ievotioa of her follower. * Rests of the Tenth Conjugaita mi Causab

348. Roots of the tenth conjugal!! md eaal generaiy admit of either Pada. But there are exceptions. (a) f When the causals of transitive verbs are used reflexlvely, or when the object in the primitive sense becomes the agent in the causal, the Atmanepacla is use<i except In the sense of * rememberiag with tendera *} as, WfSX W# f w f e ' devotees see Bhava'; ^ ^ # * Bhava shows himself to Ms devotees *\ ( Mb.II. 5. 80 ) % (S. K . ) . This, it wiB be easily seen, is quite different from the ordinary use of the causal; I ( I . 8. 44, 46} i ( 1 . s. 67)

280

THE STUDENT'S GOTBE

( b ) In general, the causal takes Atm., when thefruit of the action accrues to the agent; as, %fi ^p&@T gets the mat prepared for himself'; ? 1 ^R-OTPTff^": WW ( Bk. 48 ) ' accomplishing their own good.' 344. i The causals of P|, S[W, n% arc, % f with srfsf ), JJ, f . ^ t a k e Parasraaipada; iis, wtwf?f q*f, ^JWWTw |:W WTTOf^ &c, (a) Roots having the sense of ' eating ' or * swallowing ' and * shaking' take Paras. 3p| is an exception except when the act is not for the agent. | 345. * The causals of iff ' t o drink ' , ?, WW with. m, *R{ with an, ^ with ttk, f|, TO and #? (with arfV) are used in the Atm., when the fruit of the action accruesto the agent; as fe?f# fWl% ^ Tw. ( R. XIII. 9 ). (a) W^ with. 3 T is Atm. in the sense of s addressing' T aad * bidding, adieu to *; as WPtW^ff m%*tt ( S ' . 3 } ' bid farewell to your companion, *

(K.

io) l M ^ (A. K. 3) (Dk. II. 2)

(Dk.II.8) i (Dk.
II.

2)

W: (I. S, 86) * 1 ff??W!SW*fTOTHff^^fi|^IWWW> i ( 1 . 8. 89)

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

SSI

3 # i (Dk. 1.1) (Bk.n. i)

SWiTR W^: SPJfct | (Dk. II. 4)

: (KL XL 18)

m: II fKl XI. If)

|( (S'i. II. 93) I II (R. XV. 1)

ft: i (Bk. 1049)

STf: SR?fn^f%<nq|: It (#f<i. 26)

(ibid. 27)

282

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE ADDITIONAL SENTENCES FOE EXEBCISE

# # i p p p i f f w p R i (Die I I . 2) i % iWi|if!|: tmwt SW*fitRC 5 ^ # I (R. X I I I . 43)

^ 1 w f e # s f t # fjpro w: ^ ^ if % f ^ ffe 5#BHff?ip| W l i ' ^ f ; I | K i . I. 5) II (KL 1.10) Pf sifiptif ^mqifr w r o ^ ^ w i ^ ^ ^ W J I I ( K L I I . 49) II (R. VII. 81) t-fefeftRf if II ( E L X V I I I . 4 2 ) SPPfPf i( ( E . X L 62) i
(E.

v r a . is)

: II ( S i X V I . 34) fl%ap^iwifttfiq^3i^f^WHi*^%; 8HfpT I I (R. X V I I I .

TO SANSKEIT COMPOSITION

23S

Pjf% few "ftefi ^ wrt ii ( S / 2 )

S P W W wrc (MM. i)

: WIT ^ ! 11 WSj^t f f t * # II (Bk. VIII, 61-64) f (S'i. X l i . 5)

Mishyas'ringa blessed (?!R| with, 3f|) Site with the words * Bfayest thou give bitth to a warrior. * When you prepare (Wf^witii # ) for this mortal combat, take f ?T with H ) with you your best weapons. Listen, my lord ! You may oppress me, you may deprive (sjl[ with f%) me of ail my property; but you cannot take away from me my attachment to the cause of Troth. The ass, dressed in a tiger's skin, fnsprei ftspr (causof )ft ) in the aaimals that grazed about in the field. Out of the six expedients always use (ipf with S ) eonf ciliatloa i r s t ; if that Aonld fail, have r e m i s e to others. The cowherd made Ms cows drink (TT) the clear water of the pools and then took Ms way home, as the SUB was .about to set. When a man has to go to a distant place, he takes leave

284

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

of (Sfs^r with IT ) Ms elders and bows down to his tutelary deities. The elephaat, afflicted by the scorching heat of the sun, at ace plunged into (,|%5[ with f ) the deep pool of % water. The king, who protects (sf3J) his subjects as if they were his OWE children, Mmself enjoys (vaj with Wt) unending happiness, and secures the loyal attachment of Ms people to the throne. The king of the Drup$das promised ( I T with. JI%),the hand of his daughter to any one who would shoot through a fish hung above a basin of water, by looking at its image below. The sons of Sagara, while searching the sacrificial horse, fell in with the sage Kapil*. and accused ( W w i t h srf%) him as the stealer of the horse. UalucMIy.it fell out that the mother in her precipitate flight, blinded with haste, dashed (fT with m) her favourite child's head against a stone and killed it. "Hie crow picks up (| with 3|<T) crumbs of cakes or other bits of eatables, and thus maintaiES Mmself. A king of Persia ones asked (jp[ with 3fS|) a philosopher * What do you value most in kings ? 5 ' Absence of greed * was Ms reply. In this Kali age parents often s e l ( ^ with 1%) their girls for money and wed them to persons bent double withage ! Is this not monster-like ?

P A R T IV ANALYSIS AND SYNTHESIS OF SENTENCES 346. In the first three Parts we have dealt with some of the chief principles that regulate the joining together of words in sentences. We have also explained the meanIngs and uses of the more important grammatical forms and useful connective particles, which, as observed by Prof. Bain, * belonging alike to all subjects and all styles, are the very Mnges of composition.' The explanation of such forms and words is the more necessary in the ease of Sanskrit, as in the existing Sanskrit Grammars tha subject is rarely or very imperfectly treated, though, perhaps, in doing so a writer may seem to trench a little on the province of the lexicographer. To reader the rules of Syntax more simple and intelligible it is necessary to consider the analysis of sentences. This will enable the student to ascertain the different parts of sentences 'and the relation in which they stand to one another. The analysis of sentences will also facilitate Sanskrit composition, and help the student in translating from Sanskrit into English and vice versa. SECTION 1 ANALYSIS O F S E N T E N C E S 847. A sentence is the expression in language of a complete thought. The expression of a single idea is a word (f?) the aggregation of two or more words without a subject or .predicate is a phrase (q^prero) j and the collection of word

286

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

containing a finite and complete idea Is a sentence as, 1P?i, fpff, ftfe (words); ^Pfftf^RW, arfRRf 1?T f!%: (phrases) ; and mfqWRFf #%W p f p f firfSRlfST, W f p n f T ^ f l : TIH 3ppss# (sentences). AT. B.A sentence, whether indicative, imperative, optative, or Interrogative in form, Is the same in essence. 348. Every sentence consists of two p a r t s : the and the Predicate, That about which something is or asserted is the Svbjeet, and that which Is mid about the subject is the Predicate; as ? frf^RlT ^ f e * lie tun rises. * Here ffflT is the Subject and ^tfif the Bwlfeefe. | M. Sentences are of three kinds Simple, Compla, sad Compound. A simple sentence contains one subject and one finite verb or whatever serves as a predicate (see further on ) ; :.as,m{ w i W Tsmrnsraf ( K . i e e ) ; fa^ sf ( B h . n . 2 ) . A complex sentence is one which, while containing but ne principal subject and one principal predicate, has two or more finite verbs ; as, wt f^OTTft" 1OT & W tewF ( B h . 1 1 . 2 ) ; wk *rfir wtforit ( 1 ) w f (M. 5 ) . A wmpmtmd sentence Is OBC which coBtains two or more principal sentences; as, j p l f TT W 1WW l^fW WfWf fe# ( r ^ w ) (B.I.26). THE SIMPLE SENTENCE 5Si# The simple sentence contains one subject and ne finite verb. WMs is the most elementary forni of a simple sentence: t i e enlarged and complicated forms may be considered as jjpowing' oat of this by means of the processes afterwards given.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

2ST

351 The primary elements of the simple sentence* Subject and Predicate, may be enlarged by one or more secondary elements or adjuncts attached to them, wEich., in their turn, may undergo further expansions. Subject ~52 The subject may be a noun, simple or compound,, or a pronoun; : ( K . 178); ' ) ( K. 102 ); ' wmWf4t' H Ppf: ( R. X. 8 1 ) ; * # arfqr tftfef; ' q s r f ' mm^h f s # ( H . t);' wm' jrftffcrt ( R. VIII. 87 ) ; ' # 'saTPPW ( Dk. II. 8 ). Obs. (a) As the inflexion of the verb itself shows the number and person of the subject, it Is very fitequently not expressed at all; as, (i ? n^() - n ^ f ft f^ (K.-18 ) ; # W W Wtfi* (9%) ( U. 8. ) ; ( t f ) f t f ' O ' T O ( U. 2 ). ( t ) Aa adjective is often used wtliout the noun qualified l>y i t ; as, ' f e l ^ ' IPfW %svfa; '5Wfr* WFrfw!1 (M.8). ( c ) The numeral substantives often stand as the subject of a sentence; 3PC3t ' 8PJ1 * ipft ( R. X. 1 ) ; * 5RT * 353. The simple subject may be enlarged by the various means of qualifying the noun or pronoun: ( 1 ) By an adjectivepronominal qualitative or quantitative; or participial,

sr'-<F;T farror: tfsrflr ( u . 2 ) ; m ' ( U . 4 ) ; ' f * W ? ( ) W#!PfW ( K. 138 ) ^ ^ (K. 147); W f f w f w t 'wfw^Wf* ( S / 8 ) mm wmm'm prf% ( u . 2 ) . ( 2 ) By a noun or pronoun in the genitive case;

238

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE tf: ( U. 3 ) ; 3ffa j p p # ' I ' f ? : ( R . V. 4 3 f f e : ' a r s m ' ( S ' . a.).

( 3 ) By a noun in apposition ; (Dk. i t 8 ) , 06*. Participial adjectives, if derived from transitive verbs, may govern an object; ' sotferFf' icmar ' mm' fr ^ f # r w ^ # t T O # f {R. v i . 4,)-,'m^mm C q i w f r ' (anr) f i f # r fTfera?ri:"(s\ 1),* TftRWTtf^ WffcWRW^' OTtRWf: ?Wf^fTW (Dk. I. 5 ). N. B.Indeclinable past participles ia Saaskrit are of the nature of adverbs showing time, and will be considered in treating of the extension, of the predicate. 354. The most general and frequent means of enlargement in Sanskrit is the use of compounds. They are the very essence of Sanskrit, and it will be difficult to find a passage where no compound is used. No limits have been set by grammarians to the length of these compounds, and to what extremity ( absurd ia some cases ) this latitude is carried by writers, will be seen from the works of Dandin, Subaadliu, Baa, and even Bhavabhuti (see Lavangika's speeches in Mai. Act III. and the well-known Dararifaka metre in Act V ) . Compounds of moderate length add beauty to a sentence, and play a very important part in the economy of words. 355, The compounds most frequently used in the enlargement of the noun or pronoun are the Tatpurusha ( Inflectional, and Appositional) and Bahuvrfhi. ( 1 ) Instead of the simple adjective may be used the Inflectional Tatpurusha, Karmadharaya, Upapada Tatpurusha and Bahuvrihi; ' mm (R. VIII. 4 7 ) ; ft (Me. 2) ;

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION (s\ 4); ' ' mfmrt^Tf^ft' (R?IV. 4 3 ) ; w&mt ^

239 (K. us); *

(S'.I). The Genitive Tatpurusha is mostly used for the possessive case; : sfife ' TOffffW:' (It. V. l ) ; TOT#CT ' g f t w f e r f : ' (s'. i ) . 358. The subject may be further enlarged by a repetition or combination of two or more of the above modes, and the adjuncts themselves, if they be nouns or pronouns, may be enlarged by other adjuncts : fPPFf tr? ^raTpffcft f^TOT ( adj.) spftPT ( K . 119); W w * (Gen! T a t . ) f r f t e q ? ( a d j . ) : ( noun in apposition) fRcgWR: f f ^ ) g { adj. Bahu. comp.) ff?R*rnj: ( adj. ) OTTW^f ( K. 37 ) ; rfrf: Slrraflf>T: ( adj. to ;5P|fr:) fP|fe JPT^: ( adj. of Subj. ) ft m a n ^ {S'. 1 ) ; VR&R | 4 i ^ f t w w f ( adj. ) % ( adv. to the next) H^fw^vST ( adj. ) =|5P|ft( adj. ) JTf?TfptPTW 3M*%T WTOPtfl (part. adj. with obj. and adv.) Tit OTHf^T ( Dk. I I . 4 ) ; so ' ( P . I . ) ; f : # f tPF%'<!pf! ! '*:' Tmx: 'ml' (U.S). Obs. This idea of enlarging the noun has beea carried to excess by writers like Baa, Dawdin, and Subandhu. in their descriptions of persons, places, towns, rivers &c. Enlargement should be carried on so long as the sense does not become complicated or unintelligible. When there is danger of the sense being complicated, the sentence should be split up into two or more sentences. Object or Completion of Predicate 357, If the predicate be a transitive verb, or a verb of motion, or any verb becoming transitive by the force of prepositions, it is completed by means of an object. The

S40

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

olyeet may be a noun, or a pronoun, or whatever else m&y serve the purpose of a mown; ' O T f f e ' mm ( K . 42);3ffTO: 'fOTfef* WT# ( K u . i n . n ) ; mn (wmfmi' ffedrwW ( s ' . * ) ; f a r o l m ( R. II. 8 ) ; f f e ' flfff * SfWTO^ (R. VII. 87) 358. The object, "being of the same nature as the subject, may be enlarged in the same way ( see 858-6 ) : f w p p ' t f r f o t ' t R t f {Ku. I l l , 44) ; ' f e w ' f t a f r (K. 165); # * i f f W # ' ' W ^ W ' (adv. t o adj.) TPT w i i f f e (R. V. 6 1 ) ; srff^Pft 1" 'mm' ^ f t r f ( ' . 4 ) ; * ? ? ' W^WW?ftp ' m,: ' OT:fW ' WWfear r ffssftf (S'. ) S ( fei* * taC (Me. 2 ) ; 3p#Fifaf * (K. n ) . 35S. erbs of ' making, * ' naming,' * * thinking,' 'considering/ 'appointing* &c.s govern a factitive object, besides the principal one; as, (R. f. 8 6 ) ; fe (K. 108); f (K.885). 3tfU In the case of verbs governing two objects, such as, _ m^, W and sft A c , there Is a principal and a memi-ary object, or a direct and ao indirect object. See 40. 3S1. oojnetiines verbs, transitive ia sense, govern* by virtue of special ruless a noun or a pronoun in the dative, ablative, genitive, or locative case. Such cases may be regarded as completions of the predicate, for without them the sense Is not complete j Ppprfi? j|#flScIW ' < S'.- 7 ) ; Jfeqfar f p f r f M ( K. 108) ;*8|^rf% ' ' ( V . 4 ) ; *fPH^' 3ff=l ( M b h . ) ; ft :' (U. 6).

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

2*1

S2. Verbs of * giving, * * telling, * * promising, * ' sending * govern the dative of the person to whom semetMng is gtvea, told & c ; this dative may be regarded as an direet objjed ; ' t w w ' f f f t p f r t i r , i f r f r gat *Tf%* f%ffif: (R. V, so); *m^' mmmmi (R. v . 10). 06*. From another point of view, they may be regardei as extensions of the Predicate, answering to the questio* to whom, * * whither, * The Predicate 33 The Predicate may be a single, finite verb; as, 'afTgTWf *1WPT(S'. 4 ) ; ?fif| f f ftfpft ' f f f f f f " (ibid. ) , | 34 The Predicate may also be a substantive m adjective, with the verf? 3RJ * to b e ' expressed or understood r ' m' ( K i . n . a); (Mai. i ) ; * f c ftw ' ^ r a r r ' 'arflr' (S'. ) ff * t ' ( ' . 7) ; ^ f f# r t ; (S'. 7) ; * fffST: W ' ' Tft^T: W TPrp^? ( U . l ) ; ' W R ' ( K . 121), ( a } The root W[ is, by preeminence, the verb of ia complete predication, and hence it requires a noun or adjective after it to complete its sense, as in the above instaaces. But whea it denotes * existence,' it may stand by itself; as, r: 3ffef (Ku. I, 1) So also 3 whea it implies mere * existent* * and not. 'becoming'; r ? r f f ' # t t f%H ^WW: ( a VL 8 8 ) . ( 6 ) Sometimes the predicate ( aR^ f ^ , %RQ is not expressed at a l l ; W t # W W f w ^ t w wrfffPPf: ('. 7 ) , i e ^ 385. There are other verbs of incomplete predication such, as, V, ^ * to become, * Wf * to become, * or * grow/

242

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

Wf ?*5T, or W T pass. ' to appear,'' to seem ! & c , which require S a noun or adjective to make a complete predicate; WJ ' mnm:' ' 4mi:' ( P . I ) ; fra srarq; ferkr: w ^f ?RJ' ( S \ 7 ) ( become the pourer of copious showers); fotfft %' u . a ) ; wwrt f r o r f e ' ( Bh. II. 67 ) ( becomes or ( ) grozvs a good pearl); 3Pf liST: * wfgTR:' ^WWlfe ( R. VI. 60 ) ; * iK<#WT ' ^-^pyCTt ( S ' . 3 ) ( appears or seems afflicted % love.) (a) The same Is the case in the passive construction of verbs like W ' to consider, * ' deem, * ' think ', | ' to W change into,' &c. jjfgsfj- ^ f ^ ^ ^ JRTT' ( R . VIII. 45); ' ( H . 4) ; so % f e P ' Hence the predicate, if a aoun or adjective, agtees in case with the subject, or is in the nominative case. | 366. Sometimes, as in English, a sentence is expressed in a contracted form, by the use of particles or interjections, when the Subject and Predicate, or both, are not expressed, but have to be evolved out of the particles ; as, spruit; &c 367. An indeclinable not unfrequently purpose of the predicate; as, 'arcrisRw' {K. I I . | (S'. i ) = i p p f t ; serves the '-m'

Extenslcn f the Predicate 388. The Predicate is enlargedis more accurately defined or determined-by an adverb or whatever has the force of, or is equivalent to an adverb. Such are adverbs

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

243

of time, placej manner & c , particles and interjections, the several case inflectional forms (except those of the nominative, accusative, genetive and vocative); and combinations of prepositions or adverbs with nouns ? $m wm, TPTffiWT, WOTWPPT:, Tf: TO &c. 3. The enlargements or extensions of the Predicate may be classified under four heads: ( 1 ) Those relating to time. ( 2 } Those relating to place. { 8 ) Those relating to manner. | 4 I Those relating to cause aad effect. Adjuncts of Time 370. Adverbial adjuncts of Time are used to show one -of the following conditions : ( 1 ) Point or period of time, answering to the question when ? * i srtfiRf'tfsrfa' s&fafftiRrr (Ku. v . 7 i ) ; 'm:' srfertr $ ( S \ 5) ; m$%k '3RT' STfaW (S'. 4 ) ; fel' % 5T (Me. 2 ) ; ' ^ f e t ! ftft |S*. 8 ) ; P r f e t ^ R R "ami' m f%# (Ku. I. 60) ; WFWmi't^t rT: f^fq^Rrf% f w ^ f e ( S \ 6 ) . Oh$. (a) Locative absolute constructions generally signify time, and may be regarded as adverbs of time under this head; * 3Rffl% 5if%f%' & r f ^ # % f f e f ^mk (S'. 4 ) ; i.e., ' the moon having disappeared or when the moon, is hid & c . ' ; (K. 181). (b'} Similarly indeclinable past participles in 3 ? f changed to f or c f ) are adverbial adjuncts showing point or period of time. If derived from transitive verbs they may govern an object;

244

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

(K. 125); ^ f ^ ( ) pRfsrf f t T WWfowfe (S'. 4, 18), ( 2 ) Duration of time or space answering to the question * How long * ; | '. 8)) ; T (K. 152); # f ffijWffft ( K.) ; (S. #tw (u. ?). ( 3 ) Bepetilim of time, answering to the question,. ' H o w often": j j p f ^ fgnciifi ^^fti^iw u w i f c (Mil. 1 ) ; Wf^ * fir: (S. K . ) ; OT^fe: ^qfe ^ T : ' ^5lKI^ (M&l. 8 ) . Aijuocts 1 371. Adverbial adjuncts of place specify three relations : ( 1 ) Best in a place, answeriag to the question 8 Where *j (K. 48) ; ( P . I. 5)-; f f * mmt fw% ( (S'. i )) ; ' feir' W I ^ T M : ( K U . I . i ) ; f?pte?wwTwf?r: (K. 198). ( 2 ) Motion te a place, answering to the question WMther 8 ; ITT Mf^W ' W ' WT (K. 178) ; ^ # ; ' Jf^fe 8 3 # T ' V (Me. 112); ' Wfffwfff * sp=pp| ( H . 4 ) ; witm: ' JTW*ft%?: ( K u . H I . 8 1 ) . ( 8 ) Motion from a place, answering to the questioa, * Whence *; * from what * ( t h e general seise of the ablative ) 8 fe i rf (K. 182) ; * % ( ) (S'. 4 ) ; ' p : ' f ? ifWraPRi (Dk. I I . 5) i ( Ofts. The general seijses of the ablative, except caum or motive^ are expressed by this relatioa;

TO SAKSXBIT COMPOSWtOK f Ku. I. 12). (Mu. 8 } ; ftfimRr' wmrt

Aijunefe I Manner 372. Adjuncts of mode or manner specify the following r elations :{ 1 ) Manner or mode of aa action ( how }; =f?SFfte: ' # P P ? ' 3Ptf#5| {.. 184) ; W C --f% (MJ 1 | , W P f # P ! P R l f i f e : ( p . i. 2 ) , ? r f e r ' m 4 l ' 0 P A % ( K U . I V . vm% * w l (M W w i p ( c . 4 ) , <&m 'w4' 1'l ?P#f 3R (K. 151} ' (S'. 1). ( 2 ) Degree; mkm m'ws' w( (Ku. i v . 26); 1 a t i w ' ^fw* ' w l (R. I V . 1 ) ; ' w s i w (K. 151). Obs. The ablative of comparison may be tinder this head , * ' mint U^RtOTi (R. Xl, 56); f | ' fP. IV. 1). { 8 } Instrument of an action; T ( B . X I I I . 19); fefsrfff s f p w # w 4 : ' M%f: (S'. 3 ) . Oft*. The instrumental denoting the * agent ! of aa action may be consiierei under this head for aB practical purposes; <nfa^r * ( P . I, 2 ) ; ' wf: (S'. 8 ) ; ^f ' <U. 8 ) . Or, It may be put under the sabject, being regarded as the ageiit of the action. C 4 ) Attendant circumstances;

T H E

STUDENT'S GDIDE

f pf (U. 2 ) ; Tcsf 3 W B R J ' W ^ m * (R "VI. 7 9 ) ; ' xmfm' wm: (wrfe or m*&); ' w ^ $rc*rr M i W ; SFHT:OTT<ap?f?rT ' Wt fefT ' (Ku. IV. 88). Adjuncts f Cause and Effect 373. Adverbial adjuncts of this sort specify these relations : ( 1 ) The ground, reason, or motive of an action {the senses conveyed by the instrumental and ablative ); (Bh. H . 42); ( s \ 4); ' n t ^ r w f e g t i ^fk' % ^ & (P. 1.1); ' (K. 187); '?^JT I ^ r f % 5 ^ r trt%'(u. i f ; % '( f : (ibid.), {2 ) The i a a l cause or purpose of an action, as indicated by the dative case aad the lafinltive mood; * wftf??T m ( (S'. i ) ; prfer wpift ) p ^ (MM. 3 ) ; s^ ? r r ' S f ttM l plw'' 7rf%W: (S'. 7 ) ; ^ M rf% SfFWf ? t ' f qWWTwsfwM (Bh. I I I . 86); itPfrpsg % ' (Ku. H I . 18); <#iCT?3fr W^m (Ku. II. 56); ' Pffef wm' (R. v . 2 5 . ) ; # ^ ^ ^ o f l w ' ftrfftr^ % (Bh. II. 6 ) . ( 3 ) Condition, Concession; '?rnfr' wfew (M. i ) ; 5 F ^ r p r : ' m s f t 374. The particles considered la Lessons 2128 are some of them, of a purely enclitic or exclamatory character such as, ^f, fP|, fef, |f?T, ai^t, W3", jnf, *TW. Tliey may be either left oat in analysis, or may be considered as adjuncts of manner. 375. The' predicate may be further enlarged by a combination of two or more of the four circumstances boe mentioned; and these adjuncts may be enlarged by other adjuaets in any of the ways specified ia. | f 353-6.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

247

: ( u . 6.);' imt'' P % mimm

w%?' f j f ' wf%Ppft?rewT' (K. ) t' * i (K. u s ) ; 4 spr' . I. 5 ) .

Analysis of Simple Senteices 376. In. aaalysing simple sentences the manner of proceeding is as follows : 1. First set down the subject of the sentence. 2. Then set down the enlargements or attributive adjunctB of the subject. 3. Give the Predicate. 4. State the object, if the Predicate be a transitive verb, 5. State the enlargements of the object. 6. Lastly, state the adverbial adjuncts of the Predicate. Examples 9W?fT

I (Ku. U . 17)

TO SASSKBI1 COMPtttmo"" (s) i {Dk. II. 8) I : {R. XL 1) (7) fait ffPRf f f l f f f | (Ye. 3) THE C0MPLE1 SEITEICE

241*

3?7. A complex sentence, wHIe consisting of one principal subject and predicate, contains tw<^ or more .finite verbs. * fpjrwf: ' nm TmiTn (H. 1 ) ; ' f i t r * m ^ a u # Hftsft (K. u s ) . The part coataining the principal sab] ,et and predicate iis called the principal clause, and the other part the tukirdinate clause. | 378. Subordinate clauses are of three klacls:the noun clause, the adjective clause, and the adverbial ehaue. Strictly speaking, a complex sentence Is only a simple sentence in an enlarged form; the noun clause beiag representative of the noun, the adjective clause of the adjec* tive, aad the adverbial clause of the adverb or extensioa of the predicate. The Mean Cause 37S. The noun clause occupies the place of the noun ; that is, it may be the {1 ) subject or ( 2 ) object of the principal predicate ; (8) It may be in apposition to some nona in the priaeipal clause; or { 4 ) it may be the object of some verbal form ia the principal cltuse: ( l ) 4m j i # ? w : P R ffe* i r : ^ i % C D . 4 ) | Sabject of s p i t ) ; f I f f W ^ mm f i f f *' tfr | S\ i ) , (subject of t)

25

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

(2) ( S*. 4 ) (object of (a) ' mfw$i v^m m sfpssf f w r m ' 1 ifw f . # r t if; feM II { U. 5 ) ( i n apposition to f : # [ ) ; ^f fa f ^ f | f f : * (P. f in apposition to f^RTT). (4) ' ) p f f ' mm ^Ww"^ffi{*( K. 155 ) ' ( object of f 380> Noun clauses are priacipally denoted by or introduced by ^^f, ff with or without fff at the end. tw?r iff 'fwpi rPTt'R^jmftT' fRr ( s \ i ) ; # # & (K. 78) rf^ ( 8 m r8ifir f & * smrrfitf (K. 147). Ob$. Sometimes f% is not used ; mm ' ^ f t r : prt fc sr ^ d & ' (Bh. 11. a s ) . * (K. 186). The Adjective Clause I 381. An adjective clause Is used to qualify a noun or pronoan, and is of the nature of an adjective. I t is Introduced! by some forms of the relative proaoaa ITS An adjective clause may be used i {1 ) With the subject; ' iP?F?ft% f m ' I ^ %%m ^f^t ( S M ) j wwm fwPr jpst ' n t ffJTCT fiwtw:' Cu. 2 ) , * 3 ^ : mmil r:' ?rW ^ffk1 WfefefT ( U . 5 ) (qualifying ^m the adjoact of the subject). ( 2 ) With the olyeet; ' mwmw. m^t^mi' cf S W P f P % (M. 1) j *r wr^fw#^i% w r a t ^ ^ ^ 1 mim # ^ * W T t 11 { R. XVII. 17). (8) With adjuncts of the predicate; l l ^

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION f??ii (S'i. I. 23) (qualifying ml

251 the adjunct of

Obs. Mark the position of tiie adjective clause. I t either stands before or after the principal clause, and not where ' who,' ' which,' * where ' &c. stand in English. 382. Adjective clauses are often expressed by compounds of the character of the adjective, i.e., inflectional mad appositional Tatpixraslia and Bahuvrfhi; and also by participles (past, potential passives and perfect); (Dk. I. l ) , where 3fPRT: aad : represent the adjective clauses (tit S and i?tjp??sf ) T i e Adverbial Clause 383. An adverbial clause is the equlvaleat of ait adverb, and modifies the verb. I t occupies the place, and follows the construction, of aa adverb, and like it, specifies the conditions of time, place, manner, and cause and effect. 384. Adverbial clauses of time specify an event which takes place ^after, or at the same time with, -that wMefa. is expressed in the principal clause. f * (P. I. 8) ; mm'wm^mmn' ( s \ 1 ) ; 'RTf?::trrl^lf<r Wt 1%! W|W fw#ft^lf?r (Ku. IV. 4 2 ) ; -. m f w r # sfpRfflr* g r i ? ^ w # ppm-. (H. 1). Oft*. Adverbial clauses of time are often contracted by changing the particle and verb into a participle, or by using the locative absolute construction. | 385. Adverbial clauses denoting place show oaly one relation, i.e., rest in or motion to a place.

52 | 386. Adverbial clauses relating to manner are used to denote: (I) Likeness or analogy, as expressed by sjaf, OTT (correl. , cfifff } ; as, ^W f f ) ( I t Y, 8 4 ) ; (wffcr) ( u , 4 ) ; ' w r ^ fe SfffTOff * HR ^WWFPT: ( H . 4 ). *. The clauses introduced by WT or W are- often contracted. f 2 ) Degree or relation { equality, intensity & c . ) ; fwtfar f i ; sni f w f ?w^' OTT m ( f w r % ) ( u . 2 ) ; f t t (K. 252). f 38? Adverbial clauses of manner are often expressed by adjectival or Bahuvrthi compounds used adverbialf ; as,

(Ku. XVII. 51) 388. Adverbial clauses relatitig to cause and effect ate 'used to denote the following relations: ( 1 ) Ground or reason (because, since, as ) ; f t e r i f e (u. 1); # "* ( u . 5 ) ; ^Bf:* (Mai. l ) ; apJUrW^r T ^ ^rf% WWT;* (Ku. 1 . 9 5 ) ; ^ w i f e ' f i i % ' ?t % ^w fsrafir' f Me. ) I) Condition or supposition; . 4 9 ) ; ' 3W (S\ 5);

(Ve. 8 ) . 18 ) Concession ,*

< S M ) ; " ^ f | # g f f IffWl% * fWlft ^IWMf W: 1 i f ( U . 6)

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION Purpose ; % % *f%q; wm 'm a Jrty%ft%' ( u . i ) ; ' r a I W f ' ( P . I. 8 ) ; Wt # t Teg ' m i f f (lest) fepf' (M. i ) * mw s-rtkw m Tmmt ( ) ) i#p?ifffC!r WpfW ( (K. 820). ( 5 ) Consequence, result; firrc ?ror M%WT: ' W I w ^ t s o ) ; I T I w a n i (K. r 10).m f f | ^ i ' Rp ^#:* (K. n o ) , {4)

258

38. A complex sentence may be enlarged by repeating the noan, adjective, or adverbial clauses, in which case the sentence will, strictly speaking, be compound, each member of which is complex; ?R ' ' PfSftf ( K . 150}; ' mw tfsfffw # % ' ' f : w i l t f f * '"^ wr' i f p f f ^ j p f f i i ' (K. 156). 3S. Agala, two or more of the subordinate kinds of clauses may be used in the same complex sentence; ) I! (Ku. III. 72); {adv.) pCTRff?rftW: {adj.) (noun) (Dk. II. 1 Particles asei to intfiiuce Subifiinate cltases : Mown clause { f i r , W , 1^ with or without fftr. Adjective clause | Forms of f ? f -,. | <T3T,<Tni^#qT^r (followed )

254

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION Manner .Adverbial clause f Cctwe Effect, f ?W, Vtf[ (followedby i ) f ( )

255

( i ) ( y ) 2P|, W f (fol. by OTT), f?; {^) ^fe ( f o l by. wff, ?P|t aw:), %f,iw. (s) w f o , w f (3, y r : ) . (( * ( )) ^ f i future or imperative), _ (5) JPTT, W .

is t f Ctmplex Seifenees Complex seuteaces are to be analysed in the first place as If each, subordinate clause were a single word r phrase. When this is done, the subordinate -clauses may be separately analysed, like simple senteEces, Examples fc nt fefr i t s i (K. 155) (S. 6) fip-sprfiiiifffat (K. 152) THE COMPOUND SENTEiCE 392, A compound seatence contains two or more sentences, simple or complex, which are co-ordinate to each other. The members may ( 1 ) be simple sentences, or ( 2 ) some may be simple and some complex, or ( 3 ) all may te complex';

25fS

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

( i ) w % srror: fycfe * %wHiwmfkt (u. e); tffl f l p ^ j r ^ 'spiff W f%Tt'nfsRSrf?r W II (MM. l ) ( each being a simple seateace. J (2) SJlffcpsf 'TPf f%^|f% wfe^Ffi |3!?Pf i ?P% ftwffe 1 SFFMf TOTllf^'WWT: It (M. 4) ( t h e second member being a complex sentence.) (8) nfk W T Fftf f M l r f g w cwwfe 1% ft^fwrr ^ n i (both membeis being complex sentences. ) In these examples the separate sentences are not In any way dependent upon each other. Either assertion might have been made independently of the otaer, while a complex sentence can not be broken up into sentenceshaving ladepeadent meaning, d93> There are three principal relations ia which the parts of a compound sentence may stand to each, other : ( 1 ) Cumulative relation, as expressed by the cumulative conjunctioas **[, ?ffT, 3ff%^ &c, iu which two or MWe 'assertions are coupled together; (2)Adversative relaiim, as expressed by the adversative coajaactions WT, 3 y : TC^&c, in which the second sentence Is placed 1B some kind of opposition to the preceding; and ( 8 ) Ittativs relation, as expressed by the illative conjunctions "JRP, W> cRT*, in which, aa effect or coasequencc is said to' be produced from what precedes. Cnniilaflve Relation 8S4 The coupling of assertions together in the eiimu-iative relation, may take place in three different senses : ( 1 ) When equal stress is -laid upon the assertion ; ft (Mai. l ) . (Ku. I I I . 66).

TO BAK8KEIT COMPOSITION

257

( 2 ) When greater stress is laid tipwn the second clause ; f jThNTfa * (K. 88) % When there is a progressive rise of the ideas f f f p ' W:' *m (S'. 5 ) ;

(S)

1 (1). &) 0bs. Several co-ordinate seattnces follow oae another ia tMs relation, being merely placed side bj side, without any conaectiEf hoks, fch sense of which, however is implied; (S'. 4) { iere there are four assertions. J rrf

Altersatlt e 35, The adversative relation Is expressed in three ways ; { i 1 By means of the exclusive conjunctions, which imply the exclusion of the first eireumstaiiee ; fits); ' at n:<vm ( u . a ) j y r : (S'. 8) ( 2 ) By means of alternative conjunctions ; Wf-fTj , <3?r, SHft- or ^tf^

258

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE ttPPTt' Wf' ifPT ' IT ' (S*. 5); 'm' t i 'rr' ^1 s wr ? w f f : ( K . iso). (Ye, 8 ) ;

( 8 ) By means of arrestive conjunctions : ?J, festj, IT , <p:, OTTff, and (sometimes) % f # ; FT ^?PM ' #?<f (Ve. 3); wfw: (u.4); # f f e f (K. 155) ; n ) ^ *i m w ( (M. 1); % i ? s i l w t p : ' wmm w w w f f w u f e 11 ( u . 1); fi % ^ mm f i t T w^flr (s*. s ) . Illative Reiatlca 8S. The illative relation is expressed by words or expressions like-af?:, 3Wl^ s W : , 3 ^ , s r % ^^f, %w W ^T If; (s*. 5 ) ; # "%$' mm f?i^f f w ( M . 2 ) ;

{U. 1 ) ; (u. 5); srepw? f u R f ^ (M. 1). 3S7 Very often in Sanskrit, as ia English, when the co-ordinate parts of a compound sentence have the same subject, the same predicate, or any other part la common, the common part is not reoeated, and thus the sentence is contracted; (1) mm-,
W P # J

*iewff *r frf *r wwt"

(MM.

1);

' *

(ibid.)

TO SANSKEIT COMPOSITION

259 ' # * ft:' (U. 4) '(M&1.2)

Classification of particles used t connect -f#inate sentences (2) %f#-8#F, (8) 3W f f (1)

Illative

f I

Analysis I Gemptiinl Sentences l a analyzing a compound sentence, first Indicate the relation existing between the seYeral eo-orfinate sentences, and then the latter, according as they are simple r complex, may be separately analyzed. Examples ( i ) m m m m ?ro ^ r m 5?nits5#Pf (Mk. 5)

II (M. 8) (3) 3[<3T ^ ^ TTT f ^ ?ww wmi *?: ^ f e : : (M. 8) I. sjr^ (?g) *^t IT ( A ) Principal sentence. (f^) 1W ^T {B ) Principal, co-ordinate to A. {?#) H#3?rf% # f m (C) Principal, co-ordiuate to A and B. The relation is adversative.

2S0 Subject B (W) C (5f) II. # q

THE 8T1 Predicate Object Adverbial adjunct

The relation is adversative { swestlve ). Analysis of ( A ) wMett Is a complex sentence. Subject Predicate Gbfeet Adverbial adjuncts A mm; ( ^ f e : adj.) (a) ffssflpw: 3^T: -(adj.) B Wt feff (purpose) m^(:...%iXt:(o) reamm If (reason)

TO:

wwrcTffw; qffff#Wf (gen, i fffwri%#f? T ( i t } ( )

I l l , The first is a simple sentence. The second Is complex sentence, which may be analyse! as above. Tfee relation is cumulative. Miscellaneous Examples for Practice Analyse the following sentences, according to tuc metkods before explained and illustrated, stating whether they are single, complex, or compound, (S'. 2) 2. t p t ^ f w f t ^ : n f tforaft ?arfir t (s'. 5) TO^ %lf^ W^1^W* II (P. I.) (K. 177)-

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION 5. i^RRW5 (K. 196) ^

261

j it ayntoft sfawrfw s (Dk. I I . 6)

7. U f%f%!f f%fi!1[ J P wrr Jjaifaftfii W T i * nit t wRt: (Bh. I I . s ) j I (Dk. I I . 8) '9. ipStlff I ffS*3 1 WfTWRTOPI ; I. (Mu. 3)

11. 3W 1 | R I l w W 12. 9tw i ^ r a ^ w i f w f n ^ w f e f% (Ku. V. 72) 18. Iff 11 IWn: f%#W? SfW^ tPtfflRR: I ^f% wfeff ^ ^ H ! tm ijwnwwfNanf 1 (Ku. 11. 28} 14. f p i V T F | s ^ w wte 11 (K. 109) 15. ?fs$ i f t H (Dk. II. 4)
1

ftyrt w npit * i a * q i it (Mk. 10) 17. WtS% WJfW 'jS

282

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

iUWPW fPPft Ijfftwwftff'ft WPR (U.2) 18. SW ^ f f c ^ ftlB^ WW fiHf: OT^ I (P.I.) 19. qlf fPffiffiW ;|(&ff ( e . 8) SO. I f A T9pff T W W f f p ^ ^ H ^ W ? : I C (Bh. I I .

i f f i f W J swnt i f i ^ (Bh. n Iff: I ifff ^ r t ^ 5 ^ ^ S^Wff 1% f it: II ( U . 8) J M (V. 5) 24, ?f#I#; W f t ^ W f ^ W # ^ % l ^ l f i i 1 : (M. 2) w fin? ^ i w w fffe ^ w w w swrr

27. 4W <fpfPJ| if is (R. i n . 70) As a further exercise the student may select sentences from the preceding Lessons, amd analyse them.

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION SECf ION I I O n the O r d e r of W o r d s in Sentences

26$"

I t has already Been observed In the introductory section of Part I, that the order of words in a Sanskrit sentence is not a material point for consideration, In Sanskrit eery word {except adverbs and particles) Is inflected, and the grammatical inflexion itself shows the relation in which one word stands to another. Thus grarntrudically speaking, there Is ao order as such that need be namefe attended to. A seatence like Wfft" 1WW f t ffii S | f f . ustwstf may look very awkward, but It is not grammatically incorrect. But if there is HO gram' tnatiedt order, there is a sort of logical seqaenee of ideas, which must foljow oue another In a particular order,, If we examine the pages of any Sanskrit prose workB we shall find that there is some order la the arrangement of words, e.g., first conies the subject expressed or understood, with Its adjuncts, then the object {if a n y ) , and lastly, the verb or predicate; sjOTf^ftferait ( K . 80T); P r a m f w p w Tmm (Dk. i, 25) Even In Kivy&s and Dramatic poetry, which are acknowledged to be exempt from the rules of ordinary prose s this order Is many times strictly followed; TfWFfRPf 4 f t (R. I. 8 ) ; mm fife f # T & m wm-- (Bh. H. 7 7 ) ; w w * l%#: WUfk (U. 4 ) ; 3ffi#if wm mk ^ f ? f # Mw^ (Mai. 5) &c. We shall now lay down some principles regulating "the order of words in sentences. | l t d . The best rale for the student to follow in arrange ing words ia a prose sentence is this:First place the subject with all its adjeetiYes aad adjectival phrases, thea t h e object with its adjuncts, aad lastly the predicate { verbal

2114

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

nominal, or adjectival ) Adverbs and adverbial phrases may occupy any place except the last j while conjunctions f except a few) stand first before the subject. Thus the student would give a very awkward sentence If t e "were to say: 4 BfOT *J*fc: anfttf Tl srfafriff ST^tr S ^ f P f f f ' instead of saying * 1W Wt w f e f srapfirsFff TO: <S7nf SRffaTPf' (R. . 85) 401* When a verse is construe^, and-put In Its prose order, the above sequence will be found to be generally observed. Take, for lostanee, the foHowfrng verse : 3W 4 ^ i | < t # # t II (R. II. l ) prose owler will be as folows ; 8W (coaj.) W t f f : (adj. ysraflTt ( g e n . ) arfiw: f subject ) ( j j ) ^ (exten. of the adjunct of object) fi^ ( adj.) <ftosrf?nra!R'Brt ( another adj.) ttpgt: ( adjuncts of rf object) # | W T 4% ( adv.) f#f { predicate ). Similarly ffN % # ( Mil. 1 ) ; fjRf.

The general rule may now be split into particular cafies and we shall show what tne positions of the several parts of speech should be relatively to one Another. 42. The first principle to be k a r a t from die general rule is that words must be so arranged that the ideas will follow one another in their natural order, and the words In their natural connection, observing the laws of the dependence of words upon one another; ia other words, the governed and dependent words generally stand before the words on which they depend or by which they are T t a s an adjective a a i the substantive qualftei by it, the transitive verb and its object, adverbs

TO SANSKRIT CQSBOSfflQK

265

verbs, prepositions and the words governed by them & c , should be kept as near as possible In a Sanskrit sentence* 43* When a sentence has a simple subject and a verb, the former stands first; ^ r f f f e p s s % ( U . 6 ) . Adjectives precede the subject; W vpfirferasftr ( u .( e ) ; ' r t W ' p ftrff' srifr ( i t . v . i ) ; *3FFRrrw;, mfvm (K. 82). (a) Adjectives, of' course, follow the substantives they qualify, when they are used predicatlvely, (h) When pronominal and qualitative adjectives are both used, the former usually precede; tffqf fe f ( K. 169). ' oa that accursed and most dreadful night'; bat sometimes they stand after the adjectives of quality ; as, ff^SWt ^fff ?J: ( Mali, on R. . 19 ) ; fl[f!T s # f ' mMn I f ( M a l i , on R. 1 . 32 ). 404.. A noun In apposition should precede the wort 'which it is intended to expiala; ITT (K. 5 ) ; 8W ( / 1 . ' 5). 405. The geaetive generaUy stands before the word to which it relates ;* spRT:' ferci ^% ( R . I. 1 ) ; so * 3 r # r f ' f f e t ( B h . I I I . 30). (a) When the substantive is qualified by aa adjective, the order is generally the adjective, genetive s and, substantive : m mm %wnr: fRfro ( K . e i ) ; a w ^ f i p p w Tswrnr: rfWt M ( K. 28 ). 406. The vocative should be placed at the head of a sentence ; * WM' fr 0 5 8<tp5: { Dk. II. 8 ) j * 1W fH % f t ( K . 1 5 1 ) ; ' W W p fUwfW ( S'. 1 ) . 47 The predicate (verbal or nominal) always stands last ia a sentence ; it finishes the idea intended to be expressed *>y a sentence, and hence, the last is its best position.

MS

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

(a) In narratives the verb sra * to be* and sometimes W, stands first, la the sense of ' there is, *; * there was *; itara<Wft fmm-. m ^ i t e r e : (H. i ) ; 'srfer* i TPT w f l (Dk. i. i ) ; ' (Vas. s ) . (6) Sometimes the predicate stands first for the sake of emphasis; [
r

(S*. B. 371);

' mmi wmmiiM ( K .I S ) (S'. 7 ) ; 4 f?f' f^rr immm w^ ( u 2 ) ; ' ' iWTfl^FT: (K. 109); ' rf4w% I ? (U. 4) (c) The same happens in Interrogative sentences when the ioterrogative particle In not used ; as, 3fRF ' srfef * % " TOT ' mw' wr m (V. 4 ) ; * w w ! w ai<p%wrf *#*irft* ( U . 1 ). 48 R-epositions in Sanskritthe so-called Upasargm are usually prefixed to roots, and do not stand by themselves, except wliea they are used as fnfsff W^tW (governing cases). In the latter case they follow the words they govern, according to the general law ; f i r iysprate srfir' TORT ( s } . B . ) ; apftsit' m' wmfn & (R.XIIL61). (a) Words like I f , M^, f^TT, %& & c , which govern mouns or proaouns, mostly foEow the words they govern ; If, The term indeclinable in Sanskrit is of wider application than * adverbs' in English. I t includes all words which are not declined; i.e., adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, particles or interjections. The several caseInflexions of nouns and pronounsexcept those of the nominative and accusative cases, which serve the purpose of the subject and object of verbs, and the genitive, which, expresses the relation of one word to anothermay be

TO SANSKEiT COMPOSITIftK

287

regarded as * adverbs' for all practical purposes. The following rules for the position of adverbs will thus apply to the ease-Inflexions also, which are so many * extensions of the predicate, * showing time, place, manner, or cause and effect. | 41. Adverbs of time, piace, manner or cause and effect are usually placed near the words they modify; { K. 2 ). Here 1% modifies O w f , and hence must be placed before i t ; so ' aiTS^prpfflil' * ' ( adv. of cause ) asTTOPSOft ipff% ( adv. of place ) trsj ( adv. of manner ) spfrclw ( K. 124). * f & lOTPPfpf ' SRPPT ( K. 155 ) ; * ?T*rW' ( adv. of time ) m ' f t ' ITf? ( Ku. IY. 26 ). Here *ptf cannot be p k c e i first, for it would alter the sense. 411. When adverbs modify the predicate they may stand before the subject, after the subject or after the object {if any ), but not last; snapsnt {time ) aftffestf (manner ) m T f t a p w ( U. 6 ) * 5f3iTWI%f SJfspf (purpose ) 1" iff! {place} fpPIfffJ'cj? R. I. 18 ) ; tff ^kTfTsqt ( place ) t f P f i ( MM. 1). fe ( caase ) f=p%fg" (Mk.. 1 ) ; |ftTT ( agent) 8ffWf?TT: ( S'. 6 ) ; ffTWT*# { purpose, strictly inffir. obj.) w M w arrfepf M% (time ) l*ffPpf ( K. 65 ) ; iRi W^T ^fq;^fqT{ cause ) ? fimfm (R. I I . 8 ). N. B.If the subject or object have any adjuncts, the adverb should be placed after the object to avoid ambiguity. (a) The absolute clauses, being in. sense adverbs of time or (sometimes) cause, are generally placed first. (v. s ) ; (Ve. 4), O6s. Adverbs of time and place usually stand at t h e head of a senteaee s next to the conjunctions, if any

296

THE STCBENT'S GUIDE

| 412. Of conjunctions, =f, ^T, 5, ff, % never s t a a i W fiwrt, while 8Wfr, 3PT, arftpf, f%f, usually stand first; and the correlative conjunctions are used at the beginning in the clauses which they oonnect. For examples see the respective sections. 413. Of particles, the intcrrogatives usually stand first ; : &e. ( K . : 8 ) . (a) The pvticles of emphasis, such as HW J , "f? If, are joined to the words which they emphasise* Particles like 5 ^ JJ, arfr are used with the words which they modify. (6) Interjections, such as ffs ^ s j , ^ff, and vocative particles, such as ar^t, aw, ^ft1, usually head a sentence. 414. A repeated word or a word akin to the one already used in the sentence, is generally put as near that "Word as possible; as ^roft W %fff 7 %fw ftww 06*. From the preceding sections it will be seen that the- arrangement of words ia a Sanskrit sentence is much the same as in Latin. The most general rule in Latin is that, " in simple narrative, after the conjunctions comes the subject (nom. case), then the governed cases with aefcert* and expressions of time, place, manner, &c, and fast of all, the verb. " Arnold

SECTION I I I O N THE SYNTHESIS O F SENTENCES

415. Having explained the Analysis of Sanskrit Sentences and laid down some principles regulating the rfler of words, we shall BOW take the student one step further: the composition of sentences.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

268

He has already seem, that a sentence must contain a t least one subject and one predicate; that the subject or object may be enlarged by an adjective, a noun in the possessive case, a noun in apposition, by comouads, o r by combining all these modes together; and that the predicate may be enlarged by circumstances of time, place, manner, and cause and effect. Let him now try to compose sentences. Simple Sentences 416. Take the words XfM and *W. They may be combined to form a sentence, TJRt 5PTPTI Now the sentence ^pft gpnif is in its elementary form. The subject may be thus enlarged : ( i ) W O T S j f . or gijRsjppt xnft - w r , (2)- #e55fPT?^pf?r: arfwS^TfOTt WCWJpft &c. (3) ifWWSf": ifftf^FlKWEpT: &c. &c.

i t will be seen how the last sentence has growa out of the simple dements, "^PJ" and P?. Ex. 1 Frame sentences, using 3f3PT, 1FPRT, 'FIT, aad fft as subjects, and enlarge them successively in the manner above indicated. Ix. 2 Frame sentences, using the roots l>, ?r^[s *nr, if? as predicates, and the subject enlarged in any two ways, Ex.8 Take these pairs of words and write sentences enlarging the subject by an adjective and a noua la the genitive case j

27

map

STUDENT'S GTOBE

and m and c S pass. TT Ex. 4-5 Take -the sentences TRW: # 3 1 3ff R and , and enlarge the subject in all the ways of enlargement. | 417. The predicate, If a transitive verb, is completed by means of an object, which, being a lioua or pronoun, may be enlarged In the same way as the subject; e.g., 3ff WTOWIW. Here the object may be thus enlarged sf-f fen?? wraprawr; 8ft shnfaqw fenw l a the same manaer 1MT WWW sft^Tf may become, la its enlarged form, Jim W Ex. 6 Find appropriate subjects (enlarged by adjectives) and predicates, and frame sentences in wHch each of the following will stand as the object : Ti m, wmf$i, w&nM, w i i f w ^rsff^, w f t ' f t and p Ex. 7 Frame sentences using the following roots, and supplying objects enlarged by participial adjectives : T, m ' to drink, * W{, ?T with ST, d #? Ex. 8 "fate, the following words as subjects, and complete the sentences enlarging the subject and object: fl"f, Ex. 9-10 Frame sentences, finding out an appropriate subject and object to each of the roots given below, and enlarging mm,

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

271

the subject and object in any two ways : !|, fef^ wife arpff, rftfor,y , sft, w% and a s . Ex. 11 Write six sentences, la wLich the subject is enlarged by a participial adjective, and t b t predicate completed by means of an object enlarged by a participial adjective. Ex. 12 Write six sentences in which the subject and object are both enlarged by a noun or pronoun in the genitive case a n i a participial adjective. | 418. The predicate may be enlarged by circumstances of time, place, manner, and cause and effect. Take the sentence c T life. The predicate may be thus enlarged ; * cf * 3WPTfs Jflfa (time } ; & 3PJTT * f f ' ffe (time and place ); ?f?Pp!f ' WWt' i p ! fife {time, place and manaer ) f * t fW * Nh (time, manner, purpose and cause ); ^ W f ^ T ?R?R W i f e &c. tnftr. Similarly # iff may be thus variously enlarged : ft s ^ i r t OT ' * s f O T ^ ; ' faj:' cef' fw: f w l ^ ^ : W f Tc*fr ^W ^ * 5PP53:. Ex. 18 Join appropriate adverbial adjuncts of lime and mannvr to the verbs in the following sentences : ( l ) fajfrrr 5^T%; (2) 5g*WT^W; (3) 3Tf TWIT*PT; (4) S T ^ ^ e i ^ r ; (5) ^ - ; (8) ajww^Tfe; (7) #|%w TOM; ( S ) fr ^ ; (9) !IW?I :3rR ^ : ; (10) 1 | l ' Ex. 14 Frame sentences using the following adverbial adjuncts, the subject being enlarged in more than two ways : fcwr feitw

272

THE STUDEKt*S OOIBK

ffffT, f r t u t , f t f 'EfaRITra, Wife, ^RJT, J (with abl.), mm, S , Jffffof, 3wf?f, Ex. 15 Use the following in sentences, the subject being enlarged, by aa adjective or a possessie case: ^TOT f,

IX. 16 Take the following pairs of words, and enlarge the predicate by adverbial adjuncts of time and place :vfiH and f^; ^ n r | and ^ ; p aad | w ; >f!Pp and ^ twffc far; f f t and 1^[; R w aad Pf wifft ST. Ex. IT Frame sentences, using the following roots and enlarging the predicate by adverbial adjuncts of manner and cause and effect: [, ff w l l , WT w I ( A t m . ) , m, ^ with ff * to protect *, f ^ ft ft Ex. 18 Take the following subject and enlarge the predicate by means of indeclinable past participles or gerunds : ?prT:r. ml, TWt: ( agent )jfa:, IFIlfsTO, f j : t ^TOW: r T, ^Wfff, aad SPOT. Ex. 19 Enlarge the predicate, by means of the absolute coastrac, tions, usiag the following rmtS',WW, ?f^, JJ"^, f (past part,), Wf^, ^%, f | (past part.),f5, *PT with i s and frEx. 20 Enlarge the predicate, by adjuncts of time and manner ad by gerunds derived from the following roots : f |

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION tifc fir, 3 f f $, and #1 wtlfe *ffe Ex. 21

278

Write twelve sentences in wMeft the predicate Is enlarged by adverbial adjuncts of time, place, manner, and cause and effect. 419. When along with the predicate* the subject ad object (If any ) are also enlarged, the seatence assumes Its fullest form. TftRWBfT Is a sentence in its simplest form. Enlarging the subject and predicate we may have a sentence like the foHowing : tfeflf' M^T^W. In like manner the simple sentence ^ may become, when enlarged, ' ^ f e

; so also ff"T: want TS3T may be enlarged into ^ 5

^

TO% ' Wff. ft wr

Other examples are :^fe" I (K. 85) ; (K. iss); (K. 135). Bat. 22

Write six seatences Io which the subject and predicate e enlarged by all the methods of enlargement. Use the Ex. 2S Write six sentences in wMefa the predicate aad object

274

TBE STUDENT'S GO1DB *FF, pf%> Hf and fe|

are enlarged : Use the roots ?f, fg s * to obtain.' Ex. 24

Write sis sentences in which the subject, predicate aad object are all enlarged in more than one way. 42#, l a simple sentences the expression m&f be varied by changing the voice of the verb, without altering the meaning : SRfl" |B?pqTcFR[ has the same meaning as ifQPtt jwffWl#ffl'. Sometimes the expression may fee varied by a change of phrases ; ^PPfRfftTf feffrfl, faff fPfSft WPf W- are the same in sease as pppfipf ftqgftr a n i faff ^T I f f or fffp1:) fPf *RT:. But very often in Sanskrit we may vary the expression of a sentence by expressing the same Idea in different words. Take the sentence gg^f?| fpr^: spnflr. This sentence n a y be thus varasly expressed, without altering the sense:

{ or figuratively ) : Ex. 25 Taking the above as a m o i d , express In different waj the Ideas ia the following sentences :- (1) Mm i # K f w i w i ; (2) SOT * T : sftftrar.-; ( a )

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION CiiBfiex Settecces

27S

| 421. From the nature of a complex sentence it is clear that there is one principal assertion and at least one -subordinate assertion. The principal clause is iEiependeat, while the subordinate clauses are dependent in construction the principal. Thus take the sentence fft TST f 'It is simple and may be made complex by taking on to it any one of the three kinds of subordinate clauses. Thus SFfiT 1fraWWfl#^^%ff JRT% i f f fRff f # Wit | iioiin clause ) f J *T f!ft &c. (adj. clausef f ( j t ( ) iTO#i?t?tf!f f?ft: fait &c. (adv. clause). 422. We shall now give a few exercises in the composition f complex sentences. The student should, as far as possible, aim at variety in matter ss well as expressionHe should refer to the table given on page 253 which gives the particles used to introduce subordinate clause. Ex. 26-28 Write five complex sentences in which the noun clause will lie ( 1 ) the subject or object; ( I I ) be in apposition to the subject or object of the principal clause; ( I I I } be governed by some participle in the principal clause. Ex. 29 Write one complex sentence about eacli'of the following : Ex, SO Constniet fonr complex sentences in which the adjective clause will respectively qualify the subject, the object, mine adverbial adjunct, and any adjunct of the subject, object, or predicate.

27i

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE Ex. 81-34

Construct six complex sentences ( I ) having an adverbial; clause denoting time ; ( I I ) ' place ; ( I I I ) manner; ( I V ) cause, condition, purpose &c. Use such verbs as the following :fSPT, fWT with OT, |Fj[, W RJ, 8fT-IFf earn. W Ex. 35 Write six complex sentences having an adverbial clause: denoting point of time, motion to a place, analogy, manner, consequence, and condition respectively. 423. We have givea exercises in complex sentenceshaving one kind of subordinate clause. We shall now take sentences where two or more of such clauses occur. Take this sentence: |W: fTTWrOTfe I M' ^T ( Mu. 1 ). Here the object of OTWPWfeis the clause W ffe, the subject of thisclause being quailed by an adjective clause W... So in the sentence inNf WfPI ft Ti the principal predicate is modified by an adverbial clause of time *T$...f*f%fer: aad a noua clause is joined toone of its extensions (t9ft?R[ being the object of ^ftiT) In this manner we can combine two or more Mads of the subordinate clauses in one complex sentence; Iff . in this complex sentence there Is one adverbial clause TOT... modifying |FPTf%, two adjective clauses 1^...<W . . 5 ! ^ , anfl one noun clause ?Rt...^RJ|f%. Ex. 86-40 Construct five complex sentences each ( 1 ) with one aad one aoua clause j ( 2 ) one adverbial and

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

27T

one adjective clause ; ( 8 ) one noun snd one adverbial lause; ( 4 ) one adverbial and one noaa clause, each ^maliied by an adjective clause; and ( 5 ) all the three claases used together. Canponol Sentences 424, In a compound sentence, as we have alwwly seen, there are two or more principal assertions. These Assertions may be all simple or complex, or supple and complex combined. This holds good in all the three relations, cumulative, adversative apd illative. Take a simple sentence ^ i f w : VRftwl'KJf. To t u n this into a compound sentence, showing the three relations, we may say, (1) ITftRi: W ^ J l i ^ ^ , pfTO: TOW lfllil5PTfl| f 5ftrff!T W f T f t WPf fo mfm;: ^ftwsgRT fef wral%% (a) The several members of the compouad sentences are kere simple; they may be made complex, if necessary, Tinis taking ( 2 )

Here the speond member is a complex sentence .aad the first simple, which may also be turned into a complex one, t h u s : ^Wii5%W^<lW;TIPirFf &HOT?Wf ffcWtfef H F &c. Ex. 41-42 O B the above mo^el construct ( 1 ) p sentences, having simple senteaces for their members* and ( 2 ) five, having complex sentences for their mciabcw.

W8

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE Ex. 48

Write a compound sentence descriptive of each of the following :(1 ) A#FP5:; ( 2 ) f#rff:; {8 ) aRPircft apFPI: ; ( 4 ) TPppfs; ( 5} pf; and ( ) Wfe?W:. 425. In English we can combine or contract several simple sentences Iato one seutencc by means of participial, prepositional or other phrases and by means of subordinate or co-ordinate clauses. The sentence so formed may besimple, complex, or compound. Take for instance the sentence : " With these thoughts 1 came near the place. Just then I heard sounds of loud lament. I, therefore, eagerly pressed forward. Then I could clearly distinguish Kapiajala's voice upbraiding Puwdfanka for his cruelty. The cruelty lay in leaving Ms friend to live without him. "" These assertions may be thus combined into one sentence : ** With these thoughts as I came near the place I heard sounds of loud lament; and pressing eagerly forward I coold clearly distinguish Kapjnjala's voice upbraiding Ptmdarfka for Ms cruelty in leaving his.friend to live without Mm. " This, it will be seens is a compound sentence, the first member of which is a complex sentence. l a Sanskrits, the use of participles and participial phrases for the purpose of combining or contracting simple sentences is much more liberal, aad this is largely supplemented by the use of adjectival compounds (Tatpurusha and Bahuvrihi). By their aid simple sentences can be combined intoone sentence, which may be either simple, complex, o r compound, tp&ft W ##TSf& 5|WRf I fPFRf^ f P t i P t i atf: m f f f f f% f f e t f w i t ^ i . These may be thus combined into one simple sentence: BJW 8|% Jpfft s^ft m aWPpftfsnWJ^fWT ?rf|f% i l f f e $ So ^#^5T TTS t

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

279

These sentences may be combined info one complex sentence thus: # w w e 4 c r ; p R ! t ifspfj' xm ^^f^mn ^rfwrorNarcrr =ff iff1! \ITf fcff %#if Wi T ^ M J U O T ^ ^ I f f feffWK" 5 # . * Or'shorter still i t ^ O T c i l ^WT*|E^ft Vp fW W4 mi &c Ex. 44 the following groups of sentences into a single sentence which may be simple, complex, or compound, # fe% f f i OTT ftrat

3RT: f 428. We have shown In the preceding section how to combine a given number of sentences lato one sentence. We shall, as a further exercise to the student, now show how to resolve a given passage into a number of different sentences. This will enable Mm to acquire practice In paraphrasing Sanskrit passages, by varying the construction of the original passage to a considerable extent. This system will facilitate the work of parapisrasiftg by

28

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

ome-half; and if the student, after having s p i t up a passage into different seateaees, substitute equivalents for the words and expressions la the original, he will have given. a free translation or paraphrase of the passage. Take, for instance, the verse : >|RWt sgwl I ikm wre% f f f t * 8 f%ipsB% It This may be thus expressed by different sentences, or paraphrased; Pf: ^ f w ^ S

TMs is, BO doubt, a free paraphrase of the original, but It makes the sense quite clear. Take another instance :

TMs may 'be thus resolved into sentences :

;pf

f 1W ^0W15# ^f^fWFf

W#W ! Similarly

expanded . f

On- the above models, and with the assistance of 420* the student may select passages from authors and para* phrase them.

TO SANSKB1T CGMP081TI0W SECTION IV

281

UTTER-WITING I 421. Letter-writing is not a subject to which Sanskrit writers seem to have devoted muich attention. We find very few iostaaces of letters in the existing Sanskrit works, probably because GOT forefathers did not much resort to that system. Naturally, therefore, letter-writing la Sanskrit does not present the difficulty which a letter in .English, with its various formsprivate, commercial, -official &c usually presents. Letters writtea In Sanskrit are mostly of one type. There are certain settled form* in which they should be begun. There is also a variety in these forms according to the position of the person t o whom they are addressed. But beyond this difference there is nothing to distinguish a purely priate letter, | say, from a father to his s o a ) from the official or demi* official letter sent by a minister to Ms sovereign, or by any person, to another person officially. We propose in this Section to give some of the common forms of letterwriting in Sanskrit, with examples. 428, We shall first give two specimens before askiag the student to study the details: I. w wfttr i ftrfeafcrst

Expresed in the form of an English fetter the above U stand ss folows : Maheadradvlpa u % dear Mfitlyaat, X X X

*SS

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

With kind regards* I remain,. Yours sincerely, Paras'urama. Give my best compliments to the Lord of Lanka. To, H. E. Malyavat Minister of Rkv&ma, King of tanks,. I L Another specimen of a more modern form;

] 429. We now call the attention of the student to thefoEowinf points : 1. Every letter begins with the word fffef. 2. Tlie place where the letter is written is statedf firsts as in English, and is put in the ablative case, being construed with the main predicate. I t is sometimes put last ia the locative ease, as in letter I I . 8. The address (My dear, * ' dear Mr. * &c.) is not Actually expressed, but is represented by some word expressive of that relation ; as, arfyro indicating a youager relative,. fifT friendship &c. 4. The name of the writer, which, is in English, usually coupled with a word expressive of the lelatioasMp between * These adjectives are merely complimentary. I t Is* liowever.usual to put in one or two as a graceful introduction. They may be omitted in a purely business letter. f When letters -pass between persons In the same towa the place is usually omitted, as also the date.

C SANSKRIT COJUWmUN JO

w>r

him and the person addressed, is not usually written at the end, but at the beginning, being made tile subject of the first introductory sentence. The degree of relationship is expressed in the predicate of the first sentence {' 3Tffl^ff?r * * pays his respects t o , s which indicates that the writer is a friend of the person addressed ; * f%?nW% ' that they are mere acquaintances; * ^f^fSflf ^Wff * that the writer is a near relation, a father, husband &c.) M, B.In modern forms the writer's name is put at the end ( as in specimen I I ) , in the genitive case, going with some word like f l f f e , STP?TT in the body of the letter. I t sliould.be noted that this style is more formal, and should be used when the waiter does not know, or is not familiar with, the person addressed. 5. The commeneement, or the form proper, of the letter is in the third person, though other person* may occur in. the body of the letter* itself. 6. The name of the person addressed which, in English, is sometimes written at the end, near the left corner of the paper, and is written in full on the envelope, in Sanskrit, given in the introductory sentence together with the place of his residence, being made the object or the subject ( a s in letter I I ) of the predicate, or connected with it in any other way. This gives the superscription or address of a letter, 7. It is not usual in Sanskrit to specify the date of writing; but when required, it is generally put in the locative case, being used as an adverbial adjunct of the predicate, or pat last at the left-hand corner of the letter; as, fs??w#!f?i% #WWf? $ 3 ^ 1 430. For the sake of convenience, letters may be divided into two classes :- I. Domestic, or those passiug between members of s family.

884

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

I I . Other letters written by a person to Ms friend, a pupil to Ms preceptor, a minister to his sovereign, or in geei. by one person to another. These we shall call Mifteelianemu. I. D t m e s i c Lettets 431. 1 B a letter from a father to Ms son, or from an elder to a younger relation, or from a htisband to Ms wife, the degree of relationship is expressed by such worfs as We shall give a few examples. (a) A letter from a father to Ms son : | w?rFrtsrrf%^: i m-. Ararat* mpi fmx-

(e)

A letter of a more modem form will be as follows :

^raf

432. A father writing to Ms son, an elder to a younger brother, aad generally an elderly .relation writing to a younger one, will also use such a form as the following:

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

285

&c.; or, fe; or i &c. ( a ) From a husband to his wife. i

433. The following forms should be used younger writes to an elder relative, or a wife taisbanl : I. From a son to his father: ^ W H O T f w W : ^ : (or (o vim i x x x

when . to her

:)

(2) fffef I ^ ^ (sometimes TO") ? ? ^ # 5 ^ 5Wfawf?f^^'!l^^ 1 ^l T I &c. (8) JV. B,A younger writing to an elder brother, or a soa to his mother, should make the necessary changes. II'. From a wife to her husband: (the

| ipfRWH H^WJS'RR'I'nTonsJfcnT^: TTTnT name is sometimes given) f p f

io

THE STL-DENT'S GCIDE II. Miscellaneous

434. We shall now turn to the class of letters which we have called Miscellaneous. One writing to his friend will generally use words of compliment; such as , BWf* iFfi%, sffiPFsprfcr, sff^jpw milk. mFtf 3nj?*Nrf?r, swf^pr-M Tfie student has already been shown a form of such a tetter from a classical author ( see specimen letter I ) . He may take that as his model when writing to a friend. Here are some modern forms : { 1 ) Fifer I

(2) f^fef I f%H i 435. Persons who are not familiar with or do not know each other, may use the following general form:
1 |%f% or OS S% ( somfe complimentary adjective ) f w or f%%^% (the conclusion in this ease to be like that in specimen letter I I ) ; or sffaRit &c. Taking this as a model one may write to the author -of a boofc5 requesting him to send a copy by post :

* By a Money Order.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION IOTFWSSWl e f t ' ^p

JV, S. In all these letters it is not unusual to put in soiae prayer or wish for the addressee's good health. I t is pot at the end in this way ; frf%f WRff f ^ r very shortly f l i &{. 436. A pupil wiH write to his teacher ia the following way : { if in a different place )

^ ; or ffff : &c. According to this form a pupil may thus write to feis teacher asking for sick leave: wm fetliwr fte^ir; w : w : f i r ifiFPF flPHr w

AAV 43?. We shall conclude this Section with, a few more ferns:{Hfw may be repeated with each form.) (1) From a minister or other official t a Mug:

or

28

THE STUDENT'S 6OTDE ; or 9Wffllf | # ippwjFfTr: Iff:

( 2 ) From a superior to aa iaferior : r) Ac. ( 8 ) ftoo a s inferior to a superior : 3 f f P F f f R | ! i^ P i rr t ^ ( 4 ) To an ascetic :

438. We shall now ask the student to write a fewletters according to the directions la the preceding pages.. I t will be found that with these directions he will be able to write letters from one person to another in any capacity. There will be considerable variety la the matter, but t h e forms given will generally do, Ex. 45-52 1. A fetter to your father, describing your progress at school. 2. From a father to his son, sending Mm books and tome presents, 3. To your frieadt, asking Mm to give you the pleasure of Ms company at a dinner party or some religious ceremoay. 4. To a book-seller, requesting him tp sead you the books you want. 5. To your teacher, asking for leave of absence OD private affairs. 6. To a Mead, asking of him some pecuniary assistance.. 7. A note to one of your fellow-students asking M a to lend you Ms Sanskrit Grammar for a few days. 8. From the liead-masteF of a Pathas'al& to the educa-tional officer of the district asking for more assistant*,

SOTES LESSON 1 P . ?. I. 24. Said by Pururavas with refereace t o Vidushaka, when he compared the moon, to a 'modak.' ' W i t h a glutton food becomes in every case Ms proper scope or proviace, * i.e., even Ms similes and metaphors are deriYed from food. 1. 26. * Who can assure himself (believe for certain) that she is the same," there is such a vast change in her appearance. I. 27. splrtr a proper name (lord of w e a l t h | ; the meaning i s : * Yimarclaka forms -the external life, as it were, of Arthapatl s * he holds him as dear as Ms own. life which is aftnftRj: Wtf: 1. 28. A questioa; * are the Pandbvas am object of dread* &c. P . 8. i . 12. BMma says to Sahaieva: * neither my wortky brother ( D h a n n a ) , aor Arjuna, aor you too, a w the cattse * &c, p? fe^^1 4 of me, wMle yet a boy, hen a mere child.' 1. 8. % # # | [ ^ 6 a second heart * thorn formest a part and ^ r c e l of myseK, !. 5. ft#WF: * void of spirit or ptack ' and * wamtiag fire, * lnwifig no power to burn. It refers to WW^W also, which 'though very big, is easily trodden under the foot, because there is no fire in It. I 8. affflpwwP * was given the characteristic name KakwMha, * became known as Kakatstfea, or * noted for Ms good qualities * ( according to Amara). I. 10. ' W h o , like yourself, is the seceal tie of my mini. * Said by n m a n d a k f to Malatt, when she related to her wko M&ihavs was. 19

290

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

1. 12. qfN% ^ 1 % ^raiFT?3! * being in Ms last ( declining, old ) age,' who was far advanced ia age. P, 8, 11,14.-17. ^PTRW ' bringing with her a parrot.' aO^PHTcP * an object of wonder,' a prodigy, ffif frfff * so thinking," * with this thought.' tqfRWWFraT * come to your Majesty's feet. ' 1. 19. TfarpNr * while he is yet in the womb,* i.e., all these five are born with him. I. 22. ?W%: = *nrf?RT; only three things could not be given away by him because they were the essential insignia of royalty. 1, 23. The line means that, though Wealth and Learning occupy, by their nature, different stations* yet in this king they live together; the combination of wealth aoct learning, which is very rare is found in this king. 11. 24-27. silfppfwfijWI:' who have pervaded { completely filled ) the ends of quarters.' ?gf tF &c. ' who are the abode of mighty manifestations { displays ) of good actions,* who have done many meritorious deeds.

LESSON II P . 18. 1. 2. ^HKtCOTf: * guardians of the moon-lake, ? i.e., the hares. 1. 3. ' On whom the king fixes more his eye, * *.,, who is looked upon with a more favourable eye than others. 11. 5-6. The meaning is : "The demons are fit marks for your arrows ; so let your bow be bent against t h e m . ' 1. 7. H 5 1 ^ SOT# T-* FfFT ' he is a friend who is so in adversity,' or ' a friend in need is a friend indeed.' 1. 14. ' In like manner the king and the MagadM Sudakshinst) who were like them ( S'iva and Utah a a i

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

291

fndra and S'achi) were pleased with their son { who was ) like then* ( Kartlkeya and J a y a n t ) . .11. 16-17. ^ 1 *F<I% * is esteemed, * * highly thought of. ' sj-RFTPr^OT &c- * became the tie of the hope of the whole world. : Sita means to say : ' Happy indeed is that woman who. having contributed to divert ray lord, has caused the hopes of the people to be concentrated upon herself. " P, 13. 11. 18-19. Said by llama with reference to the tub of elephant tenderly reared by SIta, JRT ^Tfof &c. s He has become the receptacle of what is good in youthful age,* i.e., is possessed of youthful freshness and vigour. 11. 20-21. Prithvi means to say that Rama, ia abandoning SHa, was not swayed by these considerations, any one of which would have decided against him. P. 14. 1. 2. Diisliana, Khara and Trimurdban are the names of demons killed by Rama. 1. 4. ' That he lives is death {really speaking), and death is rest to h i m , ' i.e., the existence of such a man is a living death, and actual death only is his final rest, 11. 6-8. Line 6 is a rather doubtful line. It appears to mean :* That which may become fit object both in joy andsorrow (prosperity and adversiaty ), equally with e friend, is difficult to be found,' i.e., none but a friend will keep company with us in good and bad days. For zf fe#tf cf. Samson Agonists: * In prosperous days they swarm ; in adverse, withdraw their heads, not to be found though sought.' tffwf'PP? &e. ' But adversity is their touchstone ( on which their true character may be tested ) . !
an r

11. 11-12. fpW^f * oid of iujury,' got without injuring > one ; cf. Goldsmith : * And from the mountain's grassy side, a guiltless feast I bring.' 3RR goes with SJHWRT SPTrfssr 5Pnf% * are spent away,' ' are all exhausted "in trying to arn their livelihood.

292

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

11. 18-14. An address to the God Visfamu. " Thafc ( o u r ) words liaviag extolled thy greatness, are curtailed ( fall short ) is either through our exhaustion or inability ( to describe ), and not because thy merits are limited. *

LESSON I I I P . 20. 1. 17. fsffijaJnTPJ, 5 the drops of water thrown out * by the revolving wheel. II. 24,-25. Priyamvada means to say : ' W h o else but' Dushyanta can support ( t h e life of) her who has. exhibited signs of deep love?' 1. 29, $neflT ^frgftsft: * whose splendour is eahaBced by the raiay season. * P. 21, 1. 1. | K I W predicate of f<f, * having its object accomplished, * blessed H< object of ^fSflf%. "J 1, 4. arffytsrtT * becoming the leader or conductor, becoming the guide. 1L 10.11. apft" goes with f|p!W:. fSj^rflwfr; * whose placeshave been fixed or assigned. * 11. 18-14. Give the dimensions of the hall. WPH?. ' one hundred and fifty. * 11. 15-16. ^ffeftft": *the represeatative of R a g t a * : i.e.,' Aja. 1. 16. * Like Cupid assuming a state* other tkaa boyhood.' 1. 17. tfsrfir a r n i ^ ' has recently^ dwelt. 8 1.19, * He slept after she had slept, and rose in themorning after she had risen from sleep. * 1. 21. anf^FP generally refers to the speaker. Dushyaata. means to say : * TMs persoa (i,e,, I ) once made love * Or rathet occupies the state next (>., youth). to childhood

TO SAKSREIT COMPOSITION

2SU

I to her, Le., Hamsapadika ) ; and hence have i been subjected to a great taunt with refcireuee to the Queen -Vasumati.' P. 22.1. 8. # f fC<f3Wf fWT * by thee intending to imply * fault.' 1. 8. ftaTRTO^trf^^W' without interfering with your othet duties, * *'.,, at a time when you have no other matters to attend to. 1. 11. fif^TCR^Wif ' I n the interior of which were weapons kept ready. ! 11. 12-13. ^<p$PTFf *a conveyance having four corners,' i.e., a palanquin. 11OT: apspft fW SRJ. ^fRITCPWFi * the high ( r o y a l ) road formed by the ( rows of) sofas, * * decked ia her wedding dress. * 11. 14-15, Said by Ravawa to Sfta. 1. 17. f>OTspiT: ' attended with miseries. * 11. 18-19. m * since.* The meaning is that, like the poison of a mad dog, this scandal about Sit4 has spread eerywhercs though it was removed before by miraculous .means. I. 21. fimpT: * the companioa of my belovei, * i.e., accompanied by my beloved. 11. 22-28. 'itePrftafaPiST ' in the vicinity of which is t i e river Goi&vari s 1 . 28-27, ?^T &c. * baving for Ms weapons Ms jaws, -daws and tail. * ^wjf f w % ' slakes or quenches his thirst. * 11. 28-29 ;. 28.11.1-2. iTOPfW: * Dharma,* who had EO enemies, prfewft^ 4 as if drawn in a picture *, as If we were so many pictures devoid of the power of movement, *ad retaliation. 1. 8. 8 I t ( t h e river Sarayfi) on the banks of which are erected sacrificial posts, carries off its waters along &e capital Ajoihjk, *

99*

THE STOB^ira'S GIQBK

4. 4. WSK^fffTEf * perceiving the censure * ( to which ke would be exposed ). *Jfffe 1F| * lord of mm as he was. *

LESSON IV P . 28. 11. 18-14. V^^S^ift'^f ' instruction in wMeh. haft mot been long commenced, * she being but recently made over to her master. qft^Qft iff^ferr' how M&laviki. fares or progresses, * what degree of proficiency she has -attained. I. 15. Ipf spsg * to ask how she is -doing. * i, 19. fVffwi * pointed out bj the king Prithu ' , a* c a b b i e of yieldiog several p-ecioia things when properly nisei. 1. 20. Who had shows Ms power with regard to t h e wrk aimed at by India, who had proved his capacity to do the work intended. I. 22. fftf 8 1 therefore, * * hence L * 1 . 24-25. Said by Kautsa whea fce found t h a t : Ragliu had made Ksfeera pour down trewure from the heavem ^ # f w g w 8 of Mm who acts accorfing to the duty ( right, policy ) * of kings, ipftfw &c. s evea the heavea has beea made to yield ynr desired object. * P . 87. 11. 8-4. Sfssr ' the eldest iaugHter of Himavat. * f^WWIT * running in three streams,' through HeaveaB Earth, aad P&tMa. 1. 7. ^ i w w ^ % * the fang who was, as it were, a Muni la the hermitage in the form of a Kingdom. * I. 11. W W W t * who wore (graceful) side-locks of hmv, * i,e,, who was quite a boy j a Gen. Tat. compound. i N d ! JBC, * age is not considered in the case of those are possessed of lustre. * Cf. Bhartnhari' !f W*f 1. 12. ^ w r f ^ ^ 4 over>nie by ( t h e feeBng of) p i t y / fl. 14-17. The S'arat season is here compared to a dewet

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

8S

e s s e n ger who takes her friend ( t h e Ganges ) to her lord | the ocean) io a perfectly pleased mooi { with its extremely pure waters ) after having, with great difficulty, brought j , e r to the right path ( having brought the river to its usual coarse), who has grown lean (which has shrunk within its *oed), and who was much enraged at her husband's having many wives (which had turbid water in the rsn the ocean too, having several wives, the rivers). i . 18-21. *Pf f^RTEJ *at my Instatce* In my name. * rtfttTBf &c. 'This (jpPWW ) Is the only mode of iidress ( t o be used ) by those beings who are ea;ly subject to miseries. * 41. 22-25. m * R a m a . ' HTWR: ffpf ftPf # begging a Mess* iog of the gods, * praying to gods to wish well of Slti. * qqrftatf ^ * everything as it stood. * fiwPIPft f f fjfllt * sMog the forest ( any informatioB about) his beloved. * 4 20." As if squeezing out life from Mmself.lie coninsel torrow to his mind, * i,e., became very desperate and hence was sad st heart. 1. 27. Throws out a conjecture, iff is a particle * yes, perhaps it may b e . s

LESSON V P. 38. 1. 17, W W ^ , i.e., f f f t e , when he found the little parrot In that helpless state. ^ I W W * who had left oft straggling. * 1. 2 jfcf &c.' By whom my frieni was made to rely on that |>erson false to his promise. * 1. 22. SflRPf VdHTT^r: * you were made to e p r y the (Guru's ) seat. * 1. 28. WPftfaf^fpr: fft>fff * having taken charge ( of them ) commeacing with the duty of a oorse, * ix., ioimg *Bthata nurse would have done under the mmt eiraun*

2&B

THE STUDENT'S OO1DE

stances. Perhaps the sentence may be read as 3f<pf: iftjpfif * having actually undertaken a nurse's duties.' tpPpft ' after the tonsure ceremony was oer. * spftlW ' excepting the three Yedas. * P. 84. 1.1. Said by Chandrapida to S'uMnitss, wfaea raquesting him to persuade Ms father to allow Mm to go to bring back Vaisapmpayana. II. 67. * They two, having lamented, made the killer of their child extract from Ms heart the dart therein implanted. * 11. 9-1. f M ' wth its angas, wMeh are six S'ikshik, Chhandas, Vy&karana, Nirukta, KaJpa, and Jyotisha. * ^c^FOTff^ 4 who had -passed their f state of ) childhood.* 5rf%SWItr * the first path or road of ( t o be followed by ) poets, * who first showed poets the way. He is * ^ M : 'pfsf: * and -hence the epithet. I. 15. *{$Ft ' by y e w SfttradMra. hoaour, * referring to the

11. 21-22. Said by Rati to Capid after lie had been reduced to ashes by S'iva. TWH"....*^ may be simply locative, or loc. absolute: * enveloped in nocturnal darkness. * -1. 2824. at ijOTfif^F SfPOT ' making her, wbo was the glory or strength, ( source of stability) of the family, bow down * to the tutelary deities. ^Rfef^OTF * knowing wel what others should be made to d o . ' * made her seize {fall at) the feet of the chaste ( matronly ) women .* P. 85. 1. 1. fpil^fteW^PS: * calculated to at once unfold ' ( recall to memory).' 1L 84. 3WW%W1W name of a people. declaration or announcement of Ms victory * .., verse* declaratory of the success of his arms.
$

TO S&N8KBXr C0MP0SIT1OM

2i7

1.5. sw 'after the death of Dasaratiuu* anWT: 'vrithout a ^ or ^ * owing to the king's death. -11. 7.-8. Said by Mama to Sita . WIT * by M v a n a . 11. 9-11. Said by Braupadt to Yudhishtbira. * What other king than *yourself, who has all meaas favourable to Mm and who is proud of Ms family, will alow others to take away Ms wealth, like his own wife, attached to MH> by virtue of good qualities,'and born of a noble family. * sp ff * who possibly. * 11. 1816. These four lines and the next two are addressed by Havana to Sita, when he was endeavouring to win over her mlad to himself. 7: &c. * he who extracts milk from a stone, will aloae derive happiness from BJuma, .-meaning that it is simply impossible. #ff?w fpifpf 4 who { Havana) is telling you what is good and bad. * % few># * why make me talk much. * f 11. 171^. 4 Employ the demons aad' myself in rendering you 'service. * 1. 18. * Who will not wish for the reverential bow made by Indra. by folding Ms hands oa Ms head, * i.e., as Indra, my conquered vassal, bows dowm to me, so will he bow down to you my dear beloved. i or arfw^ft wsft * f 11.19-20. tpj i.e., U # WfPT fSRJ * calculated to disperse | destroy) the multitude of demons.* TTftRpf: Vis'vamitra. LESSON VI P. 40. 1. 16. 3 f # W ^ s i f e 4 l l ^ i r ' i t will-be manifest who is inferior and who is superior. * II. 18-19. 3fj| apjf Gaftadisa^ who complained to the iing about Haradatta. 1. 20. I conjure you by the Mfc of' &e. if you do s a y it in words. Said by Madhava, when MalatI simply replies to his qaestioas.

1W

THE STJJOENT'S GUIDE

P . 41. 11, 13. STRVftCTiftftF: * aa o i l Dravida ascetic. * goes with PtTC:, aad means * to the satisfaetioa of.* goes with iPftVRl * wished for,' ''cherished. * 1. 5, f igpfT * why say much,* to be brief. % 1. 8. * 1 am ashamed of my very heart, now thai.. it knows the whole affair. * 11. 18-14, wpf^W cU. arfffT ' belongs to, * * is possessed by .* I. 14. * Then garden-creepers are Indeed distanced by wild creepers la point of excellence,* i.e., nature unadorned adorns the most. * 11. 15-16. Describe the state of Sudakshina when: pregnant. 8re*npg3V|T * not having put on ell her1' ornap, meats. * but only a few necessary ones, such as Wf^pf^ fNsw &c. W#f = Jp|#???felWF. fpJWRT * of dim lustre. * fl%HTWT the night * the stars in which, have to be searched out, * being very few, as It is nearly day-break. -JL19. Wfip| SRfijlf; * lie among all men, who, ua> d&tuded; kaows m e ' &c. < L 28. P . 42. 1. 5-6. Translate : * Proud women, though having first slighted a prostration, are subsequently stung: n i t h m s e , are nevertheless secretly ( a t heart) ashamed; of propitiating their beloved ones, i.e., do not like to openly; coaciliate them. ) 11.7-8. Said by Mima to S!tA, whea a i d WW^wfaT p w # fmjk * t i l the purifieatim, of | by fire.' M m a means to say ; s Pity it Is that people fawr* to be propitiated by those whose wealth consists in tlwte aoMe (untarnished) famfly8 a o i hence that step (purifia**' tion) was takea simply to please the people; and thm> ime what i l we have said of you, does not Indeed befit you.* Is as ifufw:. !. -10. Every instrameatal is to be consbmel with'

TO SANSKBEP COMPOSITION

lift

the noura folowiag It. wfwPff555PIT &c. ' because blooming youth abounds in Immodest a c t s . ' Pff = 5^W 11. IS -IS. FJf?T Wi ' attains to a position. * *JW JkC* being connected with ( arising from) ths possession of a number of qualities,' which are not found in the dog. 1. 17. W: = *tPr. 1. 19. fspPIOTR:fWPT: 5WP!: Jfalt- * amongst which Biodesty stands foremost.* i . 26-29. ifS^iM^ppft: goes with * simultaneously. * These lines show the superiority of Chteaky* to the sun : ' Who surpasses, by Ms lustre, the lustre of the thousand-rayed god, which Is not all-pervading, and which causes cold and heat in alternate succession, ( and not at oae aad the same time as did Chtaakya). P. 48. 11. 56. Describe the qualities of Duryodhaaai.. OTcf * uplifted * or drawn against enemies. His oriew are most respectfully obeyed by kings. *Pf also meant ' a thread. * 11. 9-10. Refer to S'is'upila, as described by EkmM to Vishnu. <war: * while yet a boy. * r#f &c. * in face, being like thte full moon, he was I k e the three-eyed -god. * 1.1 4 M&w he, beitag a youth (grown-up m a n ) , who has made kin^g wbject to tributes, is, to be sure, pre-eminently * ke the sun (who occupies the mountains with his ntvs ) LESSON VII P. 48, L 20. fpflW baa the sense of the iBStaimeataL * Undertaking to decide by only one petsoa, howsoever omniscient, is liable to be faulty.* ~ i 25. f t scil. U W W . 1. 27. mwfc * given to a good person. * 1. 29. Said by Gang& to the Earth when she mm ogty with R&nm for having abandoned her elsaglftftr*

3d

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

Sitl. wftTWfe #ffCW ' you are the very body { mainstay ) of worldly life.' P. 50.11. 1-2. p f ^ T . . . M ^ : ' full of pride of .pretended ( false ) greatness,' SffcfSIWT &c. * they hate the minister's advice thinking that it {following the advice ) is degrading { derogatory to ) their own wisdom.' 1. 5. tf^l^Tnr>rnTJT:^ ' first making his salutation C paying Ms respects) to Mahas'veta. * 1. 8. arcisnRRPihR ' who is beyond the reach ( range ) of speech and mind', i.e., who can neither be described nor conceived. 11. 9-10, An address to t i e moon. The Amkvh&yk | new moon d a y ) occurs when the mooa enters (afTfiff) the body of the sun, but for which, there being no Dars'a day, there would be no performance ' of sacred rites by the pious. ^Wf &e. cf. TOffftwW ^J^fijpffcfft: 1OTIf p|: ( R. V. 16 ), the waning of the moon j from day to day being ascribed to Ms being drunk up, digit by digit, by the Gods and Manes. 11. 1112. Said by the seven sages to Himalaya whea \ they asked Umk in marriage for S'iva. 5Wc|p5' &c, * this : manner f collection of circumstances) is sufficient to ' elevate your family, * II. 13-14. qirfsNt: TfaffiKT:' Ifldra afraid of Trimbiadu*. wko was practising austere penance. Gods, aad especially ladra, are always afraid of the penance of others; ef S'ikuntala ActI. ' ar^RSRnnfWNcf t f W t ' MV name of a nymph. 11. 17-18. Said by Katitsa, when he found R a g t a almost penniless, and wished to take Ms departure. f?pffefrfappf &c. * even the CMtaka does not trouble (press with requests) aa autumnal cloud, whose watery contents have been poured out or emptied. s

TO SANSKBIT COMPOSITION

301

11. 1920. * The king having approached that only gos.* C of his parents ) who was in that condition, told theta both Ms deed done through ignorance.' x^tw, according to some means s f | W . p . 51. 1. 2. ^ j S P f * falling quite prostrate on the ground, * like a stick lying horizontally down. l 1. 4. M ? 5#f ff?t the seeing of friends by Rama, * ' Mima's st-eing his friends. 1. 6. jpSWIW: ' a disgrace to the family, * who sally the tioaoar of their family. 11. 11-12. I'sfefe?:, qfW *fer the performance oE sacrifices * which keep gods contented. Inetra seat down rain (lit. milked the heaven.) for corn to grow ; thus they two reciprocated sendees, and supported the two worlds. Tf f^tf * milked the earth * (took taxes ). 11. 1314. An address to Brahman ^siWiiW^ 8 who was single, undivided. * sfjor^f* Rajas, Sata, and' lamas. * Brahman was afterwards divided at the times, of creation, the three qualities appearing respectively at the times of creation, preservation, and distraction. 1. 18, ^iWR^fli^* * that happiness which falls to one's lot after ( suffering ) misery, * the savoariness of the pleasure arising from contrasted enjoyment. 1. 2'i. sppfW ^?l% ' is fit to receive Aruna 5 the harbinger of the sua, which indicates the close of night. P. 52, 1. 2. 3pT|J!^% * roars i n return. * II. 3-4. icffflf saying * yes . * ffgOTTWOT * who longed for issue or progeny. * 11. 5-6. ?fPTT: goes with TOR. 1. 6. * Communicated tr liis beloved the favour of the cow, inferred from the * Better translate* The king having approached them,, told them of the condition their only son was in, and Ms owa deed * etc.

802

THE STUBENT'8 GUIDE

signs of delight ( o n his face), in words which were, as it were, superfluous * as the very appearance of delight informed the <jeen of the auspicious event. I . 9id. p w W &c. * restored to its former grandeai. or magnificence.' f ?ppft?i|W &c. * did' not at all eavy the happiness of either, because he already eajoyed It in Ms capital. 1. 12. frp|ftfe ss fPJW: * assuming a conciliatory tone, * 11. 18-16. fefj~ff TO T %%5f*l!8Bnf. 1. 14. * I t is the- very character of demons that they should make inquiries about others* wives.* *PTCjprf: c&

LESSON 111 P . 58, 1. 21. ifNWfflWWfil * OB account of the dlstimgwislied reception * ( on the part of the I n d r a ) ; the king ' 'means to say that he has done nothing to merit such a gmnd reception at Indra s s hands. 1. 22. ^tfrnftCTRg wfwpfWff 4 returned! after having served, or waited upon, the SUB. ' P . 59. 1. 5-6. 3f3l3R "iftfiRlt * whose life Is departing,' or leaving her. 1. 7. SWCfaPf * more following more* * * talking more * and more. * l. 9. ^ w t s w ^ r w r . I . 18-14. Said by Purdravas to the Swan. WHf * first,' * before doiag anything else. * i. 14. * To the good the business o # a supplicant is more weighty (important) than their own interest. * I . 15-16.. OT% ffftWff * who had made up her mini t o practise penance. s 'JpRRfHWIIW. 1.18. l ^ w ^ fc, In its abseace (there being no

TO 8ANSKEIT COMPOSITION

8t&

fa,

) even that which, exists becomes aon-existing, * there is BO security of person or property.

II. 19-20. S": SB itj:. WPH * the science of missiles. * His father himself was Ms guru. 11. 21-22. ?IWR| * from the conqueror, Hagfau .' ^nfofcf: * the Suhmas saved themselves. * ^cWff jf * following the course of reeds, * which bend down to the current of water; hence, * yielding to & stroager enemy .' P. 60. 11. 8-4. Describe the position of * Madhyades'a. .11. 67. ^*R|*Rft Tfwjjr^FT * the people in which were dirtier than their birth.and deeds. * PppRfT &c. * all whose practices were more abominable than their hearts. * P. 8-9. She considers the pleasure-garden to be the bow of Cupid, which is lovely on aceoun of having arrows made of iowew, and the garden is abo lovely m account of bees clinging to the flowers. if?it*pf * arrow, 9 and * bee. * te^WF:ft?t!W % W l f f , Champaka and As'oka being yellow and red respectively ; and ft?f T*Rf K% when taken with TTSffaT. 1. 11. aWRPT^ 8 self-excellence. * ^fw^WIWfft" * beginning with aoble descent. ? 1. 17. VJifWfT * who has got room for free or upfaainperel conduct *, ' grown ascendant. * JJilfl'PWf 4 served or propitiated with difficulty. * 1.- 20. fWfWPf * imparting moral training, 8 * teaching gool manners. * 11. 22-28. nm =3rar:; n%?R: = V$ 1. 23."' He, of firm resolve, did not desist from his practice of meditation t i l lie had seem the Supreme Being. s P . 81. 1. 1. fspffer * weil-observed. * 1L 10-12. Said by SitJt, when she foaBd M&ruti near her in the As'oka garden. |ffwra &c. ' he appears to be iiffereat from the l o i a e r (i.e,s MMWSM& ) , siaee he devoutly

804

THE STUDENT 8 SUIDE

glorifies R&ma; or Is it that he has come here to Inspire confidence In me, without any cruelty * f !WRFR[ IFf sell. ; 'who ' found | B&aa's ) addresses to be unbearable. * I!, 18-17. i p m t * the one syllable * aftw nffSfff^ f t nft?[ * there is nothing superior to S&vitri,' the celebrated G&yatri Mantra. (which has to be silently repeated or muttered J.

LESSON I X P . 67.11.8-4 ff?FP#r-. * a living or contemporary poet. 1. 7. WSWPf! * has fixed her affection * on you. 11. 8-0. Said by Lava to Kus'a. I. 28. #EFP|fe: % | = W 1 W ^ W : company of wicked people."

'shunning

the

P. 68. 1. 1. fRfPPftf ffW * for ( t h e performance of} some rite having for its object progeny. * i . 6-7. Said by ladra to Cupid, when entrusting to Mm s great mission, siTrTOW ' you who are like myself, seeing Ms capacity to hold up the earth. * 1. 9. f c # i#PP!f s S M who formed the entire auspiciousness * of both the families. 1. 18. |ff ' their lord,' i.e., KJtma. ferRT &c. * who entertained a very cruel thought with respect to Site, * i.e., of abandoning her. 11.15-16. TO?f#if:' destroying the works of Ms enemies^ . 1 . 16. * Striking Ms foes in their weak points, he covered Ms owa weak ones." 11. 18-30. Said by Mikatasa to Laksiuni, with re-

tO SANSKKXT COMPOSITION

305

ference to the want of appreciation of merits shown, by her i leaviag Naoda and falling in love with Ciianctragupta. II. 21.-28. Said to Vidushaka by Dushyanta who 0S& pleased with the picture of S'&kuntafo, though he ^ad Mmseif first repudiated her when she came to him w person. P. 69,11. 3-4. Said byR&vanato Sita, when she contemptuously spurned all Ms supplications. iffffWTO'S'pft' * not inclined to acknowledge me * as your lord. 1 . 8-8, ?f at 5PW: SfF^pRFTRT ' from the words of the trustworthy sage.' At these words of the sage, Jaaaka became assured of the manly heroism existing in R&ghava though he appeared to be but a boy. fwwflfWTl% of the size of an, Indragopa insect, * as small as Jfce. LESSON X P, 79. i , 5-6. fwVlflKOTafWfl'r: ' bearicg testimony to the occurreHces {incidents) of much familiarity. f between us two. ~ I. 7. t^wrffc^ * under these circumstances. * I. 8. Wf OT^fif M t ' your ladyship has full power to do t h a t ' &c. ~I1, 11-12. snf W^:, le., MMatl. ^ W^ &c. * that beiag is surely not dead s who Is remembered by Ms beloved.' ~ i . 19. 51Tftd% ' in the front of battle, * ' in the thickest of the fight. * P. 80. 11. 1-8. fpf^TOIW ' he was like N4riiyaa, who represents all gods9 because he had the several deities dwelling IB Mmseif. * Dharma in the mind, i.e., he was as straightforward or righteous as Dharma, &c. 11. 5-6. * Certainly Dharma stayiag here In Ms entirety, setting at a naught the sports of Kali age (being act

806 not influenced by its effects ) does not think of the { good old ) Krila a g e , ' the age proper for Dharnaa; so good is the life of those who dwell In this hermitage. P . 80. 1. 8, fRf 51KW &c. * but with yotis the blesslnp have preceded your favors * against the general coarse of cause and effect. 1. 10. #W!s#": 5 to be decapitated. s S" s= WIT. i. 11-12. ^pppift sdl. the two mothers Kausaly^ and Sumitxa. 11. 18-14. Said by Stta to Lakshmatta, who* she was ruthlessly abandoned. 3iFnn{ ' i n my name.* I. 15. SKI": ffelrfR:: ' i t Is now 12 years since the world "was, made destitute of the queen. * 1.17. # f i w f ^ i w = # f i & arftwpf. - 4 L 20-28. OT=#3T. JT: &c. 8 Knowing the entry of the monkey into the {impregnable) citv Lanki to be a occurrence.* l. 24-27. Refections of Stta, at her fret s e e i ^ fi alighting in the garden. She first believes Mm to be M&vana. 1L 2-27 State why she does not believe that the person had been sent by Btaia. e Bweling to the north of this seas how could R&ma know this city situated t o the south of the salt ocean'? LESSON X I P . 66. 1. 1. Said by Parivr&jik&, wheB she was told to sit as a Judge to decide the quarrel between the two dancing preceptors. VRtff &c. a question ; * is a jewel examined in a vilage there being a town ( hard by ) ,* meaning that the king alone was fit to do the duty asked of her. 1. 8. m HWW * oh, do not do s o , ' * hold, hold. * L 5. 1% #%s>PftTO#T' why the superfluity of lights * why want these lights, * they are sferfhs.

SO SANSKRIT COMPOSOTOW

307

p . 86. 1. 7. f f?f * what became of her ! *% how it fared % with her?* ,--1. 8. "^^?1%W * the pre-eminent among Raghus. 1, in. ?n#3i## sp?Tp? ' make Mm only remain . la aieoiory,' .<?-, MM Mm. p . 7. 11. 3^* ^W Sita herself, who, when she- was pregnant, was cast off. 11. 5-6 m Prithvi. m Utr ajffi^jpt * just as he ( t h e lord ) was saying * oh* do not, do not take her away.' 1. 14. "TOOTf W ^ * a creeper (dependent on the tree) leads (Is sure ) to fall down.' --11. 17-18. The strong-minded are not the appearance of ianger. deterred by

1. 21. infFPIfljtf*! s continuously flowing, * * Ineessaatly working. * 1. 22. ssffeTt Hf^W #Wf>% * tow together, as it were, la thousands of currents,* finfl out thousands of new eliannels tq vent themselws. 1. 23. fffif: * the five constituent elements. 8 TRt *l% * reduced to wae skate of I v e , * resolved or decomposed t o its component members. P. 88. 11. 1-2. wHipr = W# the missile which was used % Kus'a against Ytoiki to get back Ms golden bracelet. !*nfef &c. * with its hands in the form of waves tossed about through agitation. * Ttltfir f5p*F| * violently dashing against the sides.' 11. 5-8. Makshasa says to Malayaketu that e^eryttang is ready for aetion s aad every circumstance is favourable to them. ?^lt3F!rf%#f 6 obstructed by your desire, * *., * only desire to inarch onward, aad everything else is 'eady. * the several locative absolutes show the favourable ewmstaaees. f f e n f e ^ R f w ^ 5 indifferent, being dismissed

38

THE STUDENT'S 6O1BE

from Ms authority.' ^W &c. # f is superfluous; * who business Is only pointing out the way. * P. 88- II. 9-12. Said by As'vatthaman. 1. 9. ' Who acted like the submarine fire in the oceaa consisting of the enemy's! forces lapped by t i e lames of the missiles burled against! them.'

I I P, 95. 11, 1-4. These four lines give the use of all t k e | s t a r t forms. W:-T: in the sense of the instrumental.; * fit to be', sewed % you or us. * 1. 7. fMWRJ * for my purpose, * that I might understand and realize the events of that time, 11. 8-9. SaidbySIta. TOf#t#W:s just like my children.' ' I. 10. cfTfiPpftW: ' who formed the subject of our 1. 19. wf^ff% ' send love-messages. * ^PJHTtF draw near their beloved ones.' II. 21-22. tr^: fe excellence of his sovereign power,' SfpFfttJ consisting of S"? and 3T551. .^fwWFWNPfT * by the practice of concentration (meditation).' l ^ K ^ T F T * visible in (pervading) the body,* il. 24-25. Krishraa says to Arjuna : ' Those who are deprived of their discerning power by various desires, look up to other Gods, performing various rites and control* led ( guided ) by their own nature. * P . 96. 11. 8-4. Describe the state of those who are puffed up with the possession of riches. siffpRRf &c. ' though become the mark of hundreds of calamities,' though exposed to hundreds of miseries, they do not perceive t h a t their fall is imminent like that of the drops of water a the ends of grass growing oa ant-hills.

LESSON -XII

TO SANSKKIT COMPOSITION

809

. }, 5. *ffre<fwPp| &c- on account of its lucid and transparent water, it served, as it were, as a mirror for the Goddess of Splendour to see her face in. p . 96. H. 8-9. TO%; the Chedi king, w f e n r o * p a t forth," ' exhibited.' 1.12. spffdffT fwrffpr:' devoid of the warmth of wealth *; cf. the English phrase * a warm m a n . ' .1. 25. ' As is seen la Chitrk an<i the moon ia their COB j u uction when freed from mists.' 11, 26-27. The peculiarity of a slanderer is that he the ears of one and destroys another ( b y reasoa his backbiting), unlike the ordinary course of bites, which kill only him who is bitten. p. 97. 11.1-2. Describe the qualities of Aja. 1. 2, * The Prince did not differ from, his (generating ) zause, M father, just as a lamp lighted from another, does not differ from it.* (in flame or light.) LESSON X I I I P. 102. 1. 1. % wfe fTHSf * wishing to kaow your fate. * what had become of you. 1. 8. wrf%OTT: * prevented from advancing. * 11, 5-6. w w t : ' k a r a t from the sage,' f which lie had heard from the sage. 1. 3. * Ragh&va became excited though he was not conscious of the acts of Ms former existence (in the Dwarf inearnatioa.)' II. 11-12. Said by Mahas'vetA, when, her mind was <frawn by Cupid towards the holy sage Ptmdartka. 11, 14-15. Said % Gawadasa, when Db&jiai was''not willing to allow Mm to exhibit his skill in acting ia the person of his pupil Malavika. pP^RN>|f% s the power of transferring or imparting to another what oae knows or can do,'

310

THE STUDENT'S

11. 20-21. stfW * for security,* to ensure thnt safety fcftftr ^ppr: and hence the significance of Ms name, p. 102.1.2f, ^pptftrte: =s WR:, the king of the Yaidarbhas.. ffg'&e 'like the set, with Its surging waves, going-to meet the moon,' which occurs at the phenomenon known a* Tides.

TJBSSON XIV P. 107. 1. 19, aprspiwt: of Haradatta and Ganadastu. HRRPIW: * a literary contest, * a contention for superi* ority ia knowledge, * 11. 21-22. Said by Agaiihitra to VidQsfaaka whea, the latter told him how he had made Madhavika set at. liberty the two girls Malavika and Bakulavalika. 1. 23. Said by Pururavas to Chitralekha and Urvas'i, when they were called up to execute an order of their lord Indra. P . 108. 1. 2. ^ W W ^ H U f f M * has become such as must be done, 8 has become an imperative necessity. 1. 8-4, ^feWffe &c. * should be made to take the hint given by the contraction ( winking) of the right eye.8 you should wink at them in sucb a manner that they m i l at, once understand what you mean. 11. 8-9, 1 consider him to be the best maa who res-:' pectively obliges and retaliates upon' Mm who has helped ' and laughed at him in adversity. * 1. 11. ' T h e king should remove the afflictions of ft person who is distressed and who dwells in Hs dominions. r Jl 14.;3cfRffira!f'rs.* their life left them, as it were.*1 11. 18-19. Said by'R&ksfaasa, when he was told thi*\ a person desired to see Mm on urgent business. 11. 21-22. s When you have thus completely M e

TO SANSKRIT COMPGSiTIOk

811

the .measure of your sins, the anger of the P&davas will ct only as a toiling cause to lead you to your doom. * 1. 25. * A heart, agitated by grief, is eased ( disburdened) ] y by lamentations, * oa p . 109- 1. 'i. 1 *3fr: 1FOT * putting ia the back-ground, * repressing. 1. 4. Describe the fame of Raghu. ^W#W * ever-conti-* nuous, * eternal. fffPIT ffrsfStf WPJcaanot be circumscribeii within any limits. * i.e., no determinate limit caa be set to it.' H. S. ffOT ^ T Slftw * laughter delightfully continued,* &c. * Joyous sports, enlivened by love ' decreased. * destitute of exhilarating passions.' J t f i p &c * and what was beneficial to, and desired by, the towa was not done.' 11. 8-11. Said by Kattva when sending DnsiiyaoJ* a message. < P O T ^ | 5 | * whose only wealth, is their restraint of passions,' uwrawNwWf * not in any way brought about by her relatives. * 11.10-11. * She should be looked upon by you as one of your wives with a respect common to all. Further than this rests with fate; it should not be uttered {referred t o ) by the relatives of the bride. * LESSON XV P. 116.1.9. fipniTWraff^inft * % fake accounts and mes* ~ 1 . 18. ?feWifK *nfr?T: * slaughtered like a sacrificial victim.' l ! fe 11. 19-20. fira^irrfitftwf * having CMtralekhi for *hf companion. s P. 117. 1. 3-4. i r W w f W Mil. ijppiT. m$tt Khan, and Dushawa.

812

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

0. fc-7. ^RfWTO' * repeatedly beading down the creepers.* &c. * would sip water, troubling the (water* of) rivers. *! fFffe#?i|^ * seating himself on some charming rock.* -1.12. feOTSfffTOWts who have entered ItttoconiaeBce', who repose in confidence. 11. 16 * Overcoming ( all sense of) shame, warding off decorum, and at once rooting out strength of mind. * * slow in (forming ) Judgment, * 1. 24O spp^ftelT * with graceful agility. * P. 117. 1. 25 fa# mxm ' whan It was midnight. * "&. HB. H. 1-2. f%ICT.., .icfT' who made an attempt at killing whomsoever she considered { saw ) to be a Brahmana * feft^?.-.?W: * who took resplemdant missiles to kill whomsoever lie knew to be murderous.' 11. 4.5. * Better that he dies or is dried up &c. who does not abide by his elders' order in the case of a difficult thing {to do which is an. arduous duty ) ; how much more so when he is told to travel abroad * ( a comparatively easy t a s k ) . -11. 7-10, BAksbasa blames Malayaketu for suspecting Ms conduct without any ground. l H o w ' says he, 5 did it not occur to Ms mind that he, who even now served Ms master's c a u though they themselves were dead and goae5 would not certainly ally himself with his professed enemies, so long as he lived safe and sound ! ? LESSON XVI P, 12S. 1.25. ?ft 'PRtW; <rfts#^ * to eiamine or test us w it h regard to our merits and demerits, so as to ascertain o u r excellences and defects. P. 128. 1. 26. WW$ 'attended with promises r agreements."

TO SANSKItIT COMPOSITION

819

. i, 3, Said by the son of Pumravas, when lie was aboo* to be entrusted by his father with the serious respoasi bility of governing the kingdom. I. 81. m WIT * what need we say of,' * much more is it true la the case of. * P . 124.11.1-2. arf^nfwfeWTW: * who has newly acquired sovereignty,' whose sovereignty is newly established. tf * not having struck deep roots in ( t h e minds bl of) Ms subjects,' and who, therefore, resembles a tree which is loose on account of its being newly planted f when i t has not struck its roots deep la the soil). 11. 7-8. ' The life described was BJima's; the work belonged to V&Imiki, aad they themselves had voices like those of Kinnaras j so what was there which was not calculated to enchant the hearer's mind * ? 1, 18. apprapff %?Tf ' an agony equal to that when |they are) experienced, ! i.e., the same grief as that wkeu the miseries are actually suffered. ^flTTT &c. * Be, therefore, pleased, not to make your life the fuel ( p r e y ) of the fire of sorrow caused by the recollection (of past incidents).' 11. 28-24 Said sarcastically by BMma. 11. 25-26 & P . 125-11. 1-2. %#J# s deadly by reason of its quickness of circulations * * deadly in Its effect. * af "WK- * this pre-eminence or superiority ! exists io them naturally ( ^ M f ) . 1 . 8-4. Said by S'iva disguised as an ascetic. <?|QP7T * possessed of much patience.' 1. 6. Said by the seven sages to Himalaya : * join your daughter with Mm, like meaning with words.' 11. 7-8 flF^t sflff f t ? TTffw ' be pleased not to give way to sorrow.' 11.19-18.Jpff ' t h e twins,' i.e., Nakula and Sahadeva # QO recount need be taken f. * OR|jfiRf &e

114

THE STUDENT'S -GUIDE

has drawa (made to vibrate) Ms circular bow * f or perhaps Ms bow and wheel). LESSON XVII

P . 181. II. 27-28. & P , 132. 11. 1-2. t?f: goes with U#f. i 2.. * l a this way young women attain to the position f Jtause-wiYes; those of an opposite character are tha banes of their families. * 1 . 11-12. 3Fp?qiow * not devoted to any one eke. * W^Ptl", for she did afterwards obtain a husband of that description in Hara. 1. 12. * The words of the great (lords ) n e w bear a contrary meaaing in this world,' i.e<, never turn out false. H, 14-15. The might of Havana is here described. * Who night apd day disturbed the heaven by conteadiag with the enemy of Namuchi' ( ladra ) * by doing the various tlpngs givea in line. 14. ^fl = s p r a i n P . 127, 11. 1S-20. mm &c. ' May the people rejoice * deriving delight from the close ( familiar) talks with their Meads and relations." 1. 27. * There are ups and downs In the state of man * in the coarse of the wheel. .LESSON XY1II P. 189. 11. 1-2. Said by S'ukaaisa in vindication of Chandrapfda's conduct. 11. 5-6. * One who longs to secure S'rt may or maj* not get h e r ; but how can he, who is desired by S'rt herself, be unobtainable ' ? i 7. u r i f p t f * marring the interests.' 11. 11-12. Krishna here describes the importance of *eBfpos actions.

TO 8ANSKK1T COMPOSITION II 18-14. m W^T * what will be its state * f

11. 24-25. P. 140. 11, 1-2, The kiag asmes tiw several things he hopes Urvas'i will do. *JiF s being herself jiidden or invisible. * l ^ K F f t w "RRT? ' may be forcibly brought ( a s it were ) step by step, * so unwilling Is she :nrough fear, to advance. 11. 3-4. s^fSOT' of resolute will.' 1. 4 * Who caa turn back in the contrary direetkr ( t h w a r t ) the mind -rfaieb is firmly resolved upon secuiing Its desired object, and water flowing towards a lower ground' t -11. 9-10. Said by Sita. ' Or I should certainly be reckless of this wretched life of mine, fruitless on account of { my ) ever-lasting separation from you ( i.e., would gladly abandon i t ) , if your seed implanted in my womb, and which must be preserved, were not an obstacle In my way.* 1. 11, t^f^HW * from the pointed { sharp ) jaws.' L 17. ppr goes with :p%: ia the next line. 1. 18. They are the { real) servants of the king; others ire like wives, who follow their husbands (or their owagood# 1. 19. sftffeOTft" * mortal,' * fatal to life. * LESSON X I X P. 144. 1. 14. nf%^rM?fWf 6 to whom the Supreme Light has' manifested itself.' 11. 22-28. JfWi &e. * did not deprive him of his life. * if? 5 ^ c * ' P u * he, whose will was Inconceivable, caused him when all his wounds had been healed, to be led to the prison and caused it to be estimated or calculated by astrologers.* &c. 11. 25-26. U%f: ' brightened up. * SRipnf%: &c * thefire accepted oblations f thrown into i t ) with its fiantet' the right.'

8l

THE STUDENT'S GUIBE

P . 145.11. 1-2. l f ^ f t : l T t * with a limited ( very small which could be counted) retinue.* 8Pf"HTWfw#yra[ * by reasoa of their superior lustre. ? 11, 84. ^ffWTOWW * passed by the hermitage * without stopping there for fear of obstructing the sage's penance,

LESSON XX P. 154. II. 29-80. * If the two princes had grown up without any harm, they should have, by this time, attained t o your age. * P. 155. 11. 45. Said by the seven sages to Himalaya. *How could the serpent have sustained the Earth with_ Ms tender hoods, if you liad not supported it from its very depths.' 11. 8-8. m\, *..,Kapa]akundala.<rpf, i.e., killingM&lat: II. 1011. ' T h a t servants succeed even in great wori is the result of the honour paid to them by their maste in assigning to them those duties. * 1. 17. ^sfpsfew ' any other document or paper written by MM.* 11. 2824. ftprofrJRfW * whose beauty was enviable, ' TOS^W goes with ti * had not intended these two &. a couple. 3 11. 27-28. P . 156.11.1-2. j f t f f f ^ s confusion or taiiii caused by ignorance. 8 f^Wi iRHfw &c., s will become indifferent to all that you have heard or will hear.' sfflff?1SfeW! * confused by what you haYe heard-* 11. 84. Masters of great cars great chariot-warri'"4' will think that through fear, yoa Resisted from the fight, then you, having been once highly thought of by then". will fall to littleness. >

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITIOW LESSON X X I

817

P. 161. i . 23. ^PFcPHr'fW "TWflf ' considers his own as beautiful." P . 162, 1. 2.-3, ffOTfR * Mutual conflict.' * m'hen it has come to this pass. * -11. 4.-6. 3R?*OTr: s altogether powerless.' * grows dim. * 1. 17. xJtWffPW: * a test or criterion of superiority. $ 11. 18.-19. Said by Rama to Valmtki. W- - Wm'. 1. 22. iTfWTraRTfW fRlftWffw 6 1 shall drop a few wordsof compliments ' as proceeding from you. P. 163. 11. 3-6. Mahas'veta means that if she, actingia pursuance of the dictates of propriety, were to become'' ready to die, she would reject the request of Kapiwjala and at the same time incur the sin of having caused? Puradarfka's death* 1. 7. s p j ^ t TW% * so long as K&kshasa is aot won over. 11. 11-12. Said by the enraged S'&rangarava toS'akuntala, wheu he fouad the king denying all knowledge of having ever before married her. OTT ?W?f%, i.e., anfcft. I, 16. f*WW 6 for religious rites.' P. 168. 1. 17. tpf ' the soul' ftxWT^-PiW-Wcf * ever born, ever dead.* 1. 19. SSl*ff gprtflfi adds to, enhances, the lustre. s

LESSON X X I I P. 169. 1. 80. ?TOt#r: s combination of notes,' voice.. P. 170. 1. 5. 3f%*rfif # f f s having reached its climax, * xcessive. 1. 11. 8Tf! WR * how I fency .' 11.18-14. 8 The wise accept the one or the other after

318

THE STUDENT'3 GCIDE

careful examination (for themselves ); a fool only has hit mind guided {influenced ) by the convictions of others. * - - 1 . 16. f%*tfTfe"VST: * antidote against anxiety, s 1. 25. On account of the pitchy darkness ' the sight has become useless, like service rendered to a wicked maa. * P 171. 11. 6-7, r %ftr &c. ' he fell down o the ground whether through the force of love & c . . . . . . . . I do not koow. * WtPWPfW * which, reaped its fruit immediately. * 11. 8-9. fp#f#wiw 'placed in, imparted to, m excellent material. * WWFfrt * a higher excellence.' 1L14-15. f f f W Cupid, your friend." 1.15, * 1 am, as it were, the wiek of the lamp, all covered with smoke in the form of this unbearable calamity. * D. 16-17. * Since even one's own body and soul at*, known to be subject to separation ( o r subject to union and separatiou), say why separation from external object* (such as wife, children &c.} should trouble a wise maa. * 11. 2021, ' Said by Rama, when Ms mind was vacillating as to whether he should abandon the innocent Slta, or turn, a deaf ear to scandals about himself, ^ T O F W &c * being at a loss to follow any one alternative, Ms was swaying 'backwards and forwards, like a swing.'

LESSON X X I I I P . 178. 1, 12. wfTOTT 'about her husband. 8

1. 15. 3?lftRita^n: W O T : ' Ganadftsa's instruction wr* found to be superior. 11. 24-25. t i w i.e., of Dushyanta. Said by the Chamberlain when he was going to report the arrival of Katwa's pupils, ^ r e t w r f r ' causing trouble ov disturbance, trouble

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

819

p, 177. 1. 8. Said by Fkrv&ti to her friend. f * = w c f ^ f t ^ : 8PRt TOT W * whose lip was greatly throbt bing? ' m a ^ n & a movement to speak ; or better still ' whose and lower lips were throbbing.' _I. 4. II. 1218. IXtoflFWt * who has had no perception or experience of love, * who is out of the reach of the influeict of love. L 13. * Let not, O friend, that ( which was simply uttered in Jest), be taked in earnest. * 11, 22-28. Said by S'arangarava to Dushyanta when he said he could not believe S'akuntalk's words. * untrained to guile.' arSTfW * Is not ( regarded as ) aa authority, * 4 is not held trustworthy,' f%^T %fe * considering it to be a regular branch of learning.' 11. 24-25. 5?f TPT ?Nll: lOT ft^T * in whose range of sight you stood' by chance, and whose eyes, therefore, became Wf^T (not useless, having reaped their fruit). ^ftff^T: * of deep-rooted friendship. * 11. 26-27., Said by Himalaya to the seven, illustrieu* sages. t3SKftft" TC ' even higher than (transcending) the Hajas quality.' P. 178. 11. 12. Raghu's father was not only the sole Emperor, but also the sole ( unrivalled ) archer ia the l a n d 11. 8-4. ffspf ' pleasant to hear.' fclfoftt ?fT = 11. 7-8. Sff'pnwfw changed, *s perturbed.* * longing for a close embrace of the neck. * 1. 11. 3d%fep|S?w 'untaught guile or cunning. f --11. 15-16. Agnimitra means to say that the severe pangs caused by Cupid seem hardly consistent with his weapon which is apparently so harmless, being only made of flowers; therefore the saying that, ' the softer it is, the harder {to bear ), * is realised in Cupid. U. 17-18.?'lTRWfflf' derives encouragement or consoles.

320 itself by seeing the manifestations of her love. * ^; * the desire of both of us produces satisfactioa, * the veng idea that we love each other contributes to make me h

LESSON X X f P. 184, II, 22-28. Said by the Sdtradhara to Ms wife--, when she was taakiag grand preparations for a banquet/, in honour of Brahmanas in view of the coining lunar eclipse*/ which, io his opinion, could not thea take place. '\ P . 185. 11. 1-2. fcPSf JtfH?[ ' let It stand over. * '* 1. 5. iff%Pf T &c. * and the days are sure to be pleasaat on account of the absence of heat. * 1. 6. ^ffirfJWffRI *on account of bis affection f feeliag) for his devotees or worshippers,' f t ss JfRJF. 11. 13-16. The plan suggested by the family-; when the king refused to acknowledge S'akuntal his wife. 3TWRft=5lf*9FafT. vFlfos 8 told, * * foretold. f " : ' eadowed with the signs ( of an emperor ) , ' * if the result be otherwise,' 11. 21-22. Said by Kus'a to the presiding Godde of Ayodhya when she had found her way into the king's palace, though closely bolted. ^SS^RIRf * having got a access to. * 11, 26-27. W|?#? * throwing up her a n a s . ' p * a flash of llight iin ffemale shape. * JTO^fN* name h f h l h * f of a hoiy place. P . 186. 1. 8. f%fli#wraT.* * of sharp descent, * " sharpMing.8 11. 9-10. =^F? in every line has the sense of * scarcely" when." W^F^Ff: compact and condensed. *

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

821

LESSON XXV p. 191- * 18. IW^RPfW: 'being advanced (grown o l d ) knowledge *, i.e., though both are equally learned. * *s e n t ^ e d to precedence. 5 I. 20. Said by Vid&haka who had expected to get a from the preceptor of dancing. 1. 22. WpW^WW^^T: 'can be freely (without any reserve restraint) questioned.' 11. 2526. WWIWTW the skill of Kamamanjari who had fascinated his mind. II. 2728. |Rgs?sf>% ' who had set up a loud uproar. * * with Ms hood expanded.' "sfaft IP? * pretending to be afraid,' * like one afraid,' P. 192. 1. 1. WTflJT^ ' a n ineisioa in wood or In the leaf of a book caused by an insect or book-worm and resembling somewhat the form of a letter.' "f^ppf ' in a fortuitous .and unexpected manner,' ' by a happy cfaan.ce.* 11. 69. Said by Rama when he felt the balmy touch of Slta's hand. 11.1218. H^Pnfwf'Prat ' should be made the subject of representation, ' * should be brought out oa the stage.' 11. 18-19. Said by llama when the old Chamberlain addressed the newly-crowned king in his usual familiar way as ' Ramabhadra' and stopped short, diseoYering the impropriety. grgtrfrgpfiJT ' the servants of my father,' heace old enough to call R&ma Ramabhadra instead of Maharaja. ?ffT*IW * as is your wont,' as you are accustomed to do.' 1- 20. ereTC^re^^ffc: ' about 1 ' years old,' * whose age bordered on 1 8 . ' i 25. 3F[f3S(?j*nT:' not leaving the bounds of propriety,' U. 26-27. & P. 193. 11. 1-2. s n r f ^ : ' having assumed t! e sceptre. ' W W &c. * There may be Masiaaen in

322 affluent circumstances (when there are abundant meant! of income), but in you is summed up (comprehended} \ the whole duty of a kinsman towards your subjects,' i,e,t t there may be found many parasitical gluttons In days of| prosperity, but you are the real kinsman of the people i%j good as well as bad days. 11. S4. fr;C*fff3If!tT * forsaken by the perception, touch & c , i.e., grown senseless. * with the drop of dripping oil.* senses * of *

11. 5-8. 15ff%5W: s giYer of lustre. * Will &c. ' the month of Vais'&kha,.r spring-time, when the trees are tadej^ with lowers.

LESSON XXVI P . 196. 1. 21. |5f5^p- * the gait of a hump-b&ckeC person, * or * the manner of the Kubja plant,' a beat gait ; 1. 28. Sfj^Wff?! * possessed of ready wit, 5 * haviag^ presence of mind. ' 1. 26. IT^RfSTrfff 'makes one act wickedly.'' P . 197. 11. 3-4. W ? W w &c. ' that a great regard if. shown ( t o a person ) even for a small cause or occasion.'' -:, 1. 5, spWffCT jft?^T ' do not misunderstand m e . ' ; 1. 7. ' Generally persoas, equally learned, are jealous of each other's renown. *' 1. 11. #^% * Is attended with fruit," becomes fruitful,** -1. 24. ^wpft * the sacred cow.' ~ H . 2326. Said Jby Aja. when the celestial garlan^ dropping on Indumati's bosom, deprived her of life* but did Mm no harm.

TO SANSKRIT MMMMUTION. LESSON XXVII

823

p . 23. 11. 1-2. 3ffwPl%W ' directing ( t h e mind) to t f Vfftf * is unable to brook delay. * _1J, 12-18. t ^ T : & c . ' such has turned out to be the lot I fate ) of your being created. * 11. x617. The meaning is that, the more the desire for wealth is cherished, the more it leads one to commit "fork deeds. The simile is taken from a lamp, which gives oat more and more soot as the flame is made brighter and brighter. 1, 23. WOTPRH 1R>R ' reduced to ashes.' p . 20*. 11. 12. ' J u s t as the Ganges Is revered, for having taken its rise from the foot of the Supreme Being | Vishnu ), so also is it revered for having derived its second source from your high head. *' Said with refereEce to the Himalaya mountain personiied, <3f^Bfl3fF * whose head | peaks ) has gone up ' into the sky. 11. 7-8. 3#pp5F% s at the conclusion of the coronation ceremony.' 1. 8. By which their own sacrifices, with complete gifts, would be completed, s i.e., wealth sufficient to enable them to complete their sacrifices. 11.10-11. f^^SfOTTRt' * frequeated by a- few people. s f f r name of the king's palace. 1. 19. 5^wif^T fetT 4 this course of life -is settled. * P. 205. 1. 3. * Since transitoriness first- clasps to the bosom one that is born, and then the mother like a nurse, what ground is there for lamentation * ? ~11. 7-8 ^ W t : = igWflt:; ' the people wondered not so much at their skill in music as at their thorough disregard of the free-will gifts offered by the king.8 1. 11. A salutary advice to those who are in the habit of doing things at the eleventh hour.

824

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE LESSON XXVIII

P . 210. 11. 12-18. Said by S'ukaaasa to Chandr&plefcu. i p j fefprf ' easily find access t o . ! 11.16. W#cft*pft' in every respect,'' unlimited/ 'complete.' I. 17. vp& refers to Himalaya. II. 20-21. The idea of the liaes is best expressed by * Union is Strength.' P. 211. II. 7-8. Said by Chandrdpida's mother to llanorama at the time of aliowing him to go to bring back Vais'anipayaaa. 11. 9-10. 8RRW &c. scil, 5Fjptf^5T I. 10. The meaning is that the secret prompting (the ianer voice ) of the heart* of good men is a safe guide for them to follow, siace it can never think of an illegitimate object. 11.11-14. Said by Dushyantato S'akuntala. CpFJfFfT: & c For such, for the most part, is the behaviour of those, over whom darkness {of infatuation) exercises mastery, in auspicious (good ) matters ( on auspicious occasions).
s

u. 15-19. ^wrfefw:, i.e., relating to her.'

wm-.

m = ^f#

erersrfa<flr -

11. 20-21. 'They call you who are immovable ' { another } Vishnu, for your belly (interior ) {like Vishnu's) has become the support of beings, movable and immovable. ' 11. 22-25. Describe the position in which the cloud messenger will probabfy find the Yaksha's wife. Hfrp^ ' 6 conceived by the mind.' P . 212. 1. 3. WW4 ' caused by the great Vis'vajit' sacrifice, "in which Raghu had given away all his wealth, 11. 5-6. f # Malavika. JNpTTl? & servant.' W ' like.' T ' ia the capacity of

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

82*

11.7-8. # J r R f : = W3T:, #RT meaning 10'. What Bas'afatb> transgressing the rules, did, was iadeed forbidden ^o the king; { how, then, did he, a wise king, do it ? ) for e veu learned persons, when Winded by ( t h e quality _of ) 4atkn-ess (passion.) set foot oa the wrong road, * _-ll. 22-25. Said by R&kshasa when he found the ptefc most cleverly laid against Mm by the wily CMtaky&. ^ f sr WWI%W his bosom friend P. 218, '11. 1-2. Said by Agninaitra when he found it difficult to conceal any longer from Tr&vati Ms ardent love for MMavIij^. >a*3't|<!np ' occasions or pretexts to disafpoiat her. ' 1. 2. * But not a form of courtesy { polite behaviour 1 towards proud or intelligent women, though ( i t b e ) greater than before, but wanting In sincerity. * LESSON X X I X P. 221. 11. 15-16. srfiRT * regal power * which has three constituent elements : 5PTPC the fciajesty or pre-eminence of the king himself, * W^ * the power of good counsel, * and HHTf ' the force of energy * 11. 19-20. ' Oh I the property of those who are bereft of support tUrough. the failure of issue (lineal descendants) passes over to another, at the decease of the original progejjitor (from whom in a direct line the family is descended). P. 222; 11, 1-2. These lines refeF to Vishu. WlWfjfff * being in a distressed state at the end of the JTafjw (the time of general deluge ), ^ * was uplifted or drawn out." 11. 3-4. TO 'enemy,* 1.4. ' F o r lie ( a a enemy) and a disease, when growing, are regarded by the woe, m the sums * (in their fatal effects ), t.e., if their growth e not checked in time, they will prove verv injw|ous.

826

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

II. 6-7. Said by the bards to Aja, at the time of ar cing to Mm the timfe of rising. PfW^tWipptlt s em.] to rouse you from sleep. * 1. 10% fPRfiF|W * having faces in all directions,' b he was !^<|*ir 11. 12-18. f = f f f f P f : . ftff! Mmt ?Hlt' the girt mental creation of the Fathers' (created by virtue o desire, and not by the ordinary means.) 1. 14. *pf f i f^rrfir * my grief is, as it were, although so many ( 1 2 ) years have since then ela 1. 18. aRft Hanumat. SI. 22-28, The Jumna and the Ganges, iiimn - . pectively 'black and white waters, seem to provi< i>,-. each other black aloe and sandal ointment. -1. 25. ^ y f e f &c. * as If bursting out on accou . the flood (excess ) of internal excitement. s P , 228. 11.12. Wt & c . ' the resemblance between ;-i. and, the two ( l a v a and Kus'a,) 3iffering only in aj. .;..: dress, * i.e., they two and Mitana resembled In every t i-f-c except age and dress. ffTfepf sifgpssa"' stood withoi * 'K twiakllng of their eyes,' stood fixing upon them a ste S. ..< gaze. 1. 5. TOT: f f : BMma. ^fewfwfw * who had : :.-ifft a change in n i i a i , ' i.e., emotion of" anger. 11. 910. 3 ^ W : ' Ms warriors.' 1. 10. * On gi i" covered over with excelleEt hides of antelopes an * : by vines. * 1. 11. ^ w f ^ l ^ " * having acquired a sound know:"'i;f%^ Besire, Anger. Avarice & c , the six pa'.":''";i --!. 12. ' T h e y soon bring upon Wealth the !"J4'-";' (ill-repute) of unsteadiness,' i.e., wealth leaves l-iCi persons aad becomes liable to be called

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

82?

.11. I8-I 7 - fOTSWT ' for the most part kind . 1. 17. , flavour {interest ) of which is unchanged { unabated ) j.jier before or afterwards, * i.e., which is at all times equally pleasing. __j, 19. T ?CTOT% ' will not stop, ' will be accomplished. ]), 2021. ^fferf obj. of's^S". ^IT^^" * proceeded towards the sea-shore. . ji, 2228. The past participles are used as abstract nouns. 1.28. Lanka ( with so many jumbled noises ) produced a Boise resembling that in the city of Indra. 11, 24-2Si ' The son of the Wind was for a time pleased at the sight of Havana being afraid, of whom, the thousandeyed (Indra ) ceased from fight, JL 26~27. ^TWS^NRT S having words just enough to convey the meaning,' not using many words. 1. 28. affipftlPW * without having made powerless. ' P. 224. 11. 2-4, iftWtKf "m ' do not entertain fear.' wfff same of a mouatain. ^WJfrfsiW ' their hearts took dourage.'

LESSON X X X P. 23. i 19. JFWfiPltfsiTW, i.e., to turn the eyes of the Princes which were fixed upon the king, to the Ch&tuZala girl who was being ushered in. 11. 2627. SRTSfWIWtW * did not mind i t , ! turned a deaf ear. ?p#f%t ' pledged their word, 3 ' vowed.' P. 231.1.5. ^ M ^ W f fftsjScff 'having adopted measures against the possible schemes of the king. 11. 78. <($i$[' maintains himself,' lives on elephants wiled by himself. 1. 8. ' A great person, who, by his prowess* s the world, does not forsooth wish for his own susfrom others.'

828

THE STUDENT'S 6UIDE

11. 910. SR&ffrrf * so as to be beyond caleul in countless numbers, apf * in this battle.* 1. 18. The idea is that a warrior, having re to mild or soft means ( such as forgiveness ) should a plish Ms object, just as a lamp sucks oil by means soft wick wMch Intervenes, but for which the flame be at once extinguished. -U. 14-15. lfi?f * strength * and * the three regal pc fPPJSf * the six expedients. * afWTfff * limbs * and * com| members of a State. * -1* IS. TT w f t | W l i : * do not prepare ( for me articles of food ! such as condiment, spices &c. (< 1. 25. W K : * sMnlng forth * ( i T H M : ) P . 282. 11. 2 - 3 . ^ ^ ^ r W t e # 'will endeavour to a court of law. * iWplTf#W &c. * reduce him to ab Indigence,' i T. * He with Ms (left ) arm (always) raised a] las right arm in tHs direction conformably to greet ft 1011. * He, void of priie always shows (I world) his servants, as if they were Ms dear frie&ds, Ills friends with- a respect common to his nearest rela amci hi& relations as If they were vested with imps authority. * 1 . 14-15. fft^Nffc1^ -&c. * who had previously ft a plot for the accomplishment of their sch IJfftW^f * to be got at the time of the departure of 11. 16-17. Sail by Arjuna to S'iva. itw^pftl" * to faculties. * 1. 17. flftsf &c. * Of those who, through become hostile, bat afterwards become submissive,' * 11. 18-19. wPfPffffW asked the preceptor ' wit ference to some expiatory rite for averting the evil. s "resulting ia good.'

TO SANSKHH* COMPOSITION1

329

11. 22-23. JJjrfa: * tiv CJie41 king , 1. 28, * I t Is .not probable that the MOB ("Krishna,) will humbly crouch for f ea r of a attack. * _11.' 2425, * He had scarcely mastered the characters the alphabet written on the writing-tablet, when he enjoyed aU the fruits of political Instruction from Ms association mem advanced In knowledge. * 11. 26-27, ^f^WPRftff * having the ocean for its k boundary,' i,e., m far as the very oceaa. ?PfT Ac. ' having arms as long as the bar of a city-gate, * which is both long and massive, and hence indicative of great muscular strength. P. 288. 11. 5-11, Describe the ;As*oka garden of B A w i a . ?ff ?llWFPRj[ *as if making the creeper dance to the breeze.' #5RH: * afraid of BAvama, * TOWPff * did not interfere with or affect,' each coming round in due rotation. fro?J * being love-smitten. * 11. 13-14. The elephant, with his boiy tossed up> aad hence Imitating the lord of mountains about to dart up into the sky, made the driver get on himself, who placed .his foot on the foot of the elephant slightly bent.

CHOICE EXPRESSIONS AMD IDIOMS

^ g f l^P ffefW: ' he abandoned to Ms fate. aft f?pf# f*TKW#r, ?Pf fjph": SPfFf ' I shall abide by ( bowt o ) your decision.' afeff-^feWt-JfrOTfe 'abides by hhi, promise,* }t IWPfPlrr, WPfsppf' to the best ( utmost) of one's ability, *f ; all that one can do, as far as possible. ; Iw: * the country abounds in curiosities.* ^ r: * about five years old,' w^ff^W:-^W: *fW: * it is about noon. * f % * what are you about.' *he stands above ( a t the head o f ) i a l l . ' 3RfTRWJft WffRW * above eavy. 3 1 gff ? M F 8 flfiT ?Jt% W I O T WrWRftWcfT * the dreadful T vow became known abroad.' ' ''absent minded. ' 8TCJ|%?r TafrtT * do not talk so absurdly.'' * nothing is inaccessible to desire. *: ' death is nature, life is but an accident. * accommodate oneself to the will of.' * with one accord.' W^SJOT, W J O T ^ W : 5 of ! one's own accord.' 3S^TWfvf-flW^W ' in accordance i with, his words.' spfstEiy ' according to seniority.' TPffw ^ T W T* W W ' of what account {consideration ) is '] > W "W T W a king to me ' ( I defy him). ' accursed or wretched fate.' f

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION AFF

991

Tt <fPf% I am suffering from a bad strong qfr*pgt?rr<lf 5WT M l ' the queen was made with your immodesty. * jig- f q ^ f f ^ ^ ^ f ^ ^ they acquitted themselves well.8 ': * act up to your master's orders.' s ^ ^ l f r p i t the ^part of Laksfamt. * the part of a dear friend towards your rivals.5 pft ^p^rra"ip!f*r: in action, thought and speech * (in thought, w ords, and deed.) : s aeutenms (sharpness) of intellect.' s f ^ T aifejjlyour coaduet to dtrunasfcanees.' fW: ' a portion of it has been adapted to the stage. * &dds to the lustre of.' OT#rf\ ftfS3T ^rfW, flfte": this is another evil to add to the first * (lit. i a pimple has grown upoa a b o i l ' ) . jfSj^PSFr, fsRW?" * of agreeable address.' ' a letter without any address upon I t . ' y p send the letter to my address.' bid odtcM to (take leave of, bid j7 ^ farewell to ) youi friend.' stT 4 she should be admitted to all confidential matters.' ?TWT fSpntt feRWW: s her iUness admits of no delay.' i#fS, WOT ' advanced in age.' I F f f ? * advanced in knowledge.' *W fepr ^qra^RF: taking advantage of my weak point. * or setting la of spring.' * not effected by the slightest fatigue. * ' affecied by a devil.' 3#f?sfre|Rra; 'affected

382 AMO by many diseases. * H !T: f%f%#tl% ' our position is not i n the least affected ( I t does not affect us in the least), * ' affecting a quarrel. ' H W^W TOT i p ^ . W p f ff I f ^W ' my words deeply affected his heart.' Wl^fasiftft * he affects learning,* ft *pit StHT< TORF: ' two negatives make one affirmative, $ m t S J T * such a rumour was afloat.' RW |pNn ' oae u/Jer another. * ^ f OT f w f e * waters tree after tree.' fef^^J^Tsr^t^-Ufft ' he is called ^ r Ms graadfather.' * come of age,' ?terfffftfWPff<?fl?[ * he reached the 18th year of Ms age.' wfefPfft W f t &WWUW^*T ' they all agree (there Is a ' unanimity ) on this point. * |piNr * taking aim with his arrow.' fffPffiiK* where are you going withoat any definite aim/ ' t o take the a i r , ' TOfWF 1*T ' take air ' Qft&f* J * an air of conceit,' f%flfWf?WR ?K5# ' with the air of one who is offended.' ' to build castles in the air.' f, BfOT, tiw^ ' all of a suddea. * ^ %f?Rf * this is all I can do to serve you.* oB-in-ofl of one's life.' f p ' e me 20 rupees'in all. * < p f%fef^T 1 ^ f<f ; we are T &f in off.'" * this story alludes to myseii. t JfRWt * when the night had almost worn away, ' w ^ f a^raSTOT-WTf T^fft * it is almost dawn now. * * almost dead ( all buc dead)'. 3|Sf? TftRffar, "SlWs^M ? n # # ' thei-c is EO elkrmtiw |course, help).' ftfe^: * your who1'1 speech amount

TO SANSKBET COMPOSITION

888

APT to this C this *s' the purport or sum and substance of your speech).' t ! * when the country is in a state of anarchy.' *' anniversary of birth. * ipfefw: ' anniversary of death.* i S?ts|Pf * he answered very well', spr % ' tMs will answer my purpose,' will do for me. : * an antidote against anxiety.' Owtw:, - * a dealer in antidotes.* : ' apparent praise.' r * I appeal to your honour ia this ease.' ' the witness did not appear. $ # ' good in appearance. * 'your story has an appearance of truth.' I j S * W^% * they do not apply the word T to happiness.'* fMwTPft < ff <5W ^ * this our title T H does not ajp% to any oae else, * Wtwtl ft^ft^^lWlWw * h,e applied for further orders, * ?Rf f9W3far* we apply ourselves to our work. * & keep your appointment < M 1 engagement. * Ift WfftirT HWWt * Queen, let us keep ( t o ) our appointment or engagement, * let us be punctual, ftfopffar * of quick apprehension.'' W5#, ^ ^ f e ' of dull apprehension,' * dull-headed. * # , 'ETWtf'Rf, ^ W ^ ^ ' l * appropriate to (fit for ) the occasion.' 5 % q^slw'F^ffw * I do not approve of your speecli, f (your speech does not commend itself to pie). FRTOPfffeT: s youths are apt to forget. * 3ff|r?f |T * over-affection is apt to suspect evil '

884

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE ATT

p ' man is the architect of Ms own fortune * {the fortunate circumstances of our lives are of our own making ). gtsfrfg- % i^ft^JRTs: ' the CMtraktMa mountain arrests my eye.' ^ : * an artlessly ( naturally ) lovely body.' !f?r fW% 4 es for merits, lie has none.5 s t as for doing it quickly, it is easy.' fq%fe W F * as a father lie respects m e . ' f ' to ascertain the time,' , F ^tff^ WFCTlf% * to whom shal I ascribe the blame' ( on whom shall I lay the blame ), " a sinful deed is ascribed to him.' ' to reduce to ashes.' W?*ft**f' to be reduced, to ashes. * 5PPT R'f f>ffep^S w t 'he had a cheerful aspect.* flsf ftFPtflf ^M * all things wore a different aspect.' vKTftfWlf % *p| * my house has a northerly aspect.'' ' ' aspiring to the fame of a poet.' e^ff^:-?pjfwT: ' these are, indeed, high. aspirations * ( ambitions, soaring desires ). ' deer associate with deer. 5 '4' assumed silence.' ' I assuredly feel', ' I feel assured. * T:' this is an act to' atone { make amends ) for the slighting of prostration. * 5rtWMI?t ^SWl'Tft % ' I attack great importance to public, censure.' H$ ^S^PT^cIT: W*fV. ' subjects are firmly attacked' to the king. ' 3g^33t JTftfjflT? WlPzS' young women attain to the position of liouse-wives.' i.

TO SANSKBXT COMPOSITION BEN

885

| ' | ' ricMy or splendidly attired.1 :, ffWPffw: s hostile attitude.s fT: ' attributing to themselYcs falte greatness. t*f rs|' I had an audience of (interview with) the king * * I wish to be favoured with an audience. * If Sfeft f^: ' destructloa { death) awaits those that are born,' 'syqffjf fpr^jpf^f * I approach the kiag wi'*h awe. * B W * behind one's hack * ( i a one's absence ) . ^ f # ftW:s Urvas'l throws Lakslimi into the background" (obscures, eclipses her). ' the place baffles description.' % jfjfjfgTTO': l they are a bane to the family , ! ffar HI": fRF: ' such ^bargain was struck,' 3Fff % 3pnf W 1 into the bargain.* ?ffwwn% i f flt f%^T^ ' lie 6ore himself bravely on that occasion.' f^w SffW, W^l% Fi 3fWff ' bear in mind.' #^>^f *tt T*T: ' fear wp under grief,' 'iffaT^sn': f ^W * what became of the queen Sita ? ' what % was Sita's fate ? WlWfeff tfWPWnRfforf'TP^rf tFMT:' such incidents befall worldly persons.' # * not heard before.' feff: ' concealing or hiding his body behind creepers.' ' to bend the brow.' S g*nft" | ' lie bent his mind again to his task.*. Wff'tf : ' trees bend down under the load of fruits.5 fw

$36

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

BY ipfffW, ft?Rff>??, fffftHfaf" * bent on.* TXWCffllit * bent on ( killing ) each otherJ * <ff ^ f * beside oneself with. Joy. * anrnsnfols SCTffpi, sfKffFi, 3W?f ^3?| ' this is. betide the question, irrelevant, does mot bear om t i e matter in question.' arffcr % fl#ft5I ' I am (feel) better to-day.' pass, * to get the better of. * ff*J, <pfa, ffi f e ' beyond compreliemion.' f p i f * ke l lives b d bem$d h meaM.'' 9 sjiffW wfW^W:-^^": * he .' his went beymd keariag. * *f^^: * rich from Ms birift. * : *l jpfnfi** f iitSsRhrft * not a bit, not In t i e least. * |i?lW?jfif: * a hlock-heo4, cloi-patei.* * in a body. * W W f W W : * a iodf-guard. * f W I K W ; ' the family brtmehed off into 8 parts.* sfefffftf * fortuae favours the brave.' SPIRIT ISfft' the ay ftrofe, it was day-break ( dawn). *' ^ * the story has suffered a break. : * the- assembly broke up. * * the day broke upon Ms eyes.* * to be fenef, in short. * : * Ms body bristling or thrilling; with joy. * ; ffST ?f#cFP$pKf * she terjl into tears.' i i * there -was a burst of applause. * p|%fwfe 1 ^ ? ^ # * why do you beat about the kuht*, or af * a bird in the hand Is worth two ia the bush.' , M M ''day by day.' URT: * % hundreds.*' f * oae by oae. *

TO SANSKBIT CQMPOSITI0K

88?

c COM ' brought up with care: fjfyprfwpf * searching with care. * 3rgHf| sfaf^RT: * 1 do not care now. * ^ UFPfi%# f t e % * a self-wiled person cares not for blame.' gt *RT: * let care be taken of each character. * p , STi% in the case before us, In the present case,* % If ' if srch be the case, * weH then. W If* ftftsftvf fR^pf^Flt * why east pearls before swine.' q9ROTiltf<3|ffef$t$-^[ * the house caught I r e . * wNpfti; rai#ffTf|p, ^ # W ifl?T ' caught in the act ( red-handed ).' * chanced to see two Kiaoaras. * a happy chance.' tf Wf f H { % ^ : * i chanced to see Mm, I accidentally met Mm.* : ' nature caa t be ckangea. * % ' milk is changed into eurdi. ' 'give in charge of,* arf : * la whose charge has this person been gives.* 4w Pplflf f^t" * be of goofijefew, or e t e r up, take courage. * 5W or ^ # icMffir * under these circumstances,'l such being the case. * fW, ffefTW, %:ft*RT * in bad rcwfoc.' ^ UJT^I * tinder any circumstances.71 aay how,J WTWt, ' according to eirenmstemces.* 3ff=pjfif Rft WPWl^fT: 'her anxiety has reached Its cli-maz % or the highest pitch. tfPffS'lT * the king's beloved closed her eyes in f death.' W p w f w WW; ' i t is close to-day.* : * rescued from the clutches (jaws) of death. * *me what m a y . ' * some harm, coc good.' SfjfiPlFt^, fnt-%^f-w| or ^ ft FTT * ctwte to oneself, regain consciousness, comes to one's sense.* U P l l t t f # ^ H 1 % * * on the coming Monday. * 2

338

THE STUDENT'S GUIBE

CON 9fI ipPTfei T ^ ' ask her whether she has had a comfortobie sleep.' ^prifff PfTOV frfersf *O"feT' I can't sleep comfortably even at Bight.* ' sitting at a window commanding (the view of) a well.* W^fMw^W^fKT: <pj ^Ttfw * good forms command, respeet.* f4 If # *jwf%^l% * merits command notice or attention. * ^JfrffepTwI' 1W ' though I have no command of language * (though possessed of scanty powers of speech or description ). ?f ^ 1 R ^ n ^ ^ ^ ' ' he has command of language,' j f W ^ f f j p r SJKMT, %% {%%?!? * commit this matter t o SS W writing. * f * who hae made common cause with us.* * a companion at school * s a fellow-student. : * a companion in joy ard sorrow.' : * competing with one another to salute first. * !5 !#fw ' says or writes after presenting compliments,* or wfW TOWRl ff^: 'give my compliments to Cfayavana, * OTfRft ! complimentary saying. * if sfTSlfr f#lWf'lfe'-#'Pll?f WfrWR * he does not yet compose ( collect) himself. * J?i|#f TT3# r % fftWIIlfla' 4 even my large kingdom docs mot conduce to my happiness.* % # f : * have yo'i feept the secret confided to y o u . ' fW^W-ft^W-wfw. ^ T ' he is my confidant,' fSpspf* to take into confidence. * ' * confinement of a woman. ' sr^pTT or g^WPff ' his wife is eonfitied (is in child-bed ). 1s you are to be congratulated upon seeing your son's face,' or ' I congratulate you upoa seeiag &c.'

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

830

CBE <P#: * your conjuncture is clear { you have rightly conjunctured or guessed ). * , a!qij5!Pi OTW ' consign to the flames.* ^ W T fwW?if%'' his conduct is not inconsistent with his words.' ifTSffflTtsPT ' consistently with their own interest. ' wfWf;iprfTC>T qf^w^ * an assembly mostly consisting of learned men. * g^q- zpfo |jp|p!f iff sfpff-3rFdPT ' do not put a baatconsiruetion upon Ms words.* cRTCPFf %?TRfofT'Pnf?r 'ft^rOcr s construe Ved&ntie sentences as referring to it. ! gR%nrfir wmw <mi f^w\4-mf^ ^w%w-3i%fltW ' y o u .must also consult public good.' ffUpTOWH IT T: * do not nonsuit ( be intent on ) your good alone.' lff?f^l>: ^fWRRTP? ' let astrologers be consulted, * 1?: 5H|W: WJW 'ficwf?, ^ 5 % T TflfV' he could not contoiii liis great j o y . ' f ' if so, I shall know its contents. * T * when it suits one's convenience.' ^^^p^Tw^M^^M-'W^f^lT^^^-'^^twt w r wwi g^H^: * when may I conveniently see you. ! sfTTWRRT ^ t W^'PRTW WWf^W * we are not conversant with love-matters. ' * even at the cost of one's life. ! ' counting upon your promise. ' ' to take courage. ' spf TOff W 3|^3W or f ' to summon courage,' ' in the course of conversation. * , , | S?3, I^Sife ^!% ' in cowrse of time. ' ?fc^pTRPTRW, *prwfeKWR| ' there being no other iourse,' if ofrft 5eWt<PF;i he is your mature ' {owes Ms rise to you).

84s

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

BEL f$t SfaSTT *W SfFf^Rf or s n # thoughts crossed my mind (occurred to me).' *W ^ 4: ' he crossed my sight. * the arms crossed, * KTcTOFfK: * cross-legged, i#SOT JPfiOT: fISOT W^:-^feH: * aU Ms efforts weteetmenei with, success.' ^ * to take flowers as is customary.'' * make the customary bow { salutation ) .* W W&% * cutting to the quick.' ' cutting short my speech.' D ff * T fW: * do not damp Ms energy, ' T ^tfij ' the-patient is in a dangermts state. tf 3W:, ff%#W3W:s pitchy (-blinding ) darkness. * * all pervading darkness? V- ' deafening all directions with cries of alas. * f W : * he paid off the de&f of his master with. his life,* <rft^% ^ff^r, fPcRRPrt% * in tbe decline of life*, ' ia declining years. * IT, ariOTfif w^Wf af^pf; * she is deep ia lwe far gone in love."' * *p? fWR: f f ^ ^ T ^ T : * my aagttish transcends definition.s' t & f % % ' aH expenses' are defrayed out of the proceeds of oae. * ?f: ' a disease which defies medical efforts. * delay is 4angeroas. * Wfft 3 ^ ^ i f f f t ^ W ^ d ^ * delivered the earth to Mm ?t 1W ^ff WWffWfft" * I s h a l tfeltW the letter into hto Mad, *

TO SAM8KBIT COMPOS1T1OS

S41

BIS ffpfrff-3fWff' everything depends on fate.* f $0 f%fe * depend upon it, I stall starve myself to 4eath. * spf fP, Pntft, fT, ?Ff * depend upon it, * * to be . g ! i r e. J f?Tpf?fSWtf ' dependent on a cause. J * depressed in spirits, * * dejected.' " * are derided by a l l j ^ become the laughing-stock of all. * her beauty can't be described, * t * In detail,* at length, exhaustively. or RliPC 9TJ:, * she developed her lovely limbs. * 1 W^l^: * did not deviate even a line ( an Inch ) from the beatea path. irffRffTpf ' I shall not raise a devil for my own destruction/ ^ f e f W Y * having iemlwi their 5 property upon their sons. * WfW ' a dead letter.' 3paTf f t * deaMff enmity.* ": * he was pelted to death."' 4 she is not different from my body ( myself ).* l * a commeBtary expMaiag ii : * the nriod feds diffident of itsdf. or i W P f , ^ W % ^ ! ^ ^ H t * eaoagh of

w ' the pigeons having disappeared. * E#si?f% f:fira?:f%#Pf!if ' the afflicted skoold iiiburden lease) their grief.* tms[ mM i f e w f l ' a p a p i spoils, b r l a p *te instruction (given to him}
l

8*2

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

J J p *to turn to the subject under % diseusdm.' SPRjfRf:, 'm^-wm-fmw:, JR^ef, SFPf"' Use ; , subject under discuss-um. ' p : * disguised as ascetics ' fJ : *a dirinierested Mead.' ": 4 how have you disposed ot my money.' 3J| rf^Wtflw * I am at your disposal. * spppfeftf. T:, W VRTfr S T fT * this matter is at your disposal' W P Wf ft ' disposed to quarrel.' f ^t f%WRl^ ' what are you disputing about, 3 * what % is the matter at issue.' TOWfffW; ' a disputed point. * f: * a distinguished guest.' ' I shall thus divert his thoughts.' ^ * a house divided against Itself.' : ' how 4 you do' 'are you doing ' 1 you f f?r Wt ^ f ^ W f ' tasks you how y do. Mi f?r 5 ^ p , ; y *she canie to ask the. queen if she was doing well. ' 3R5 f--s* --^ with, enough of, your Importunity. 2 f% Nft ^' ' what have we to do with watchinj l fif movemeBts of our mastet.' % iOT%W f l f l or 3TRW% ' m y miad is still ia d : ' grouad ha%'Ing ups downs,' uneven ground.' TnjteTRT: ' ups and dm. ^ 'there are ups and d>- *. ia oiir condition (in life ) as in the course of the wh-' pA W f f e f : ' down with the tyrant. 4 *. the day is drawing to a close, * * it is a <."* sun-set. * 5fW fl^^FfTTr: ? f a | : s you have drawn t iii upon yourself with your own hands. 9

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION

348

; ' an ass dressed in a tiger's skin.' ' driven to do a rash a c t . ' T:, <K[#OTK: ' a sharp driving shower. * ' what are you driving a t . ' iff WfFWTpf i j ^ t j ' let not your spirits droop ( flag ), do not despair,'^#CprinfM% ' I slept with drooping limbs," (i * the whole frame droops down.5 WIW. 5^% ^: ' small drops make a pool. * T ' let this matter ( story } be dropped.' CT % *rpnfr, ^KPw % wnPi, s I fed ready t drop down,' f%# %^rfwfeR^fif % 3PFT ' the peacock irowns my voice with Ms cries.' E SF^eiifH^ fTO be witMn ear-shot.' if|f|f S^W * early in the morning.' 5 fftprft 1 , OT "Tftfraw W q: ' I am in earnest, ' 1 f W" am not joking.' TWfW*? 5^ ' take in earnest.' ^isf f^reaf TPIT, 3j^ Pr^rT:, %rf%cT: * I am at ease. 3ffrft TO! feR: 5Ff?TJf SRmcTT' this my soul is completely at ease. * wrf>W, Pffif, HiTW ' at one's ease.' ' sleeping at ease,' 5FTH|W: ' setting the teeth on edge. tp5 ^ g ^ ( I P . ) H o take effect.' wmm t | : ^s^fg-' tlie velocity of the wind has BO effect on { prevails not against) a mountain.' W'effepft f%Wtf *$$&&W#^ ' saeti changes of purpose take effect (grow strong) in persons intoxicated with sovereign, power.' fsff^T WS&XiOTWI* of darkness thickening at night. ! Wi M^tWW^i J S * the thunder-bolt has BO effect on those who have practised austere penaaee." f%, tp^fwSW * to this effe$J fa ^ ' in effect.'
s

Si*-

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

EXC ffWfff W R : , lOTTOf:, ^tfff-Wpf q&&( * the king was enamov-vd of her, * * ixed his love on her. * 5f!| % 4,*f#f W^: * hear my speech to the end ( hear me out ). * *5;in'ft^JPF?f-^rfVwRr * it wlE end In good.' SfW#rf%i!!%sr enough of prolixity. * aj^-f^f-sffelltf enough of Joking.', ' WT ^ift 1 f ? !pf * curiosity entered Ms heart. * !tf %, TFT, ^ ^ : * he is entitled to respect.* JWISTC. * lie is entitled to precedence. * * envious {jealous ) of another's happiness/ If T: * they are envious, jealous, of each other's 5 fane.* IJ9SWF <[ ' to consider equal. * lcl>OT f f w f t ^ ^ 9 : * he k to the task. * * sending oa an errand, * if ^qf^r^^SFTT ^ t ^fef: * tie has escapei one danger only to fal into another {has escaped Seylb. to fall into Charybdis).' W fWfff MW: * lie narrowly escapei.s ' send ker a good escort.' " * disappeared for eper.' ^URPW * lost for ?cr.s WllWWtt m, 3RW1W * gone for etw, * * she slept not to ever wake again (to wake no more)** f, iwrff?! * O h ! an m l has befallen, * alas, woe TT ir^WFfPPrrfl': ' the reception evea my expectations. * s ' roles have ew-cepiimu.' ': * as general rules aw limited by exceptiovSh < ^pf:, ill" ^ ^ K : f fwWK^WKlfi' * that has no exception. * SlflPRW: * counter-eseceptton. ^ * pieaffiag an emmse of keadfrctie- ^ under the excuse of illness.

TO SAMSRBlfT COMPOSITION FAB ^f^, do thy duty.'

845'

apiffTOffifSft fsnftf 'execute thy business, i :

* Ms boyhood g gradually expanded y p into youth. * ffft|p5y!l r: * with Ms eyes expanded with joy, * T: * you exposed yourself to trouble.* fftf fr^TO1*RT: * he was exposed to the cliarge of cowar- dice.' T 3 W ^ P | ^ f e % 5fra#, SUWTFftfeRRRft * she exposed rice to the sun. * * to some extent' f#WF ' to the fullest extent. * * in the eyes of the public. * SfpPWllf HW * 1 am an eyesore to Mm.
?

F *pTfi, #ff'/ to/ace. * ffffiffif W | ' a house facing tie" Ea*st.' ,^ ^ J | TO, as a matter of fact. * #P|fw!<wret": * his talent fails not in difficulties, * q&i f ^ f f ^ f ' fails to gic the fruit. * Tft^wW%fclT f ^ l f f e f : * a good appointmeat was made to fail by Fate. * ai!f t*f H '|k%, ? p f e ' Ms courage does not/t*I h i m . ? 5^Tfl% T * failing male issue.' 3W fffefW: ^TRT: * his memory aifed Mm. 3RrRrpF5$?:--3ftcF: ''failure of issue. * # 'faint heart never*woa fair lady. * * a / a i r day OF weatker, * rise and f fall.' '* his arrow fell short -of its aim. * p ^f * words fall short in describing your greatness.* , apjffippr, ifBftfiir 'false to one's promise.* * familiarity breeis contempt. * ; * how fares it with her laiysHp.

846

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE VVh ';

sfPf IJ^PSW Hftsffif * the sage will not find fault witl [ this.' ^ ^ 1 T VWF * chase is found fault with. * T* * a man of feeling.' ^ %?Rft R?r Jpft r 'what man of feeling is not affected at heart. 8 OT * he feigned himself to be dead. W fWT 'feigning anger. ! * feigning sleep.' % * driflks { his ) fill. WlftW: 'they found Mm guiltj ! : S5T: ' a ^n or fair proposal.' 8 tMs fits well. * f f e * with his eyes fixed oa my face.' ^ * having the gaze fixed.3 ferfwg"-3##f-w\W ' with * a J^eJ feoft. * *Pft fTOl^wf *IlfW ' the mind devoid of , fixedness rambles.* , s ,seekiEg or fiEding fiaws, ar, picking holes.' : ' a palace having seven floors.' fff! fJfT#T, SWf% 5^WT, flTS^rflsr:, gf (srt) W%:''folding I his1 hands together.5 iprpfff WWFte?I * folding her in his arms**,;' Wfpt f W f f f l ^ 'follow (in) the foot-steps of the great.*! epjif! S f t m *lfUocmng the p a t h . s ^ a middle course.8 11^^ g rdsfostune fofflows another. s ara1: f ST^^tflr ' what % from this ! * 1X^RFP3|% ' what follows is understood. *| OT^li * what followed next,' proceed. OTTT ' it is a* follows.1 1 s God /rff (forfend ).. ! -, i ' I shall forego my name. * ty f: ' who ^ fulfilled his prdmise.*

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION"

84T

G HAN ' get out of (leave ) bed aow. ' : or WScrfW?I# ' they have girded up their jloins for battle. ' m\ n^ m m-., sftanfta: m %t, f f w jfppwfw * do not I ,ire way to grief, ' ^yffrfWf f | P # T %:Wm ' as if glowing with Brahmaic i istre.' :, ? W : ' heroes by the name of. * 3F1TW ' she went by the name of Urai. * f ^m ^ ^ W , #ffcPRT OT#W ' what is the good of seeing % he r. * 3fW trfttft^ * what good do you get by weeping..* 1 i^ifjipf g## f ^|ST#?:, WimfWi W: 6 he is within the gra -ip of death. %? ^r ^OTW^TWfTOVf * and this grasp of . every (kind of) learning.' WTRPf ^rnpftepfFf f * you % haw e well grasped my meaning. s gfirq^WTO ^WJ-W^f 3rfV"lW: * he was greatly delighted.* ^ T T ?5ffgTf%l%W ' grinding the teeth in rage. ! R jftePTTS'sfNjW:, 3 l ^ l f W : , jftW8Rlfnn^ ' h e grew up to maa'i; estate ( attained majority ). f?TO;: ^^OTTf % a calf |rows into a large bull.' f ra#W, i'fWr^ W # n t ' ears forth from her eyes in torrents.1 H h ' in the habit of stealing.' WRff, | ' habituated to distress. ! W r 6 evea a ^air'* breadth.' *f T ??3rfiT rfo35T: ' M i / a loaf is better no bread.' ? ' a ftawd-to fearatf fight. 1 ipw.-W;W:, ^ J' on the one hand--on the other hand. ! | , 9fff ' o

THE STUDENT'S GDIDB

HIO the other hand, * 1WWT, i#f * on ail hands. * * given a helping hand.' VCTOIl WPP? ' to be handed down.9 * Mmg between * {like Tris'anku ). HWRTfpF ^Hf% fsffefiTpT ' amtece- dent good omens are harbingers of coming happiness ' {Cf, coming events cast their shadows before.) 5fft STOTJf tWffiffW: ' Oh hard fate, * SWtS^lfMOT * hat pressed by hunger.' <ff vgi Wf%W^ff3"-ll|Tflf-"' your face has the beauty of a lotos. * f: * who hazards Ms life, * or srftWTFffefW * to be placed at the head of. *i <iiP|f wft-wf^-fewfa"* he stands at the head of all. * wfllW f5i ' sote-heaiimg oil. * * he is in good fteollft .* f # W - S ? % fW: ifipfPRf * i)eaine as healthy as before. * Rl^ffqffppt 4 why do you heap aeeusati o n ( calumnies ) upon a s . l f fif VWT^Wf ^^WOTff: * we know It by hearsay. ' ' with ail one's heart," w f e v w ufw** f: * he has applied himself to the work, Mart and s oul. * f, fe^W ' to one's feart's content. * * heaving deeply. * ifSFhJJRT: fspf:' this Is p heaven oa e a r t h . s ' ' I shaI be close, upon your fuels, * *I ( -shall just follow <you. * W ^ T O I ' to take to one's Iieeb.', tw 1 fl^ffe ' God helps those, whi 3 help';-' themselves. * 1I Wra:s W W t *' I can't help.' f * yoader Is indeed a hideous spe etacle, * flit ffffift s he has a ft%* opinion (thinks MgWy X of y o u . '

TO SAN'SEBIT COMFOSIIIOJC IMP &f * arrows hit a moving mark.

84S>

m fwsft wprr S i t T T , stHft ^ t w *r*& or ^ I fafol them of ao account. * lFW*ft Wl", WF? ' hold your tongue, * 'a^*rn T: * this rale feolds good everywhere.8 ^ 4 letting go the hold.' THT: IFWfi CT!# 1 1 % , * red colour takes a firm koM on a white cloth, * l %^F7 *R 3fWt * h had a told on the m i n i of the people ( drew the mind of the people towards himself).' %WC %ff'ft'ltlV affWFRt iffe" * the advice took no bold (was not i m pressed | oa the mind.' ffff: i f f jp*P?*fff>W?! ' t h e words went hmae to his-'heart. * : f^: fraWW ffWreWT^" ^ W * retaining four hares as~ kostages. * uttered kumun accents.' ffe TRff fertfi" fWfKWffW ' thus completely humbling' Whs k i n p . ' f W: * becoming idenMca.1" ( one ) with fff, f*rfwf, W P f , twflWfe:-|f%W: * ill luck.' 4 from times immemorial. * if ^ % sftfftffRRf 3 f W ' he stood in * imminent peril; off death.' 3T5? tflflrr (#fwfli^') w ^ f H f >T^fr Wt ' away with: 'lattery, speak impartially. * # * an untimely storm impends/ ' a drought Is closely impending. * : or 3*^ J M T W P : W ^WR" ( p r e s s e i ) , he told all, * Iff * being"

3S0

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE INT

WH# mmf njmmt SP&ftfT fjRfaptf ' Janaki is the Karawa sentiment or pang of separation incarnate.'' cfTajrat ff%, <tl'*IT^-#TOT^-^raW-WWll' ' lie incurs blame.' f ^aj% ^f|^fn^- g^j ' the splendour of that pair is % simply indescribable (what words caa describe their splendour) #Wf^fWWRFBlTffe * his dignity may be inferred from his form.' n^|%^T|ifltW?TOT^Wt ' her very form leads ( one ) to infer her being superhuman .* ' it will be clear who is inferior and who is superior.' ajfaf^RT W( f TpCfNI' IWf: ' she is not, inferior to S'aeM in, majestic dignity.' SfUf^lPSff-4 T Ufftlfl'^J' iWUHf * (her ) loveliness is not inferior to ( does 1 not fall short of) that in the picture.' spft fl^wlfraT: ^ T T T ^ | : S W * these diversions wil 1 only sei"ve to inflame grief.' T, T?ter, ^fffTfcf * inflated with pride.' -ff W * under the influence of sleep. s S: "RSR^PI1W ^ - * a fool has his mind influenced by the eorivietiotiis of others.' ' instead of saying on Pumshottam a.' #" feft"f% ^f% ' instead of studying why do you play ? ! ffF?T# 3f57 fwfjtq" ' be not sorry wislead of ' being ( where you should be ) glad. ' serving as the instrument of others . * R: ' such persons become helping; instruments."1 : ' conipouEtl interest' WM f f e : ' simple interest. * ^ ^ i ' interest at. five per cent. ' V*t ^ ' you have seen how the interest o \' j the story made me disgress.' fWTWTT, ffpfff% ' Jooking;

TO SANSKKIT COMPOSITION LAN

851

t o one's own interest. affipWoffcf fRfPRf ' the subjectmatter of the story Is very interesting.* IfRTf?nft SfPfTOWt: 4 we two are (respectively) interested in these two, * ^"PPPrff^TOM: ' if it should not interfere with other T duties.' SfSTOr^r sffntx U W&fa ' he interferes in matters .not his own. * rf s do not interrupt Mm. * , 8RRT aRTO * at intervals, * * inured to fatigue. * : 4 this is not an invariable rule. * ' It was a sad irony of fate in the case of R a m a . ' J f f ' uttered in jest.' * oa aecGimt of the fatigue of journey, * J * he resumed his journey.' l^T^Tftsfr * it is only a week!s journey. * * W l ' stay here just as in your owa house.* ' brought up just like one's own sons. * K or 15 ' 8 o r ^ ^ on the knees. * ' face-deep.' or Tf, v^?ft ^ 5 ^ or ft^ * &S the eyebrow. * " 5W '' knowledge is power.' f %mm itfk "W^, W1W ' became known by that name. 5 L ' labouring under hundreds f -anxieties,' ' proceeded by land. W ' with languishing looks. '

S52

THE STUDENT'S GOIBB

: S[l?; * this talk will last through life. * l l ^ f # : ' t h e bloom of youth lasts for a few days. * URJRfWIT T W T T * a garland capable of lasting for a long time, * ffBTC * the postern door was on the latch.' ?r: * why are you We. ?RT Wittf, fa5 aWcf * toy it aside for a while. * #fePf?Wif?I * fed a dissolute life. * * on the way kadimg to CMtrakfifa. * an s this way fead to the river. * : * yon are growing leaner and leantt i a y by day * ( you are gradually wasting away ). leaning on MadalekM's arm.' * leaning her face on her left haacl * p H f c l l l l f : * there should be at least three witnesses.*' 3ifi|fippff!i<f * we being left behind, * m$t ff#PP ' when It left off raining, ' ^ ^ f e ^ f i w ' It Is easy to adise or read kcMtrm t o others. * , l*l*'lf(TTT, 5W1W * being at kisure. TT "WllPr a^fffft ^ " rf?narf?r * secure her fe#f' she fall Into the hands of some ascetic, * srfirarep ' to level to the ground.' ^ f e w a t # -reduced to the level of the poor.' # : s man i | liable to err.'* ' y O a i . ladyship Is to do what befits the occasion.' f ? t ^ Iff % snrafif * now she Is at !&?% to detain or set you free.*, IPPfT ?1%WM ^ H T ^ ! the fault lies with you entirely. * f f t art ^f: ' this fault j[j with my friend. *

T0 SANSKEIT COMPOSTTWK MAS W 'support of life.' SFPffr "ieaaiag a virtuous life. * W T O f r ' the vicissitudes of life. ' 8FP!f 5*Wf ' considered in this light. * fff% * this and the life.' n% &*Z:, f ^ w t # # ' Just as you life. * HFTffT, ffSgff, ftft|, VWWf% * doing as one likes. * W W : " taking what form far likes * flfflffrffW f)W!ff * do as., you life. * W iWF P f t a*W ' he was not to T Zt&ing.' 3{qfror " of narrow limit (scope;.' ^W W ff^ # * no ( definite ) limit can be set to Ms fame. * T * sot throttgh the limited nature &! meiite. * ^ * as long as I live. <fapf<#: JfrfhFffl lives OB wfld fruit. * p m f ?pr^r * within living memory. * cans. * to lodige a cwnniaint, * * to fil* salt, * w;-^fefW:-f f,fe^' to fool; intently.at.' fRfffSPfW * thai ,.& like wantonness, * Spfs^T % WtllP? itigR, ^Pfftf'Nf'Rr*foofeafter C look to the wrfl-beinc. tdce care of} mj ', ! f l # ? f t e * he lost his life. * M f f f S f t * Me loses Ms friends. * ^ ^ T O T ^ JfW * he fo^ Ms w&y.' ^ p r f w ^ R - ^ f w t T S ^ * who has lost Ms office. f%^^Wsf?P?f?P|3 * being at a loss what to do. * 3*WJ, 3Wff * fall to die ht of.' * ffW f:1pp!itf| * misery will be youf hi. * %WRl?i Sfi|W!f s to who fof ( share f does ^erpetoai happiness foil. * If ft 'toMfafetlie best of a b&i matter1. * Mtting the mark, fd mmn-., n wmmwm:, n not matter of najself. ' *who lias completdy mmterei ! sdeaces.' S3

S5i

THE ST0BEMT9S GU1BE MIS

felT?| i^f ^rfg^si ' you have attained perfect mastery over all sciences of arms.' m SffcrtfS'ft WWPt * let us (two ) make a match. * 5j * Hari is a match for the demons. s * t o be more thai* a match for.' ^ w f g g f s I V f apt * it was weU-matcfted fight.' it does not much matter. * Pf? (SWf Wtf f: * what is the matter with her, * f W q*f % W Is ' what matters it to m e , ' * proximity being not material. * ffipraSjl, 3^tTtft' of matured intellect, * if iff fiffiii * easting at me a meaning look.' f + Wf-9WJf^-I' go out to meet.' STCtgror, SFfPIf rise to meet.' wn- #c?;y^i%-lfwW% s waters nwel.* tiff ^ W ?%I#OT 8 w | i r ^ 5 1 * ^ ' his heart was with affection. * ^ * having a retentive memory.1 Wflfi ' or sffc pass. ' to remaia only in memory.' tp?t ?t*ft ^Rff?Wf% !%f^% collection of good qualities.'
s 4 1

to

one fault merges in a

f^^>sjTTre:-srfff: 6 working of the mind.' ^wfe or ^ ^ , ^ 1 #3ff ' to cross or occur to the mind' a ftlWf TO: W : - ' never nd the first questioE. *
18

^ffferaraR !ff<^^^Wlfr' I fell pleasure mingled witli; Tegyet. * '.; " * is way.' 1 ^ * a mwtalte in calling by name.' OTI? f^WK * ' animals run away from the ass ; it for a tiger.'

TO SANSKEIT COMPOSITION OCC ' good for the present

355

mommt.'

^ff r ffJ|% ' the mote thou seest in the eyes of others, but jot the beam in thine own, * fij% ?FIW iwRf, ^W W # ^ r t l % * he makes mountains of mole-hills, * 3f??TFOTTOcI^1W?*?ff 1 W ' don't move even a step T further,' sptpff iffpft 1%: s mysterious are the ways (working) of Fate.' N f : ' do you know their names.' Wfft ^TW: f!3#jf ' I shall ask Ms mother's name. * f WWrpff ' he calls me by my name.' f W ? , g^WT^' in one's natm, ' m^^^m WS^WTW TMT ' say to the Mag in my name. m%T%m ^ OTT^Tmrfw "WOT ' salute Mm 1B myfatme. ' ^*ft sfwwr ' levity natural to mortals.' r t ? r p : * a friend in need ( adversity ) . s f: f^fW * a friend in mf is a friend indeed.' ' MalatI nods her head. * I am biit a nominal lord of the Earth. 8 | 5 this matter has become notorious * ( known to all). * let her be carefully nursed.' O f [ 5 j ' the sole object of one's affection.' fipr, f%Mi?W, ftm%pr 1 # ' with what object in view. * ; ' she was an obstacle to meditation. * f ' occupying the honourable position f a housewife.'

S56

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE PAS

?fe g w fgir * wm, ?itf rr*<r f5tf frwfer * this aid not#eea.r to his mind.' fiffVtflqcft f*ft ft 5?iWt ' these two verses raw to our mind. * spfpraPr prf STOW |p3WF * S'afaintaH. has ej some , person worthy of respect.' fl" if $CTf? WT 3 ' I have never even ooce offended you,* * easily taking offence, * * dismissed from office, pfifg": * having gone oat into the open air,' tfft^ffenrfl, 3 W W T ^iwr 5 1 laid my'self opm to your taunt. * * seizing an epportwmily, * 5 opposed to the practice of the world. * arr tmwsm mm mn^Mmfmsm fwf ' it is left to option,"" or choice. ' your Majesty's orders will be obeyed, * W ' natural refer. * 5H%^W, ^ W : , fewi:, SRHWr reverse orcfef. 4 a n f ^ qft^W^feWfffeW 1 am criwe by sleep, f caused Dy fatigue. * with an eye omfftmiiing'with joy. * my curiosity first, merjimmi. ' * grew or turned pale."' % Sf^OT * S'afaunta!& forms, as It were, a p t parcel of my body. * * assigniaeat of parl*. * TOW IWW ^ff * give the particvhrs of that maa. fwflW: IWf: wf% * he with difficulty pant$" eight years.* ^f fW: # T l l i s this pa$sa coBC^tion. < T

TO SANSKRIT COMP08H10M

857

PLE .3fffcft~f?fls5<J ^SFIF, 4T?| f%J?#sf ' let it pass aow. * pptpf Vj^tcPp: ifJfTfsps^PTfir ' why do you leave the camp without (taking ) a pass.' 3r3JTT3!tf9cf: ' without a pass. * sfHT i[W?55Wtefwfei ^wti^TO^N" W^pKftST^f: 'she passed off the picture of her beloved upon her friend a s that of Cupid.' ^STOtlfWRfts^rfer arpfar ' t h e account of the second mother has been passed over by his honour.' f%f another peeping through a lattice.* affUX p j|rfrenrfHn the conimand of elderly persons d y ^s ( t o be considered) peremptory,' should not be catted in questioa. ^ra JRt"rat f*?, W^#Wffr?cf T | ^ ' the draina hM T not been seen performed (acted ) on the stage. s ' persevere in your opposition.' : '& p personal atteadant,* s body-guai s : ' personal experience.' INPI WX& i youth has pervaded the limbs.' 1PRIF %>' ^wWHf s ascertain who are the petitioners.' a heart pining' -away in absence.' tf * * he j>ine<2 for his home. * d % ^ W: ' the royal sage is pining by the separation from his wives. * fil^|f#-*|ift ' in the place of a father.' SOT, SPTOT:, SW# W W * in the first place.' 3PTC % Jf:, g^RW ' in the next R place.! , ^fffef, 3rfiprtW ' a plaintiff. '^SfJffrf/sifipPKr:, Sfflr* a defendant.8 ^ ^ ' worthy Sir, please wait for 2 or S ^ ^ y p 'lays.* ^fir#># WTOTW ' just as my friend phases.'' j frid h ' ' f ' f t : ' a pleasant joke.' [^ s pleasing to the ear. * :-3ilf * I have pledged my word.

358

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

FBI * they two thus pledged their word.* y^W ' he has pledged his -virtue (honour) that he would not harm y o u . ' * on r at the point of death. r t l s , aHOTSOOTfir on, the point of delivery. * ffrffc!Ts %tfbn*f wfirgt * the maid was given he position, of a queen.* HPJfWWlf*!' fZ% * it is possible in both ways (both sides. are possible). * pfOTfW * being long in practice.' S5RK, fpyjrf, I P f p 1 * following g>d practices.' W ffwYr#5|Wft: ' what professioa do you practise t* STOW: * practice ' as opjwsetf to 5TOW-^PW: * theory.' ( g r a ^ <R*f ^Tij fW: w f f M ^ # * example is better than precept.' if T U W P n P p P W f * he even preduis events.' I ^ : f jppoiifp!: * I jw^ death to disgrace.' * she showed sipis of pregnancy. * 8 advanced in pregnaneg, * W, i f e f f l f P # * you should be premntftm Wf T * the past, preseat, aud f u t u r e ; ^ f% WWW ' In the presence, of fire. * "".SB WHffT'Wr-iptflf??*! '"pressing him to the txraMnJl ": ''pretending to be affected by poison. 8 ^ ^ H * pretends not to hear.' WT#sff^'r-f%f'Pf lptetniding to be just.' ' the witness prevaricated. ^ Wf ''prevention is better thn cuw. * ' fell a f $ to enemies.' ' the prime of youth. *

TO SANSKKIT COMPOSITION' BEA

359

C ^ W * proceed with your narrative. fflftt f%RK^RF?| * proceed with the matter at issue. $fofc4clt i^PRft ITip'OflFrfi[W TW*: ' you may proceed with your dinner-preparations In hoHOur of the worthy Br&hmanas. * f%P#Rf % I^IW: * from what cause does thy excitement proceed V * prompted by hunger.' * SRI Mf^Wfltf:, ; * he seldom wants a prmnpter. * t fRlfiTrffl^r ' here is this person being disgraced and proscribed from the city, * f ^ ff * ^ T ITOf! T W fsT^pUfwl" s good men their usefulness by deeds, not by words. * Rr * one who provides for the future. ' l id lh ^ * one should provide T,<ealth against times of want.* g or VpIclT: i are not puffed up when praised.* ^jfarW, # W , Wffe6?!, ^SM i puffed up with prBe.s ' he should punish (anoffender) as a thief. * ': without reseive.' R ^ * slow and -steady wins the race.' frer^Ft *PT f ? ^ ^ WW * those words ranhU inony heart,' W iTfR: ^ff55lt ^af; s the wouad rankled.' ' by the accouat reaching ( her ) f g ears. %i i f l w g^ ^WWWWiW-^rWfWllfef%^ ' this has probably reached your ears.' r * having a ready wit.' l ready-witted.' * affection in the real sense of the terra.' k * asceties may be questioned

30

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE

EES pft OTRT mt% (Pf) p q W ? 3 l the creditor pass a receipt ia his OWE hand. s ?t * he entered into a recognizance bond,* if fe# 5 T f^W OTRqf: flfa^T ' I shaE, therefore, R mend you to Damayant!. * n?nPr SQR "T^TTftr, Hf?fT T Wff% ' you are uot yet reconciled.' ^TWff5? SCfOTfTWrft! ' reconciles statements.' fpPliftSl<(Tfflf: snftf: ' a pledge to be redeemed at a fixed time.' g sfr, W^l f> * reduce to subjection.' * reduced to a skeleton of bones.' iRfef TPf ' ft body reduced In bulk. * s a reference or allusion is here made #to a mythological story.' *RT: SRfrt W O Tff: ' do not show a refractory spirit towaris , TT your husband.' ?}fl|f% % Siopf fo^g ' pray, do not refuse my request. * * Ms heart relented. *. I 'being appeased, he relented.'' f%*?ff'f: * he somewhat relented. ' <Rff?r ' gives relief to sorrow.' l^TT WiC^f ^fWT|^f% ' please remember (lay to h e a r t ) these words well. * TfWM ttrWST ^TWW^fN' "^Wf^W: ' this group of gaHante < as if reminds me to-day of Patala.' apt * Oh I 1 am well reminded.' X:' there go.es a report. *,- ' reposing confidence. ' JTWT^Wf^} lopRT ^ n w f % ' represent even-1faults as merits.* ?T<R'?JnHRrf'r " the eharactt-rs resemble one another, agree, coincide.*

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION SAJ, psft fW5foF% ' rivers are resolved into the sea.' fPff?cftI?f!ifterif?JCir' with her interesting on her left hand. * jgpCW Wt fviT * resting on the three hoofs.' HFTOfPI<!: TT fttrther than this rests with fate.' fwf^fWRff TT 13? fl## ' on whom your sons had rested their hopes of overthrowing ail enemies.' fTX: mi # 4 wy?t f ^ s r f t ^ f t r * Hara will restore to Cupid his body.' %4 my actions hctag thus restricted on al! sides { my course being thus hampered ) . ' g??pf ^Wwfoj 1 !!?^: ' fni exception can restrict the scope of a ride.' 3Rf: Tt Jfr; ^^fiftqifn ' I shall resume, my story front this point afterwards. ' ?fW TO M # Wftr fwqi^a^Hpfra * that matter 4Dstantly revolving in his mind.' Tcff ' I shall be ridiculed.' ' Priyamvada is right.' * says rightly.' ^far 4 a woman has rior?gft to independence.* JfT TOlwi^f^tf ' I acted right:tj in delivering it into the hands of the Queen-' ' they do not rise to receive their elders.* I t ' a rising enemy.' f f e : ' it is proper that the eye is riveted.' 3^I^T ' your answer is, as it were, learnt

Hy mte. ' SRfl: SPfT: ?^r ^ tF^"i!rcWr ' ruling the subjects like one's own -'Mldren. ' TT: how much has the night yet to run . * S
s

y: * ( who showed t h a t ) he had not eaten s master's sali m vain. '

THE STUDENT'S GUIDfe. SHA WWft ( with l o c . ) , 3Ffa Wlfef with, sri?t * what .Beed we say of. * ^R^WK: ' popular saying.' WWt' ^WWr^^; * so runs the popular saying,' ' as the verb goes. * jgyf qfi?Tr^^ sRrsjRrsii ^${W * open it, preserving the and show m e . ' ' to see with one's own. eyes. * 4 fer ' exposed for sale. ' P M . f l l f e f 'seme of obligation.' ' having lost all sense of honour and dishonour on of old age. ' ^ftPjWf 'etymological sense. * ^3PT *convea', tional or popular sense.' af^sf, WWW, TCTPfcT: * in its true; mense.' wmi ^ T # U T ^tWPff rafe s else th repetition has no sense ' ( does not beome significant), i s taken separately' ( 9 ^ ^ ^ p t or <wflf%? * this will, serve to rouse his'' anger * 3WW ^f, Wlt-ipr! V ' to KTOC the purpose of,*'; as. * WRC- ^ f i ^ ^ K : ^WT * the gods send up feed, * t^ rf%sf% ' this will serve as water to wash t$'. feet with. * .r ^f^fprw wrarW^rr: ' #rf* of ornaments fitting ail parts' of the body.' ^fFff%5 ^ f r a ^ ^ , l ^ ^ ^ T * set w i k ' jewels. * ^< f> ' set one's foot on. ' Pf:-fV'i-f!Ri OT or afWfs or i f e f e r caus. or f t eaiis. ' *rf the heart on. * 8ft#: OTWi iPcnJt T?W: ' by this time the sun had set. * ft iRff TO wl: ' set your heart on religious duties. fipp}t| ^ f t m ^ft%W ' *cl not your heart on| rf%fl # ' h h h objects. * 3rf%tWfffl #^WWT: ' summer iwhich has just i n , ' WtT few 5JW% ' virtues are set off by modesty. * settling what to say. * srftreif!c!*n$$ita^ * this position would be shaken. *",

TO SANSKitIT COMPOSITION'

863

STA | * sorrow shared bj dear friends. % f !!# Sf WWT^Tl^jflfiT g:W * with whom else shall I S share m y grief.s* ifppr, <i!SWPv ' armed with a shields W&t%$*K ' havinga sword and shield.' f^ fe : ' a JwVfe-k>nj look.' Wit ^FWfft * makes a stjfre to Viditehaka.' 8PPf|j[, lW, 31W^p?T, 3P=l^ 'significant.' % i p ^ * my heart A down * 3PFWPT 5 limbs sinking down through excessive thirst. * ^W: ' his heart sank within him.' T: ' I have slackened the speed of the chariot.' teWT: 'who have shekemdtheir efforts.*' ^ %9T: ' a mind slow to discriminate. ' S * slow In recognizing. * ^ *TW>PCfr ffe ' I ara smarting under the defeat' {the defeat Is rankling la my heart ). *'!: sspftf ' something is better than nothing,*' ' it is sooner said thaa done. * s the spider spots out its web threads ) from itself.' , wfelf%Tf * ifl high spirits.' f: arrfipf ^if^pf% ' snatches away the prey in sjwfe t>f our looking on .'. ^: * the king sees through spies. * : WFf: f * what is the use of life stained % by infamy (ignominy ) ' ? ' his life was at stefe. *

Mk

THE STUDENT'S GOTOE SOP

f^pftUffif^ a^fip^f * this will remain, a standing stigma | OB m e ) . * ffel~scfel?r-lS-?f?r ' at a gtand-stiU. * '?? "BtVjftRJ f Wife ' this does not stand to reason,' : ' who has obtained a standing.' * with the hair standing on e n d . ' ft ^ ' to start on a journey.' WTF: * not starling aside, the deer hear the sound,' ' with a start.' 5lf%fePRWPn 7l5n s night, the watches of which stdk away (Imperceptibly glided away ) . ' 5ptf%ffT fspftpJSWW'f WPf^ ' sleep gently stole upon my eyes. * f: Hazes up,' 5t f^TEWife ' the evil does not stop here. * t 5T ' to strike oa the face.' Vsffi f{W %pm$( 'strikes fear' in the mind.' g?-a^S-ff^ ' striking deep root. * f?fr q w i f f m e - he was s^rwfc with wonder.' afe ^ ^ f f % f f e ^ k t ' being used in its most general sense, it easily strikes the mind. * ^: ' a sound stunning tan.
1

* when the fuel is stirred the fire

the

W ' she is styled (treated as ) Queen.' F4 ' succeeding his father as of the North. Kos'ala.' jjfsy- JnTOffefe "fi* SfiftSR * if any important duty should' n&t suffer.' M^: 1MJ?T ^{ff fife tBSf% 9TW^' a %vieked person commits a fault, and a good man suffers for i t . ' 6 from a sun-stroke.' J r 'ft * to render superfluous.' f ^f'PPFft^^WW ' wheB there is a clear moonlight, torches % w e superfluous. *

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITIONTIG

365

' truth is superior to thousands of horse-sacrifices.' pf # f l # WF^TOTf'T 'how shall I support my life?' * 5PT U*W: WTOTW # f e f f WK ^R^faf^RRfr s this hyiau cannot by itself support any theory. s lTPtw ' suppressing the emotion of sorrow.' *Pf5ftefW |fiT ' I am made susceptible of an emotion. * ffwC! fof?t ' youth is susceptible.' t % TT:' my mind is held la suspense an<l " hence anxious.' FffW: W^^Wf 5 5f^|: ' t'c birds screamed as if out of sympathy. * T Praff^ff ^ T : ' tastes differ,'' different men have different tastes. * ' I am| unable to tear myself ^ f y off from the cane-bower,' fcft&nr feftsffltf5TT * she tore her hair in grief.' MW$t T3Ff!ftWK^Wcf"<t' passes the night grown tedious on account of dejection .' f ft f^5T test me in theory and practice. * OTR: ' ( I ) thank you,' ' thanks.' Sf * both are well-versed in tkeor *nd practice, * ff% T ^nfttg" ' he does not think' of going tohis capital.' W ^ 'spoke through her friend. * Wf PR!: * a child is the mutual tw of parents.' ^ffffTOgq1 f ? W ^ Pwf?WWfffW ' 1 am chained down by this tight bark-garment.

366

VflE STODENT'S G0HM

Wffl: prppft^pf C ' l ^ * it is high ftiwc to bathe and take our meals.' IJRfFjrti*!' a time server. * t# WITRrf fawnftj s I shall not do so aaother time J SROT^fWtfWWra: 'begging is out of lime' ^frRW'N' ^ferfltf, 3(fF5?W ' without loss of time.' 3ppT f!RIT ^OTTfsig^j lif^TT lT fWffts^Fflf s learning danced on the lip of his tongue. * ' it rained in torrents.' 'the number 100 toucAe me home.' ' the heart is touclted with anxiety.' ^ ' adversity Is the touch-stone of the sincerity of) friendship.' ff * a thief is traced out by his foot-steps,* k when the word Brahma is traced (tn s its r o o t ) . ^ T : * from the trodden, (beaten ) path. * WOT WIW^TO ' Parantapa truly so called.' * of Dhruvasiddhi true to his name, * truly so called. another. * W(||: ' one good turn deserves

IJ JW * unexpected.' f 3RP#rw. araftw *.:, ffff: 1OTffrfwfJT ' union strength. s is r s?[pf%'':he word 5if|f?f: is used in the ftfif: is convcR" .->ensc of Light.' > * HOt fd to tior,a1ly used for fire. ornaments.' ' to Itad thf van. f ' a verbal message.

TO SANSKRIT COMPOSITION WOB

c

867

a verbal ( oral) discussion .* ' from a worldly f practical) point of

view,* fts^f&OTWHf: thy * vindicated or shown .*

s

parent affection has been fully

W wait for some t i m e . '

wait for two months. 9 ' f f fffW: * there Is fire in the state of a spark ( only ) waiting for fuel. * rTrft 1 PPiff fftf!W% * nothing will be wanting to you. * ffFFfTCt *ffif ^RPftT: * do not suspect me of wantonness.' T ?p%qr %?| ' warm oneself' f in the sun ). VWlRiW %^ * warm oneself at the fire.' * waxing and waning. * 8 on the way. * qrfttFsft'W ' stand or come in the wa%* fip ?q|crr5^wwf% * do you have your own way'? iSPfaj f| n r a ^ f ^ * know that we are doing well in every respect. * js#, TO, ?T#% ^^Wf s saylag very well" f: & acting according to another's wMm. * 1 # 1 # , S^TWfeiPrai^ ftfW: ' God's will be done.8 W, f 5I, grora*: 4 against one's will.' : snps ' the ignominy was wiped out."" 1^9f: ' he was at his wits' end. ' : ' in a ivoeful plight.' * it is no wonder,' what wonder is there'? -WT: * true to, or keeping one's word. ' H^^ft" ' a briefly-worded message.' ffJ^mpfg''well vcorded. ! ^fWW^ftw 'pathetically

M8

THE STUDENT'S GUIDE YIK

c# JPT5ftft?re^Rfn|?r: 'y are my all-tfae-wwW' (the allin-all of toy Mfe }. STfaf^flsr' knowing the ways of the xcorUL' H gff JfFFfiFTOT: TfT^l% ' you are not then worm off m ia a worse conditioii than before.' having a husband worthy of hewelf. * f * wreaking revenge. * Y f i t , 3?w f " * yes ' OTfff" 31?WT 8 sajiag yer, % 4cWff ffff anfisr * to field to a superior foe. *

SEITENCES FOR CORRECIIOi

: fW:

WS W. Si

3W

SENTENCES FOE CORRECTION wife i TOT

If

IT

#fe wt

S H O T ifeftswfp 1 f ^ ^ W :WTWfe' TJH t : wm OTt wr

few

: ant 5 JPHFT 5iw;

W WIT

SENTENCES FOR CORRECTION

371

WTijFII W W O T T

TO TO

, ftn| fWWHf

TPfW l t

TRW it

ft" JWrTOfl^ I. ' ': f

3R-tfT<|?R?Rt|

#72

SENTENCES FOB COHBECTIOK

3PT

sfrfir:

IT

f W l S f

IT

5W f

T 5 w^ wtrnHf^. i

GLOSSARY

Sanskrit English : excess, climax, adv excessively, the or venial creeper. fPFWr over-constrwmfc. a. very jtnaL a. very w i .

it

m, the sun. a. incomprehensible, not known. tf feting penniless, indestructibility. m . bad- quality. a. most shameful. a. not covetous. 8 U. to consign to excelve the flames, to burn. ado. in the meanwhife, m. a Br&hmana. a. not distant. r a leader abused. a, best, a. well-strung. ?IW sin. : a supreme or 3W: a speck, spot. mount lord. WJT: a sprout. : a sacriice. ant a component part. ; Cupids bodiless one. K a scented cosmetic. a. not to be dckyed. / . a iager. a. having no saitobk a ring. . incomprehensible, wtfe. ^ ^ ^ a. contiguous, ntisgli** inconceivable. *W a..not born, bouring. eo'lyrittitn. WWWfft^ a. imperishable. p . -p. past. 1PPI a. unbeading hiauflity. f beiog * i f p . p . very Wamable. p . p. not excessive raieaess.

874

GLOSS-* BY sift a. cool, protected from

heat. a. not sick or fatigued. a. foolish, silly. . having no beginning. health. a. easy. i a. distressed, sorry. I n. having no control or j mastery. I pppf adv. favourably, so as j to please one. ) ': a follower. j : a younger brother. ) unsurpassed. i ': absence of pride. \ f a. not puffed up-. ( . incurable. i a. guileless. ! : course flow, con- i i tinuity. p. p. inferred, guessed. ! p. p. intertwincd.wvcr- ' spread. j R^fW/. complying or obe* i dieat spirit; experience of < the past. untruth. j in. the inmost soul, i : an obstacle, impedi- j meut. | the s>fcy. <.p. disappeared, tie- j parted. '

p . p. la it. hidden.. : the Doab or between the Ganges Yamuna rivers. W a. one who does ill, : improper conduct. : a pretext, colour* M. ignominy ill-repute, p. unceasing. ua ending. : censure. away. a. not repeated, new and new everyday. fl. new, the like of which did not exist. reasoaing power. . unrivalled, having no rival. a. irreniediable. ' \ unimpaired. . diflident. . inriumeraWe. dant. a woman. the God Jtraluna. beauty, splendoiu*. .sexual noble descent. souvenir.

GJLOSSAKY art* 8jf*PPT a. new, fresh, blooming. affVrfrf^^n application, devotion, inteatness. 3ff*pra"f. jp. liked, dear, desired. n a learned man. t. aa invader. a. very charming, f: a desire, longing for. p. p. clear, very distinct. 3ffsprPI ( denoin. ) to face or encounter an army. 3#T ( % ) WWl cheating, deceiving. srwpTft'sf food, eatable ( l i t . } that which is fit to be eaten, w p. p. come as a guest. y ?. p. undertaken. apfW an evil, an evil thought. F a.enraged, exasperated a. pure, white. 3PTFW a. superhuman. an irrational female. a. infallible, unfailing. f: a cloud. n. iron. T: charioteer of the sun. w ife of Vasistha. acquisition. rn wi/i w 10 A. to consider, imagine ; with % to pursue. m

97S

a. significant, not deviating from the sense, snipr a. deserving, worthy. 3rW%Wfi[ . foolish, dullwitted. 3Rff>t?<aT a. fit to be thought of or conceived. : ground, room, scopt. : destruction, decay, sinking, drooping. rushing s treading. . fit to be condemned. p. p, spurned, disdainfully slighted. pWRr. a pit for catching game. WWrt^f a, slighting, disregarding. ratR: a member. Rf5?ffwT name of a maid servant. p.p.cnAed, terminated, close, terminatiot. p . p . settled, remained. f%iRr P- jp. ot hurt, safe and sound. ift^gTa woman not widowed having her husband living, p. p. rude. p. p. alive, not deadp. J>. unobstructed. 3RFT food. : thuoderbott.

S78 ant

GLOSSARY

the state of beinga stranger. afPPT: appearance; bursting out; the Yedas. a. versed in tkeorv agony,' excessive torment. : heat, sultriness. p. p. heated, aftiietetf by heat. ffgpnf hospitality, hospitable reception; 0WT rite f hospitality. a. afflicted, troubled. . wise, intelligent. 8 U. to conquer, acquire. : love, fondness. : in'the very bud. ^ m. one who imparts, ; : a bane, euree, sway, rule, delight, pleasing to, a. inward, internal. : m 3|FIW:-W a market, store house.^ H ! ? H ' p. p. come to pass', %: 3. mine. occurred, befallen. C: appearance, form. p. p. distressed. a. full of; affected by, : a credible or trustovercome with. worthy person. ?f wailing. growing fat or stfl a name of Indira. : environs, outskirt <ffR|: a mouse, rat. a. lovely, eharantiB| p. p. told, announced, bait. guest, a stranger.

a. helpless, f mishap, calamity. : adv. completely. a horse-faced creature. 3f3f itW: the horse-sacrifice, j 3RI with vR pass, to turn j away from; with ftwfr -4 P. I to undergo a change. o. ignorant, a. not over-attached. a. incongruous, Illsuited, improper. a. worthless, weak. transient state, frail or transitory nature. a. black. the blade of a sword. ; the setting {western) mountain. K; egotism, pride. adv. quickly, at i>aee.

GLOSSARY

377

I m% with 3PJ 2 A. to wait : gain, acquisition. ! upon, serve. . j. long, p. p. fixed upon. an abode. r . attachment. W a. giviog trouble. a. long-lived (one ). i a bed. an inhabitant of f an assembly; # W : Ayodhys\, ! an assembly-room, hall of audience. : a n action, undertaking, entertainment, pro': a battle. pitiation. ;: food. jruj a. polite, courteous, ": a juggler. worthy. f CPF|/f: a term used in speakcans, to convince; ing of the husband. with a w to separate^ part. ilWfiOTT: worthy or respectable persons. W f : one of the kings of the 91^7 a. pertaining to a mad solar line,aneestor of Raghu. f organ of sense, sense, dog. fuel. 8 T5 a female companion. T 5V nam of a woman. J : sight. p. p. thought, considered. ^ ttftar| I A. to look f obscuring, Winding. after, inquire after. . p. p. slightly turned. eye, sight. : a dweUing, house, abode, p. p. liked, desired, fe. turbid, muddy. a lord, master, Siva. ( denom.) to suMy, to ^m a. able ; -T: a lord. . f t 1 A . to wish, desire. make turbid. ffRW p. p. surrounded by. : inlluence, subjection. . usual, custoHpry. : a serpent. . adv. quickly. p. p. high, raised, up. : a stage or state of life. p height, excellence.

GLOSSARY

: doing good, conferrinf a. dishonouring or disobligations. gracing the family. fe m. a benefactor. ^ a loud cry. a royal teat. p. p. exterminated, ": destruction, injury. eradicated. ; external show, outWIRffr a. full of hollows, ward form; mode of address, having ups and downs. : instruction. ?fW( denom.) to form into i harm, injury. sa ornamental braid. p. p. come, befallen. WT a. latter, -TT ( / . ) Abhioccurrence, befallmaayu's wife. ing. a. ever-increasing. a. open, unreserved, 1 T O a. fit, proper, comparison, guileless. p . p . dead. 3H#Rf" p. p. stretched, : eclipse. opened. : disturbance, damage fe a lotus-plant. injury. S: a wreath, curl. characteristic sign. festivit}', ceremoaial S ascertaining. rejoicing. : a fast. : aceouut. history. p.p. that has drawu ". appearance, sight. near or approaehed,befallen adv. without restraint, W^f p . p. doomed, struck violently. down.' a. proud, high. derision, ridieuk.. fl. shedding tears. : condition, circum1 W i?. p. engaged in. instance. tent on. : a preceptor. n resolve, determination. ": a taunt. # nobleness, sublimity. adv. in private. fi?1 f. eminence, elevation, : resorting to. seeking dignity. 1 'protection of. m. readjr. j | / . morning, daws. vicinity.

GLOSS AH Y

tn. warmth, heat. in. heat. It p. p. uudertaken. >: the thigh. a. great, powerful. r . a billow, wave. 3 ^ with 3TT 1 P . to remove, destroy.

N^i a. splendid, majestic.'.. : a glutton. ittdiKerence.

? the hump ; ( fig.) chief or foremost. [: hair. m frSaR"? collyrium, soot. 5 with 3?f 1 A. to be eaget ^3f a. not evil, unsinister. or anxious for. ^pRTST a. almost a sage. a. some, a few. ^TJWTT: a young sage. ^jKiiiPJ": the son-in-law of adv. with great 'diffiDas'aratha. culty. a plantaiu tree, gold. adv. suddenly, all of a :-t a cave, glen, deiile. sudden. !F?Si a mass, collection. r: Brahma. finT a. concentrated, fixl xtftft arj to take pity a. on one object. [f^Tf a. excessive, ever-last* ^ wi/A 3|T 10 U. to hear. jug, perpetual, with adj. *PWR: a hclmsmau, pilot. au uproar. very excessively. : a cub, a young elephants ^ ; adv. oue by one. : a duck or goose, p.p. brought up, digit, w. a sin. a. bud. the body. : a form, mode. a. deseeaderf from T: the and or dJsaltstis ku. of the world. : Indra's elephant.

GLOSSABT

benefit; -% puss, to undergo f a. early, prime, a change, be affected byj ffl. noble, good, blessed. -f^W to tease, harm;-(p. p.), a. blessed. wronged,illtreated, troubled, a. difficult, : side-locks of hair. harassed, injured. H gold. a. wise, thoughtful, 1JW: a, desire ; Cupid. a. whole, entire. a. going at will. a. mean-hearted. T: adv. out of lust or pas- f5F o. lean, emaciated. sion, sensuously. p ^ 1 P . with fr to beui, VP(^[ a, fulfiffing or yielding direct ( as a bow). the desires. ff% /- husbandry, cltivatl@a m. .a lover, gallant. toUh <rfr ( eo*ffll) fa R an astrologer, a forupoa, design^; - w ( w l ) tune-teller. iatend, settle, aim at. a red garment. wjq?#!r m. i r e . ^; otte of a class of celesT an aboie, residence. tial choristers or musicians, w. name of a demon, a report, rumour. m. a lion. :-t a hollow, cavity. a, crooked, wily. m. a family man. . pitch.; extremity, end,' I: pavement point; TOlJlfe highest piteh,, euriosity. clima-x. a. fooMsh, dull-witted, :-C a bud. a. lotus. curiosity. a lotus-plant, f a small piece of cloft ' j welfare, well-being, worn over the private paste.! a. doing well. \it% the northern directioft,; . of sharp intellect. slf^f: a descendant of the J j l / a brook; rivulet. Kurus. f 8 U . %mth JT to .place in a. belongiBg to a tot* the froat; -Wf to remove, totse. '' ' prevent j -"M to do good to, report, scan*toJ. *'

GLOSSARY

381

ii Vis'vaiaitwis soa of ; ^JT name of a woman. r. a saw. ^if with 8fT to fall upon, seize. |%3fT work, composition, a toy. weakness* timidity, unmanly behaviour; being neuter. $rfP a. momentary, traasltory. $pf the Kshatriya or warrior class. WJt night. Srffcr jp. f, destroyed SW o a b l e , capable} fit, proper. CTK waning. Hlf a. belonging to or beccnang the Kshatriya class. ": the salt ocean. 1 king, lord of j the earth, fef m i f 6 P . to dash against, to seduce, entice; -fir to bestow on, devote to. flpr a. ^mean-liearteds base, worthless. # f a field. #*r: jolting, violent shaking.

": breaking, splitting; a fragment. : a bald-headed person, c. fatigued, exhausted. : an astrologer. a harlot, wfe" / . recourse, help, alternative. *[^R ffidr. falteringly, convul- sively. : odour, perfume. : an elephant of the best class (emitting a sweet smell). prf??r: a ray. W*| with Sc^T? to go to meetor receive. being born rich, getting wealth by inheritance. ffifWf depth. WTf A. to enter, penetrateft^T: S'iva. ^T: a good result or effect; credit, merit, use, efficacy. *p? a. foremost, chief} m.($.) father j (.pL ) elders. ^ m. a householder, a housewife, family. t a Jackal. raagnitudes

the sky.

382 If : seizure. a. vulgar, churlish. awr loveliness, beauty. f tet'tft S pas. to thrive, T to grow more and more; to acquire, desire of doing, a. strange, wonderful. f- painted or drawn in a picture. crest, crown of the head; t o p ; tuft of hair. a crest-jewel. : a niango-tree. an action. f course of conduct. a. of a depraved or corrupt soul, evil-minded.

5 with cot. to unite, i join. ! r: the hot-rayed SUB. j : an executioner. t

m. a sovereign or paramount ruler. PRfj# the horizon. ^5[ with SWf 2 A. to repudiate, east off. iNrcr a. shaking about, waving. : the beak. J1: the moon-stoue. n. disguise; pretence. siderate, thought- I lessj fiekle, unsteady. | : *W f. an artnv. i . grown dull. =W: a lump, heap. ! the populace, people. f t 1 P. wiVA 1 to mam, | % : a creature, being. wander. / . native laud; ^T: a spy. j f. fickle, unsteady; % B T j mother-country. ! <RT : son of ladra. of mind. ; : an aquatic animal. a kind of dance, the Ch&taka bird. i H cloud. invoDsidoratv vonduct. ; a waler-engiiie. artlt a di&wrk. chastit\ pui'itj' of' fieial water-reservoir. ; a pcol of water. conduct. >

GLOSSARY mwx

883

a child; a collection, with that time, living a t brood (of young ones ). that time. -3t#-/. caste. ?P| a. lean, thin. ^fleT: a rogue, villain. WPf. the sun. 3fNr with 3fj l P. to sun'ive, p. p, afflicted by heat, outlive, name of a river. f life. darkness, the world of the a wave. living; the universe. ' fickleness; agitation, 3r| wM 'BPJCJ 1 A. to endeaperturbation of the senses, vour, strive ;-f% to appear, father; a term of to pervade. endearment ( my dear ). snf?f: a kinsman; ( pi.) kins': an ascetic. folk. 1 a palm tree. Sim ( cam. of W ) with % T I A. (desid. of fifW) to say respectfully, beg t o forgive. to say, request; -iff to firPfT:-^ darkness. command, order. ' tftew a. severe, over-rigid, 3flf the bow-string. i ftw a sared or holy place; i^tfeSTKW astronomy. a worthy or fit object, a sH%fflf| a. luminous, bril) worthy recipient. liant. i holy water. a. cool, cold. ': a thin shower. a female Inrd of ^>W a musical instrument, that uanie. trumpet. ?jp: cotton, fo? I A. to approach, draw ^jpff ado. silent. 5 1 P. with W% to end the near. course, discharge the eoetents; -Sf cans, to deceive; I -Pi to grant, impart. a. river. T a. possessed of ft. contemiwrancoiis

384 frr

GLOSSARY fft / . p. ordained, made ready by initiation. a. pitiable, wretched, sad, * A. to blaze, sMae. i a light, lamp. [ a. possessed of majestic lustre. a. painful to remember, a. difficult to be propitiated, fffef sin. ^ a, impassable, impervious; ( # . ) a difficulty. wickedness, villainy. a. invisible. # a. dreadful, Invincible. a. irresistible, famine, scarcity of corn &c. fsra. difficult to be trans* gressed. Wpf?f a., wayward, unmanageable. ^ T a. austere,- hard to practise. a. difficult to be done. nt. an evil doer, a wicked person. <gsjr?f a misdeed. . wicked-minded. J J 8 U. to distance. sur pass

or martial splendour;-( * } a warrior. *f a collection of three. pj^fl: the destroyer of the three cities. iftgffr a. having, or existing in, three forms. . a Mde, skiu.

a. clever, wise. a. civil, courteous. ": stalk (of lotuses ). H with JT cam. to curb, subdue. f control, restraint. ": a young bullock that has yet to be tamed. fW a. or g. (dear, beloved, lord. ft a dale, valley. W: pride, haughtiness. ': a mirror. W: a blade of Kus'a grass. H a portion bit; small shoot; leaf. ': conflagration, a tooth, tusk. m. (pi.) wife. a. painful. ': the lord'of the daj # , sun. a. celestial, heavenly.1

GLO8SA.BY ft fSf

385

of a fault, defect, weakness. ' a lawful wife. f: a proper name, father of MMfaava. a penance-grove, j*qt queea. a tribunal, a seat of ^pj?T *.! a person, an emjustice. % ^ | m. j bodied being. 8 U.with9(^tto deceive; ?fejff%TFR ill-luck, adverse -WC to hide oneself from; -srfif to say, speak; -ff to tura of fate. treat with, make affiance f. splendour, magnificence ' ( ienom,) to strengthen. with,} to i t ( as an arrow ). . the creator. jf a material object, n. splendotir, radiaace. j 1 P. to ooze ; to fly. jjJT, a tree. steady abstraction of fl^jpnrar a. doubled, doubly mind, increased, KWffi.'f a. continuous, infewt a bird ; a Br&,lima?ta. cessant. a Br^hmana. name of a queea. I: an elephant, o. strong-minded, couan elephant, rageous, persevering. a bee. ffanr strength of mind, a division of the world. fortitude. ^t: a leader, chief. W reitfc i 1 A. to kindle. a name of Arjuna. ^, l o M ^ r S U . to wave,leave : the lord of wealth. jiuttering. Kubera. W^: a rogue. a. blessed, happy. W 1. 10 P . to support, hold B. an archer^ a bowu p ; with <H| or fPlW to deman. liver, save; to root up, pull f: duty, religious merit; up the roots,extirpate," lift propriety of conduct, up, extract, take out. decorum. a. dirty, unclean, a. religious rite. a. rearing, thundering 25

586 fftj

GLOSSARY

an ichneumon, a mungoose. wnf an asterism, a lunar mansion. PT: a mountain. ^ 1 P. to be delighted or pleased, rejoice; -arfVr to greet, receive, congratulate. *f the paradise of Indra. . name of a maidservant. a lotus-plant. 8 U. to revive, renew. with # 4 A. to be ready, a dance, dramatic representation. fTOT^i calling to mind the name, remembrance of name. fashref final beatitude, supreme happiness. fefFOTTT falsehood, telling untruths. a. cruel, heartless. (J5nWT)a toueh-stonc, test, mixing powder. a. copious, abundant. a. whole, entire, complete. PTRI a. to be told or mentioncd.

f: elmstisements punish* men!. : a tree of that name. a. one's own. f*Rnt adv. excessively. P a. excessive. the hot season,' summer. RTW the first or original cause. death. tie, connecting link, good omen ; a cause an omen. : twinkling of the eye. : a religious rite. adv. invariably, as a rule. : order, command, duty, p. p. intent on. a. unsurpassed. ftPCtar a. 1 regardless, in-' fqxfWCTTtt. J different. fi p- p. dispelled. repudiation, easting' off. an outlet. ti. worthless. : spring, waterfall, cas-', eade. fT W importunity, pressing.-' ?W : ffrafof complete sati:>faetiott' or pleasures allaying ott_ heat. -

GLOSSART

387

fe still or calm air. scandal, evil report. alleviation. f / . satisfaction, pleasure. pfWrf p- p- become, f a demon, evil spirit. T p. p. inhabited by, resorted to. steady, motionless. p. p. squeezed or pressed together. a. irremediable. : nature. p. p. given, bestowed. . cruel, ruthless. fj-IW? a. motionless. fHfSR: a sound, iloorah. sfl" 1 P. with 3T^ to eherisk, love j 37 to invest with the sacred thread; ?PTT to- bring together, join. a. dense, thick. a. blue. ^ with f cans, to divert, % entertain, amuse. ^ an anklet. ^ an effect. f; a name of Nala; king of the Nishadhas. T^f cruelty, harshness of temper. f?fpffi <?. natural, innate., inborn.

( ) the hut of a Ch&ndala. 5F: a side. ^pf^S^ a. removing impurity or dirt. S: king of the Panchuhis. : a cage. T5 . sharp. 75 zo/f/i "fft caws, to teach. W I P. tviik i f t to hover about, wheel round j -TOf to return; arrive; -Sfpff to salute, bow down. : a. moth; the sun. (/.) about to choose a husband. <PTgj a vessel of leaves folded. a proper name. a garment of woven silk, well-being, welfare; wholesome diet. 5 with ^TT cams, to kill; 5% to acknowledge; show, yield; obtain, getj admit, confess; -'37 caws, to bring about, to do. path, line of footsteps. : a snake. a TOW. a cloud. : a. paining or Siarassing the enemies.

888

GWJSSAEY

: a, cuckoo. a. of great renown, very famous. ph the highest truth. T. adv. really, a series. : valour, prowess. ITPRT P' P~ returned. TOWf! p. p. turned back, returned, #CWfter p. p. patronized, favoured. [: espousal. # a. gratifying, lamentation. a. coming In the way. : degradation, humiliation. a. humbling, degrading. : 1 retinue, train of at: J teadaats, suite, ft (ft) W!?: a water-course or drain, an outlet. a female recluse. . audience. ^ m. name of a king. p. p. overcome with. adv.. in one's abseBce. roaming, travelling. a. able, competent. regular rotation or turn, due order. : a sprout, twig.

nanie of a maidservant. W?5'fe a. having put forth, sprouts. PFf: wind. fPpl a. disgracing; J ^ a disgrace to the family. 1 # f l f : marriage IP3r a. pale, whitish. finw:-# the lower or aether regions. an object. ^ sinful. TPfW water. - hostile, inimical. a, hostile, inimical,. the Persians, side, fire. a. purifying, holy, a. yellowish; reddishbrown, tawny, fe a basket, a pot, pan. a. (tksid. of Tf) thirsty. O. slaaderoiis. back-biting, slandering. fte seat, throne. "frft?r p . p . espoused, takes hold of ( as a hand ). fNr a, fat, plump. nnr: a bull j {at the ead of

GLOSSARY

38

the Creator. compounds) the best or : love; request s supplimost eminent, cation. fff a. holy, sacred, love. ozfsfpf a. meritorious, blesa dear friend, sed. an emissary. : a naoie of Indra. a. verj' small. jf>. p- led, headed, : prowess, valour; heat. . old. a. obstinate. 4 P. to exhibit, p* p given t o : . blossomed, lowered, wedded. : Cupid; lust. excess -or superabun- yfiraKHH a. attended with dance of water, difficulties or obstacles. adv. as before. grf?Pp[ p. p. awakened. a low or vulgar j wfMt'WfJ a. eadowed with reason, rational man, an illiterate person. a. like. TO? surface; back. a. clever, skilful, / . a reply, answer, fa: a ship; a young one, as in security of position! : a youthful warrior. stability. a. descended from <-p. fftflWp. p. fixed on, attachmanliness, prowess, ed to. / . mention of name. SR?tf?Rr p. p. styled, called. / . body of ministers. : provocation. : a court in a house, a valorous deed. p. p. annihilated, a. bold. sleeplessnesSj being awake at night. ] p. p . coafidlog or believing in. a. adverse, costrarj. oci. to the west. a. fresh, newly-maie. a. hostile, opposed to, coining in the vay of. <n&fr: an obscurer, rival, ( l i t , ) throwing into the

890 SO fT

GLOSSARY

back-ground or eclipsing; repudiation. Um ready-witted. y p. p. celebrated, wellknown. giving away In marriage. sNfa: the evening. Ssjcf p. p. run away. SW?W: composition work. JiW^T: source. SfWR: power. power, authority. *f a pleasure-garden. SPHW standard. limit, an authority. STPftfJ 8 V. to regard as an. authority. ^ a. tormenting. ' p. p. pure, purified by austerities. W F marcliing onwards. I f p.p. contrived; set on ; employed, used. T: practice. T: lamentation. Xp. p. drawn, inclined. a. aged, old. current of air; windy or stormy weather: 5P1T a bed exposed to the full | current of air. ' / . commencement. ' turning out a recluse.

rectified, ted. fW:^*T adv. incidentally^, by way of. 5 p. p. pleased. T adv. perforce. progeny, issue. f a flower. : mention, allusion. f object iu view. : a kind of measure. 5rf5Tf a missile, weapon, ridicule, mocking. T adv. to the east of. SFPK; a rampart. 5T5RR a. foremost, first. Sffg-TO" a. with one's face turned to the east, in the eastern direction. STPOTTR: suspending the breath. STRPIRT: the morning" meal, breakfast. 5TRT: the end. margin. STRWiR a. delivered of a child. desire, love-suit. W f. the rainv season. : a judge, umpire. . dear, beloved, p. p . sent : dismissed. p.jD. set on fire, blazing. ) IT: a tuoukev.

GLOSSARY

sir ;-?!T gentle lady ; (a) auspicious. pcT:-ofF a hood. support, malatenanec. f/Z result. ! T?fw; the best or most emiB31f% a. fruitful, bearing nent of the Bharatas. fruit in season. R*;!?|f\!CT a princess (daughter of the lord. ). 1: birth; S'iva. a house, dwelling. a crane. ^aT being destined to a youth, chap, fellow, happen, destiny, fate, a captive, prisoner. WPPW lot, fortune. 'efSF: a bastard, au attendant prosperity, good days, in the chamber of a harlot, a receptacle, reservoir. 5J army, forces. W =: feeling or expression of Tf f?7: worship. love ; incident, oceurrcaee ; a learned man, honourable : an ox, a bull. Sir. ; a relation, kinsman. a.ors. a foolish person. WT witli 3PT 1 A. to abuse, i an image. revile. PTFPTFf pres. p. shrinking T n. shining, resplendent. from, being disgusted with, T a, shining ; {s.) the fsrsfrfw*? a. emplojing the sun. reason, rational. ^ living by begging. ; a Brahmanicai sage. o,. dreadful, terrible. : a. snake, world. ii. devoted, loyally j with!% cam. to think of, attached. \ contemplate ; to establish, f^TRfiT a. foiled in attempts, i decide; perceive, be condefeated. . i scious of; -7f to be born. ai [ 1 U. to entertain, chc- | pf a created being. v JcrsTTfcft earth, supporter sf ^ h ; pi-actise. *^: a title of address, good ; beings. m

382

GLOSSARY

a part, character (In a | m. a *'ise man, sage. drama). > fjfa%^: a Brahmana > | : j Cupid, W: ado. again, j | with 3JT 10 A, to take 3 adv. for the most part, j leave of, bid adieu, > |: a proper name, father j W a. composiBg hymns. 'of Malati. ' ^ a. attended with inim begging. . j cantations or sueils. Wfl: enjoyment I a. slow. f: loss _ I a. dull, dui-witte-J ffc. turning, revolving. ! a. unlucky, ill-starred. ?PWFf a, lagging behind, auspiciousness; an austarrying, picious rite, (in compounds) p. p, slackejitiu. auspicious ; as, ifF5>^p: ausf a depresses in picious trumpet; ipf55ffTf spirits, cast down, auspicious ablution. : Capid. w a. sweet. : grief, sorrow. : a kind of creeper. . pepper, pepper-shrub. ornament, decoration; : ray, embellishment. ^: a mortal, human beiag. ^ f t ^ cans, to infatuate. sandal juice. R: passion, ardent desire; : the mob, populace. rutting juice, a. of great spleadour pr a. being in rut. or heroism. . liquor. : the spring-time, : a fortuaate person* a. lovely, sweet. f a, costly, f Krishna (slayer of f: a king. Madhu ). : the great ladra. : a great ted. a. acting as umpire, : a ful-grown bull. a. intelligent, strong/ . a medicinal "clM#!, ;-ft a wise woman.

GtOSSAEY

898

i # l ft daughter of the king of the Sfagadbas, Sudakshina. n?f: a term of- endearment, sfff: pride, a proud woman, human nature, wind. a gardeuer, florist, a wreath, garland, fipsf a.an honorific affix, meaning worthy, respectable. f a pearl, artless, innocent, *rer with 3R 1 A. to second, approve. iJST seal. JRift: Vishnu. Jpf^ I P. to take effect on, prevail agaiast; to grow stronger or more intense, gather strength,. thicken. pf# a pestle. adv. often. a. Incarnate, embodied, "hair. CTf^f mirage, a lotus fibre. ^ a lotus. "T? / . clay. 15 a, soft-minded, weak. I f 10 P. to endure, suffer, ^ff adv. wrongly, in vain, a /alschood. a girdle, belt.

: a proper name, talent, retentive faculty. a, sacred, holy. ! ffRtU: son of MaitMlt. Kus'a. : release, a, or s, one brought up in one's service for generations, aa old or hereditary servant ( minister &c.), * a man of an outcast . race; a barbarian,

sacrifice. cloing worthless things. WWn a. sigoiicaat, true to its sense. WTW?T adv. according to the proper method, property, duly. J^gnjt adv. accidentally, by chance. 1W with f 1 P. to dissuade; % cam* to regulate, control. TO a. twin. / . a neckla.ee. carland. wiih ^T cam. to trouble. Wfwi& 5f 2 P . to march on, set out. mean soMcitatioQ. T: an evE spirit, a E

894

GLOSSARY

a. accidental. JJTR*f adv. in all senses. SRf 7 U. to design, intend, destine ;-pf cans, to yoke, harness; to unite; - T (A. ) S to act, represent ( dramatically ); -flST pas*, to be engaged in, apply oneself to, a business. m t fight. ^jfTOW: an hcir-apparcnt to a throne. ifp(: the science or power of concentrating the niind; deep eontemplation. a distance of 8 miles, f source, origin. *

f }?. speed, velocity, an evil spirit. M with 5fT pass, to grow discontented with. TWTF the front or van of battle; Tt 11 to lead the van. "TfR> anxiety. ffeOT the art or science of war. tlte ocean, a cavity. 1 ? with Tfr 1 A. to clasp, embrace. H: current, force.

: the rem. 1 P. to roar, sentiment. (*> more savoury or tasteful. T9^ the nether regions. an elixir. ": the mango tree. a. graceful, elegaat; appreciating. %%4 a secret; the secret (of conduct); ife disclosing or revealing one's secrets. name of the minister of the Nandas. F: passion. ffl-. governed by a good, or just king. : a royal sage. the science or theory of government. lft^Tl" a Rakshasa female, | with 3 T cans, to please, T humour. : name of a mountain, f / . pain, agony, blood. a. sickly, affected by sickness. a. passionate, wrathful. angiV or passionate temper. a. made of the hide of the deer called ruru.

GLOSSAEY

395

T n. a speck, spot. er. ': beauty, lustre. 'sylvan deity, wood( denom.) to alleviate, nyntlph. lessen. a tree, wild. F witfiJt 1 P. to prate, ..ave. T with T^X 1 P. to otterW with OTF 1 A. t o taunt, i blame. j present. m. a sower. rafif or WT n. an ornament, j * ?#RF! the foster-sister of WF iife 3W 1 P. to pour or Maiati. vomit out, emit. J^uftWWTO.the ocean j[having ] W . a crow, bird in general. salt water). ! R; a. best, foremost ;(T:) 5V%a mortification, liumilia- i a bride-groom. tion. I a. poor, pitiable, characteristic mark ; f a. better, superior, distinguished by one ^belonging to a the name Jsftf5. group ; ( pi.) a group of' 55^ with fw 6 P . to implant. actors. sfWrT n. a writing, docu- W : a caste. W ment. | m. a bachelor (learned). rT with S cams, to entice, f a bark garment. seduce; with W caus, to sea leap, bound. duce or entice the mind of. :-sp an' ant-Mil. Jtsj>st the tree of t h a t name a. favourite, beloved; or its flowex. (i*T) wife. ?T: subjection. a. eager; eagerly lolling down. j a. ( a sage ) who has subdued his passions. a docile and obedient wife. a descendant. ^ with m^l I P. to inhabit;. : a calf. enter into. a heifer.

place of execution, the Madhavi creep-

SIQSSAKY

residence, R8RFt?lW. the vernal festival, ff^cam to traverse, go over; -PlR cam. to perform, manage. blame, censure. m. a horse. T: a report, talk. fl. of aa opposite character. i fPRf: a crow, elephant. / . a harlot. Benares. T: a cloud. fff a water-wheel, ( a flywheel for raising water }. welfare, well-being. old age. wf the inner part of a house; bed-chamber. ftf>ff?r p. pexpanded, dilated; spread out. malady, illness, f: a temptation, seduction. prowess, heroism. a. frightened, startled; grieved. a. bad, worthless, j : hostility, enmity, strife; a body, form. r: impediment, obstacle.

a. learned, proficient, skilful. fepn ( aad 3fliT ) a kind of mantra, which averted the pain of thirst and hunger and gave mkaeuloas powers, f%fsr|f a. crooked, turned', away, f a request, a branch. 10 P. to imitate. a. false, untrue, P- p- descended; givea, skill. : a foreign country. . a cloud. I iftff m. an enemy. fsflSTnj m. the Creator. fwWrf p. p. preserved. fiftPT: a servant, f%hlF a. who knows hitduty, obedient, feRR: a country to the North-West of Delhi. exchaBge. an enemy. a. wise, learned {' wise man). a forest. JJ. p. deceived. / adverseiiess. property, wealth, night\

GU>S8ARY

897

fapj: a lord. T: confusion, loss. a. disconsolate, dejected. p, p, dishonoured, f: a wrong road. p. p. separated, lovelorn. f*C??f P' p. stopped, at aE end. fsRFf: discontent, dissatisfaction. f%UW: cessation, stop. fwim: a antagonism; TO1?!0 natural antipathy. I: amorous pastime. opened. R discrimination, Judgment. fef with amrfH 6 A. to eater into ; with # to sleep. / . purity. f: difference; distinguishing feature, ftws^ adv. ' confidently, freely. f^^^: eonidenee ; FTFf confidant. ?: rest, repose, the earth. power to inspire confidence. p. p. dejeeted, sorry. ' a. adverse, difficult.

': scope, province ; dominion,' - object of sense, sensual pleasure a horn. ; dismay, dejecticsn,. sorrow. !: a seat. a heap, a large quantity. 1R1W p. p- dismissed, seataway. TOJW p . p. extended over, wide. fCTJffW p. p. extended. dilated. a decree, command. a. agitated, afflicted,, overcome with grief; fT affliction. #51 1 P . to fan. # ^ : the mother of a warrior, f 10 P. to ask, beg of, a r ^ R : Bhima. ^ 10 P. to except ;8|T to bead dowa;-f% (jjP.) devoid or destitute of. a with ftx caus. to i n i s h ; W^[ -TpC to revolve ;-Sf- to spriag, arise j to begin, commence ; -aspf to turn back. a[fff / . livelihood; behaviour,. conduct. Wfe/. waxing. JW cam. to aggrandize.

398

GLOSSARY sro

V: a S'udra; epithet of Chandragupta. W F> W f : the bull-bannered God, S'iva. ^ f e / . a shower of rain, rain-fail. itf: speed, force. %ITPT?5': a strong or violent gust, a bamboo-stick. f: a reed, eaiie. f, an altar. in. the Creator. a harlot, ;r , a house, dwelling. a turban, a tiara. an ill-omen. ' a. sacrificial", sacred. a. sacred, holy, consecrated in a sacrifice. ?: a bard. ; Sita. V. the fire of lightning. Jf m. an enemy. i a. situated in the air, j aerial. / . manifestation, tf adv. evidently. sing engrossed in. a fan, C an incident, occurrence. I^tT. family ; name ; race.

: spending, expenditure-.. obstacle; loss. sorrow, anguish. : hearing of a ease, judicial procedure, tribunal of ju-.tiee. p. p. separated. f adversity, need, difllculty ; intent or close appj-eatioa. qT|py a. deeply or intent] / engaged in. ^M: a hunter, fowler. fT^: a serpent, cruel <> - wicked animal. , speech course of conduct. a. abashed, overcoin>with shame.

a bit. a miraculous weapo.or missile hurled at a foe. P: a name of Indra >: a dart, shaft. ^ wife of Indra. 1 U. to abuse, revile. : one of a wild mountaineer tribe. : a title. r 4 P. to hear s find .

GLOSSARY SPf (caus.) to subdue, vanquish ; - T caus. to settle, S adjust. m. a destroyer. r m. name of Eartikeya. fTof a house, dwelling. KWPTR! p. p. come for protection, a refugee. , a year, a target, mark, butt. a bow. T m. a bodied being. | n. happiness. night. f a dart. ": a hare. ?f fldo. forever, perpetually. RrT*??! "* a t t a r n 3 e < i nian, warrior. WT: monkey. p'P- alleviated, removed. / . removal, destruction, cxpiatioB, ^3^J soothing water. : a Mud of rice. 'T a. endowed. : a youEgling. . permanent, everlasting. zoitA 3PT 2 P. to advise, prevail upon. an order, command.

390.

instruction, advice, flame, fefef m. a peacock. (denom.) to allow to cool. : neck. : a slab of stone. : a mountain j a collection of stones. art, skill, f good, blessing. with fw caus. to excel, surpass, : an oyster shell. / grief, sorrow. : royal harem or seraglio ; inmates of the Iiareni, i.e., queen or queens. ^FSRfffPT a. of good augury, presaging- good. 5f*r<f ( desid. of sr ) to sen'e. ^WH m. S'iva. . a goad. ?5: a mountain. moss. a, red. blood. elegance, grace, : Vishnu, lord of S'rf. ^ |>. p. well-known, reputed. . ear. . bliss, good fortune.

400

GLOSSARY

': a thought. good; ( o.) better, more praise-worthy. ': the mind-born, *ffecjF m. a merchant. j Cupid. ftf%: a learned Brahmawa. a. full of, crowded witit, : a beast of prey, wild contraction of the beast, limbs. a. white. #tf: attachment. ifW: a multitude, a. startled. *Rf: a group, collection,, a, ready. clump. Nr with sr 1 P. to be attacked to ;-3q"fgr to Jink. m NftffWw / the reviving f drawing in, holding In. plant. union. ;: a good banneret. : turbulent spirit, virtue, goodness; hosif?!?: ideality. pitality. ifeRW p. p. shared, parf a being, creature. taken. 1^ 1 P . to sink, drop;^WWfR: mercantile business, with f to be dejected; % traffic. - ^ to sink, fall into, #*pr: a resort, ruin. Wwi: coatact, associatioa. RW; aa assistant at m : worldly existence. sacriiee. p, p. strewn, RTl?r/.> flFWFf: issue, pR>> establishment. f geayf offspring. p* p- dead; finished. ffi& p. p. ordered, com: the dissolution of the missioned. world. T fitting, taking aim. ^S a. entire, unimpaired. ': a joint. a. satisfied, having the ': proximity, vicinity* desires fulfilled. a collection. p. p.continued, begoa. ": aa enemy, : mixture #f castes. a rival wifes co-wife.

GLOSSAKY fill? a. fruitful i P . to pay respects to. 3, In the presence of, beforefight; war state, T: a collection, combinationfPfffw: concencratioa of mind lifWfe J, accident, cnaace. 5fWf: betaking, resorting to, ? # ? & / . fight. ft?I]f?| a. fed with sacrificial fuel adv. near. f: a collection. a. over-eager, Impetuous. fPKCfij / . elevation. TO? p. p. increased!. iT|fe /, prosperity, affluence. / . excellence of virtues, p. p. endowed or furnished with; prepared made of; become, gmmu. Jwftpffff/. admission, confession. Tr: a tie. ' m. a kinsmaEj relation. ' p. p, collected, gathered. f w l : enjoyment, TOW: ftar. confusion.. infatuation. m. & paramount sovereign, f / mode, way, a lotas. adv. angrily, creation. , altogether, entirely, all-subduer, . smeared to the whole body, water. odw. with or prottuciog a sound. I f f corn. lf^ Kft ^ ' 1 A. to dare, venture, a mango tree, a, natural, the sun ( having j 1,000 rays ). : a companion, friend. a co-uterine brother evidence depositioa. ^R: leanness, s nking down. 1KW likeness, Image, OT^f with JT catia. to promote. further, advance. W W an army. W 1 F W fear,, timidity, 5fP| .. summit. .4 a mountain, a. loyal, attached. a, proper, right.

402

GI.05SAKY

WK" strength, power.* akindofbird(ffT3p>f). f: a collection, group, f: a leader of a caravan, a. with an attentive mind. a, bold, audacious, p t literary composition, fef a. white. fm with fa 1. P. to forbid, prevent. |: a demi-goti. the ocean. f: a name of Jauaka. a. agreeable, pleasant. n name of a sage. W nectar; "ftf^J a. dropping honey,- mellifluous. adv. charmingly. a name of Duryodhana. ^ f g ^ m. an enemy of the oods. |fe5Be* a. well-arranged, nicely laid, well-fitted. pfspfe 'separation of friends; name of the 2nd part, -of Hitopades'a. good words. : a earpciitcr. 1.3: P. icilh Tf to ap proaeh, draw near. l tt'dk f vuus. to % dismiss.

%?j: a bridge, W% a. of the lion. flt with 3?T^ 4 P. to attempt; think of. ^ff^jf:' a eo-uterine brother, | brother of whole blood. I ^ft^F? goodness or kindness of disposition. lightning. T a. marring the beauty. friendship. ': a divisioa of an array, cfpftf the rumbling of clouds, thundering noise. cTWfiftsTT forming clumps or sheaves. W woman-kind, female sex, W n. land-route, land. with 3fT to resort to> ': a name of S'iva. a. lasting, a. firm, stable. fF4f?r / . stability, permanence; propriety. fWK a. firm. f ^ t t ? 1 8 U. to cheer up, console. V$4 stability. ';TT?T^: an initiated (Br&hm&ne. ) house-holder. ^ abathiag cloth.

GLOSSARY

408

p.p. friendly, affectionate,, iisfrefSTfe a. looking intently or with a steadfast gaze. : a crystal stone. a. clearly, visible, distinctly seen, f*PT: arrogance, pride. xjp| /IA srftr 1 U. to ooze, to be melted. f a river. #^" <fc. at will, as one likes. 1 A. to like. a. naifcural. a. safe, sound. . at one's command or disposal, ease, tranquillity. arff. at will, to one's heart's content.

; fft: Indra. ^Pc^sfr^jf a sort of yellow : sandal. . fawn-eyed, an oblation. 1 P. to clear up. br.ijfhteu Up. a kind of pigeon, name of a warrior. : a well-wisher, an adviser. . or s. a well-wisher. f|Wsnow, ice. the cold-rayed moon. %JTRF: j | | m. the Himalaya mountain. |pf>R: the 'hum* sound, f with mm 1 P. to eat; OT to pluck up by the roots, extirpate; pTT to draw or take out; -4 to drop; curtail, shorten; to withhold ; curb, restrain '-sqj to speak. ||^%5T: name of Krishna. . wretched. ff a.1///; 3T? 2 P. to destroy, |rf?cf a. cold, wintry. annihilate :-5r{ff to repel, fjf a. caused by *now. ^%: a deep poo! of water. counteract.

GLOSSARY

Engli t i t - S a n s k i l l Ancestral a. ; property

Ablest a. ^2OT, HHP?. j Aaeieat a. Absence, in one's TCW, Wlf- { JCRR. Aasjrer v. t. Slfe ^ 2 P.~ Absent-minded a. 1 A; 3WT Sfef^ 4 A, Anxious a, 8nfj}5?, Accidentally ado. Appearance , Accomplishment *. l i f e / . Application , #IKH. Approach s. wflwHf / . , H * Accord, of one f% Acquaint . I. 3J5[ eaus., IT Appropriate, v. U 8. U. Acquainted a. If in comp. Approve v. I P. Ardent a. T Adapt oneself to the wiB of Assiduity s. ^ 6 P. # t Assist v. L fffaf fr 8 U. or 1 A. ?T 8 U. Advantage s. f^f, Association s. ^W& / . , lf:. Adventure i Astonishing a. Affairs of state Affected a. Attacluneut s. Afflicted a, to b e ; fmf. Attendants. fpf8Pf: Attended a. iff^W, ^Rf, Agony s. All but adv. expressed by Attract j . i, | 1 P. IP. tE comp.:agreed Auspicious o.

GtOBSABY Ava Avarice s. Averse a. Awaken p. t. fffiri|^ COM*. B. Baffle v. t. tMm 8 U ; frftlA. Banner s. I f l , Bard s. ^wfe:; wf^f m. Base a. 8PPT, ^[5". Basin . Jtftft, TOfif:. Become w. I. 3fyT-3TO a. | l P . f | U , { geu.) Befall v. t amq[ 1 P. 1 P. ( with gen.) Beginniag s. *JW; from the Con Cast off v. t. fTOf 8 U. Cause s. <RfT:. Censurable . if^iW, PW. Certain a. W, P Certainly adv. Chance of failure . Change ( for the better ) s.

undergo apPRfl' m 2 P. Charming a. ipWi T*V. Circuitous, a. ^ p , Citadel #. gf:. Class s. ^if Clear v. L St-M7 10 P. 2 P. Clever a TfiP..v _ Beholder #. ^ m. Close v. t. ftw, 8 U. Bent a. f^ffrf^r, ^ r a ^ T Colour *. arrsr double mith age ^ H p f 9 ^ ^ " . Commendable a. Bid farewell t>. WT^ 10 A. Cooimit v. t. ^ T - ^ I P. f ^TSf^S 6 A. 8 U. Bit s. MW>. Communicate v. t. Boast v. 5^TW-fn>^ 1 A, cam. Break open v. t, Company s. 8U. Completely oA>.f%:#f; t Brought up Compose v. t. fJRfWF catts.t cans. C Concerning a. [ Cake s. Conscious a. a#W ST-ft^ in Care, with eomp. Carnivorous o. Constitute r. f. V 1. P . 2 P.

406 Con Consultation, in-with mv?( ( instr.) Contending s. Contracted a. i Conversant a. Cost s. OT:, Countryman s.

GLOSSARY Dis , I Demand t.i. Desist v.i. , ; Desolate v.t. 8 P. l P. 8 \J_

Despair v.i. Detail *. Deterred a. De%'ise v. t, f ^ 10 P. % cans. 5P3[ caw*. Devolve p. I. *PPT caws. Court &. ; y 6 P. Devoted ( t o ) a. Covered over a, 3fP3W, Devotion *. "*ffiRT / . Cross v. t. sippj 1 U. Crowned, to be-with success Devout a Dictionary s ml P. | Difficult a. | Crumb . * J Difficulty s. mm[ f., Culprit ,1. T with greatw, Current s. 73:, Dignity * D Diligently Direct v. t. Directed .. Directly adv. Discharged a Discrimination ,v Disguised as. % Disgust *. Disgusted a. I Disloyal, to be I Dismissed a. i caws

Banger s. W^J, 3fW?/., Dear a. O R , Deed s. Beep a. Defaulter s.sfe^:, arnrf^PT m. Defeated in one's attempts. a. sprftetf, SftWTOT. Definite. f f w , ft% in eomp. Delay s. without Delighted a. Delightful a, Deliverer s. W

GLOSSARY Dis Dispelled a. Disrespect v. t. SfWT-A. A. Disrespectfully adv. ?TM f. Distinguished a. ..uest Distressed a. Disturbed a. Divide . L {%-^W 1 P. Divine a tw ( * / . ) fa Doomed by fate a. Draw near v. i. SR*THT^ 1 P. Dreadful a, W ? , Dreariness*. Dreary a. Dressed o, Dried up a. < f Due a. ~%H. Dull a, J F ^ Duty s. ml, E Early in the morning Fal

40?

Emperor s. m.. W R wi. Enjploy r. t. JT-ira" 7 A. Employments. cans., 'S Ejtehant v. I. 1. P. Engaging . Engrossed a. Enraged a. Entreaty s. Enry s. Epithet s. Escape v. t. 1. P. 1. 4. P . Excellent a. Excessi%'cly Execute v. t. 1. P.

Earnestly adv. I hopeffir Ease, at, PfWcT, Eatable s. Ktonomically Education s. , Extraordinary a. 3RV Effect .l.m^cavs.,m*{5. F. Elapse c. *? arfcH; 2 P . ^f?PF.*T 1. 4. P. Klders A-. JT^iPT:. nx- pi. Fail p. t. 1 P.

Exertion . Exhausted a, , fen. Expectant a Expedient s. Expose u. t. qiw fr. 8 U. J f t l P or W 1 P. Extend, how Extensive a. Extent,, to any y,

40S
FM

GLOSSARY Hid Fulfilled a. W , ^pT. Fully ode. WOTW:! IRlfeRT. Furnished a. WRf. G

Failed in attempts *TiftSPr, Faithlessness *. SRIOTOTWT, Fall ia with 3|Rf3[ cans. ??T 1 P.outHT5[ 4 A.;upon. wmq i P. mofe l P.;a victim arrfSfSRlt *PT 1 P., tRSTWPT W 1 P . Famine *. f%Sf. Fathers s. CPPC: fPfPf3f.. Favourite a. WF5JW, fSRT. Fawn (Flatter) upon v. ! n3nT: anrrf caws, or

Gentle a. W^, OT^. Gently adv. JP? ^ ^ . Get abroad v. i, Sl^[ 1 P., SRRlt 1 ^ I P , Give over tf-SR cans, (srfir). Glory s. TOU n. ^TfTW. Go home ( t o ) v. t. FR^ 8 P. ipfffff ?qn^. Gratitude s. W?i^f^i, W^W^T. Graze r. f. f?MR 1 P . Guard s. Tf^f f, ^OT>:. Feature s, WW^i. Feed { with food ) v. i. V3T Guardian of the world s. COttS, Feign . ^T-fe^ 6 P. H Fickle a. WT^,!WIW, Field . a ^ . Hail-stonc ff. wfey:, ^ W * Fierce a. 3W, ^WW. Hastily adv. 1T*I; SWT. Fiery-tempered a. "PltpT, s^W- Haughty a. ^jfew, aprfe^T. Haunted a. ppcfw, IWrf^CT. Fine #. ? T : ; -a. 5f|^Wr ^W. Hearing of a case a. sprgRFinish t. t. 3TT->Jt 4 P., iPflW Cffit, Heart-rending a. ^PQT'H'tffy Fix (love. ) r. I. t% 9 P. Follower *, ^ ^ ^ ' ; , 3fiT^Ti%W tn. Heat . WOT:, ^wf. Fowler *. s^TSf;. Heir-apparent *. W^W Freed, to be, ^ ^ pass. Helpless a, ^FfTW, WIXW! orT Fret ( oneself) v. ffw? pass. Hesitate v. 3fT-OT 1 A. ^ ^ pass. Hide v.L ^ 1 U.?$T-S< 10U. Fuel 8, ?W*f. U.

GI-OSSABY Hig High a, ( words ) ?TTO!T, High-mettled a. Hold v.t. H 4 A. W Honesty s. Honeyed %. Ins 3fpffsn?f: Importune v. t. 3fW-#| 9 P .

Impose upon w^[ 10 P. I A. Impossible e. Improve v, L 1 p . H?pr i P. Improvement. Honour P. I. *f-W COM*. Inanimate a. c-. Inauspicious a. Honourably adv. Wlt^M, Jrf?T- Inborn a. #af%s House-holder . Incarnate a. ^ # , %ff^, TO. Incur displeasure House-hold duties s. rnt T I P . Independence Housewife a. Indian a, Huge a. Indicate c. I. Hum our . co*. caws. Hung a. I different a. tfcW, 111 c Illness *, Image s. , Imagination Ht / . Immediately adv. Immodesty Immoral a, com*). Immortal c. Impending, to Ije 1 W 1 P. l! portant a. m Indigo-pot s. Industry Inflicting punishment Influence s. Inform v. t, in Innumerable a. S Inquiry . Insignificant a. ^ , Inspire ( with confidence ) ft 1 P.

closely

410 las Insult*. Intent s. <R conip. Intimate a.

GLOSSARY Mor Loss, at ato do in I,ore-lorn a. Lovely a. , ^ ; ( garden &c.)TTLower region a. Loyal attachment to throne M Majesty (His ) (Her") ttfr. Manifold a. Market s. Mass s. WF$, Master completely v. t. v(ti' W or 5 1 P. TT Matter $. W%:. Mention, not toexpressed bv ^T ^rafT-TpJFff with loc., Merchant *. ^1 Merge iuto v. 6 P. Merit'*. W : , 3Iisdeed. s. 71 Misfortune s. Mistress *. Misunderstand v. t. 9 P. .v. or lost Modern a. ; Moralitv s. 3ifP|pR.

Jaw s. K Keep eontented i>. f. cants. Kept. a.

Lady ( voc. ) Laid down a. SfflW. Lamb s Lavish o. | Leave v. t. ftfm 6 P. N 8 U. Liberal a. Library s. Lie *. Liked a. limited a. Livelihood s. Look to f. wr s u . I^ook intently v, t. qT i P. Lose cTW 1 P. | cans. oners life t

GIXJSS.VKY Mor Mortal s. W%;; a. <X^^K, gloved to be. {to pity ) sfftr i. P. frfopu f^ i p . Multiplied, to be, <Ji^ft*j\ l . p . Pit

411

Occupation s. oJnTTT^ WWPT: Offend 5. i, an^T * P. (loc or gen. ) Old a. <sngt fwf%^, 5WTO"

Oppress o. /. WJ^ I A W # f 10 P. OrsHF 8 LT. Oration . a f t ^ l ^ ; . Naked a. 3RfT|. Narrate v. t. s p | 10 P. 3 Overcome . 1, W^fti? 8 I.' >> A. ?Rf nt 1 P. Narrow-minded a. fBfOftrfw. Overtake c. t. an-^? cat Naturally adv. SRRflfitaf > *& Owner *. l^fipf m. ^fWffff: P* " Painter s. pspT^TC, 3n%^n>: NVxt to impossible 3f Palfrey s. ^ff%f TO.. ^T:. Noble a. jg^tr.; birth 3ffW- Particular s. ftRtc 5fff:; g& gpir. Isass v. t. TT caus., sft 1 P Nocturnal a. <t?r. Sfff M-7 Srfe CM. .J A Noise s. fr^^":. Past a, aftfiicf, IRT. Notice o. L ?W 10 P. Patience *. ^f^fBTTj ^fef^raw*. Pay off . f. ^W crt-tis. f^^ wilt. Number *. fsnpT:, OT": Nviiiph s. sp^rw y,, ^ ^1 I Peevish a. iTOjT, ^:^55". B Perforce adc. W^T^, ^^f. o Perilous time *. sflf^RTObedience *. WITW Perplexing a., ^i^f^fft^. 3WfwfW, sjRTFT^W:. (>bev i\ i. 3PT^ 4 A. 5fTO Perturbed a. !Plf^57 ^nf^WSf I P. Philosopher s. 5tff%? w Object ( sole ) of love : Picture s. WT%fi, f ^%" Observe t. t. pTfT 10 P, Pious a. JosfTPfT, WW^te. i Pitchy aT a p q - , " ^ ^ . w f e ^ io p . Pitiable a. flW, W^N".

412 Pfa Plain s. Plaintiff s. 3 # R m.

6MJ3SABY Bea Prompt a. '331, WWt, ?W. Proper a. ^ Properly adv.

. Plaintive a. tr^jof ; cry 3JT<f-

Proudly adv. Pleasant a, p Pleasure-mouutain Provided . Provoke revolt , Pollution a. t?#f?:. ?W cans. Position s, 3pff% ffifff / , Pull down r. 1 fff-W caw,, Possession *. faff, 3R1? cans. Possible, as far as Purifications, 5ffe/.i Pouring down o. Purifying a. TPFf. Practice . Put up with if^ i A . Precinct s, ^ 1 A. Frceipitatc . 1TOT. Preferable a, Q Preparation Presence s. Qualified . Present . feff^; to be Quarrel v. i. fw-T^ 1 A. J*resldent s. zretm.. Prey upon 1*,7 10 P. Prime a. W^ in comp. Principle .?. l*risoner *. / Proceed p. i. 5^-v 1 P. 4 A, with H | 2 U. cau8. Plroceeding from a R Bag s. ^ T J tattered, dressed ia

Bainy season *. STTff / . , (pi.) Rash fl.

Rashness s. Rather adv. ^ ft-ofess to be one's daughter Rave . i. $r-557 1 P. Beach the ears, -Froftclent a, 2 P..f5jfOTiT Wl^ 1 P. Beady a. ^

GLOSSABIf Ee Ready-witted a. Sad Resplendent a.

Real a. snfaw, adv. <TCRT*f?T: j Restrain! ag s. ffff|[:, #p?:. Realized a. SPJW??, SRfift>fW. | Result v. L FPRft * P. Receive v. t. SRi^ "*PJ^RT 1 P. j Return ( t o the subject of Recourse, to laveto ipftf? j discussion )S^W^WIFWT8U. 8 u . mm 1 u . | or w^r I P . Recover v. I. MT-S%-*f^ 4 A, j Revenge, to taketffe|%ffReduee to ashes v. I. 1F>ftfi, WtmH f> 8. U. 10 A. Revile v. t. f 8 U. BTRW 1 A. Heed s. ! Rider s. Regard #. , OTWT. m. I Ring s. 3f _ Region s. ? j Rise against r. T Reign, in theof 4 P. I (ace.) I Risk r. t; Relation -s. cam. 1 P. I l o a m p. *. Relent i>. i. 1 P. 1 P. I P. Religious a. Wf J action Rouge . 3fTOT:. *pffcn. Rout v, t. 1 % can*. Reluctantly odr. spppief:, Ruin v. t, SRT C<MW. *. Remedy s. Sff (t) *tKt, Run a risk'sSRnt1 VtTmfxf f. Remove r. I, 3Wft, W$f[ 1 P. Rush upon v. 1 P. Ilenowaed a. fWW, srf*RT. or 3ffsp| 1 UKepeating .<?. 5^K0f, 3^Rof. Ruthlessly adv. Or^t. Reported, to beexpressed. by ffe qjq%, ff Sacred-ceremony ?. 1 or i l l f%<5Rrft JJ#. learning Respect s. ffW:; ( r . ) cam. ^ 10 P. Respectfully adv. Sacrifieial a. Sadfl.

414 Saf

GLOSS A B " Y Sub

Single combat s. Safely adv. Sandhya adoration s. Sinner s. TTTf^ m., ' TORI. Sister's husband s. Save v.l. '.IE 1 P . W I A. Saying s. s-fPftf / . . 'Sf^t. ! Slaughter-house s. Scene s. FfFT, fOTf?<| n. Schem<-' s. ^W-. ; Sleepless a. Scorching a. # f , few, SfWT. Scriptural point *. lTClf%W;. Slight f. . spfftT 10 P. ! m 4 A. Season s. Secret s. i Snore v. i. W T W f 8 D WC | Solitary a. Mwm, Secure v. 1 SR caus. ! .SouudJy eefc. ?Tlt, Self-respect, s. i Sovereignty *. Sell v. t. fk-fy 9 A. Spectator s. S'OTJ: 2 ^ /. Senseless , fe^ Speed A. pf:. * Senses . Spend see Pass. Sensibly arfc Serene a. Splendid a. Set ( niiufl) . f. caus* gw o P. faOrer <.. I Spoil . I. n#5?ftf 8 U. Severely I Sprout *. ^ r ^ : , ft j Spy s. *R:. Sharp . I Stick s, q f e /., Shepherd .v. | Still a. Pff^?^, 3T5. Ship s. "flW:. i Stop t-. t. wfe-flW 1 P. Shoot tlirough v. Storm v. t. Sfg1^? I P . Shoulder s. FW . H String i!. t. rf Shy ( a t ) f^m I a. f 8 U. 1 A. I'P. 'f i Stroke A . * , Side s. i Strong-minded a, $tK. Sight *. i , Student, s. 3fs9w m. Sign * \ Subject a. 3T*CN", *. Silken . > Submit v. i. I f 1 A Silver a. in conip.

GLOSSARY Sui Suitable a. , Tut

415

Sullied with disgrace a. 3pRftSully v. t. n f e # 8 V. f f cans. (fwHf). Superior, to be, ^feff^-l%flw pass. Supplied a. <W. Support ( oneself) v. jt% f> 8. T. # f e f f 10 P. ' Surmount v. t. -35HJ 1 PSurpass v. t srf?Hift 2 A,,

Survive P. t. 3ffe-3|rf-^Wl P. Suspicion s. 3fRffT. Sustain v. t. tf 10 P. '^wm 1 A. Swarm v. i. fa 6 P. ^'SRT: ?rq?r i P. j Treat v. t. sf<ff~m*FC 1 F. Swear w. 5f? I L*. c Sweep away y. L 3pT-ff. ] Wf 1 A. { with loc. ); with i wm 3 U. caws. I Tributary prince Syllable s. ! Tribute s. ^T: j Trilling a. !JJB\ ! Troop s. t^JK Taking Jood -v. j Trouble *, \ Troublesome a. Tall a. ^*T, \ Tamely adv. i Truthfulness s. Tarry u,. f^TW!5r ( denom. }, Turn 4'. tp#r:, fT Tutelary deity *. %J5 1 A.

Taunt s. Temple s. Temporary a, 3ff%n, Temptation s. Theory s. sfFPI";, Think of ^% ff 8 U. { with . dat. ) This and the like a. l ^ n f ? . Thought 8. t^^:, f^RTT. Threshold #. %ft. Through prejj. raH in eomp. Tiirown down a", Tidings s, ^<^ Tired a. fOTxf, Tortoise . fijf Touchstone *. Transformed, to be q-fTtro 1 I!., W# s m K 4 A. Treadiag in the footsteps

416 Umb

GLOSSARY Zea

U w Umbrella a. 3fRITf. Wait v. JTfeP U S io P. S%Uncommon u. <TOTWfTof> fj^ 1 A ;-upon v 1 U. Undertaken a. spsjifa, spftfKf. Walking *. WZW, f? Undertaking s, 3TFtW:. Want s. 5T Uneading a. Sfrpxf, 5FRH", Wantiag, to be ffr fr pos$ Warlike a. ; deeds. Unfathomable c. g^lWff^fff^ TOW:, Unfortunate a. W f F f , Warning a Uninterruptedly adv. pfPP"f. Wicked a. f U c ^ , ? United, to be ?pp$ 1 A. H'^pf Wild a. W?1", TO. pass. WiE . f c against Unparalleled a, si^TT, apiftw. one'sf? eftPr, ?rw; a t f i t V % Win over # 1 P., Value v. t. f | W^ 4 A. Wg 9 P. Vaaquisli . 1. iW fjr 1 P. Wolf #; ^ Jffsf f R , PfWI 3 U, Wonder t. ^R^f; it is ao f Vary v. i. ft{\ pass., varies as the nature of the work. Wonted a. fT|5r, Wood-cutter s aunter *, ff^c ^TOfT^ TO. Work, cease to, ^ fspf m. Verdant a. f f e , 1 P. Vernal season*. Working s. ssfWTC, World, my all the ! or expressed by Worthy a. Vie a. * FT^ 1 A; qH 10 F. Wretched a. f Z ; man TO"Violently adv. Virtue s. Virtuous a.

Zeal s.

INDEX Thefiguresrefer to the section { ,'and not to the page. 88 an 83 84, 252 112 ST I 3tf 234 248 82 140 245 r 244 ;-; r 258 , 344 m " cau$. 81 111 112 r 82 246 *187, 138 3ffT!W 81 131 3fIW with arfVf.; 81 28 with part. 145 281 100 82 t 37 I m 262 117 ( a ) 118; 106 (a) 44 268 35 (a) 81 88 85 255, 256185 112 (6) f ? 181 285 81 257 S9 sfft 185 ( a ) ; 247 f 100 84 ! 71 59, 268, 267 248 83 268, 200 3ft 249 113 100 3f# 59,111 i 67(d), 111 3f|% 180 258, 259 -r -w 112 % SS8 ;afT 889 ; f *& 57, 87, 177 840:-^^ 118{a) 112 (a) 100 (a) 08 250 246 251 116 112 ft

418

INDEX

with

39'lT 3i'',-toitk t S32:

59iT^ with S f

sioiw; I, and ?f 7ft 341-7JT 311 264 if fa 1851 %, c?IT fm% * ea#. 271 45 () 8 312

, 275 315 ifPT 278 279 117 sft 80, 310; 97 127 5 f 146 s P =f 78|?ft i

67 (c) 67 (b) 330 83 -J-8I. 3-i 100 (.') 287 127

with W

f m caus, ^

833 !S?, 45 (d) !? w He. 272, 273

113 329 119 (a) 280 89 112 (b) 45 (e) 68 3RTT 85| 33 100 62 281 XPjfff 127 286!

100 Hi 100 Srf*T 67 (c) 136 JS2 34 112 '286 112 ;

19CF|

15f| 132 (aW with 3 T 3lll|' T 3, 8#1 82" 5 ?SS

39 10 ci. 274 jH TCT!T:, 7U1

INDEX fffe srfer 5fPT: 5T T fsPT m 100 ( ) 81 289 106 290 291 82 154 39 45 () 111 128j 129 '1 157 (a) 78 336 77 W wife 167 (a), 118 aft *K .'!< ?i sr T? JW 76 111 fcf29S HM I " w3^s ^T^fc4 295 ^m 296-97 J}^ si/i<A 3JT 317 ; \iih gq1 317 (6) qtcT 89 qT^r 190; 298-99, and 300 spRT 117 (a) zL 96, 337

419

f^ij-with Wt H2ti ,fW*tf " 83 * fel wi/A STfwpT 31 (a.);~ivithfH Him fiNff: 108 {) ^ crtwi, 7S

Tr, 1^ f? %

104 (c) 70, 154 & 3JT 345 (o) 39 127 98 39 292 127 n 60 ()

5 T 5RT 68 5!7 39;-a;i7/t 3JT327 5JT with arfr 31 # 100 t ^ w-u<t 3PT {pass.) ? 94 TST 98 (a) TV K'f'fA fsr, 3TT, T^ sj w<A sir or- $1% 64 fC 8si 76, 318 ,, tej% Tf TPT71; isithmiW, fcRT a'i<Af% 93 (a) (a) note. ^ 61 117 IW 39 OT TO 116 <S3f 146 i?P?J|T 34 33 OT roiiA 3Tfw 94 irfe: tSiwith PT 85 T^ 99 ar 111 <f? wiift 310; Sffw TO 66 (6), caws. 45 ( / . ) WT320;-3rf4^1,-3TW, ?f, 5 320{,,); 3 T T T grf sol ( 6 ) - ^ 3 2 1 ;-gq> W with s?T, 3R, 322-23 srPf or 3 T 32 T 804 m?: S'.kcaus-i5(a) sH# ^T 302-8 f ? ^ 94 ff, W: 127 113 |%? wjVA pr cans. 68 iJ?"

4*20 wr ( T caus. 45 (d) F 189 m 189 wm ( 67 tt 67 (T)

INDEX

66, (b) 111 %r 828 f 89 fWttt*. 45(/), [8241-^^119 805 84, 806 146 I 307 f t Uhan 325